Alhambra
Owner’s manual
7N5012720BT
Inglés
7N5012720BT (06.22)
SEAT Alhambra Inglés (06.22)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.22
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Introduction
Thank you f
or your trust choosing a SEAT ve-
hicle.
With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy
a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology
and top quality features.
We recommend reading this Instruction Man-
ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle
so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily
driving.
Information about handling is complemented
with instructions regarding the operation and
maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure
its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we
want to give you valuable advice and tips to
drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting
the environment.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.
SEAT, S.A.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety infor-
mation concerning the passenger
's
front airbag
›››
page 31, Fitting and us-
ing child seats.
About this manual
This instruction manual is v
alid for all variants
and versions of your SEAT model. It describes
all equipment and models without specifying
whether they are optional equipment or
model variants. As a result, equipment not fit-
ted to your vehicle or only available in certain
countries may be described. Find out about
your vehicle's equipment in the documenta-
tion supplied with it and please contact your
SEAT Official SEAT Service if you require
more detailed information.
All information provided in instruction manual
corresponds to the information available at
the time of going to press. As the vehicle is
under continuous development, it may have
differences to the data included in this man-
ual. For this reason, no claims can be made in
the event of mismatching data, illustrations
and descriptions.
Ensure that the on-board documentation is
kept in the vehicle at all times if you sell it or
lend it to third parties. In addition, SEAT rec-
ommends resetting the infotainment system
to factory settings to delete all personal data.
Some details on the drawings may be differ-
ent to your vehicle and they should be inter-
preted as a standard representation.
The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,
backwards) in this manual refer to the direc-
tion of travel of the vehicle unless otherwise
stated.
This instruction manual has been written for
left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive
vehicles, the arrangement of the controls dif-
fers partly from that shown in the illustrations
or described in the texts.
Technical modifications to the vehicle or
safety-critical issues that have arisen since
the time of going to press will be included in a
supplement to the on-board documentation.
Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-
sence of this symbol does not guarantee
that the term is not a trademark.
Indicates that the section continues on
the next page.
You can access the information in this manual
using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
information, which is detailed in the corre-
sponding chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
®
WARNING
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about saf
ety and warn you about
possible accident or injury risks.
CAUTION
Texts after this symbol indicate possible
damage t
o the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion on envir
onmental protection.
Note
Texts after this symbol contain addition-
al inf
ormation.
Digital instruction manual
The digit
al version of the manual can be
found on SEAT's official website:
Fig. 1 SEAT website
●
scan the QR code
›
››
Fig. 1
●
OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:
https://www.seat.com/owners/about-my-
car/manual
s.html
and select your vehicle.
Related videos
The oper
ation of some of the vehicle's fea-
tures can be shown as an instruction video:
Fig. 2 SEAT website
●
scan the QR code
›
››
Fig. 2
●
OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:
https://www.seat.com/owners/about-my-
car/manual
s.html
choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.
Note
Video instructions are only available in
cer
tain languages.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Gener
al views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Correct sitting position of vehicle occu-
pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 15
How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 18
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 50
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Control instruments and warning
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Instrument cluster operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Three button unit in the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 140
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Auxiliary heating (additional heating) . . . . . . . 168
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5
Table of Contents
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-
bo
x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Assistant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Drive assist sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . 258
Cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with
parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Stabilisation and brake assistance sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 288
Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Park assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . 295
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Electrically unlocking trailer hook . . . . . . . . . . 306
Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Engine management and emissions control
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 336
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Vehicle conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Accessories and modifications to the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 344
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 347
Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Radioelectrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Indications about the technical data . . . . 357
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Driving assistance sensors
›
››
page 257
Front multifunction camera
Front radar
Park distance control sensors
Park assist sensor
1
2
3
4
Levels control
–
Oil
›
››
page 317
–
Brake fluid
›››
page 322
–
Battery
›››
page 324
Bonnet
–
Unlocking lever
›››
page 315
–
Open/close
›››
page 315
Towing the vehicle
–
Towline anchorage
›››
page 56
A
B
C
–
T
ow-start
›››
page 54
7
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Driving assistance sensors
›
››
page 257
Rear view camera
Park distance control sensors
Rear radars
Park assist sensor
1
2
3
4
Rear lid
–
Opening fr
om outside
–
Emergency opening
›››
page 112
Towing the vehicle
–
Towline anchorage
›››
page 56
–
Tow-start
›››
page 54
Opening and closing
–
Doors
›››
page 103
–
Central locking
›››
page 95
–
Emergency lock
›››
page 104
A
B
C
Fuel tank
–
Fuel capacit
y
›››
page 357
–
Open/Close cap
›››
page 310
Action in the event of a puncture
–
Anti-puncture kit
›››
page 42
–
Wheel change
›››
page 45
D
E
8
General views of the vehicle
Overview (left hand drive)
Electric windows
›
››
page 113
Central locking
›››
page 95
Exterior mirror adjustment
›››
page 128
Open bonnet lever
›››
page 315
Headlight switch
›››
page 117
Turn signal and main beam lever
›››
page 119
Cruise control system
›››
page 260
Warning lights
›››
page 87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wipers and rear window wiper
›
››
page 125
Driver information system
›››
page 85
Infotainment system (factory fitted)
›››
page 172
Hazard warning lights
›››
page 122
Fuses
›››
page 58
Steering wheel adjustment
›››
page 14
Ignition lock
›››
page 239
Air conditioning
›››
page 161
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Start button
›
››
page 240
Front passenger airbag disconnection
display
›››
page 26
16
17
9
General views of the vehicle
Interior view
Access to the third row of seats
›
››
page 137
Seat belts
›››
page 15
Isofix anchors
›››
page 32
Headrest adjustment
›››
page 133
Panoramic roof
›››
page 114
Interior mirror
›››
page 128
1
2
3
4
5
6
Disconnecting the front passenger front
airbag
›
››
page 26
Armrest
›››
page 140
Seat adjustment
›››
page 131
7
8
9
10
Safe driving
Safety
Saf
e driving
Advice about driving
Safety first!
WARNING
●
This manual cont
ains important informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle,
both for the driver and the passengers. The
other sections of the on-board documenta-
tion also contain further information that
you should be aware of for your own safety
and for the safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation
is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-
pecially important when lending or selling
the vehicle to another person.
Before driving
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, al
ways note the following points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Make sure all luggage is secured
›››
page 140.
–
Make sure that no objects can interfere with
the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors
properly according to your size.
–
Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats
always have the head restraints in the in-
use position
›››
page 133.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
›››
page 30.
–
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position
›››
page 12.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly
›››
page 15.
Factors influencing safety
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your passengers.
–
Al
ways pay attention to traffic and do not
get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, traffic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take breaks
regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
Driving under the influence of alcohol,
drugs, medication or nar
cotics may result
in severe accidents and even loss of life.
●
Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics
may significantly alter perception, affect
reaction times and safety while driving,
which could result in the loss of control of
the vehicle.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
passengers in danger
. In the event of an acci-
dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
»
11
Safety
risk of injury. The following points cover part
of the saf
ety equipment in your SEAT
1)
:
●
three-point seat belts,
●
belt tension limiters for the front and rear
side seats,
●
belt tensioners in the front seats and out-
side seats in the second row of seats
●
Belt height adjustment for the front seats
●
front airbags,
●
knee airbags,
●
side airbags in the front seat backrests,
●
side airbags in the rear seat backrests,
●
head-protection airbags,
●
“ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear
child seat system
●
height-adjustable front head restraints,
●
rear head restraints with in-use position and
non-use position,
●
adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Correct sitting position of
vehicle occupants
Correct position on the seat
Fig. 3
The correct distance between the driver
and the st
eering wheel must be at least 25 cm
(10 inches).
Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions
The correct sitting positions for the driver and
passengers ar
e shown below.
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the correct sitting position,
contact a specialised workshop for help with
any special devices. The seat belt and airbag
can only provide optimum protection if a cor-
rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-
mends taking your car in for technical serv-
ice.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident or sudden
braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the
following positions:
Valid for all vehicle occupants:
●
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
1)
Depending on the version/market.
12
Safe driving
head, or as close as possible to the same lev-
el as the t
op of your head and under no cir-
cumstances below eye level. Keep the back
of your neck as close as possible to the
headrest
›››
Fig. 4.
●
Short people must lower the head restraint
completely, even if your head is below its up-
per edge.
●
Tall people must raise the head restraint
completely.
●
Always keep your feet in the footwell while
the vehicle is in motion.
●
Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly
›››
page 18.
The following also applies to the driver:
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com-
pletely against it.
●
Move the steering wheel so it is at least
25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum
›››
Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands
on both sides, on the outer part, with your
arms slightly bent.
●
The steering wheel must always point to-
wards the chest and never towards the face.
●
Move the seat in such a way that you can
step on the pedals with your knees slightly
bent and with a distance between the knees
and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-
ches)
›››
Fig. 3.
●
Adjust the height of the seat so that you
can reach the top of the steering wheel.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell so
that you have the vehicle under control at all
times.
For the passenger, the following applies:
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com-
pletely against it.
●
Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-
mum 25 cm between the chest and the in-
strument panel check translation). If you are
sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system
cannot protect you properly.
Number of seats
The vehicle has 5 or 7 seats, depending on
the f
eatures. All seats are equipped with a
safety belt.
5 seats 7 seats
Seats in the
fr
ont
2 2
Seats in the
second r
ow
3 3
Seats in the
thir
d row
– 2
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position may in-
cr
ease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
vring, in case of collision or accident and if
the airbags deploy.
●
Before starting the car, all passengers
must be sitting in a correct position and
stay like that for the entire journey. This al-
so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.
●
The maximum amount of people in the
vehicle is the same as the amount of seats
with seat belts.
●
For children, always use a certified pro-
tection system, certified and suited for their
weight and height
›››
page 30.
●
While driving, always keep your feet in
the footwell. Never place them over the
seat or the instrument panel, for example,
or outside the window. Otherwise the air-
bag and seat belt may offer insufficient
protection and also increase the risk of in-
jury in the event of an accident.
Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-
tion
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,
the risk of se
vere or lethal injuries increases.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect
sitting positions substantially reduce the
»
13
Safety
protective function of seat belts and, there-
f
ore, increase the risk of severe or even lethal
injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is
especially heightened when a deploying air-
bag strikes a vehicle occupant who has as-
sumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver
is responsible for all people, particularly chil-
dren, inside the vehicle.
The following list contains examples of incor-
rect sitting positions that could be dangerous
for all vehicle occupants.
When the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the
rear.
●
Never lean against the instrument panel.
●
Never lie on the rear seats.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the instrument panel.
●
Never place your feet on the bench or on
the backrest of the seat.
●
Never travel in a footwell.
●
Never sit on the armrests.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Never travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position increases
the risk of se
vere or fatal injuries in the
event of accidents and sudden braking or
manoeuvres.
●
All occupants must sit correctly during
the journey and wear the seat belt correct-
ly.
●
Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-
ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or
are not at a proper distance of the airbag
risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,
especially if the airbags deploy and strike
them.
Steering wheel position adjust-
ment
Fig. 5
Lever in the lower left side of the steering
column.
Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and
only when the v
ehicle is stationary.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 5
1
lever down, move the
st
eering wheel to the desired position and lift
the lever back up until it locks.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
ment function and an incorr
ect adjustment
of the steering wheel can result in severe or
fatal injury.
●
After adjusting the steering column, push
the lever
›››
Fig. 5
1
firmly upwards to en-
sur
e the steering wheel does not acciden-
tally change position while driving.
14
Seat belts
●
Ne
ver adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust
the steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion, stop safely and make the proper
adjustment.
●
The adjusted steering wheel should be
facing your chest and not your face so as
not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-
tection in the event of an accident.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
to reduce injuries when the driver's front
airbag deploys.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position or in any other manner
(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In
such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,
you may sustain injuries to your arms,
hands and head.
Pedal area
P
edals
–
Ensure that you can always press the ac-
cel
erator, brake and clutch pedals unim-
paired to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals
›››
.
Only use fl
oor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasteners
for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be
pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the
vehicle.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
R
estricting pedal operation can lead to
critical situations while driving.
●
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor
coverings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area
and impair pedal operation.
Seat belts
The whys and wher
efores of
seat belts
Control lamps
Lights up or flashes
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.
Objects on the front passenger seat.
R
emove the objects from the front passenger seat
and store them safely.
The control lamp lights up t
o remind the
driver to fasten their seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
●
Fasten your seat belt securely.
●
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
●
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight
›››
page 30.
When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed
exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the
seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened
while driving, a warning sound will be heard
for a few seconds. The warning light will also
flash .
»
15
Safety
The lamp goes out when the driv
er and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the
ignition switched on.
Rear seat belts fastened display
Fig. 6 Example of seat belt status display for
the r
ear seats (here, a 7-seat vehicle) on the in-
strument panel:: upper part, second row; lower
part, third row.
Depending on the model version, when the
ignition is s
witched on, the seat belt status
display
›››
Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in-
forms the driver whether the passengers in
the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.
It indicates that the corresponding seat
is empty.
Indicates that the seat is occupied and
the occupant is wearing the seat belt.
The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of
30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats
is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An
audible warning will also be heard if the vehi-
cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).
The rear seat display can be enabled or disa-
bled by a technical service centre.
If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while
driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt
status is displayed for approximately 30 sec-
onds. The indication can be hidden by press-
ing the
button on the instrument panel.
The protective function of seat
belts
Fig. 7
Drivers with properly worn seat belts will
not be thr
own forward in the event of sudden
braking.
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the pr
oper position. They also help prevent
uncontrolled movements that may result in
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of
the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driving
around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury and
improving the chances of survival when in-
volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, overturns or accidents in which the
16
Seat belts
airbag trigger threshold value in the control
unit is not e
xceeded.
Important safety instructions for
the use of seat belts
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
this section.
–
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and ar
e not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat belts ar
e worn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even chil-
dren) to share the same seat belt.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,
etc.) because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged
or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as
an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the
proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-
ducing their capacity to protect.
●
The sl
ot in the seat belt buckle must not
be blocked with paper or other objects, as
this can prevent the latch plate from en-
gaging securely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings
or similar items to alter the position of the
belt webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to
the connections, belt retractors or parts of
the buckle could cause severe injuries in
the event of an accident. Therefore, you
must check the condition of all seat belts
at regular intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an
accident and have been stretched must be
replaced by a specialised workshop. Re-
newal may be necessary even if there is no
apparent damage. The belt anchorage
should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
the retractors may not work properly.
Head-on collisions and the laws of
physics
Fig. 8
A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown
f
orward violently.
Fig. 9
The unbelted passenger in the rear seat
is thr
own forward violently, hitting the driver
who is wearing a seat belt.
The effects of the laws of physics in the case
of a head-on collision ar
e easy to explain: the
»
17
Safety
moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-
er
gy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on
both the vehicle and its passengers.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of
the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher
they are, the more energy there is to be “ab-
sorbed” in the event of an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),
for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-
gy is multiplied by four.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
our example do not have their seat belts fas-
tened, in the event of a collision the entire
amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In
a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are
thrown forward and will make violent contact
with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-
screen or whatever else is in the way
›››
Fig. 8.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants
›››
Fig. 9.
How to properly adjust your
seat belt
Fastening and unfastening the seat
belt
Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt
int
o the buckle.
Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.
18
Seat belts
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-
cupants in the position that most pr
otects
them in the event of an accident or sudden
braking
›››
.
F
astening the seat belt
Fasten your seat belt before each trip.
●
Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor-
rectly
›››
page 12.
●
Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
an upright position
›››
.
●
Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-
bing e
venly across your chest and lap. Do
not twist the seat belt when doing so
›››
.
●
Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the
corr
esponding seat
›››
Fig. 10.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
Releasing the seat belt
Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle
has come to a standstill
›››
.
●
Press the red button on the buckle
›
››
Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from the
buckle.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim will not be damaged.
WARNING
●
The seat belt cannot off
er its full protec-
tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-
right position and the seat belt is worn cor-
rectly, according to your size.
●
Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
den braking.
●
The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,
can cause severe injuries if the belt moves
from hard areas of the body to soft areas
(e.g. the stomach).
Correct seat belt position
Fig. 12
Correct seat belt and headrest posi-
tions, vie
wed from front and the side.
Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.
Seat belts offer their maximum protection in
the e
vent of an accident and reduce the risk
of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when
they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if
the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat
belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op-
timum position to ensure the airbag provides
the maximum protection. The seat belt must
therefore always be worn and the webbing
correctly positioned.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe
or even fatal injuries
›››
page 12, Correct sit-
ting position of vehicle occupants.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind
the shoulder.
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach.
»
19
Safety
●
The seat belt must lie fl
at and fit comforta-
bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up
any slack.
In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt
must lie evenly across the chest and as low
as possible over the pelvis, never across the
stomach and must be worn properly at all
times during the pregnancy
›››
Fig. 13.
Adapting the position of the belt webbing
to your size
The seat belt can be adapted using the fol-
lowing equipment:
●
Belt height adjustment for the front seats.
●
Front seat height adjustment.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can
cause se
vere or fatal injuries in the event of
an accident.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-
ably on the torso
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie
across the pelvis, never across the stom-
ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-
fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if
necessary to take up any slack.
●
F
or pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over
the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”
the stomach
›››
Fig. 13.
●
Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-
tened.
●
Once the seat belt is positioned correct-
ly, don't pull it away from your body with
your hand.
●
Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or
fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.
●
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings
or similar instruments to alter the position
of the belt webbing.
Note
If your physical constitution prevents you
fr
om maintaining the correct position of the
belt webbing, contact a specialised work-
shop for help with any special devices to
ensure the optimum protection of the seat
belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking
your car in for technical service.
Fastening or unfastening the seat
belt with tw
o buckles
Fig. 14
Fasten the seat belt on the centre seat
in the second r
ow of seats
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-
cupants in the position that most pr
otects
them in the event of an accident or sudden
braking
›››
.
The seat belts f
or the centre seat in the sec-
ond row of seats and for the seats in the third
row of seats are fastened using two buckles.
Fastening the seat belt
Fasten your seat belt before each trip.
●
Adjust the rear seat and head restraint cor-
rectly
›››
page 12.
●
Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
an upright position
›››
.
20
Seat belts
●
Use l
atch plate of the belt
›››
Fig. 14
1
to
pull the seat belt do
wn. Do not twist the seat
belt when doing so
›››
.
●
Engage the latch plate
1
in the buckle of
the corr
esponding seat
A
.
●
Use the latch plate
›
››
Fig. 14
2
to pull the
seat belt acr
oss your lap.
●
Engage the latch plate
2
in the buckle of
the corr
esponding seat
B
.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that both l
atch
plates are securely engaged in the buckles.
Unfastening the seat belt
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the
vehicle has come to a standstill
›››
.
●
Press the red button on the buckle
›
››
Fig. 14
A
. The latch plate will come out of
the buckl
e.
●
Press the red button on the buckle
›››
Fig. 14
B
. The latch plate will come out of
the buckl
e.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim will not be damaged.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can
cause se
vere or fatal injuries in the event of
an accident.
●
The seat belt cannot off
er its full protec-
tion unless the seat backrests are in an up-
right position and the seat belt is worn cor-
rectly, according to your size.
●
Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
den braking.
Note
Seat belts with two buckles include a dia-
gr
am to show how to fasten the seat belt.
Seat belt height adjustment
Fig. 15
Next to the front seats: belt height ad-
just
er.
Using the height adjusters for the front seats
and the out
er seats of the second row, the
position of the seat belts can be adjusted in
the shoulder area according to the height of
the occupant:
●
Keep the guide device pressed down in the
direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 15.
●
Move the guide device up or down until the
seat belt lies over the centre of your shoulder
›››
page 18.
●
Release the guide device.
●
Pull the belt sharply to check that the de-
vice is engaged securely.
WARNING
Never adjust the belt height while the vehi-
cl
e is in motion.
Seat belt tensioners
Ho
w the seat belt tensioner works
The seat belts for the front seats and the side
r
ear seats on the second row
1)
are equipped
with belt tensioners.
The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,
although only in severe head-on, lateral and
»
1)
Depending on version/market.
21
Safety
rear-end collisions. This retracts and tightens
the seat belts, r
educing the forward motion of
the occupants.
The belt pre-tensioners work in combination
with the airbag system. In case of overturn,
the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the
head airbags are deployed.
Note
●
If the seat belt t
ensioners are triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it
is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components
of the system are scrapped. Specialised
workshops are familiar with these regula-
tions, which are also available to you.
Maintenance and disposal of seat
belt t
ensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that ar
e installed in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence
may be that, in the event of an accident, the
belt tensioners function incorrectly or may
not function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to the
specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
●
Impr
oper use or repairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners
may fail to trigger or may trigger in the
wrong circumstances.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-
tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other re-
pair work, must be performed by a special-
ised workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be
changed if they have been activated.
For the sake of the environment
Airbag modules and belt tensioners may
cont
ain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-
quirements for their disposal.
Airbag system
Brief intr
oduction
Why is it so important to wear a
seat belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
pr
otection, the seat belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work
effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the head restraints properly. There-
fore, it is most important to properly wear the
seat belts at all times, not only because this is
required by law in most countries, but also for
your safety
›››
page 15, The whys and
wherefores of seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
22
Airbag system
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
airbag. In this case
, the inflating airbag may
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.
This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors for triggering the
airbag are the type of accident, the angle of
impact and the vehicle speed.
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into
account that the visible damage in a vehicle
involved in an accident, no matter how seri-
ous, is not a determining factor for the air-
bags to have been triggered.
WARNING
●
W
earing the seat belt incorrectly or as-
suming an incorrect sitting position can
lead to critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain
critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-
gered. Children up to 12 years old should
al
ways travel on the rear seat. Never trans-
port children in the vehicle if they are not
restrained or the restraint system is not ap-
propriate for their age, size or weight.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-
ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-
erly
›››
page 15.
Description of the airbag system
The airbag system offers additional protec-
tion f
or the occupants in combination with the
seat belts.
The airbag system comprises the follow-
ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):
●
Electronic control unit
●
Front airbags for driver and passenger
●
Knee airbag for the driver
●
Side airbags
●
Head airbag
●
Airbag control lamp on the instrument
panel
›››
page 24
●
Key-operated switch for front passenger
airbag
●
Control lamp for disabled/enabled status
of the front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on
›››
page 24,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on,
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only pr
o-
vide maximum protection if the occupants
are seated correctly
›››
page 12.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-
tem, have the system checked immediately
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise
there is a danger that during a collision, the
»
23
Safety
system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
corr
ectly.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousands of a second, t
o provide additional
protection in the event of an accident. A fine
dust may develop when the airbag deploys.
This is normal and it is not an indication of fire
in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
t
ory and activates the respective restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though the
accident may cause extensive damage to the
car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous head-on collisions:
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
●
Knee airbag for the driver.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous side-on collisions:
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
Operation of the airbags
Airbag system control lamps
It lights up on the combi-instru-
ment
Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .
Have the system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
It lights up on the instrument
panel
Fault in the airbag system.
Hav
e the system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
Front passenger front airbag deactivated.
Check if the airbag shoul
d be kept deactivated
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,
the warning lamp re-
mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that
the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front
passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp
does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the
control lamp on the instrument panel,
there is a fault in the airbag system
›››
. If
the contr
ol lamp is flashing, there is a fault in
24
Airbag system
the disabling of the airbag system
›
››
. Have
the syst
em checked immediately by a speci-
alised workshop.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat
belt t
ensioner system, the airbags and seat
belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to
trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.
●
The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-
taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the
system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
●
Do not mount a child seat in the front
passenger seat or remove the mounted
child seat! The front passenger front airbag
may deploy during an accident in spite of
the fault.
CAUTION
Always pay attention to any lit control
l
amps and to the corresponding descrip-
tions and instructions to avoid damage to
the vehicle or harm to the occupants.
Front airbags
Fig. 16
Driver’s airbag in the steering wheel.
Fig. 17 Front passenger airbag located in dash
panel
.
The driver's front airbag is housed in the
st
eering wheel and that of the front passen-
ger, on the instrument panel . Airbags are
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
The airbag covers fold open and remain at-
tached to the steering wheel
›››
Fig. 16 and
the dash panel
›››
Fig. 17when the driver and
»
25
Safety
front passenger airbags, respectively, are
trigger
ed.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants ad-
ditional protection for the head and chest in
the event of a severe frontal collision
›››
.
Their special design all
ows the controlled es-
cape of the propellant gas when an occu-
pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the
head and chest are protected by the airbag.
After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-
ciently to allow visibility.
WARNING
●
The depl
oyment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in
any case be occupied by other passenger,
pets and objects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
Activate and deactivate front pas-
senger fr
ont airbag
Fig. 18
In the glove compartment, on the front
passenger side: k
ey switch for activating and
deactivating the front passenger airbag.
Fig. 19
Control lamp for disabling the front
passenger fr
ont airbag on the dash panel
Deactivate the front passenger front airbag
only if you hav
e to use a rear-facing child
seat in the front passenger seat.
SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the
rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the
front passenger airbag.
When the front passenger airbag is deacti-
vated, this means that only the front passen-
ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other
airbags in the vehicle remain activated.
Deactivate and activate the front passen-
ger front airbag
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side.
●
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
›››
Fig. 18. About 3/4 of the key should enter;
this is as far as it will go.
●
Turn the key gently to change its position to
(deactivate) or to (activate). If you have
difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the
key as far as it will go.
●
Close the glove compartment.
●
When deactivating the airbag, switch the
ignition on and check that the control lamp
with the lettering re-
mains lit in the middle of the dash panel
›››
Fig. 19.
●
When reactivating the airbag, check that
when the ignition is switched on, the
control lamp does not turn on.
26
Airbag system
WARNING
●
The driv
er of the vehicle is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
●
Always switch off the ignition before dis-
abling the front passenger airbag! Failure
to do so could result in a fault in the airbag
deactivation system.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disa-
bling switch as it could get damaged or en-
able or disable the airbag during driving.
●
If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,
reactivate it as soon as possible so that it
can fulfil its protective function.
Knee airbag
Fig. 20
On the driver side: location of the knee
airbag
Fig. 21 On the driver side: airbag action radius
f
or the knees.
The knee airbag is located on the driver side
bel
ow the dash panel
›››
Fig. 20. Airbags are
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
The area framed in red (deployment area)
›››
Fig. 21 is covered by the knee airbag when
it is deployed. Objects should never be
placed or mounted in this area.
WARNING
●
The knee airbag is depl
oyed in front of
the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-
ment areas of the knee airbags free.
●
Never not fix objects to the cover or in the
deployment area of the knee airbag.
●
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a
distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-
tween your knees and the location of the
this airbag. If your physical constitution
prevents you from meeting these require-
ments, make sure you contact a special-
ised w
orkshop.
Side airbags
Fig. 22
Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig. 23 Range of action of the front and rear
side airbags. With 5 and 7 seats.
»
27
Safety
The side airbags are located in the driver's
seat and fr
ont passenger seat backrests
›››
Fig. 22.
Depending on the equipment of the model,
the outer seats of the second row of seats
may also be fitted with side airbags, located
between the seat backrests and the access
area.
The locations are identified by the text “AIR-
BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-
bag system provides additional protection for
the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision
›››
.
In a side collision, the side airbags r
educe the
risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the
body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal protection, the seat belts also hold
the passengers in the event of a side collision;
this is how these airbags provide maximum
protection.
WARNING
●
If you do not w
ear a seat belt, if you lean
forward, or are not seated correctly while
the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater
risk of injury if the side airbag system is
triggered in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide
their maximum protection, the prescribed
sitting position must always be maintained
with seat belts fastened while travelling.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not w
ork if the sensors do not correctly
measure the pressure increase on the inte-
rior of the doors, due to air escaping
through the areas with holes or openings in
the door panel.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels
have been removed or if the panels have
not been correctly fitted.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-
ers in the door panels have been removed,
unless the holes left by the loudspeakers
have been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are
closed or covered if loudspeakers or other
equipment are fitted inside the door pan-
els.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deploy-
ment space between them and the airbags,
or allow children or other passengers to
travel in this position. It is also important
not to attach any accessories (such as cup
holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged.
In this case, the side airbags would not be
triggered.
●
Under no cir
cumstances should protec-
tive covers be fitted over seats with side
airbags unless the covers have been ap-
proved for use in your vehicle. Because the
airbag deploys from the side of the back-
rest, the use of conventional seat covers
would obstruct the side airbag, seriously
reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat uphols-
tery or around the seams of the side airbag
units must be repaired immediately by a
specialised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag com-
ponents for other repairs (such as removal
of the front seat) should only be performed
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,
faults may occur during the airbag system
operation.
28
Airbag system
Head-protection airbags
Fig. 24
On the left side of the vehicle: location
and fiel
d of action of the head-protection air-
bag.
Fig. 25 Deployed head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on
both sides in the int
erior above the doors
›››
Fig. 24 and are identified with the text
“AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
occupants additional protection for the head
and upper body in the event of a severe side
collision
›››
.
The ar
ea framed in red is covered by the
head-protection airbag when it is deployed
›››
Fig. 24 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-
jects should never be placed or mounted in
this area
›››
.
In the e
vent of a side collision the curtain air-
bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve-
hicle.
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk
of injury to passengers in the front and rear
side seats facing the impact.
WARNING
●
In or
der for the head-protection airbags
to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be
maintained with seat belts fastened while
travelling.
●
For safety reasons, the curtain airbag
must be disabled in those vehicles fitted
with a screen dividing the interior of the ve-
hicle. See your technical service to make
this adjustment.
●
There must be no other persons, animals
or objects between the occupants of the
outer seats and the deployment space of
the head-protection airbags so that the
head-protection airbag can deploy com-
pl
etely without restriction and provide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore,
sun blinds which have not been expressly
approved for use in your vehicle may not be
attached to the side windows.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on
coat hangers.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the head-protection airbag
system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such
as removal of the roof lining) should only
be performed by a specialised workshop.
Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-
bag system operation.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of
the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-
ation of the side and curtain airbags nei-
ther the doors nor the door panels should
be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud-
speakers). If the front door is damaged, the
airbag system may not work correctly. All
work carried out on the front door must be
done in a specialised workshop.
29
Safety
Transporting children
saf
ely
Child safety
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident st
atistics, we recommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 17. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-
ways use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see
www.seat.com).
These systems have been especially de-
signed and appr
oved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note
›››
page 31.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
Child seats group classification
Fig. 26
Examples of child seats.
Use only child seats that are officially ap-
pr
oved and suitable for the child.
These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or
ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
Child seats by weight group
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Age group Weight of the child
Group 0 Up to 10 kg
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg
Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
pr
oved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129
standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129
test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right
child seat for your model and age group at
SEAT dealers.
30
Transporting children safely
Child seats by approval category
Chil
d seats may have the approval category
of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific
(all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-
Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).
●
Universal: child seats with universal appro-
val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no
need to consult any list of models. In the case
of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child
seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether
belt.
●
Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,
in addition to the standard requirements of
universal approval, requires safety devices to
lock the child seat, which require additional
testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-
proval include a list of vehicle models for
which they can be installed.
●
Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
requires a dynamic test of the child seat for
each vehicle model separately. Child seats
with vehicle-specific approval also include a
list of vehicle models for which they can be
installed.
●
i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must
meet the requirements set out in the ECE-
R129 standard in relation to installation and
safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you
which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-
cle.
Fitting and using child seats
Fig. 27 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun
visor
Fig. 28 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the
passenger side door
Warnings about fitting a child seat
T
ake the following general warnings into ac-
count if you are going to fit a child seat. They
are valid for all child seats regardless of their
attachment system.
●
Please read and follow the child seat man-
ufacturer's operating instructions.
●
The child seat should preferably be fitted to
the rear seat behind the front passenger seat
so that the child can exit the vehicle on the
pavement side.
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts to the child seat naturally, without
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt
height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
ing child seats.
●
To correctly use a child seat in the back,
the front backrest must be adjusted so that
there is no contact with the child seat in the
back in the case that it goes opposite to the
direction of the car. In the case of front facing
restraint systems, the front backrest must be
adjusted so that there is no contact with the
child's feet.
●
If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
led, in which the method of attachment to the
car is through the seat belt and support
bracket, it should never be installed in the
central rear seat as the ground clearance is
lower than in other places and the support
bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
ciently stable.
●
When fitting a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat, the seat must be moved back-
wards as far as possible and placed in the
»
31
Safety
highest position. The backrest must also be
put in a v
ertical position
1)
.
Important information about the front pas-
senger front airbag
A sticker with important information about the
passenger airbag is located on the passeng-
er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side
door frame
›››
Fig. 27.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag
›››
page 22.
●
Objects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag
›››
in Front airbags
on page 26.
The passenger side fr
ont airbag, when ena-
bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch
›››
page 26.
When transporting children, use a child seat
suitable for the age and size of each child
›››
page 30.
WARNING
●
If a chil
d seat is secured to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project
it with great force against the door, the roof
or the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing back-
wards on the front passenger seat unless
the front passenger front airbag has been
disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to
the child! However, if necessary, the front
passenger front airbag must be deactiva-
ted
›››
page 26. If the passenger seat has a
height adjustment option, move it to the
highest, most upright position. If you have a
fixed seat, do not install any child restraint
system in this location.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a
key lock switch to deactivate the airbag,
the vehicle must be taken to a technical
service. Do not forget to reconnect the air-
bag when an adult wants to sit in the front
passenger seat.
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
v
ehicle without being properly secured, or
to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-
ling. In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-
cle occupants.
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or in the vehicle.
●
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to
the abdominal and neck areas during a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-
dent.
●
When a child seat is mounted in the rear
seats, the door child-proof lock should be
activated
›››
page 107.
Attachment systems
Depending on the country, different attach-
ment syst
ems are used for safely installing
child seats.
1)
Compliance with current national legislation
and the manuf
acturer's instructions is required
when using or installing child seats.
32
Transporting children safely
Attachment systems overview
●
ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a st
andardised attach-
ment system allowing quick and safe attach-
ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-
tachment establishes a rigid connection be-
tween the child seat and the car body.
The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,
called connectors. These connectors are fit-
ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
between the seat cushion and the backrest
of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-
FIX attachment systems are used mainly in
Europe
›››
page 33. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
tachment may have to be supplemented with
a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
●
Automatic three-point seat belt. When-
ever possible, it is preferable to attach the
child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than
attaching them with an automatic three-point
seat belt
›››
page 35.
Additional attachment:
●
Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided
over the back of the rear seat and attached
to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points
are located at the back of the rear seat back-
rest on the boot side
›››
page 35. The rings
for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked
with an anchor symbol.
●
Support bracket: some child seats rest on
the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.
The support bracket prevents the child seat
from tipping forward in the event of impact.
Child seats fitted with a support bracket
should only be used in the passenger seat
and side rear seats
›››
. For the assembly of
this t
ype of seat you should also consult the
list of approved vehicles for this assembly,
available in the instructions for child restraint
systems.
Recommended systems for attaching
child seats
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
follows:
●
Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-
site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support
bracket or i-Size.
●
Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
FIX and Top Tether.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the support bracket can
cause serious or f
atal injury.
●
Make sure the support bracket is correct-
ly and safely installed.
●
When the base of the child seat is sup-
porting the child’s weight, the support foot
should not hang in the air or be supplemen-
ted with objects. In addition, make sure that
the base of the child seat is always suppor-
ted by the surface of the vehicle's seat. The
support leg of the child seat should not
raise the base of the child seat off the sur-
f
ace of the vehicle's seat.
Fixing a child seat with the ISOFIX
and T
op Tether system
Fig. 29 Rear seats: ISOFIX securing rings.
Fig. 30
Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the
ISOFIX syst
em.
»
33
Safety
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily
and saf
ely on the rear seats with the “ISOFIX”
and Top Tether system.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each
rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings are se-
cured to the seat frame and, in others, they
are secured to the rear floor. The “ISOFIX”
rings are located between the rear seat
backrest and the seat cushioning
›››
Fig. 29.
The Top Tether rings are located on the rear
part of the rear seat backrests (behind the
backrest or in the luggage compartment)
›››
page 35.
To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-
FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the table
below.
Age
gr
oup
Class
accor
d-
ing to
size
a)
Front
passen-
ger seat
Rear
seats
Group 0:
up t
o 10 kg
E X IUF
Group 0+:
up t
o 13 kg
E X IUF
D X IUF
C X IUF
Group 1:
9 t
o 18 kg
D X IUF
C X IUF
B X IUF
B1 X IUF
A X IUF
IUF: suit
able place for installing an ISOFIX child seat
with universal approval.
a)
The indication of class according to size corre-
sponds t
o the authorised bodyweight for the child
seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal
approval, the class according to size is indicated on
the ECE approval label. The indication of class ac-
cording to size is stated on the corresponding child
seat.
Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX”
system
You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-
turer's instructions.
●
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings until the child seat can be heard
to engage securely
›››
Fig. 30. If the child
seat is equipped with Top Tether anchor
points, secure it to the correspondent ring
›››
page 35. Observe the manufacturer's in-
structions.
●
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure
that it is properly anchored.
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether
attachment system are available from Tech-
nical Services.
WARNING
The securing rings are designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and T
op Tether system
child seats.
●
Never secure other child seats that do
not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether system,
or safety belts or any other objects to the
securing rings – as this can result in poten-
tially fatal injuries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is correctly se-
cured to the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether secur-
ing rings.
34
Transporting children safely
Top Tether securing belts
Fig. 31
Back of the rear seats: Top Tether se-
curing rings.
Child seats with a Top Tether system are fit-
t
ed with an additional strap for fastening to
an anchor point in the vehicle. This anchor
point is located on the rear of the rear seat
backrest
›››
Fig. 31 and provides better reten-
tion.
The objective of this system is to reduce for-
ward movements of the child seat in a head-
on collision, to reduce the risk of injuries that
may be caused to the child’s head by im-
pacting against any element of the inside of
the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-
ted seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.
Securing the retainer strap
●
Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining
strap.
●
Place the belt under the headrest of the
back seat (depending on the instructions of
the chair itself, lift or remove the headrest if
necessary).
●
Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest
›››
Fig. 31.
●
Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
●
Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
er's instructions.
●
Push the lock and release it from the an-
choring support.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
incr
ease the risk of injury in the event of a
crash.
●
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in
the luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other
items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or
the upper ones (Top Tether).
WARNING
Child restraint anchors are designed to
suppor
t the loads of properly adjusted
child restraint systems. Under no circum-
stances should they be used to attach
adult seat belts, harnesses or other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
If you want to fit a universal approval catego-
ry (U) chil
d seat in your vehicle, you must
check that the seat is approved for your vehi-
cle. You will find any necessary information
on the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-
bel. The following table shows the different
fitting options.
»
35
Safety
Age group
Weight of the
chil
d
Front passenger seat Second row of seats
Third row of
seats
Airbag enabled
Airbag deacti-
v
ated
Interior Exterior
Group 0 Up to 10 kg X U U U
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg X U U U
Group 1
Rear-facing From 9 to 18 kg X U U U
Forward-facing From 9 to 18 kg U X U U
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg U X U U/B U
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg U X U U/B U
U: univ
ersal.
X: vehicle seat unsuitable for fitting this group of child seat.
B: integrated child seat.
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts t
o the child seat naturally, without
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt
height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
ing child seats.
●
Put the seat belt in place and pass it
through the child seat according to the in-
structions of the child seat manufacturer.
●
Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
●
Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle
until you hear the engagement click.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured
in the v
ehicle with a restraint system suita-
ble for age, weight and size.
●
Read and always observe information
and warnings concerning the use of child
seats
›››
page 31.
Integrated child seat
Intr
oduction
The integrated child seat is only suitable for
chil
dren in Group 2 (15-25 kg) and Group 3
(22-36 kg), according to the ECE-R44 regula-
tion.
WARNING
Child travelling without their seat belt fas-
t
ened or not secured using a suitable re-
straint system may sustain fatal injuries if
the airbag is deployed.
●
Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat.
●
Always disable the front passenger front
airbag if, in exceptional cases, you have no
alternative but to transport a child in a
rear-facing child safety seat on the front
passenger seat.
36
Transporting children safely
●
Chil
dren must always be protected with
a child restraint system suited to their
height and weight.
●
Always fasten children's seat belts cor-
rectly.
WARNING
Children must travel in a child seat appro-
priat
e to their weight and height while the
vehicle is in motion.
●
Children must always be protected with
a child restraint system suited to their
height and weight.
●
Children must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belted in while
travelling.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
approximately on the centre of the shoul-
der, never across the neck or the arm.
●
The seat belt must lie close to the upper
part of the body.
●
The lap belt part must lie across the pel-
vis, not across the stomach, and always fit
closely.
●
Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly
over the child's seat.
●
Never hold children or babies on your lap.
●
Always use a child seat and the seat belt
for children who are under 1.5 m tall. The
normal seat belt could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat.
●
R
ead and follow the information and
warnings provided by the child seat manu-
facturer.
●
Never leave an unsupervised child alone
on a child seat or in the vehicle.
●
All modifications to the integrated child
seat must be carried out by a specialised
workshop.
●
Replace the child seat or any seat com-
ponents damaged or involved in an acci-
dent.
WARNING
Loose objects could fly uncontrollably
ar
ound the vehicle interior and cause inju-
ries in the event of an accident or sudden
braking.
●
Do not leave toys or other hard, loose ob-
jects on the child seat or on the seat while
the vehicle is in motion.
Unfold the integrated child seat
Fig. 32
Integrated child seat: lift the cushion.
Fig. 33 Integrated child seat: fit its headrest.
Lifting the cushion
●
Pull the unlock lever
›
››
Fig. 32
A
on the
cushion in the dir
ection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 32
1
.
»
37
Safety
●
F
old both sides
›››
Fig. 32
B
up in the direc-
tion of the arr
ow
›››
Fig. 32
2
.
●
Push the cushion
›
››
Fig. 32
C
back in the
dir
ection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 32
3
until it en-
gages.
Inst
all the head restraint on the child safe-
ty seat
●
Remove the head support and store it safe-
ly in the vehicle
›››
page 133.
●
Make sure that the seat belt guide is instal-
led in the head support of the seat for chil-
dren on the window side
›››
page 38.
●
Enter the child seat head support in the
corresponding backrest until it fits correctly
into place
›››
Fig. 33.
●
Make sure that the rear seats and backr-
ests are correctly locked into place, pulling
on both of them.
Seat belt route with integrated
child seat
Fig. 34
Integrated child seat: fitting the seat
belt.
Fig. 35 Integrated child seat: seat belt route
with guide handl
e.
Using the guide handle
›
››
Fig. 35, position
the seat belt so that the shoulder part of the
belt lies on the centre of the child's shoulder.
Seat belt guide handle
●
Secure the seat belt guide handle to the
side head restraint on the window side. The
guide handle is secured by a button.
●
Open the upper button on the seat belt
guide handle and pass the belt webbing be-
low the side head restraint and through the
guide handle.
●
Close the button again.
Adjusting the seat belt
●
Guide the automatic three-point seat belt
below the side head restraint.
●
Pull the latch plate and slowly place the
belt webbing across the child's chest and lap.
●
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
WARNING
The seat belt only offers maximum protec-
tion fr
om severe or fatal injuries when it is
correctly positioned.
38
Transporting children safely
●
Chil
dren must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belted in while
travelling.
●
The shoulder belt must be positioned
against the middle of the shoulder.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-
ably.
●
Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly
over the child's seat.
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie
across the pelvis, never across the stom-
ach.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat.
Removing the child seat
Fig. 36
Integrated child seat: lowering the
cushion.
Lowering the cushion
●
Pull the unlock lever
›
››
Fig. 36
A
on the
cushion in the dir
ection of the arrow
1
.
●
Push the cushion do
wn through the central
area
B
in the direction of the arrow
2
until it
saf
ely engages
›››
. The side supports fold
aw
ay automatically.
Remove the head restraint on the child
safety seat
●
Open the guide lever on the seat belt and
guide it by hand to pull the belt back in more
easily and without damaging the trim.
●
Lift the child seat head restraint to the top.
●
Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards
›››
page 136.
●
Remove the head restraint on the child
safety seat.
●
Fitting the head restraint.
CAUTION
When lowering the integrated child seat,
only pr
ess on the centre of the cushion
›››
Fig. 36
2
. Otherwise the cushion could
bend and not engage pr
operly.
39
Emergencies
Emergencies
Self
-help
Emergency equipment
First aid kit, warning triangle, re-
flective vests and fire extinguishers
Fig. 37
On the rear lid: warning triangle brack-
et.
Warning triangle
With the r
ear lid open, rotate the lock 90°
›››
Fig. 37. Lower the bracket and remove the
warning triangle.
First aid kit
There is a first aid kit
›››
page 152 in the rear
left-hand side storage compartment of the
luggage compartment.
The first aid kit must comply with legal re-
quirements. Check the expiry date of the
contents of the first aid kit.
Reflective vests
Some vehicles have a driver door compart-
ment to store a reflective vest .
Fire extinguisher
There is a fire extinguisher underneath the
front passenger seat.
The fire extinguisher must conform to legal
requirements, be ready for use and be
checked regularly. Check the certification
seal on the extinguisher.
WARNING
Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be
viol
ently thrown in case of a sudden ma-
noeuvre or braking and especially in acci-
dents causing serious injury.
●
Secure or store fire extinguishers, first aid
kit, reflective vests and warning triangle
securely in the vehicle.
Note
●
The first aid kit, w
arning triangle, reflec-
tive vests and fire extinguishers are not part
of the vehicle's standard equipment.
●
The warning triangle should meet legal
requirements.
●
Bef
ore acquiring accessories and emer-
gency equipment see the instructions in
“Accessories and spares”
›››
page 344.
40
Self-help
Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 38
In the luggage compartment, seen
fr
om inside the vehicle: vehicle tool kit in a cavi-
ty located in the lock carrier area.
Fig. 39 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-
gage compartment: v
ehicle tool kit.
Depending on the model, the vehicle tools
may be k
ept in the luggage compartment, in
a cavity close to the lock carrier
›››
Fig. 38.
Loosen the safety straps and remove the ve-
hicle tool kit. For vehicles factory-fitted with
winter tyres, you will find additional tools in a
toolbox located in the luggage compartment.
The tool kit includes:
Adapter for the anti-theft bolt
Towing eye, removable
Wheel spanner
Crank handle for jack
Jack
Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the
handle for screwing and unscrewing the
wheel nuts
Hook for pulling off wheel trims or wheel
bolt caps
Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional extras.
WARNING
When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set
and spar
e wheel are loose in the interior
they can be violently thrown in case of a
sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-
cially in accidents, causing serious injury.
●
Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre
mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-
rary spare wheel are safely secured in the
luggage compartment.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can
cause injury or accidents.
●
Never work with inappropriate or dam-
aged t
ools.
Note
The jack does not generally require any
maint
enance. If required, it should be
greased using universal type grease.
Folding chocks
Fig. 40 To unfold the foldable wedges.
The folding chocks are in the tool kit
›
››
page 41.
Assemble the folding chocks
●
Lift the base plate
›››
Fig. 40
1
.
»
41
Emergencies
●
Insert the tw
o “tabs” of the mounting plate
into the long openings on the base plate
2
.
Corr
ect use
The folding chocks may be used to block the
wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being
changed.
The chocks should be placed directly in front
and behind the wheel and only be used on
firm ground.
WARNING
If the folding chocks are assembled or used
incorr
ectly, an accident may occur and se-
rious injury caused.
●
Never use damaged chocks.
●
Never use chocks to immobilize the vehi-
cle on a slope.
Tyre repair
T
MS (Tyre Mobility System) punc-
ture repair kit
The puncture repair kit (Tyre Mobility System)
will r
eliably seal punctures caused by the
penetration of a foreign body of up to about
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign
objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
you must again check the tyre pressure
about 10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if the
vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-
miliar with the procedure and you have the
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
should seek professional assistance.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
●
In outside temperatures below -20°C
(-4°F).
●
In the event of cuts or perforations in the
tyre greater than 4 mm.
●
If you have been driving with very low pres-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
●
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
date.
WARNING
Using the puncture repair kit can be dan-
ger
ous, particularly when filling the tyre on
the roadside. To reduce the risk of serious
injury, consider the following:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-
rounding traffic to fill the tyre.
●
Ensure the ground on which you park is
flat and solid.
●
All passengers and par
ticularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work
area.
●
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you
are familiar with the necessary procedures.
Otherwise, you should seek professional
assistance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-
porary emergency use only until you can
reach the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre
mobility set as soon as possible.
●
The sealant is a health hazard and must
be cleaned immediately if it comes into
contact with the skin.
●
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of
the reach of small children.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the elec-
tronic parking brake and put it in gear when
using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce
the risk of involuntary movement of the ve-
hicle .
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same perf
ormance properties as a conven-
tional tyre.
●
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph).
42
Self-help
●
Av
oid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-
ing any l
egal requirements.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased
at SEAT deal
erships.
Note
Take into account the separate instruction
manual pr
ovided by the tyre mobility sys-
tem manufacturer.
Anti-puncture kit contents
Fig. 41
Standard representation: anti-punc-
t
ure kit contents.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the fl
oor covering in the luggage compart-
ment. It includes the following components
›››
Fig. 41:
Valve insert remover
A sticker to be adhered to the instrument
cluster, within the driver's visual field, to
remind that the maximum advisable
speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Air compressor
ON/OFF switch
Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated
in the inflator tube).
1
2
3
4
5
6
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
t
oring system (it can also be integrated in
the inflator tube).
Tube for inflating tyres
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover
1
has a gap at
the l
ower end for a valve insert. The valve in-
sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11
.
Sealing and inflating a tyre
Sealing the tyre
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the
›
››
Fig. 41
1
tool to remove the insert.
Pl
ace it on a clean surface.
●
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
›››
Fig. 41
10
.
●
Screw the inflator tube
›
››
Fig. 41
3
into the
seal
ant bottle. The bottle's seal will break au-
tomatically.
●
Remove the lid from the filling tube
›››
Fig. 41
3
and screw the open end of the
t
ube into the tyre valve.
●
With the bottle upside down, empty all of
the contents into the tyre.
»
7
8
9
10
11
43
Emergencies
●
R
emove the bottle from the valve.
●
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
ing the tool
›››
Fig. 41
1
.
Infl
ating the tyre
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
›››
Fig. 41
8
into the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air bleed screw is closed
›
››
Fig. 41
6
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Insert the connector
›
››
Fig. 41
9
into the
v
ehicle's 12-volt socket
›››
page 159.
●
Turn the air compressor on with the
ON/OFF switch
›››
Fig. 41
5
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it rea-
ches 2.
0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).
A maximum of 8 minutes.
●
Disconnect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If it still does not come up to pressure, the
tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and seek as-
sistance from authorised personnel.
●
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflation tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Attach the sticker
›››
Fig. 41
2
to the instru-
ment clust
er, within the driver's visual field.
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››
page 44.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compres-
sor and the infl
ator tube may become hot.
●
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
●
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube
or hot air compressor on flammable mate-
rial.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 oper
ational minutes to avoid
overheating! Before switching on the air
compressor again, let it cool for several mi-
nutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw the inflator tube
›
››
Fig. 41
5
again
and check the pr
essure on the gauge
6
.
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kP
a) and lower:
●
Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be
sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
›››
.
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kP
a) and higher:
●
Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
again.
●
Carefully resume your journey until you
r
each the nearest specialised workshop with-
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-
sur
e is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
●
Seek specialist assistance.
44
Self-help
Changing a wheel
Intr
oduction
The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard
with anti-punct
ure technology tyres (Conti-
Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of
up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a pro-
tective layer inside the tread.
The inclusion of this technology means that
there is no type of spare wheel included in
the vehicle's equipment.
Not all Alhambra models have the TMS (Tyre
Mobility System).
If a tyre needs to be changed the tools nec-
essary are available at spare parts dealers:
●
Jack,
●
box spanner for wheel bolts,
●
tool to remove wheel bolt caps
The t
yres mounted on the vehicle are anti-
puncture. The wheels should only be
changed when switching from summer to
winter tyres or vice-versa.
The vehicle only comes with the necessary
tools for changing wheels if factory supplied
with winter tyres. If this is not the case, you
need to go to a specialised workshop to get
the wheels changed.
Preliminary actions
●
Stop the vehicle on a level surface and in a
saf
e place, as far away from road traffic as
possible.
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
●
Manual transmission: engage 1st gear.
●
Automatic transmission: Move the selector
lever to position P.
●
If towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer from
your vehicle.
●
Keep the vehicle tool kit available
›
››
page 41.
●
Follow the legal provisions of each country
(reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.).
●
Get all occupants out of the vehicle and
keep them out of the danger zone (e.g. be-
hind the guard rail).
WARNING
●
Al
ways observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car
with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-
cle from moving.
Integral wheel trim
Fig. 42
Remove the wheel cover.
The wheel covers must be removed for ac-
cess t
o the wheel bolts.
Removing
●
Take the wheel brace and the wire hook
from the vehicle tool kit
›››
page 41.
●
Hook the wire through one of the grooves of
the trim.
●
Insert the box spanner through the hook,
rest it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim
›››
Fig. 42.
Fitting
Before installing the full trim, the anti-theft
wheel lock must be threaded into position
›››
Fig. 46
2
ó
3
. Otherwise it will not be
possibl
e to install the full hubcap.
»
45
Emergencies
●
Pr
ess the trim against the wheel so that the
valve hole is in the same position as the tyre's
valve
›››
Fig. 46
1
. Make sure that the trim is
corr
ectly fitted all the way around the wheel.
Wheel bolt caps
Fig. 43
Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.
Removal
●
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools
›
››
Fig. 39)
over the cap until it clicks into place
›››
Fig. 43.
●
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
The caps protect the wheel bolts and should
be remounted after changing the tyre.
The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a
special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking
bolts and is not for use with standard wheel
bolts.
Anti-theft wheel nuts
Fig. 44
Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and
adapt
er.
Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt
●
Remove the wheel trim or hub cap.
●
Insert the special adapter
›
››
Fig. 44
1
(ve-
hicl
e tools
›››
page 41) onto the anti-theft
wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.
●
Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto
the adapter as far as it will go.
●
Remove the wheel bolt
›››
page 46.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the an-
ti-theft wheel bolt and k
eep it in a safe
place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a
new adapter, you can obtain it from the
SEAT Official Service, indicating the code
number.
Loosening wheel nuts
Fig. 45
Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.
Fig. 46
Wheel change: tyre valve
1
and the
corr
ect position for the anti-theft wheel locking
bolt
2
or
3
.
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the
car t
o loosen the wheel bolts.
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn
before raising the vehicle with the jack.
46
Self-help
If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push
on the end of the wheel wr
ench with your
foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and
take care not to slip during this operation.
Loosening wheel nuts
●
Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go
›››
Fig. 45.
●
Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the
bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
wise
›››
.
Impor
tant information about wheel bolts
Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe-
cially matched during construction. There-
fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct
wheel bolts with the right length and heads
must be used. This ensures that wheels are
fitted securely and that the brake system
functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not even
use wheel bolts from vehicles of the same
model.
In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft
locking bolt must be threaded onto positions
›››
Fig. 46
2
or
3
, taking the tyre valve’s po-
sition as r
eference
1
. Otherwise it will not be
possibl
e to mount the hubcap.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not properly tight-
ened, they coul
d come loose while driving
and cause an accident, serious injury and
l
oss of vehicle control.
●
Use only wheel bolts which correspond
to the rim in question.
●
Never use different wheel bolts.
●
Wheel bolts and threads should be clean,
free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-
sible to screw them easily.
●
To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only
use the wheel wrench that came with the
car from the factory.
●
The wheel bolts should only be loosened
slightly (about one turn) before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
●
Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts
or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the
bolts have been tightened to the prescri-
bed torque, they could come loose while
driving.
●
Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel
rims with bolted ring trims.
●
If wheel bolts are tightened below the
prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could
come loose while driving. If tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel bolts or threads
can be damaged.
Raise the vehicle
Fig. 47
Jack position points.
Fig. 48
Jack mounted on the left rear part of
the v
ehicle
●
Rest the jack (vehicles tools) on firm
gr
ound. If necessary use a large, strong
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ping
›››
.
»
47
Emergencies
●
Bl
ock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel being changed with folding wheel
chocks or other suitable objects.
●
Find the support point on the strut (sunken
area) closest to the wheel to be changed
›››
Fig. 47.
●
Turn the jack crank handle, located below
the strut support point, to raise it until the
tab
›››
Fig. 48 is below the housing that is
provided.
●
Align the jack so that the tab “grips” onto
the housing provided on the cross member
and the mobile base is resting on the ground.
The base plate 2 should fall vertically with re-
spect to the support point.
●
Continue turning the jack until the wheel is
slightly lifted off the ground.
WARNING
The factory-supplied jack is only designed
f
or changing wheels on this model. On no
account attempt to use it for lifting heavier
vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.
●
Make sure the jack remains stable. If the
surface is slippery or soft, the jack could
slip or sink, respectively, with the conse-
quent risk of causing injuries.
●
Lift the vehicle using only the jack sup-
plied from the factory. Other jacks, even
those approved for other SEAT models
could slip, with the consequent risk of in-
jury.
●
Pl
ace the jack only at the support points
provided on the strut and align it. Other-
wise, the jack could slip because it does
not have sufficient grip on the vehicle: risk
of injury!
●
You should never place a body limb such
as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that
is solely supported by the jack.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehi-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!.
●
Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one
side or the engine is running.
●
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised. The vehicle may come loose from
the jack due to the engine vibrations.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be raised on the
cr
ossbar. Place the jack only at the support
points provided on the strut and align it.
Otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.
Removing and installing a wheel
Fig. 49
Wheel change: loosen wheel nuts with
the sock
et in the handle of the screwdriver.
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
bolts and r
aising the vehicle with the jack.
When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may
hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-
son, please take care and get a second per-
son to assist you.
Taking off the wheel
●
Using the hexagonal socket in the wheel
brace
›››
Fig. 49, unscrew the slackened
wheel bolts and place them on a clean sur-
face.
●
Unscrew the bolts with the wheel wrench
and place them on a clean surface.
●
Remove the wheel.
48
Self-help
Putting on the spare wheel
Check the dir
ection of rotation of the tyre
›››
page 49.
●
Place the spare wheel or temporary spare
wheel into position.
●
Replace the wheel bolts and tighten slight-
ly using the hexagonal socket on the end of
the wheel brace.
●
Use the appropriate adapter to tighten the
anti-theft wheel bolts.
●
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack.
●
Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the
wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-
agonal pairs (not in a circle).
●
Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on
›››
page 45.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-
ting the wheel.
Tightening torque of the wheel nuts
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af-
ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor-
que checked immediately with a torque
wrench that is working perfectly.
Before checking tightening torque, have any
rusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re-
placed and clean the wheel hub threads.
Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to
the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have
been tightened to the prescribed torque, they
could come loose while driving.
WARNING
The hexagonal socket in the wheel brace
shoul
d be used for turning wheel bolts only.
Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel
bolts.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern have
been designed t
o operate best when rotating
in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre
sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on
tyres with directional tread. Always observe
the indicated direction of rotation in order to
guarantee optimum grip and help avoid
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction
of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the
tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is
of particular importance when the road sur-
face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-
sible or remount it with the correct direction
of rotation.
Works after changing a wheel
●
Alloy wheels: r
eplace the wheel bolt caps.
●
Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .
●
Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
●
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-
gage compartment
›››
page 140.
●
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
●
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-
t
or, adjust the pressure and store it in memory
›››
page 333.
●
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
que wrench
›››
page 49. Meanwhile, drive
carefully.
●
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible.
49
Emergencies
Changing the windscreen
wiper bl
ades
Wiper service position
Fig. 50
Wipers in service position.
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
The wiper arms can be r
aised when the wip-
ers are in service position
›››
Fig. 50.
●
Close the bonnet
›››
page 314.
●
Switch the ignition on and off.
●
Press the windscreen wiper lever down-
wards briefly
›››
page 125
4
.
Bef
ore driving, always lower the wiper arms.
Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-
screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-
tion.
Note
●
The windscr
een wiper arms can be
moved to the service position only when
the bonnet is properly closed.
●
You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over the
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of
ice.
Changing the wiper rear wiper
bl
ades
Fig. 51 Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 52 Changing the rear wiper blade
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
st
andard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.
If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of
the water as it is wiped across the windscreen
will be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-
ularly. If the wipers scrape across the
glass, they should be changed if they are
damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty
›››
.
If this does not pr
oduce the desired results,
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper
arms might be incorrect. They should be
checked by a specialised workshop and cor-
rected if necessary.
Damaged windscreen wiper blades should
be replaced immediately. These are availa-
ble from qualified workshops.
50
Self-help
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper
arms
●
Place the windscreen wipers in the service
position
›
››
page 50.
●
Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's
fastening point.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
●
Raise the wiper arms.
●
Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the windscreen wiper blades.
●
If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or
damp cloth may be used
›››
.
Changing the windscr
een wiper blades
●
Lift and unfold the wiper arms.
●
Press and hold release button
›››
Fig. 51
1
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-
r
ection of the arrow.
●
Fit a new wiper blade of the same length
and design on to the wiper arm and hook it
into place.
●
Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
Changing the rear wiper blade
●
Lift and fold the wiper arm.
●
Turn the blade slightly
›››
Fig. 52 (arrow
A
).
●
Hol
d down the release button
1
while gen-
tly pulling the bl
ade in the direction of arrow
B
.
●
Insert a new blade of the same l
ength and
type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-
rection to the arrow
B
and hook into place
butt
on
1
.
●
Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.
WARNING
Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-
duce visibilit
y and increase the risk of acci-
dent and serious injury.
●
Always replace damaged or worn wind-
screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-
ger clean the windscreen properly.
CAUTION
●
Damaged or dir
ty windscreen wipers
could scratch the glass.
●
If products containing solvents, rough
sponges or sharp objects are used to clean
the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-
aged.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
the wipers in service position
›››
page 50.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage to the bonnet and the
wiper arms, only leave them in the service
position.
●
Before driving, always lower the wiper
arms.
Jump start
Jump l
eads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cr
oss section.
If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
tions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm
2
for petrol engines and at least
35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
For vehicles whose battery is not in the en-
gine compartment, the jump leads should on-
ly be connected to the starting assistance
connection points in the engine compart-
ment.
»
51
Emergencies
Note
●
The v
ehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the on-board network.
Positive pole at the jump start
points
Fig. 53
In the engine compartment: jump start
positiv
e pole
+
.
On some vehicles, there is a starting assis-
t
ance terminal in the engine compartment,
under a labelled cover.
Jump start: description
Fig. 54
Diagram of connections for vehicles
without St
art Stop system
Fig. 55
Diagram of connections for vehicles
with St
art Stop system
Jump lead terminal connections
S
witch off the ignition of both vehicles
›››
.
1.
Connect one end of the r
ed jump lead to
the positive
+
terminal of the vehicle
with the fl
at battery
A
›
››
Fig. 54.
Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hicl
e providing assistance
B
.
In v
ehicles without a Start-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
to the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
pr
oviding the current
B
›
››
Fig. 54.
In vehicles with a Start-stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-
id piece of met
al in the engine block, or
to the engine block itself
›››
Fig. 55.
Connect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bol-
t
ed to the engine block or to the engine
block itself of the vehicle with the flat
battery. Do not connect it to a point near
the battery
A
.
P
osition the leads in such a way that
they cannot come into contact with any
moving parts in the engine compart-
ment.
Starting
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
2.
3.
4a.
4b.
5.
6.
7.
52
Self-help
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
fl
at battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes
until the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
Before you remove the jump leads,
switch off the dipped beam headlights if
they are switched on.
Turn on the heater blower and heated
rear window in the vehicle with the flat
battery. This helps minimise voltage
peaks which are generated when the
leads are disconnected.
When the engine is running, disconnect
the leads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-
minals.
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
onds, switch off the starter and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
●
Pl
ease note the safety warnings referring
to working in the engine compartment
›››
page 314.
●
The battery providing assistance must
have the same voltage as the flat battery
(12V) and approximately the same capaci-
8.
9.
10.
11.
ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-
ply coul
d result in an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the
batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!
Even after the battery has thawed, battery
acid could leak and cause chemical burns.
If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-
rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-
plosion. Failure to comply could result in an
explosion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from
the other vehicle directly to the negative
terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-
ted from the battery could be ignited by
sparks. Danger of explosion.
●
Never attach the negative cable to fuel
system components or the brake lines in
the other vehicle.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the
vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could
result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise el
ectricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
Tow start and towing
Intr
oduction
Tow-starting means st
arting the engine of
the vehicle while another pulls it.
Towing means one vehicle pulling another
that is not roadworthy.
Always consider the legal provisions relating
to tow-starting and towing.
For technical reasons, towing a vehicle
with a discharged battery is not allowed.
The jump start should be used instead
›››
page 51.
If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access
system, towing is only allowed with the igni-
tion on!
The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is
towed with the engine switched off and the
ignition connected. Depending on the battery
charge status, the drop in voltage may be so
large, even after just a few minutes, that no
electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.
the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the
»
53
Emergencies
Keyless Access system, the steering wheel
coul
d lock
›››
.
WARNING
A vehicle with no power should never be
t
owed.
●
When towing, never remove the ignition
key or disconnect the ignition with the start
button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of
the steering column could suddenly be-
come blocked and it would be impossible
to steer the vehicle. This could cause an
accident, serious injury and loss of control
of the vehicle.
●
If during towing the vehicle runs out of
power, stop towing immediately and re-
quest the assistance of specialist person-
nel.
WARNING
Vehicle handling and braking capacity
change consider
ably during towing. Please
observe the following instructions to mini-
mise the risk of serious accidents and in-
jury:
●
As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
–
You should depress the brake much
harder as the brake servo does not op-
erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid
crashing into the towing vehicle.
–
More strength is required at the steer-
ing wheel as the power steering does
not operate when the engine is switch-
ed off
.
●
As the driver of the towing vehicle:
–
Accelerate with particular care and
caution.
–
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
–
Brake earlier than usual and more
smoothly.
CAUTION
●
T
o avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-
ple the paint, remove and replace the lid
and towing eye carefully.
●
Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and damage it during towing.
Instructions for tow-starting
Vehicles should not generally be tow-star-
t
ed. The jump start should be used instead
›››
page 51.
For technical reasons, towing the following
vehicles is not allowed:
●
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
●
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access
locking and ignition system the steering re-
mains locked and the electronic parking
brake cannot be deactivated nor can the
electronic lock of the steering column be re-
leased if they are activated.
●
If the battery is flat, it is possible that the
engine control units may not operate correct-
ly.
If despite everything it is necessary to tow
start the vehicle (only if fitted with a man-
ual gearbox):
●
Engage 2nd or 3rd gear.
●
Keep the clutch depressed.
●
Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-
ing lights of both vehicles.
●
When both vehicles are in motion, release
the clutch.
●
As soon as the engine starts, depress the
clutch and disengage the gear to avoid col-
liding with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
●
When t
ow-starting, unburnt fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and damage
it.
●
The distance to be towed to start the en-
gine must not exceed 50 m, otherwise
there is a risk of damaging the catalytic
converter.
Note
The vehicle can only be tow-started if the
el
ectronic parking brake and, if
54
Self-help
appropriate, the electronic lock of the
st
eering column are deactivated. If the ve-
hicle has no power supply or there is an
electric system fault, the engine must be
jump-started to deactivate the electronic
parking brake and the electronic lock of the
steering column.
Towing instructions
Towing requires some expertise and experi-
ence
, especially when using a tow rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the difficulties
involved in towing. For this reason, inexper-
ienced drivers should abstain from towing.
During towing, it should be ensured that no
impermissible tractive forces or shocks are
generated. When towing on an unpaved
road, there is always a risk of overloading and
damaging the anchorage points.
During towing, the towing vehicle can signal
the change of direction even with the hazard
warning lights turned on. To do so, at the
same time, the turn signal lever must be oper-
ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the
hazard warning lights will go off. When the
turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-
tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-
matically reactivated.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
●
Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is
not bl
ocked, and the electronic parking brake
may be deactivated and the turn signals and
wash/wipe operated.
●
More strength is required at the steering
wheel as the power steering does not oper-
ate when the engine is switched off.
●
You should depress the brake much harder
as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid
hitting the towing vehicle.
●
Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.
●
Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a
tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A
tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is
not available.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid
damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to
use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-
ilarly elastic material.
Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to
the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-
vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted
if it has been specially designed to be instal-
led on a tow hitch
›››
page 299.
When the vehicle has to be towed:
Check whether the vehicle may be towed
›››
page 56, Cases where towing the ve-
hicle is not permitted.
The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
wheels on the road; it can also be towed with
either the front or rear wheels lifted off the
road.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-
lector lever in the N
›››
page 245 position.
●
Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at
speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
The vehicle must not be towed further than
50 km (30 miles).
●
If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with
automatic transmission are only allowed to
be towed with the front wheels suspended.
»
55
Emergencies
Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive
(
4Drive)
Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be
towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-
cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-
pended, the engine must be switched off,
otherwise the transmission may be damaged.
Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-
mitted
●
If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-
cant.
●
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-
propriate, the electronic parking brake can-
not be deactivated or the electronic lock of
the steering column released.
●
If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-
elled.
●
When, for example, after an accident, the
smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering
operation cannot be guaranteed.
When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:
●
Observe legal requirements.
●
Keep in mind the instructions in the manual
on towing vehicles.
CAUTION
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-
cant in the aut
omatic transmission the car
may only be towed with the driven wheels
lift
ed clear of the road, or transported on a
special car transporter or trailer.
Note
The vehicle can only be towed if the elec-
tr
onic parking brake and the electronic
lock of the steering column are deactiva-
ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or
there is an electric system fault, the engine
must be jump-started
›››
page 51 to deacti-
vate the electronic parking brake and the
electronic lock of the steering column.
Front towline anchorage
Fig. 56
On the right side of the front bumper:
scr
ew in the towline anchorage
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the
right side of the fr
ont bumper behind a lid.
The towing eye should always be kept in the
vehicle.
Bear in mind the instructions for towing
›››
page 55.
Fitting the towline anchorage
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
›››
page 41.
●
Remove the cover by pressing down on the
top and leave it hanging from the vehicle.
●
Screw the towing eye in the housing by
turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise
›››
Fig. 56
›››
. Use a suitable object
that can compl
etely and securely tighten the
towing eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
●
Insert the upper flange of the lid into the
opening of the bumper and press the lower
side of the lid until it is inserted into the bump-
er.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be completely
and firmly tight
ened. Otherwise, it could be
released while towing and tow-starting.
56
Self-help
Make sure that there are no objects that
pr
event the eyebolt being screwed.
Rear towline anchorage
Fig. 57
On the right side of the rear bumper:
t
owline anchorage in position.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the
right side of the r
ear bumper behind a lid
›››
Fig. 57.
Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing
bracket do not have any housing for the
screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case,
the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal-
led and used for towing
›››
page 299,
›››
.
Bear in mind the instructions f
or towing
›››
page 55.
Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-
out a factory-equipped towing bracket)
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
›››
page 41.
●
Press the upper side of the lid
›››
Fig. 57 to
unclip it.
●
Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-
hicle.
●
Screw the towing eye in the housing by
turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise
›››
. Use a suitable object that can
compl
etely and securely tighten the towing
eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
●
Insert the upper flange of the lid into the
opening of the bumper and press the lower
side of the lid until the upper flange is inserted
into the bumper.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
●
The t
owing eye must always be com-
pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it
could be released while towing and tow-
starting.
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a
towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow
with a tow bar if this has been specially de-
signed t
o be installed with a tow hitch. If an
unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow
hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-
stead, a tow rope should be used.
57
Emergencies
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Intr
oduction
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
el
ectrical components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system
can giv
e serious electrical shocks, causing
burns and even death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in
the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a curr
ent circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-
perage (same colour and markings) and
siz
e.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-
ple or similar.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage to the vehicle's elec-
tric system, before replacing a fuse always
turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-
trical elements and remove the key from
the ignition.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they
can damage the electrical system.
Note
●
One component may hav
e more than one
fuse.
●
Several components may run on a single
fuse.
●
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter.
Fuses inside the vehicle
Fig. 58
On the driver's side dashboard: fuse
bo
x cover.
Opening and closing the fuse box located
bel
ow the instrument panel
●
To remove the cover, move the activation
lever in the lower part to the right
›››
Fig. 58.
●
For right-hand drive vehicles, move the lev-
er to the left.
Identifying fuses below the dashboard by
colours
Colour Current intensity in
amps
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
58
Fuses and bulbs
Colour Current intensity in
amps
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
CAUTION
●
Al
ways carefully remove the fuse box
covers and refit them correctly to avoid
problems with your vehicle.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to
avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and
humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-
age to the electrical system.
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 59
In the engine compartment: fuse box
co
ver.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
●
Open the bonnet
›
››
page 314.
●
Move the attachment tabs forwards, in the
direction indicated by the arrow to release
the fuse box cover
›››
Fig. 59.
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
Push the attachment tabs back, in the oppo-
site direction indicated by the arrow until they
click audibly into place.
In is possible that there are more fuses behind
a cover in the lower left-hand side of the lug-
gage compartment.
Replace a blown fuse
Fig. 60
Image of a blown fuse.
Fig. 61
Removing or fitting a fuse
Preparations
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-
cal equipment.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
›
››
page 58,
›››
page 59.
»
59
Emergencies
Recognise a blown fuse
A fuse is bl
own if its metal strip is ruptured
›››
Fig. 60.
●
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
blown.
To replace a fuse
●
If necessary, remove the plastic pincers
from the fuse box cover.
●
Small fuses: fit the pincer in from above
›››
Fig. 61 .
●
Large fuses: move the pincer sideways over
the fuse
›››
Fig. 61 .
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size.
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
Changing bulbs
Introduction
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
pr
actical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom-
mends that you consult a technical service or
request assistance from a specialist. In gen-
eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to the
bulbs, other vehicle components require re-
moval.
If you choose to change the engine compart-
ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a
dangerous area
›››
in Working in the en-
gine compar
tment on page 314.
Always use identical bulbs with the same
designation. The name can be found on the
base of the bulb holder.
Bulbs (12 V)
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an
authorised workshop to have it replaced.
Light source used for each function
Halogen headlights. Type
Dipped beam headlights H7 LL
Main beam headlights/day-
time running lights (DRL)
H15 (double element)
Side lights W5W
Turn signal PY21W NA LL
AFS bi-xenon main
headlight
Type
Daytime running lights
(DRL)
P21W SLL
Side lights W5W
AFS bi-xenon main
headlight
Type
Turn signal PY21W NA LL
Dipped beam / Main beam
Xenon bulb. Visit an
authorised workshop
for replacement.
Front fog light Type
Fog lights HB4
LED rear lights Type
Side/brake light LED
Turn signal WY21W
Reverse lights W16W
WARNING
●
T
ake particular care when working on
components in the engine compartment if
the engine is warm. Risk of burns.
●
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
●
When changing bulbs, please take care
not to injure yourself on sharp edges, in
particular on the headlight housing.
60
Fuses and bulbs
CAUTION
●
R
emove the ignition key before working
on the electric system. Otherwise, a short
circuit could occur.
●
Switch off the lights and the parking light
before changing a bulb.
●
Take good care to avoid damaging any
components.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to
dispose of used bulbs in the pr
oper manner.
Note
●
Pl
ease check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
●
Before changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb
with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper
towel instead, since the fingerprints left on
the glass will vaporise as a result of the
heat generated by the bulb, they will be
deposited on the reflector and will impair
its surface.
●
Depending on the level of equipment fit-
ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for
part or all of the interior and/or exterior
lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that
exceeds than that of the car. If an LED light
f
ails, go to an authorised workshop for its
replacement.
Replacing the halogen headlight
bulbs
Fig. 62 In the engine compartment: coatings
on the l
eft headlight.
Fig. 63 Left headlight.
Dipped beam headlights
Daytime running lights
Main beam headlight and side light
T
urn signals
There is no need to remove the headlight to
replace bulbs.
Complete operations only in the sequence
given:
Turn signals (small bulb holder)
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Rotate the bulb holder
›››
Fig. 62
1
all the
w
ay to the left and pull it out backwards to-
gether with the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
rotate to the right all the way.
A
Dipped beam headlights and
B
Day-
time running lights
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the
headlight.
»
A
B
C
1
61
Emergencies
–
R
otate the bulb holder to the left all the
way and pull it out backwards together
with the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
rotate to the right all the way.
–
Insert the rubber cover.
C
Main beam headlights
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the
headlight.
–
Press the wire clip downwards and pull the
bulb hol
der
›››
Fig. 63
2
out together with
the bulb
.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
pull the wire clip upwards until it clicks into
place.
–
Insert the rubber cover.
C
Side light
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the
headlight.
–
Pull the bulb holder
›
››
Fig. 63
3
out back-
w
ards together with the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
insert completely.
–
Insert the rubber cover.
Note
The images show the left hand headlight
fr
om behind. The structure of the right hand
side headlight is symmetric.
Replacing the xenon headlight
bulbs
Fig. 64
In the engine compartment: turn signal
co
ver.
Fig. 65
Turn signal bulb holder
1
and turning
light
2
.
There is no need to remove the headlight to
r
eplace bulbs.
Complete operations only in the sequence
given:
62
Fuses and bulbs
1
Turn signal
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Rotate the cover
›
››
Fig. 64 in the direction
of the arrow and remove it.
–
Rotate the bulb holder
›››
Fig. 65
1
all the
w
ay to the left and pull it out backwards to-
gether with the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
rotate to the right all the way.
–
Rotate the cover
›››
Fig. 64 in the opposite
direction to the arrow as far as it will go.
2
Cornering light
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Rotate the cover
›
››
Fig. 64 in the direction
of the arrow and remove it.
–
Press the wire clip downwards and pull the
bulb holder
2
›
››
Fig. 65 out together with
the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
pull the wire clip upwards until it clicks into
place.
–
Rotate the cover
›››
Fig. 64 in the opposite
direction to the arrow as far as it will go.
Always seek the help of a specialist when
changing the Xenon dipped beam and main
beam headlamps
›››
in Introduction on
page 60.
Note
The illustrations show the left hand head-
light. The struct
ure of the right hand side
headlight is symmetric.
Replacing the front bumper bulb
Fig. 66
On the right side of the front bumper:
disassembling the headlights.
Fig. 67 Changing the bulbs in the headlights
Complete operations only in the sequence
giv
en:
–
Pull the cover forwards, in the direction of
the arrow
›››
Fig. 66.
–
Unscrew the attachment screw
›››
Fig. 66
1
using the screwdriver from the vehicle
t
ool kit
›››
page 41.
–
Tilt the headlight slightly forward and ex-
tract it from its lateral attachments
›››
Fig. 67 (small arrows).
–
Release the connector
›››
Fig. 67
1
and re-
mo
ve it.
–
Rotate the bulb holder
›››
Fig. 67
2
to the
l
eft all the way, in the direction of the arrow,
and pull it out backwards together with the
bulb.
»
63
Emergencies
–
R
eplace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
rotate to the right all the way.
–
Insert the connector
›››
Fig. 67
1
on the
bulb hol
der
2
. The connector must audibly
click int
o place.
–
Place the headlight into its position
›››
Fig. 67 (small arrows) and tilt it back-
wards.
–
Tighten the attachment screw
›››
Fig. 66
1
using the screwdriver.
–
Replace the cover on the bumper
›
››
Fig. 66.
Replace the rear lid light bulbs
Fig. 68 On the rear lid: remove the cover.
Fig. 69 On the rear lid: remove the bulb holder.
Complete operations only in the sequence
giv
en:
–
Open the rear lid.
–
Extract the cover carefully using the flat
part of the screwdriver from the vehicle tool
kit as a lever (
›››
page 41) on the indent
›››
Fig. 68
1
.
–
Release the bulb holder connector by pull-
ing on the r
ed connector block.
–
Press on the attachment tabs in the direc-
tion of the arrow
›››
Fig. 69 and pull out the
bulb holder.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Install the bulb holder. The attachment tabs
should audibly click into place.
–
Insert the cover. The cover should lock into
place.
Replacing the tail light bulbs in the
bodywork
Fig. 70 Side of the luggage compartment:
R
emoving the left tail light unit. Removing
the right tail light unit.
64
Fuses and bulbs
Fig. 71
Tail light unit in the bodywork: removing
the bulb hol
der.
Complete operations only in the sequence
giv
en.
Removing the rear light units
–
Open the rear lid.
–
Left tail light: open the storage compart-
ment on the left side of the luggage com-
partment
›››
page 152 and then rotate cap
›››
Fig. 70
1
90 ° in the direction of the ar-
r
ow and remove it.
–
Right tail light: Move the 12 V power socket
support by pressing gently downwards
›››
Fig. 70 (arrow).
–
Unscrew the attachment screw
›››
Fig. 70
2
using the screwdriver from the vehicle
t
ool kit
›››
page 41. The bolt is secured in its
position.
–
Extract the rear light from the bodywork by
carefully pulling backwards.
–
Pull the red strip on the connector and ex-
tract the connector.
–
Disassemble the tail light unit and place it
on a flat, clean surface.
To change the bulb
–
To release the bulb holder, press on the at-
tachment tabs
›››
Fig. 71
1
to
4
in the di-
r
ection of the arrow.
–
Remove the bulb holder from the rear light
unit.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the tail light unit.
The attachment tabs should audibly click
into place.
–
Insert the connector and press the red at-
tachment strip in so that the connector is
locked into place.
Assembling the rear light units
–
Carefully insert the tail light unit into the
opening in the bodywork. To do this, insert
the upper rear light unit guide into the at-
tachment ring.
–
Tighten the white attachment screw using
the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit.
–
Ensure that the tail light unit has been cor-
rectly fitted and is firmly secured.
–
Left tail light: replace the cap
›››
Fig. 70
1
and turn it through 90º in the opposite di-
r
ection to the arrow. Close the storage
compartment.
–
Right tail light: Move the 12 V power socket
support upwards gently until it is properly
closed.
–
Close the rear lid
›››
page 107.
65
Emergencies
Changing the number plate bulbs
Fig. 72
In the rear bumper: Number plate light.
Fig. 73
number plate light: remove the bulb
hol
der.
Follow the steps indicated:
Fix
ed number plate light
–
Use the flat part of the screwdriver included
in the vehicle tool kit (
›››
page 41) to press
in the direction of the arrow, in the groove of
the number plate light
›››
Fig. 72.
–
Detach the number plate light.
–
Turn the connector lock
›››
Fig. 73 in the di-
rection of arrow
1
and pull on the connec-
t
or.
–
Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of
the arrow
›››
Fig. 73
2
and extract it to-
gether with the bulb
.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Insert the bulb holder into the number plate
light and rotate all the way in the opposite
direction to the arrow
›››
Fig. 73
2
.
–
Plug the connector into the bulb holder.
–
Insert the number plate light carefully into
the opening on the bumper
. Ensure that the
number plate light is in the correct position.
–
Insert the number plate light into the bump-
er until it audibly clicks into place.
Bolted number plate light
–
Unscrew the number plate light screws us-
ing the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit
(
›››
page 41).
–
Detach the number plate light.
–
Separate the attachment tabs from the
rear panel of the number plate light by
pressing.
–
Take the bulb holder out of the number
plate light.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Insert the bulb holder into the number plate
light.
–
Press on the attachment tabs. The bulb
holder must be firmly attached to the num-
ber plate light.
–
Insert the number plate light carefully into
the opening on the bumper. Ensure that the
number plate light is in the correct position.
–
Tighten the attachment screws for the
number plate light using the screwdriver.
Additional brake light
Taking into account that it consists of LED
bulbs, the change shoul
d be made at a tech-
nical service centre.
66
Operation
Fig. 74
Instruments and controls.
68
Controls and displays
Operation
Contr
ols and displays
Interior view
Overview
Interior door handle
Centr
al lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Control for the electric adjustment
of the e
xterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Brightness regulation for instrument
panel and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Lever for: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
–
Turn signals
–
Main beam headlights
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Steering wheel with horn and
–
Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
–
On-board computer controls . . . . . 85
–
Controls for radio, telephone,
navigation and speech dialogue
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
–
Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 248
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Control lever for:
–
Windscr
een wipers and washer . . . 125
–
Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
–
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Left seat heater control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . . . 122
Depending on the equipment, con-
trols for:
–
Electronic manual air condition-
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
–
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Right seat heater control . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Depending on the equipment, but-
tons for:
–
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . 283
–
Start-stop operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
–
Parking distance warning system
(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
–
Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
–
Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
–
Dynamic chassis control
(DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
–
Opening the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
–
Opening and closing of electric
sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Locking handle to open glove com-
partment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . 24
Switch for deactivating the front
passenger fr
ont airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Passenger front airbag off warning
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Gear lever for:
–
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
–
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
12 volt power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Electronic parking brake switch . . . . 283
Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-
cess closing and start-up system)
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Steering column adjustment lev-
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fuse box cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Lever for:
–
Cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
–
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . 266
Open bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
»
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
69
Operation
Note
●
Some of the equipment list
ed in this sec-
tion is only fitted on certain models or are
optional extras.
●
The arrangement of controls on right-
hand drive models may be slightly different
from the layout shown in
›››
page 68. How-
ever, the symbols used to identify the con-
trols are the same.
Control instruments and
w
arning lamps
Instrument panel
Introduction
After switching the engine on with a 12-volt
batt
ery that is heavily discharged or newly
changed some system settings (such as the
time, the date, the personalised comfort set-
tings and the programming) might be altered
or deleted. Check and correct these settings
once the battery is sufficiently charged.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
tr
ols when driving.
●
To reduce the risk of accident and injury,
only make adjustments to the instructions
on the instrument panel display and to the
instructions on the Infotainment system
display when the vehicle is stationary.
70
Control instruments and warning lamps
Instrument panel
Fig. 75 Instrument panel, on dash panel.
Details of the instruments
›
››
Fig. 75:
Time set button
›››
page 80.
Revolutions counter (with the engine
running, in thousands of revolutions per
minute)
›››
page 80.
Engine coolant temperature indicator
›››
page 82.
Display indications
›››
page 71.
Fuel reserve display
›››
page 81.
Speedometer.
Reset button for trip recorder (trip).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Status display
Possible indications on the instrument
panel displ
ay
Different pieces of information can be dis-
played on the screen of the instrument panel,
depending on the features of the vehicle.
●
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
●
Warning and information messages
●
Odometer
●
Time
›››
page 80
●
Indications of the radio, media and naviga-
tion syst
em
●
Indications of the phone
●
Outside temperature
●
Compass indication
●
Selector lever positions
●
Gear-change recommendation
›››
page 251
●
Display of travel data (multifunction dis-
play) and menus for different settings
›››
page 73
●
Service interval display
›››
page 83
●
Second speed indication
›››
page 72.
●
Start-Stop system status display
›››
page 243
●
Signs detected by the traffic signal detec-
tion system
›››
page 78
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-
ing, the instrument panel display shows if any
of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are
»
71
Operation
opened and, in some cases, it is also indica-
t
ed by an audible warning. The display may
vary according to the type of instrument pan-
el fitted.
Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutch
gearbox)
The current position of the selector lever is
shown on the side of the lever and on the in-
strument panel display. When the lever is in
the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in
some cases, the gear engaged in each case
is shown on the instrument panel display .
Outside temperature indicator
If the outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal
symbol” on the outside temperature dis-
play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-
til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C
(+43 °F)
›››
.
When the v
ehicle is stationary, when the aux-
iliary heater is switched on or when driving at
very low speeds, the outside temperature in-
dicated may be higher than the actual tem-
perature due to the heat produced by the en-
gine.
The margin of measurement ranges from
-40 °C (-50 °F) to +50 °C (+122 °F).
Gear-change recommendation
While driving, the instrument panel of certain
vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-
tion for saving fuel
›››
page 251.
Odometer
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-
tance travelled since the last time it was reset
to zero.
●
Press button
›
››
Fig. 75
7
to reset
the trip r
ecorder to 0.
Compass indication
With the ignition on and the navigation sys-
tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to
the vehicle's direction of travel is displayed
on the instrument panel
›››
page 83.
Second speed display (mph or km/h)
In addition to the speedometer, the speed
can also be displayed in a different unit of
measurement (in miles or in km per hour).
To change the units, in the Settings menu,
select the option Second speed
›››
page 73.
Vehicles without menu display on the instru-
ment panel
●
Switch on the engine.
●
Press the button three times. The odom-
eter display flashes on the instrument panel
display.
●
Press the key once
. “mph” or “km/h”
is displ
ayed briefly instead of the odometer.
●
This activates the second speed display. To
switch it off, repeat the procedure.
This option cannot be deactivated in models
destined for countries in which the second
speed must always be visible.
WARNING
Even when the outside temperature is high-
er than fr
eezing temperature, some roads
and bridges could be frozen.
●
The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that
there may be a risk of freezing.
●
At outside temperatures above +4 °C
(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the
“ice crystal symbol” is not on.
●
The outside temperature sensor takes a
guideline measurement.
Note
●
Ther
e are different instrument panels and
therefore the versions and instructions on
the display may vary. In the case of dis-
plays without warning or information texts,
faults are indicated exclusively by the con-
trol warning lamps.
72
Control instruments and warning lamps
●
Some indications on the instrument panel
scr
een may be concealed by a sudden
event, e.g. an incoming call.
●
If there are several warnings at the same
time, the symbols will be displayed one af-
ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-
bols will stay on until you remove the
cause.
Instrument panel menus
The number of menus and information items
av
ailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-
tronics and features.
A specialised workshop can programme or
modify additional functions, according to the
vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership for this.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is stationary.
■
Multifunction indicator (driving data)
›››
page 73
■
Assists (enable or disable)
■
Sign Assist
›››
page 78
■
Lane Assist
›››
page 272
■
Exit Assist
■
Blind spot
›››
page 275
■
Fatigue detection
›››
page 77
■
Front Assist
›››
page 263
■
Audio
■
Navigation
■
Telephone
■
Auxiliary heating
›››
page 168
■
Vehicle status
›››
page 76
■
Settings
›››
page 74
Driving data indicator (multifunc-
tion display)
The display of the travel data (multifunction
displ
ay) shows different values about the
journey and the consumption.
Change from one display to another
In vehicles without a multifunction steering
wheel:
●
Press the rocker switch
on the wiper
l
ever .
In vehicles with a multifunction steering
wheel:
●
Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
tion steering wheel
›››
page 85.
Driving data memories
The multifunction display has two automatic
memories:
Partial memory: The memory collects
journey and consumption data from
when the ignition is turned on until when
1
it is turned off. The memory is automati-
cally deleted if the journey is interrupted
for more than 2 hours. If the journey is
continued in less than 2 hours after the
ignition is switched off, the new data is
added to the data already stored in the
memory.
Total memory: The memory records the
values for a specific number of partial
trips, up to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi-
nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or
1,999.9 km (or miles) for 9,999 km (or
miles), depending on the model of in-
strument panel. On reaching either of
these limits, the memory is automatically
erased and starts to count from 0 again.
The selected memory will be shown in the
upper right-hand corner of the display.
Changing memory
●
With the ignition switched on, and display-
ing memory 1 or 2, briefly press the
key on the wiper lever or the on the multi-
function st
eering wheel to switch from one
memory to the another
Manually erasing memory 1 or 2
●
Select the memory that you wish to erase.
●
Hold the
button on the wiper lever
or the button on the multi-function steer-
ing wheel do
wn for about 2 seconds.
»
2
73
Operation
Possible displays
●
Travelling time: This indicat
es the hours (h)
and minutes (min) since the ignition was
switched on.
●
Current fuel consumption: The current
fuel consumption while driving is displayed in
l/100 km (or miles per gallon, mpg); when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not mov-
ing, in l/h (or gallons per hour).
●
Average consumption: When the ignition
is switched on, the average consumption (in
l/100 km or in mpg) is displayed after the ve-
hicle has moved approximately 100 metres
(328 feet). Otherwise horizontal lines are dis-
played. The value shown is updated approxi-
mately every 5 seconds.
●
Range: Approximate distance in km (or
miles) that can still be travelled with the fuel
remaining in the tank, assuming the same
style of driving is maintained. This is calcula-
ted using the current fuel consumption.
●
Distance travelled: Distance travelled, af-
ter ignition is switched on, in km (or miles).
●
Average speed: After the ignition is switch-
ed on, the average speed will be shown after
a distance of approximately 100 metres (328
feet) has been travelled. Otherwise horizontal
lines are displayed. The value shown is upda-
ted approximately every 5 seconds.
●
Digital speed display: Current speed dis-
played digitally.
●
Digital oil temperature display: Updated
engine oil temperature digital display
●
Speed warning at --- km/h: If the stored
speed is exceeded (between 30 - 250 km/h,
or 18 - 155 mph), an audible warning is given
together with a visual warning.
Storing a speed for the speed warning
●
Select the display Speed warning at
--- km/h.
●
Press the button
on the windscreen
wiper l
ever or the button
on the multifunc-
tion st
eering wheel to store the current speed
and activate the warning.
●
Activate: adjust to the desired speed within
5 seconds using the rocker switch
on the
windscr
een wiper lever or by turning the
thumbwheel on the multifunction steering
wheel. Next, press the
or key
again or w
ait for a few seconds. The speed is
stored and the warning activated.
●
Deactivate: press button
or button
. The stored speed is deleted.
P
ersonalising the displays
It is possible to select which of the displays in
the multifunction display you wish to see on
the instrument panel in the Settings menu.
The units of measurement can also be modi-
fied
›››
page 74.
Settings menu
The number of menus and information items
av
ailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-
tronics and features.
Assistance systems
Settings for different driver assistance sys-
tems
›››
page 86.
Multifunction display data
Configuration of the multifunction display da-
ta that you wish to see on the instrument pan-
el display
›››
page 73.
Compass
Changing the magnetic region and calibrat-
ing the compass
›››
page 83.
Convenience
Changing vehicle convenience functions
›››
page 75.
Lights and visibility
Configuration of vehicle lighting
›››
page 75.
Time
Changing the hours and minutes of the in-
strument panel clock and the navigation sys-
tem. The time can be displayed in 12 or 24
hour format. The S in the upper part of the
74
Control instruments and warning lamps
display indicates that the clock is set to sum-
mer time
.
Winter tyres
Changing the visual and audible speed
warnings. This function should only be used
when the vehicle is fitted with winter tyres,
which are not designed for letting the vehicle
reach its maximum speed.
Language
Changing the language of the display texts
and the navigation system.
Units
Changing the units of measurement for the
temperature, consumption and distance.
Second speed
Switching second speed display on and off.
Service
Check the service notifications or reset the
service intervals to zero.
Factory settings
Some functions of the Configuration menu
will be reset to the factory value.
Submenu Convenience
Central locking
●
Auto. lock (Auto Lock): aut
omatic locking
of all doors and boot when reaching a speed
of around 15 km/h (10 mph). In order to unlock
the vehicle when it is stopped, push the cen-
tral locking button, pull the door handle or re-
move the key from the ignition lock if the Auto
unlock function is enabled.
●
Auto unlock (Auto Unlock): Unlocking all
doors and the boot by removing the ignition
key.
●
Unlock door: when unl
ocking with the key
the following doors are unlocked:
All
One door: only the driver’s door unlocks.
Pressing the key a second time un-
locks all of the doors and the rear lid.
Vehicle side: the doors on the driver's
side are unlocked. In vehicles with the
Keyless Access system
›››
page 95 ,
when the corresponding handle is
moved, the doors on the side of the vehi-
cle where the key is located are un-
locked.
Handling windows
Window operation settings: this enables the
windows to be opened or closed when the
vehicle is unlocked or locked respectively.
–
–
–
The open function can only be activated from
the driver door
›››
page 113.
Rear vision mirror adjustment
Tilts passenger mirror downwards when re-
verse gear is engaged. This enables the driv-
er to see the edge of the pavement, for exam-
ple
›››
page 129.
Exterior mirror adjust.
If synchronised adjustment is selected,
when the driver side exterior mirror is adjus-
ted, the passenger exterior mirror is also
moved.
Factory settings
Some functions of the Convenience subme-
nu will be reset to the factory value.
Lights and visibility subme-
nu
Coming home and leaving home
This permits the adjustment of the time the
headl
amps stay on after locking or unlocking
the vehicle, the function can also be connec-
ted or disconnected here
›››
page 122.
Footwell light
This permits the adjustment of the brightness
of the footwell lighting when the doors are
»
75
Operation
open, the function can also be connected or
disconnect
ed here
Convenience turn signals
Switching convenience turn signals on and
off When the convenience turn signals are
connected,, these flash at least three times
when the turn signal is switched on
›››
page 117.
Factory settings
All the configurations in the Lights & visi-
bility sub-menu will be reset to the factory
settings.
Tourist light
Headlamp adjustment for countries in which
vehicles are driven on the other side of the
road. When the mark is activated, the head-
lamps of a left-hand drive vehicle are adjus-
ted for driving on the left. This function must
only be used for a short period.
Personal convenience settings
When two people use a vehicle, SEAT recom-
mends that each person al
ways uses “their”
own remote control key. When the ignition is
switched off, or the vehicle is locked, the per-
sonal convenience settings are stored and
automatically allocated to the vehicle key.
The values of the personalised convenience
settings of the following menu options are al-
located to the vehicle key:
■
Parking heating menu
■
Configuration Menu
■
Time
■
Language
■
Units
■
Convenience settings menu
■
Door unlock (individual opening, Auto
Lock)
■
Convenience handling of windows
■
Rear vision mirror adjustment
■
Lights & visibility settings menu
■
Coming home and leaving home
■
Footwell light
■
Convenience turn signals
The stored settings are automatically activa-
ted, at the latest when the ignition is switched
on. Please refer to the information and tips re-
lating to the seat memory
›››
page 136.
Warning and information messages
(Vehicle status)
The system runs a check on certain compo-
nents and functions when the ignition is
s
witched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults displayed on the instrument panel as
red and yellow warning symbols accompa-
nied with messages and, depending on the
case, even an audible warning
›››
page 87.
The representation of the messages and
symbols may vary depending on the version
of the instrument panel.
Existing faults can also be checked manually.
To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or
Vehicle
›››
page 73.
Priority 1 warning (red)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Stop
driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-
nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-
nal assistance.
Priority 2 warning (yellow)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Operating
faults or the lack of operating fluids can
cause damage to the vehicle or a fault.
Check the faulty function as soon as possible.
If necessary, seek professional assistance.
Information message
It provides information about processes in the
vehicle.
76
Control instruments and warning lamps
Driver alert system (break recom-
mendation)
Fig. 76
On the instrument panel display: driver
al
ert system symbol.
The Fatigue detection informs the driver when
their driving behaviour sho
ws signs of fatigue.
Function and operation
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
haviour of the driver when starting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-
stantly compared with the current driving be-
haviour. If the system detects that the driver is
tired, an audible warning is given with a
sound and an optic warning is shown with a
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 76. The mes-
sage on the instrument panel display is
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
pending on the case, is repeated. The system
stores the last message displayed.
The message on the instrument panel display
can be switched off by pressing the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
button on the multi function steering wheel
›››
page 85.
The message can be recalled to the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
display
›››
page 73.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Activating and deactivating
The system can be switched on or off in the
Assistants menu. A mark indicates that the
adjustment has been activated.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
inherent to the system. The following condi-
tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
vent it from functioning.
●
At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
●
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
●
When cornering
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
When a sporty driving style is employed
●
In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long peri-
od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-
tem automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
ted.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-
gue det
ection system tempt you into taking
any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,
sufficient in length when making long jour-
neys.
●
The driver always assumes the responsi-
bility of driving to their full capacity.
●
Never drive if you are tired.
●
The system does not detect the tiredness
of the driver in all circumstances. Consult
the information in the section
›››
page 77,
System limitations.
●
In some situations, the system may incor-
rectly interpret an intended driving ma-
noeuvre as driver tiredness.
●
No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
»
77
Operation
●
Pl
ease observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
●
F
atigue detection has been developed
for driving on motorways and well paved
roads only.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
Road signs detection system
1)
Fig. 77
On the instrument panel display: ex-
ampl
es of speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
tions with their respective additional signs.
The traffic sign detection system records the
st
andard traffic signs in front of the vehicle
with a camera located on the base of the in-
terior mirror and provides information about
speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.
Within its limitations, the system also displays
additional signals, such as time-specific pro-
hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers
›››
page 299 or limitations that only apply in
the event of rain. Even on journeys without
signs, the system may display any applicable
speed limits.
Applicable countries
At the time of printing this instruction manual,
the road signs detection system worked in the
following countries:
Germany, Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Vatican
City, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Ire-
land, Italy, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, Mona-
co, Norway, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal,
United Kingdom, Czech Republic, San Marino,
Sweden, Switzerland.
Road sign detection system messages:
Error: Sign Assist
●
System fault. Have the system checked by
a specialised workshop.
Sign Assist: please clean the wind-
screen.
●
The windscreen is dirty in the area of the
camera. Clean the windscreen.
1)
System available depending on the country.
78
Control instruments and warning lamps
Sign Assist: only partly available
at the moment.
●
The navigator does not transmit data. Con-
nect the navigat
or and insert the navigation
data media.
●
OR: road sign detection is not supported in
the country where the vehicle is currently
driving.
Switching on and off
●
Connect or disconnect the assist system in
the Settings menu in the SEAT information
system
›››
page 74.
●
OR: press the button for the driver assis-
tance systems on the main beam lev-
er
›››
page 86.
Display of traffic signs
Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions to-
gether with the corresponding additional
signs are shown on the instrument panel dis-
play. Depending on the navigation system in-
stalled in the vehicle, traffic signs will be
shown as above and also in the navigation
system's map display.
When the traffic sign detection system is con-
nected, a camera located on the base of the
interior rear-view mirror records the traffic
signs in front of the vehicle. After checking
and evaluating the information from the cam-
era, the navigation system and the current
vehicle data, up to three valid road signs are
displayed,
›››
Fig. 77 with their additional
signs.
●
First: The sign that is currently valid for the
driver is shown in the left side of the screen
For example, a maximum speed limit of
130 km/h (100 mph)
›››
Fig. 77 .
●
Second: A sign valid only in certain circum-
stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown sec-
ond, together with the additional rain sign.
●
Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is
working while you are driving, the signal with
the additional rain sign will be shown first, on
the left, as it is the one that is applicable at
the time.
●
Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.
No overtaking at certain times, will be dis-
played in third place
›››
Fig. 77 .
The permanent display on the instrument
panel screen is shown as you pass the real
traffic signs.
The signs for entering and leaving towns acti-
vate the display of the usual speed limits for
that country on roads in populated areas and
national highways, even if the speed is not
limited by an actual traffic sign.
The end of a prohibition or limitation is not
displayed.
If you exceed the speed limits shown, a warn-
ing will not appear. The system does not rec-
ognise residential street signs. The current le-
gal provisions apply.
Trailer mode
Connect or disconnect the secondary dis-
play for speed limits and overtaking bans that
apply to trailers (trailer mode) in the Set-
tings menu in the SEAT information system
›››
page 73.
Limited operation
The traffic sign detection system has certain
limitations. The following cases may lead the
system to operate with limitations or not at
all:
●
In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,
rain, fog or intense mist.
●
In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-
on traffic or by the sun.
●
When driving at high speeds.
●
If the camera is covered or dirty.
●
If the traffic signs are out of the camera's
field of vision.
●
If the traffic signs are partially or totally
covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-
cles.
●
In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil
the regulations.
●
In the case of damaged or bent traffic
signs.
»
79
Operation
●
In the case of v
ariable messages on over-
head or gantry signs (LED-based variable
traffic signs or other lighting units).
●
If the maps on the navigation system are
not up-to-date.
●
In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles
that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on
lorries.
WARNING
The technology in the traffic sign detection
syst
em cannot change the limits imposed
by the laws of physics and only works with-
in the system's limits. Do not let the extra
convenience afforded by the traffic sign
detection system tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and
fog may lead to the system failing to dis-
play traffic signs or not displaying them
correctly.
●
If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
ered or damaged, system operation may
be impaired.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications sho
wn on the traffic sign detec-
tion system may differ from the actual cur-
r
ent traffic situation.
●
The system may not detect or correctly
show all the traffic signs.
●
Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the system.
WARNING
If messages are ignored, the vehicle may
st
all in traffic and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
Never ignore the messages displayed.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
Note
To avoid affecting the correct operation of
the syst
em, take the following points into
consideration:
●
Regularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Always replace damaged or worn blades
when required to avoid lines on the cam-
era's field of vision.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
sion.
●
The use of out
dated maps on the naviga-
tion system may cause the system to show
traffic signs incorrectly.
●
In the waypoints mode of the navigation
system, the traffic sign detection system is
only partly available.
●
Failure to heed the control lamps and
corresponding text messages when they
light up may result in damage to the vehi-
cle.
Time
●
Press the
›
››
Fig. 75
1
to select the hour
or minut
e display.
●
To continue setting, press the
›››
Fig. 75
7
button. Hold button down to
scr
oll through the numbers quickly.
●
Press the button again to end the clock
setting.
Revolution counter
The rev counter indicates the number of en-
gine r
evolutions per minute.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
80
Control instruments and warning lamps
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
count
er indicates the maximum speed in any
gear after running-in and with the engine hot.
However, it is advisable to change up a gear
or move the selector lever to D (or lift your
foot off the accelerator) before the needle
reaches the red zone
›››
.
W
e recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the addition-
al information in
›››
page 251, Selecting the
optimal gear.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the
red zone for a short period of time.
●
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
and heavy acceleration and do not make
the engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to
sav
e fuel and minimise emissions and en-
gine noise.
Fuel gauge
Fig. 78
On the instrument panel: fuel gauge.
Control lamps
It lights up.
Gauge position in the r
ed mark
(arrow)
›››
Fig. 78
The fuel tank is almost empty
›
››
. The fuel tank re-
serv
e has been consumed
›››
page 357.
Refuel as soon as possible
›››
.
It lights up
The fuel tank is not properly closed.
St
op the vehicle and close the tank flap correctly.
The display only works when the ignition is
s
witched on.
The fuel range is displayed on the instrument
panel.
You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-
hicle in the
›››
page 357 section.
When the control lamp lights up the addi-
tional petrol powered heating and the addi-
tional heater are automatically switched off.
WARNING
When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may
st
all in traffic and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could
reach the engine irregularly, particularly
when driving up or down slopes.
●
The steering system and the assistant
systems and brakes do not work when the
engine is running irregularly or switches off
due to lack of fuel or an irregular supply
thereof.
●
SEAT recommends always refuelling
when the tank is approximately one quarter
full, to prevent the vehicle from stopping
due to a lack of fuel.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An
irr
egular fuel supply can cause misfiring
and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust
system. The catalytic converter or the par-
ticulate filter may get damaged!
»
81
Operation
Note
The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to
the fuel pump symbol points out t
owards
the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank
flap.
Engine coolant temperature indica-
t
or.
Fig. 79 Instrument panel: engine coolant tem-
per
ature indicator.
Cool zone. The engine has not r
eached
operating temperature yet. Avoid high
speeds and stressing the engine if it has
not reached operating temperature.
Normal zone. At high outside tempera-
tures and when the engine is subject to
A
B
high forces, the needle may move consid-
er
ably to the right. This is no cause for
concern, provided the control lamp does
not light up
Warning area. When the engine is work-
ing hard, especially at high outside tem-
peratures, the needle may move into the
warning area.
The coolant temperature gauge only works
when the ignition is switched on.
Control and warning lamp
It lights up red
Engine coolant system faulty.
Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-
t
ance.
It lights up red
Indicat
or in the normal area
B
Insufficient engine coolant level.
Check the engine cool
ant when the engine has
cooled and, if it is low, refill with engine coolant
›››
page 320.
Even if the coolant level is correct, there is a fault.
C
It lights up red
Indicat
or in the warning zone
C
Excessive engine coolant temperature.
St
op the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible. Switch off the engine and wait for it to
cool down and for the needle to return to the normal
area. Check the engine coolant level
›››
page 320.
Flashes red
Engine coolant system faulty.
Seek specialist assist
ance.
CAUTION
●
T
o ensure a long useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approxi-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm
also depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature
›››
page 73 as a guide.
●
Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-
fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-
atures and high engine loads, there is a risk
of the engine overheating.
●
The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-
tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle
is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can
reduce the cooling effect, which could
cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-
cialist assistance.
82
Control instruments and warning lamps
Compass
Fig. 80
Magnetic zones
The compass does not require calibration in
v
ehicles for which the navigation system was
mounted at the factory. The option compass
disappears.
The compass in vehicles in which the naviga-
tion system was not mounted at the factory,
is permanently and automatically calibrated.
If electronic or metal accessories (mobile
phone, television) are subsequently mounted
in the vehicle, the compass should be recali-
brated manually.
Adjusting the magnetic zone
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Select the Settings menu followed by the
option Compass and Zone.
●
Select the magnetic zone corresponding to
the position of the vehicle
›››
Fig. 80.
●
Adjust and confirm the magnetic zone
(1-15).
Calibrating compass
To calibrate the compass you must be in one
of the valid magnetic zones with sufficient
space to be able to trace a circumference
with the vehicle.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Select the Settings menu followed by the
option Compass and Calibrate.
●
Confirm the message Turn through a
full circle to calibrate the compass
with key
on the wiper lever or key
on the multifunction steering wheel and then
t
urn through a full circle at around 10 km/h (6
mph).
When the corresponding cardinal point is dis-
played, the calibration is complete.
Service intervals
The service interval indication is shown on the
instrument panel displ
ay.
SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
spection).
»
83
Operation
In vehicles with Services est
ablished by
time or mileage, the service intervals are al-
ready pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hicle so requires. To calculate this variation
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use
and individual driving styles are considered.
The advance warning first appears 20 days
before the date established for the corre-
sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-
maining until the next service are always
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and
the time is given in complete days. The cur-
rent service message cannot be viewed until
500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-
ly lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
If a service or an inspection has to be carried
out soon, a service reminder will be dis-
played when the ignition is switched on.
In vehicles without text messages, a spanner
symbol is displayed on the instrument
panel and a figure given in km. The number of
kilometres shown is the maximum number
that may be driven until the next service. After
a few seconds, the display mode changes. A
clock symbol appears and the number of
days until the next service appointment is
due.
In vehicles with text messages, Service in
--- km (miles) or --- days is dis-
played on the instrument panel.
Service due
After the service date, an audible warning is
given when the ignition is switched on and the
spanner displayed on the screen flashes
for a few seconds. In vehicles with text mes-
sages, the following will be displayed on the
instrument panel: Service now.
Consult a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine off
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service notification can be read:
●
Press the button on the instrument panel
several times until the spanner symbol is
displayed.
●
OR: select the Settings > Service
menu.
●
Select the Info option.
When the service date has past, a minus
sign is displayed in front of the number of kilo-
metres or days. In vehicles with text messag-
es the following is displayed: Service ---
km (miles) or --- days ago.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows:
Vehicles with text messages
●
Select the menu Settings> Service .
●
Select the Reset option.
●
Confirm with key
on the multifunction
st
eering wheel when required by the system.
Vehicles without text messages
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Press and hold the
›
››
Fig. 75
7
but-
t
on.
●
Switch ignition back on.
●
Release key
and, within the next 20
seconds, pr
ess key
›››
Fig. 75
1
Do not r
estart the indicator between the
service intervals, otherwise the information
displayed will be incorrect.
If the oil change service is reset manually, the
service interval display changes to a fixed
service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible
oil change service.
Note
●
The service message disappears aft
er a
few seconds, when the engine is started or
when
button is pressed on the wiper
84
Control instruments and warning lamps
lever, or the button on the multifunction
st
eering wheel.
●
In vehicles with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected
for a long period of time, it is not possible to
calculate the date of the next service.
Therefore the service interval display may
not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the
maximum service intervals permitted
›››
page 336.
●
If you reset the display manually, the next
service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
cles with fixed service intervals. For this
reason we recommend that the service in-
terval display be reset by a SEAT author-
ised Dealer.
Instrument cluster operation
Intr
oduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible to
r
ead the different functions of the display by
scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
the multifunction display can only be operat-
ed with the steering wheel buttons.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead
t
o an accident and cause injuries.
●
Never use the menus on the instrument
panel display while the vehicle is in motion.
Note
After loading or changing the 12-volt bat-
t
ery, check the system settings. If the pow-
er supply is interrupted, the system settings
might be incorrect or deleted.
Operation using the multifunction
st
eering wheel
Fig. 81
Multifunction steering wheel: buttons
f
or using the instrument panel menus.
As long as a priority 1
›
››
page 76 warning is
active, it will not be possible to access any
menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
hidden with the button
of the multifunction
st
eering wheel
›››
Fig. 81.
Select a menu or an informative display
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
press the button
›
››
Fig. 81; if necessary,
several times.
●
To change menus, use buttons or
›››
Fig. 81.
●
To open the menu or the information dis-
played, press the button
›
››
Fig. 81 or wait
a few seconds until the menu or the informa-
tive display opens automatically.
Changing menu settings
●
In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-
wheel of the multifunction steering wheel
›››
Fig. 81 until the desired option of the menu
is highlighted. The option appears framed.
●
Press the button
›
››
Fig. 81 to make the
required modifications. A mark indicates that
the system or function is activated.
Back to menu selection
Press the button or
›››
Fig. 81.
85
Operation
Operation with the wiper lever
Fig. 82
Wiper lever: buttons for using the in-
strument panel menus.
As long as a priority 1
›
››
page 76 warning is
active, it will not be possible to access any
menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
hidden with the button
›››
Fig. 82
1
.
Sel
ect a menu or an informative display
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
press button
1
; if necessary, several times.
●
To display the menus
›
››
page 73 or to re-
turn to the selection of menus from a menu or
from an informative display, hold down the
rocker button
2
.
●
To change from one menu to another, press
the upper or l
ower part of the rocker switch.
●
To open the menu or the informative display
shown, press button
1
or wait a few seconds
until the menu or the informative display
opens aut
omatically.
Changing menu settings
●
In the menu displayed, press the upper or
lower part of the rocker switch
2
until the re-
quir
ed menu option is checked. The option
appears framed.
●
Press button
1
to make the required modi-
fications. A mark indicat
es that the system or
function is activated.
Back to menu selection
Select Back on the corresponding menu to
exit.
Note
If when switching on the ignition warnings
ar
e shown about existing faults, it might not
be possible to change the settings or show
the information as described. In this case,
go to a specialised workshop and request a
repair.
Button for the assistant systems
Fig. 83
On the turn signal and main beam lev-
er: butt
on for driver assistance systems.
With the turn signal and main beam headlight
l
ever button, you can activate or deactivate
the assistant systems displayed in the As-
sistants menu .
Activate or deactivate a driver assistance
system
●
Briefly press the
›››
Fig. 83 button to open
the Assistants menu.
●
Select the assistant system and activate or
deactivate it
›››
page 85. A mark indicates
that assistant system is switched on.
●
Afterwards, mark or confirm the selection
with button
on the windscreen wiper
l
ever or button
on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel .
86
Control instruments and warning lamps
Control lamps
Contr
ol and warning lamps
The control and warning lamps are indicators
of w
arnings
›››
, faults or certain functions.
Some contr
ol and warning lamps come on
when the ignition is switched on, and switch
off when the engine starts running, or while
driving.
Depending on the model, additional text
messages may be viewed on the instrument
panel display. These may be purely informa-
tive or they may be advising of the need for
action
›››
page 70, Instrument panel.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
strument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are
lit, an audible warning is also heard.
Red lamps
Parking brake engaged OR anomaly in the
br
ake system
›››
page 280.
Fault in the steering system
›
››
page 252.
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat
belt
›
››
page 15.
Engine cooling fluid
›
››
page 82.
Engine oil pressure
›››
page 318.
Alternator abnormality
›
››
page 325.
Press the foot brake
›
››
page 280,
›››
page 246,
›››
page 267.
Open or not properly closed door
›
››
page 104.
Open or not properly closed rear lid
›
››
page 108
Yellow warning lamps
Front brake pads worn
›
››
page 280.
Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by
the syst
em; OR ESC or ASR in operation
›››
page 285.
ASR manually deactivated
›
››
page 285.
Fault in the ABS
›
››
page 285.
Electronic parking brake faulty
›
››
page 280.
Rear fog light switched on
›
››
page 117.
Fault in the emission control system
›
››
page 313.
Fault in the petrol engine management
›››
page 313.
Particulate filter blocked
›››
page 313.
Fault in the steering system
›››
page 252.
Tyre pressure monitor system
›
››
page 333.
Fuel tank almost empty
›
››
page 81.
Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-
sioners
›
››
page 24.
Front passenger front airbag disabled
›
››
page 24.
Fault in the lighting of the vehicle
›
››
page 117.
Low engine oil level
›
››
page 318.
Fuel tank flap is open
›
››
page 81.
Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)
›››
page 272.
Windscreen cleaning fluid too low
›››
page 323.
Green indicator lamps
Turn lights or emergency lights on
›
››
page 117.
Press the foot brake
›
››
page 246.
Speed regulator
›
››
page 260; OR Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)
›››
page 267.
Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning
›
››
page 272.
»
87
Operation
Blue indicator lamps
Main beam on or flasher on
›››
page 117.
Other warning lamps
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
›
››
page 117.
Service interval display
›
››
page 83.
Mobile phone connected by Bluetooth®
›
››
page 224.
Mobile telephone battery charge status
›
››
page 224.
Risk of freezing
›››
page 72.
Start-Stop system activated
›
››
page 243.
Start-Stop system unavailable
›
››
page 243.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ig-
nor
ed, faults may occur in the vehicle, it
may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-
ous injuries may occur.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble.
●
A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users.
If necessary, switch on the hazard warning
l
amps and put out the warning triangle to
advise other drivers.
●
Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
●
In any vehicle, the engine compartment is
a hazardous area and could cause severe
injuries
›››
page 314.
88
Control instruments and warning lamps
Multifunction steering wheel
Oper
ation of the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control
Fig. 84 Controls on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel includes a multifunction
modul
e from where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
functions without needing to distract the driv-
er.
Button Radio Media Telephone Navigation
A
Turn
Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn announcement volume up/down.
A
Press
Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation
B
a)
– Incoming call: pick up (short pr
ess), reject (long press).
– Active call: hang up active call (short press).
– No active / incoming call: open phone menu (short press), re-dial the last active call (long press).
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, driving data).
C
/
D
Search for the previous/next sta-
tion
b)
.
Short press: S
witch to the previ-
ous/next track.
Long press: Fast rewind/forward
c)
.
– No active call: Radio/Media
functionality
– Active call: no function
No function for the other modes (naviga-
tion, assistants, vehicle status, travel da-
ta).
»
89
Operation
Button Radio Media Telephone Navigation
E
/
F
a)
Change menu on instrument panel.
This function can be used fr
om any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).
G
Activate/deactivate voice control.
d)
This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.
H
Turn
Next/previous pre-tuning (only if
the instrument panel is in the audio
menu).
Next/previous pre-tuning (only if
the instrument panel is in the audio
menu).
Operates the instrument panel
menu, depending on the one that
is displ
ayed.
Operates the instrument panel menu, de-
pending on the one that is displayed.
H
Press
Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
c)
These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
d)
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).
90
Control instruments and warning lamps
Three button unit in the roof
Thr
ee button module
Fig. 85
Three button module in the roof: tele-
phone management syst
em controls.
Press it briefly: t
o accept or end a call.
Keep it pressed down: to reject a call.
Short press: t
o start or stop the voice control
function, for example, to make a call.
a)
Hold down for over 2 seconds: t
o obtain infor-
mation about the SEAT brand and selected
additional services related to traffic and trav-
el.
Hold down for over 2 seconds: t
o obtain help
from the network of SEAT dealers in the event
of a breakdown.
a)
Not operational if a navigation system with voice
contr
ol is fitted.
Information and assistance calls
Communication with the SEAT Customer
Car
e Service is established using the and
buttons of the three-button unit
1)
. The system
will automatically connect you with the Assis-
tance Centre of the relevant country. You will
only be able to make calls if your mobile is
turned on and connected to the pre-installed
Bluetooth.
Information call
The Information call button offers infor-
mation on the SEAT brand and selected addi-
tional services related to traffic and your
travel.
To establish communication, press the but-
ton for more than 2 seconds.
In countries where there is no information tel-
ephone number, an information call is made
by pressing the button.
Assistance call
The assistance call button gives im-
mediate help in case of a breakdown. To this
end, the SEAT dealer network, with its mobile
assistance vehicles, is at your disposal.
To establish communication, press the but-
ton for more than 2 seconds.
Note
●
Call
s made with the and buttons take
priority over normal calls. If the or but-
ton is pressed during a normal telephone
call, this call will be cut off and an informa-
tion call or assistance call will be made.
●
If the assistance call button is pressed
during an information call, the information
call will be interrupted to make the assis-
tance call (and vice versa).
●
Mobile phone coverage must be availa-
ble to place a call to the information and
assistance services. This service might not
be available in some countries.
Activate and deactivate voice con-
tr
ol
Switching on the speech control system
●
Press the butt
on on the multi-function
steering wheel.
●
Wait for the acoustic signal.
●
Give the command.
●
Follow the dialogue instructions (extended
dialogue).
»
1)
Depending upon country.
91
Operation
Ending voice control
●
Press twice or press and hold the butt
on
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Interrupting the instructions
●
During the instructions, press the button
on the multi-function steering wheel.
●
You will be able to give a command imme-
diately afterwards.
92
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Set of v
ehicle keys
Vehicle key
Fig. 86 Assignment of buttons on the remote
contr
ol key.
Key to
›
››
Fig. 86
Unlock the vehicle
Lock the vehicle
Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button
until all the turn signals on the vehicle
flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open
the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it
1
2
3
will lock again. In addition, the lamp on
the k
ey flashes.
Folding the key shaft in and out
Open the electric sliding door.
With the vehicle key the vehicle may be
locked or unlocked remotely
›››
page 95.
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-
cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote
control and new battery is several metres
around the vehicle.
If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle
using the remote control key, this should be
re-synchronised
›››
page 95 or the battery
changed
›››
page 94.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may
be used.
Control lamp on the vehicle key
When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,
the control lamp flashes
›››
Fig. 86 (arrow)
once briefly, but if the button is held down for
a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-
eral times, such as in convenience opening.
If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
up when the button is pressed, replace the
key's battery
›››
page 94.
4
5
Spare key
T
o obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
the vehicle chassis number is required.
Each new key contains a microchip which
must be coded with the data from the vehicle
electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
work if it does not contain a microchip or the
microchip has not been encoded. This is also
true for keys which are specially cut for the
vehicle.
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be
obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-
cialised workshop or an approved key service
qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchronised
before use
›››
page 95.
WARNING
●
Ne
ver leave children or disabled persons
in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they
may not be able to leave the vehicle or
manage on their own.
●
An uncontrolled use of the key could start
the engine or activate any electric equip-
ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk
of accident. The doors can be locked using
the remote control key. This could become
an obstacle for assistance in an emergen-
cy situation.
●
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.
An unauthorised use of your vehicle could
result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore
»
93
Operation
always take the key with you when you
l
eave the vehicle.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the
steering could suddenly block and it would
be impossible to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic
components. Pr
otect them from damage,
impacts and humidity.
Note
●
Only use the k
ey button when you require
the corresponding function. Pushing the
button unnecessarily could accidentally
unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is
also possible even when you are outside
the radius of action.
●
Key operation can be greatly influenced
by overlapping radio signals close to the
vehicle working in the same range of fre-
quencies, for example, radio transmitters or
mobile telephones.
●
Obstacles between the remote control
and the vehicle, bad weather conditions
and discharged batteries can considerably
reduce the range of the remote control.
●
If the buttons of the vehicle key are
pressed or one of the central locking but-
tons
›››
page 97 is pressed repeatedly in
short succession, the central locking brief-
ly disconnects as protection against over-
l
oading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock
it if necessary.
●
Spare remote control keys are available
at your Technical Service, where they must
be matched to the locking system.
●
Up to five remote control keys can be
used.
Changing the battery
Fig. 87
Vehicle key: battery compartment cov-
er
.
Fig. 88 Vehicle key: remove the battery.
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
w
orkshop to replace the battery.
The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-
cle key, under a cover.
Changing the battery
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 93.
●
Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
hicle key
›››
Fig. 87 in the direction of the ar-
row
›››
.
●
Extract the battery from the compartment
using a suit
able thin object
›››
Fig. 88.
●
Place the new battery in the compartment
as shown
›››
Fig. 88, pressing in the opposite
direction to that shown by the arrow
›››
.
●
Fit the cover as shown
›
››
Fig. 87, pressing it
onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di-
rection to that shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
94
Opening and closing
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-
t
er or any other button battery can cause
serious and even fatal injuries within a very
short time.
●
Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with
batteries out of reach of children.
●
If you suspect that someone may have
swallowed a battery, seek immediate med-
ical attention.
CAUTION
●
If the batt
ery is not changed correctly,
the vehicle key may be damaged.
●
Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
●
When fitting the battery, check that the
polarity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries cor-
r
ectly and with respect for the environ-
ment.
Synchronize the vehicle key
If the butt
on is pressed frequently outside
of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-
synchronised as described below:
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 93.
●
If necessary, remove the cover from the
driver door lever
›››
page 104.
●
Press the button on the vehicle key. For
this, it must remain with the vehicle.
●
Open the vehicle within one minute using
the key blade. The key has been synchron-
ised.
●
If necessary, fit the cap.
Central locking
Introduction
Central locking functions correctly when all
the doors and the r
ear lid are correctly shut. If
the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be
locked with the key.
If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking
and ignition system, it may only be locked
with the ignition off and the driver's door
closed.
WARNING
The incorrect use of the central locking
syst
em may cause serious injuries.
●
The centr
al locking system will lock all
doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can
prevent any non-authorised individual from
opening the doors and accessing the vehi-
cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or
accident, locked doors will complicate ac-
cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-
sengers.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the vehicle. The central locking
button can be used to lock all the doors
from within. Therefore, passengers will be
locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked
in the vehicle can be exposed to very high
or very low temperatures.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
●
Never leave individuals locked in a closed
and locked vehicle. In case of emergency,
they may not be able to exit the vehicle by
themselves or get help.
Description
Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid
and the t
ank flap to be unlocked centrally:
●
From outside, using the vehicle key
›››
page 97.
»
95
Operation
●
Fr
om outside with the Keyless Access
›››
page 98 system,
●
From inside, by pushing the central locking
button
›››
page 97.
Various functions are available to improve the
vehicle safety:
●
“Safe” security system
›››
page 101
●
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
●
Selective unlocking system
●
Automatic speed dependent locking and
unlocking system (Auto Lock)
●
Emergency unlocking system
The Settings > Comfort menu can be
used to connect or disconnect special cen-
tral locking functions
›››
page 73, or this can
be done at a specialised workshop.
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-
intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-
cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-
onds, it re-locks automatically.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and
the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed
of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-
tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle
can also be unlocked via the central locking
switch or by pulling one of the inside door
handles.
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, the doors will be automatically
unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
Depending on the amount of damage, it can
be locked following an accident in the follow-
ing ways:
With the central locking button
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Open a vehicle door once and close it
again.
●
Press the central locking button
With the vehicle key
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
OR: remove the key from the ignition switch.
●
Open a vehicle door once.
●
Use the key to lock the vehicle.
Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)
When the key is removed from the ignition
slot, here the vehicle unlocks all doors and
the boot automatically
›››
page 73.
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
is locked.
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of
the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not
closed correctly.
Accidental lock-out
The central locking system prevents you from
being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-
ing situations:
●
If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot
be locked with the central locking switch
›››
page 97.
Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
when all the doors and the rear lid have been
closed. This prevents the accidental locking
of the vehicle.
Note
●
Ne
ver leave any valuable items in the ve-
hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is
not a safe.
●
If the LED on the driver door sill lights up
for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is
locked, the central locking system or anti-
theft alarm is not working properly. You
should have the fault repaired at a SEAT
Official Service or specialised workshop.
96
Opening and closing
●
V
ehicle interior monitoring by the anti-
theft alarm system will only function as in-
tended if the windows and sunroof are
closed.
Unlock and lock from the outside
Fig. 89
Remote control key: buttons.
●
Lock: press the butt
on
›››
Fig. 89.
●
Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-
curity system: push the button again and
hold for 2 seconds.
●
Unlock: press the button.
●
Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the
button for at least 1 second.
Warning: depending on the central locking
function selected in the Comfort submenu,
you may have to push the button twice to
unlock all doors and the rear lid
›››
page 73.
The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the
rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the
car. This function prevents the vehicle from
remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you
press the button for at least one second.
Convenience open/close function
●
See
›››
page 113, Convenience
open/close function.
●
See
›››
page 116, Convenience function
to open or close the sunroof.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in “Safe”
securit
y system on page 101.
Note
Do not use the remote control key until the
v
ehicle is visible.
Unlocking and locking from the in-
side
Fig. 90
Driver's door: central locking switch.
●
Lock: press the butt
on
›››
Fig. 90.
●
Unlock: press the
›››
Fig. 90 button.
Please note the following when using the
central locking switch
›››
Fig. 90to lock your
vehicle:
●
It is not possible to open the doors or the
rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
●
The central locking lamp
›››
Fig. 90 lights
up when all the doors are closed and locked.
●
You can open the doors individually from
the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-
cess and assistance.
»
97
Operation
WARNING
●
The centr
al locking switch also works
with the ignition switched off, except when
the “safe” system is activated.
●
The central locking switch does not oper-
ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside
and the security system is switched on.
●
Locked doors could delay assistance in
an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-
cially children, in the vehicle.
Note
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
r
eaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
(Auto Lock)
›››
page 95. You can unlock the
vehicle again using the button on the
central locking switch.
Unlock and lock the vehicle with
K
eyless Access
Fig. 91
Keyless Access: proximity zones.
Fig. 92 Door handle: sensor surfaces
›››
Fig. 92
Unl
ocking sensor surface on the inside of
the door handle.
Locking sensor surface on the outside of
the door handle.
A
B
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may hav
e the Keyless Access system.
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-
tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle
without actively using its key. To do this, all
that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in
the detection area where you are attempting
to access the vehicle
›››
Fig. 91 and to touch
one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles
›››
Fig. 92
›››
.
The v
ehicle can be unlocked and locked via
the front doors only. When doing so, the re-
mote control key must be no further than ap-
prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.
It does not matter where you carry the key,
e.g. in your jacket pocket.
Once the doors have been locked, they can-
not be opened again immediately. This will
enable you to check that the doors are prop-
erly closed.
If you wish you may unlock only the corre-
sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec-
essary adjustments can be performed in ve-
hicles with a driver information system
›››
page 73.
General information
If a valid key is located in the proximity of the
car
›››
Fig. 91, the Keyless Access lock and ig-
nition system gives the key entry as soon as
one of the sensor surfaces on the door
98
Opening and closing
handles is touched or the push button on the
boot hat
ch is operated.
The following features are then available
without having to use the vehicle key actively:
●
Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with
the handles on the four doors or the button
located on the rear lid.
●
Keyless-Exit: locking of the vehicle with one
of the four door handles.
●
Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one
foot below the rear bumper
›››
page 111.
●
Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine
with the starter button
›››
page 239.
The central locking and locking systems op-
erate in the same way as a normal locking
and unlocking system. Only the controls
change.
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
double flash of the indicator lights; locking by
a single flash.
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-
onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open
any door or boot hatch.
Unlocking and opening the doors
(Keyless-Entry)
●
Grip the door handle. When you do this, you
touch the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
A
(ar-
r
ow) on the handle and the vehicle unlocks.
●
Open the door.
In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-
tem: closing and locking the doors
(Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(arrow) on the door handle. The door that
is used must be cl
osed.
In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys-
tem: closing and locking the doors
(Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(arrow) on the door handle. The vehicle
l
ocks with the “Safe” security system
›››
page 104. The door that is used must be
closed.
●
Touch (twice) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(arrow) on the door handle to lock the ve-
hicl
e without the “Safe” security system
›››
page 104.
Unlocking and locking the boot hatch
When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-
id vehicle key in the proximity
›››
Fig. 91.
Open or close the rear lid normally.
After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If
the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid
will not lock automatically after closing it.
What happens when locking the vehicle
with a second key
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
it is locked from the outside with a second ve-
hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked
for engine ignition
›››
page 239. In order to
enable engine ignition, press the button on
the key inside the vehicle.
Automatically disabling sensors
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
long period of time, the proximity sensors on
the passenger doors are automatically disa-
bled.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles is often activated in an unusual manner
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity
sensors are disabled for a certain period of
time.
Sensors will again be enabled:
●
After a time.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
ton on the key.
●
OR: if the boot is opened.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with
the key.
»
99
Operation
Keyless Access temporary disconnection
function
Y
ou can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless
Access unlocking for one locking and unlock-
ing cycle.
●
Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-
hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-
wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
●
Close the door.
●
Push the central locking button on the re-
mote control and touch the locking sensor
surface of the driver door handle
›››
Fig. 92
B
within the following 5 seconds.
Do not gr
asp the door handle; otherwise the
vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also
possible if the vehicle is locked through the
driver’s door lock.
●
To check that the function has been deacti-
vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull
on the door handle. The door should not
open.
The next time the door can only be unlocked
via the remote control or the lock cylinder.
The next time the door is locked/unlocked,
Keyless Access will be active again.
Convenience functions
To close all the electric windows and the
panoramic sliding sunroof using the comfort
function, keep a finger for a few seconds on
the locking sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(ar-
r
ow) of the door handle until the windows and
roof have closed.
The way that the doors open when the door
handle sensor surface is touched will depend
on the settings activated in the Settings -
Comfort
›››
page 73 menu.
CAUTION
The sensor surfaces on the door handles
coul
d engage if hit with a water jet or high
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle
key in the proximity. If at least one of the
electric windows is open and the sensor
surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(arrow) on one of the
handl
es is activated continuously, all win-
dows will close.
Note
●
If the v
ehicle battery has little or no
charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost
or entirely out of charge, you will probably
not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle
with the Keyless Access system. The vehi-
cle can be unlocked or locked manually
›››
page 104.
●
T
o control the proper locking of the vehi-
cle, the release function is disabled for ap-
prox. 2 seconds.
●
If the message Keyless system faulty
is displayed on the screen of the dash pan-
el, abnormalities may occur in the opera-
tion of the Keyless Access system. Contact
a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends
visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
●
If there is no valid key inside the vehicle
or the system fails to detect one, a warning
will display on the dash panel screen. This
could happen if any other radio frequency
signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.
from a mobile device accessory) or if the
key is covered by another object (e.g. an
aluminium case).
●
If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a
layer of salt, the correct functioning of the
sensors on the door handles may be affec-
ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the
gear stick is in position P.
●
To improve the safety of your vehicle, the
remote control of the system is equipped
with a position sensor. If this remote control
does not detect movement for a certain
length of time, the system will conclude
that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on
a night table) so it will be disabled.
100
Opening and closing
“Safe” security system
1)
When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi-
t
y system puts the door handles out of opera-
tion and makes it difficult for unauthorized
people to enter. The doors cannot be opened
from inside
›››
.
Depending on the v
ehicle, when switching the
ignition off, a warning may be displayed on
the dash panel screen stating that the “Safe”
security system is activated (SAFE Lock or
SAFELOCK).
Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”
security system.
●
Press the locking button once on the v
e-
hicle key.
Lock the vehicle without activating the
“Safe” system.
●
Press the locking button on the vehicle
key twice.
●
On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking
and ignition system: touch the sensor surface
on the outside part of the door handle twice.
When the “Safe” security system is disa-
bled, the following needs to be taken into
account:
●
The vehicle can be opened and unlocked
from the inside using an inside door handle.
●
The anti-theft alarm is activated.
●
The vehicle interior monitoring system and
the anti-tow system are disabled.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children)
in the v
ehicle if it is locked from the outside
and the “Safe” security system is activa-
ted, as the doors and windows cannot then
be opened from the inside. Locked doors
could delay assistance in an emergency.
Anti-theft alarm
Description
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
br
eak into the vehicle or steal it. The system
will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-
nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned
on when the vehicle is locked with the key.
The system is immediately activated and the
turn signal light located on the driver door will
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
that the alarm and the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) have been turned on.
If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
they will not be included in the protection
zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-
quently closed, they will be automatically in-
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
and the turn signals will flash accordingly
when the doors close.
●
The turn signal light will flash twice on
opening and deactivating the alarm.
●
The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
ing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for
about 30 seconds alongside a sound and
optical (flashing) warning signals and will be
repeated about ten times when the vehicle is
locked and the following unauthorised ac-
tions are attempted:
●
Opening a door that is mechanically un-
locked using the vehicle key without switching
on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-
tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is
»
1)
Available depending on market and version.
101
Operation
no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is
activ
ated immediately on opening the door).
●
A door is opened.
●
Opening the bonnet.
●
The rear lid is opened.
●
When the ignition is switched on with a non-
authorised key.
●
Undue manipulation of the alarm.
●
Disconnection of the vehicle battery.
●
Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles
with interior monitoring
›››
page 102).
●
When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with
anti-tow system
›››
page 102).
●
When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with
anti-tow system
›››
page 102).
●
When the vehicle is transported on a ferry
or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or
vehicle interior monitoring
›››
page 102).
●
When a trailer connected to the anti-theft
alarm system is disconnected.
How to turn OFF the alarm
●
Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button
of the key.
●
OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.
If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically
using the key, the key must be inserted into
the ignition, and the ignition must be turned
on within 15 seconds of opening the door.
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.
and the ignition will be blocked.
CAUTION
If the anti-theft security system is switched
off
, the vehicle interior monitoring and the
tow-away protection are automatically
disconnected.
Note
●
Aft
er 28 days, the indicator light will be
switched off to prevent the battery from ex-
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system
remains activated.
●
If, after the audible warning goes off, an-
other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
rear lid is opened after a door has been
opened), the alarm is triggered again.
●
The anti-theft alarm is not activated
when the vehicle is locked from within using
the central locking button .
●
If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-
ly with the key, only the driver door is un-
locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.
Only when the ignition has been turned on
will the other doors be available - but not
unlocked - and the central locking button
will be activated.
●
If the vehicle battery is run down or flat
then the anti-theft alarm will not operate
correctly.
●
V
ehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working
for any reason.
●
The alarm is triggered immediately if one
of the battery cables is disconnected while
the alarm system is active.
Interior monitoring and the anti-
t
ow system
Fig. 93
On the roof console: passenger com-
partment monit
oring sensors.
It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-
r
ated in the anti-theft alarm which detects
unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-
sound.
The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
the rear lid must be closed.
102
Opening and closing
If the “Safe”
›
››
page 101 security system is
switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring
and the tow-away protection are automati-
cally disconnected.
Activation
●
Close the storage compartment
›››
Fig. 93
1
on the roof console, otherwise the interior
monit
oring function (arrow) is not guaranteed
to work freely.
●
It is automatically switched on when the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
Deactivation
●
Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
chanically or by pressing the button on the
remote control. The time period from when
the door is opened until the key is inserted in
the contact should not exceed 15 seconds,
otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
●
Press the button on the remote control
twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors
will be deactivated. The alarm system re-
mains activated.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are automatically switched on
again next time the vehicle is locked.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
if not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system should be switched off if animals
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
their movements will trigger the alarm) or
when, for example, the vehicle is transported
or has to be towed with only one axle on the
ground.
False alarms
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
serve related legal requirements.
The following cases may cause a false
alarm:
●
Open windows (partially or fully).
●
Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or
completely).
●
Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
such as loose papers, items hanging from the
rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
Note
●
If the v
ehicle is relocked and the alarm is
activated without the volumetric sensor
function, relocking will activate the alarm
with all its functions, except the volumetric
sensor. This function is reactivated when
the alarm is switched on again, unless it is
deliberately switched off.
●
If the alarm has been triggered by the
volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by
a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver
door when the v
ehicle is opened. The flash
is different to the flash indicating the alarm
is activated.
●
The vibration of a mobile phone left in-
side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-
terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both
sensors react to movements and shakes in-
side the vehicle.
●
If on activating the alarm, any door or the
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-
vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and
the anti-tow system will only be activated
once all the doors are closed (including the
rear lid).
Doors
Intr
oduction
The doors and rear lid can be locked man-
ually and partially opened, f
or example if the
key or the central locking is damaged.
WARNING
Opening and closing doors carelessly can
cause serious injury.
●
If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
doors and windo
ws cannot be opened from
the inside.
»
103
Operation
●
Ne
ver leave children or disabled people
alone in the car. They could be trapped in
the car in an emergency and will not be
able to get themselves to safety.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
WARNING
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
lid is danger
ous and can lead to serious in-
jury.
●
Open and close the doors and the rear lid
only when there is nobody in the way.
CAUTION
When opening and closing in an emergen-
cy, car
efully disassemble components and
then reassemble them carefully to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
Warning lamp
It lights up
At least one vehicle door is open or not correctly
shut.
Do not continue driving! Open the corr
esponding
door and close it immediately.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
If a door is open or not properly closed, the
warning lamp or will light up on the in-
strument panel.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym-
bol may be displayed on the dash panel
screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi-
cation is also visible when the ignition is
switched off. The indication disappears
around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been
locked.
Emergency unlocking or locking of
the driver’s door
Fig. 94 Driver door handle: hidden lock cylin-
der
.
Fig. 95
Driver door handle: lever the cover off
If the central locking system should fail to op-
er
ate, the driver door can still be locked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver door is
locked manually all other doors are locked.
When it is unlocked manually, only the driver
door opens. Please observe the instructions
relating to the anti-theft alarm system
›››
page 101.
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 93.
●
Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in
the cover on the driver door handle
›››
Fig. 95
then remove the cover upwards.
●
Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to
unlock or lock the vehicle.
104
Opening and closing
Special characteristics
●
The anti-theft alarm will remain active
when v
ehicles are unlocked. However, the
alarm will not be triggered
›››
page 101.
●
After the driver door is opened, you have 15
seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this
time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
●
Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-
bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-
activates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the v
ehicle is locked manually using the
key shaft
›››
page 95.
Locking the front passenger door
and the sliding doors manually
Fig. 96
On the front of the sliding door: emer-
gency l
ock, hidden by a rubber seal.
Fig. 97 Emergency locking of the vehicle using
the v
ehicle key
The front passenger door and the sliding
doors can be l
ocked manually. The anti-theft
alarm is not activated in this case.
●
Open the door.
●
Remove the rubber cap to the front of the
door. The rubber cap is marked with a lock
symbol
›››
Fig. 96.
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 93.
●
Insert the key shaft horizontally into the
opening and moved the coloured lever for-
ward
›››
Fig. 97.
●
Replace the rubber cap and close the door.
●
Check if the door is locked.
●
Carry out the same operation on the other
doors if necessary.
●
Have the vehicle checked by a specialised
workshop.
Note
The doors can be opened and unlocked in-
dividually fr
om the inside by pulling the
door handle. To open, pull the inner door
release lever twice
›››
page 95.
Sliding doors
Intr
oduction
WARNING
If a sliding door is not correctly closed, it
coul
d open unexpectedly when driving and
cause serious injuries.
●
Stop immediately and close it.
●
When closing, ensure that the sliding
door has closed correctly. A closed sliding
door should be flush with the correspond-
ing parts of the bodywork.
●
Only open and close sliding doors when
no body is in the way of the door.
WARNING
If a sliding door is not fully open, it could
cl
ose unexpectedly and cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Always open the sliding door fully.
»
105
Operation
WARNING
Opening sliding doors while driving is dan-
ger
ous. These doors may be pushed open
or closed when the vehicle accelerates or
brakes and cause serious injuries.
●
Never open the sliding doors when the
vehicle is in movement.
Manually opening and closing the
sliding door
Fig. 98
On the sliding door: door handle
1
.
Opening the sliding door from the outside.
●
When the sliding door is released, open the
door fully by pulling on the outside handl
e.
Opening the sliding door from the inside
●
When the sliding door is released, open the
door fully by pulling on its interior handle
›››
Fig. 98
1
.
Cl
osing the sliding door
●
Pull on the inside or outside door handle
and close the sliding door, pushing it gently.
Make sure that it is completely closed.
Electrically opening and closing
the sliding door
Fig. 99
On the instrument panel, on the vehi-
cl
e key and on the inside lining of the sliding
door: button to open and close an electric slid-
ing door.
All of the electric sliding doors can be
opened and cl
osed manually using more
force.
Electrical opening of the sliding door
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 99 button on the dash
panel, on the remote control key and on the
interior lining of the sliding door. The sliding
door opens with the rollback anti-trap func-
tion as long as the button is not pressed
again.
●
OR: pull briefly on the interior or exterior
door handle. The sliding door opens auto-
matically.
Electrical closing of the sliding door
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 99 button on the dash
panel, on the remote control key and on the
interior lining of the sliding door. The sliding
door closes with the rollback anti-trap func-
tion as long as the button is not pressed
again. As it closes, a warning sound is given.
●
OR: pull briefly on the interior or exterior
door handle. The sliding door closes with the
roll-back function. As it closes, a warning
sound is given.
Note
●
When the fuel t
ank flap is open, the right-
hand side electric sliding door is locked
and can only be opened manually.
●
If the window of a sliding door is lowered
them this door cannot open fully.
106
Opening and closing
Anti-trap function of the electric
sliding doors
The rollback anti-trap function of the electric
sliding doors can r
educe the risk of injury
when opening and closing the sliding doors
›››
.
If an ob
ject gets in the way of the sliding door
while it is closing, it will open again.
If an object gets in the way of the sliding door
while it is opening, the door will be immobi-
lised at this point.
●
Check the reason for which the sliding door
does not open or cl
ose.
●
Try to open or close the sliding door again.
To close the sliding door without the roll-
back anti-trap function
●
Turn the ignition off and on again.
●
Press and hold the button
›››
Fig. 99.
The sliding door closes with full force!
WARNING
Closing the electric windows without the
anti-tr
ap function can cause serious injury.
●
Always close the sliding doors carefully.
●
Nobody should ever get in the way of the
electric sliding doors, especially when
closing without the anti-trap function.
●
The anti-tr
ap function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame and
causing injury.
Electric child lock
Fig. 100
On the driver’s door: electric child
l
ock buttons.
The electric child lock prevents the sliding
doors and their el
ectric windows from being
opened and closed. The electric window and
door lock controls can be disconnected and
connected separately.
Activate and deactivate the electric child
lock
●
Activate: Press button
1
or
2
.
●
Deactivate: Pr
ess the button again.
The yellow control lamp indicates that the
feature is on for the corresponding button.
WARNING
When the electric child safety function is
activ
ated, the sliding door can be opened
from the outside only.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be
locked. Therefore, passengers will be
locked inside the vehicle. They could be
trapped in the car in an emergency and will
not be able to get themselves to safety. In-
dividuals locked in the vehicle can be ex-
posed to very high or very low tempera-
tures.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
Rear lid
Intr
oduction
The rear lid unlocks and locks together with
the doors.
On v
ehicles with the Keyless Access
start/locking system, the rear lid automatical-
ly unlocks when it is opened
›››
page 98.
»
107
Operation
WARNING
Careless and unsuitable locking, opening
and cl
osing of the rear lid can cause acci-
dents and serious injury.
●
The rear lid must not be opened when the
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may
damage the tail lights.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it
down with your hand on the rear window.
The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing
it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while
driving.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear could cause serious
injury to you and to third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-
soning!
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-
low children to play inside or next to it, es-
pecially if the rear lid is open. Children
could enter the luggage compartment,
close the rear lid and become trapped. A
locked vehicle can reach extremely high
and low temperatures, depending on the
time of year, thus causing serious injuries,
illness or even death.
CAUTION
Before opening or closing the rear lid, make
sur
e that there is enough space to open or
close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a
garage.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that
the k
ey has not been left inside the luggage
compartment.
Note
At outside temperatures of less than 0°C
(+32°F), the pr
essurised gas struts cannot
always automatically lift the rear lid. In this
case, open the rear lid manually.
Warning lamp
It lights up
The rear lid is open or not correctly shut.
Do not continue driving! Open the r
ear lid and
close it again.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
The warning lamp appears on the dash
panel if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym-
bol may be displayed on the dash panel
screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi-
cation is also visible when the ignition is
switched off. The indication disappears
around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been
locked.
WARNING
If the rear lid is not correctly closed, it
coul
d open unexpectedly when driving and
cause serious injuries.
●
Always stop immediately and close the
rear lid.
●
Ensure that the rear lid has been locked
into place by the element on the lock carri-
er when you close it.
108
Opening and closing
Opening the rear lid
Fig. 101
Opening the boot hatch from the out-
side
Fig. 102 Detailed view of the centre console:
r
ear lid unlocking button.
Before opening the rear lid, always remove
any l
oad on its luggage rack.
Opening the rear lid
●
Unlock the vehicle or open a door.
●
Raise and open the rear lid by pressing the
button
›››
Fig. 101 (arrow).
Opening with the vehicle key
●
Press the button on the vehicle key until
the rear lid opens automatically.
To open using the centre console control
●
Press the button on the centre console
›››
Fig. 102. The rear lid will open automati-
cally.
●
The button is still operative when the igni-
tion is switched off.
Closing the rear lid
Fig. 103
Rear lid open: space for pulling.
Closing the rear lid
●
Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid
›
››
Fig. 103 (arrow).
●
Push the rear lid downwards until it locks in-
to place in the lock.
●
Ensure that it is correctly closed by pulling
on it firmly.
Locking the rear lid
If you unlock the vehicle without opening any
doors or the rear lid, it will lock again auto-
matically after 30 seconds. This function pre-
vents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if
the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
Locking is only possible when the rear lid is
correctly and fully closed.
●
The rear lid is also locked by a central lock-
ing.
●
If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlocked
using the button of the vehicle key, when it
is closed again it will lock automatically.
●
A closed but not locked rear lid will lock au-
tomatically at a speed above about 9 km/h
(7 mph).
WARNING
Unsuitable or careless closing and locking
of the r
ear lid could cause serious injuries.
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended, or
allow children to play inside or around the
vehicle without supervision, especially if
the rear lid is open. Children could enter
the luggage compartment, close the rear
lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle
»
109
Operation
can be subjected to extremely high and low
t
emperatures, depending on the time of
year, thus causing serious injuries/illness
and even death.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that
the k
ey has not been left inside the luggage
compartment.
Operate the rear lid electrically
Fig. 104 Button with rear lid open
Fig. 105 Opening the boot hatch from the out-
side
Opening the rear lid
●
Press and hold the butt
on on the vehicle
key until the rear lid opens automatically.
●
OR: press and hold the button on the
centre console for approximately one second
›››
Fig. 102.
●
OR: press the
›››
Fig. 105 boot hatch button
(arrow).
In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic
opening of the rear lid is interrupted.
Electronically opening the rear lid does not
work when a trailer is electrically connected
and hitched to a factory fitted tow hitch
›››
page 299.
The rear lid can be opened manually by ap-
plying more force.
Closing the rear lid
●
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
key for approximately 1 second.
●
OR: press and hold the button on the
centre console for approximately one second
›››
Fig. 102.
●
OR: press the
›››
Fig. 105 boot hatch button
(arrow).
●
OR: press the button on the open rear lid
›››
Fig. 104
›››
in Introduction on
page 108.
●
OR: manually push the r
ear lid down to
close it.
The rear lid will move down to the closed po-
sition to close and lock itself automatically
using the power-close feature
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 108.
In case of difficult
y or obstruction, automatic
closing of the rear lid is interrupted and it will
open slightly.
Check why the rear lid could not close.
Attempt to close it once more.
Interrupting the opening and closing proc-
ess
Rear lid opening and closing can be stopped
by pressing one of the buttons. Each time
one of the buttons is pressed, the rear lid
moves to its initial position.
110
Opening and closing
Then, it can be opened or closed by hand. To
do this, apply a littl
e more force.
Memorising the opening angle
The rear lid must be at least half open to
memorise an opening angle.
●
Stop automatic opening in the opening po-
sition required
›››
page 110.
●
Hold down the button
›››
Fig. 104 with the
rear lid open for at least three seconds. The
opening angle is memorised.
Memorisation is confirmed by blinking of the
hazard warning lights and an audible warn-
ing.
To fully open the boot hatch again, the open-
ing angle must be memorised once more.
●
Release the rear lid and open it to the
memorised height.
●
Push the rear lid all the way up. To do this,
apply a little more force.
●
Hold down the button
›››
Fig. 104 with the
rear lid open for at least three seconds.
●
The opening angle is reset to the original
factory setting.
WARNING
It is possible that the rear lid does not open
compl
etely or, if it is open, closes alone if a
large amount of snow has built up on it or if
a luggage rack is fitted. In this case, the
r
ear lid must be supported.
CAUTION
●
When using a tr
ailer, ensure that there is
sufficient space to open and close the rear
lid.
●
Before opening the rear lid, any kind of
equipment carrier should be removed, for
example a bicycle carrier.
CAUTION
In case of repeated short-term use, the sys-
t
em is turned off to avoid overheating.
●
When it has cooled, it may be used once
again. During this time, the rear lid may be
manually opened or closed applying a lit-
tle more effort.
●
If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
the fuse blows when the rear lid is open, the
rear lid system must be re-initialised. To do
this, close the rear lid.
Rear lid with sensor-controlled
opening (Easy Open)
Fig. 106
Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-
ing (Easy Open).
If there is a valid vehicle key in the vicinity of
the r
ear lid, it is possible to unlock and open it
by moving one foot in the area of the sensors
located under the rear bumper.
●
Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the
middle.
●
With a brisk movement, bring your foot and
lower leg as close as you can to the bumper.
The lower part of the leg needs to be close to
the upper sensor area and your foot must be
close to the lower sensor area
›››
Fig. 106
1
.
●
Quickly remove your foot and lower leg
fr
om the sensor areas
›››
Fig. 106
2
. The rear
lid will open aut
omatically.
●
If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-
cedure after a few seconds.
»
111
Operation
The turn signals flash twice to indicate the
opening of the r
ear lid with the Easy Open
function.
Switching the Easy Open function on or off
The Easy Open function can be activated
and deactivated in the Vehicle settings
menu of the infotainment system
›››
page 73.
WARNING
If there is a valid key in the proximity of the
r
ear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-
tion may be accidentally activated and the
rear lid will open, for example, when
sweeping under the rear bumper, when di-
recting a water jet or high pressure steam
to the area or when carrying out mainte-
nance work or repairs in that area. If acci-
dentally opened, the rear lid could injure
somebody situated in its area of operation
or cause material damage.
●
Therefore, always make sure that there is
no unsupervised valid key in the area near
the rear lid.
●
Before carrying out any maintenance or
repair work on the vehicle, always disable
the Easy Open feature via the infotainment
system.
●
Before washing the vehicle, always disa-
ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-
ment system.
●
Bef
ore attaching a bicycle rack or a trail-
er,
›››
page 299, always disable the Easy
Open feature via the infotainment system.
Emergency unlocking of the rear lid
Fig. 107
Detail of the luggage compartment:
access t
o emergency unlocking.
Fig. 108
Detail of the luggage compartment:
emer
gency unlocking
The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in
the e
vent of an emergency (e.g. no battery).
There is a groove in the luggage compart-
ment allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-
gage compartment
●
Remove equipment to access the inside of
the rear lid.
●
Remove the rectangular cover from the in-
ner trim of the rear lid
›››
Fig. 107.
●
Move the unlocking lever
›››
Fig. 108
A
in
the dir
ection of the arrow to unlock the rear
lid.
●
Manually open the rear lid.
112
Opening and closing
Window controls
El
ectrically opening and closing
the windows
Fig. 109 Detail of the driver's door: window
contr
ols, as well as electric child lock buttons.
●
Opening the window: press the button .
●
Closing the window: pull the button .
Butt
ons on the driver door
For the front electric windows.
For the sliding door electric windows.
To lock the sliding doors and their win-
dows.
The front and rear electric windows can be
operated by using the controls on the driver
door. The other doors each have a switch for
their own window.
1
2
3
Always close the windows fully if you park the
v
ehicle or leave it unattended
›››
.
Y
ou can use the electric windows for approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door has been opened and the key has
not been removed from the ignition.
Convenience open/close function
The electric windows can be opened or
closed from outside using the vehicle key:
Convenience opening:
●
Press and hold the button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
roof have reached the desired position.
●
OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but-
ton on the remote control key and then keep
the key in the driver door lock until all the win-
dows and the sunroof have reached the re-
quired position.
Convenience closing:
●
Press and hold button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
roof are closed
›››
.
●
OR: K
eep the key in the driver door in the
"lock" position until all the windows and the
sunroof are closed.
During convenience closing, first the windows
and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.
In the Settings - comfort menu, there are
different settings for operating the windows
›››
page 73.
One-touch opening and closing
The one-touch automatic opening and clos-
ing is used to open or close the windows
completely. It will not be necessary to hold
the button of the corresponding electric win-
dow.
For the automatic raising function: pull the
button for the corresponding window up-
wards until it reaches the second position.
For the automatic lowering function: push
the button for the corresponding window
downwards until it reaches the second posi-
tion.
Stop automatic movement: push or pull on
the button of the corresponding window.
Resetting one-touch opening and closing
The one-touch opening and closing function
is not active after the vehicle battery has
been disconnected or is flat and will have to
be reset.
●
Close all windows and doors.
●
Pull the button of the corresponding win-
dow and hold it for one second in this posi-
tion.
»
113
Operation
●
R
elease the button and pull upwards and
hold again. The one-touch function is now
ready for operation.
The automatic one-touch electric windows
can be reinitialised individually or several at a
time.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Intro-
duction on page 103.
●
Incorrect use of the electric windows can
r
esult in injury.
●
Never close the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise
could cause serious injury to you and third
parties. Make sure that no one is in the path
of a window.
●
If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of
injury, for example, in the electric windows.
●
The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an
obstacle for assistance in an emergency
situation.
●
Therefore always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
●
The electric windows will work until the
ignition has been switched off and one of
the front doors has been opened.
●
If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-
able the rear electric windows. Make sure
that they have been disabled.
●
F
or safety reasons, you should only use
the remote control open and close func-
tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.
To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the
windows when pressing the button to close
them. The windows stop moving as soon as
the button is released.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the
windo
w will automatically open again
›››
page 114. If this happens, check why the
window could not be closed before at-
tempting to close it again.
Window anti-trap function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
jury when the el
ectric windows close.
●
If a window is obstructed when closing au-
tomatically, the window stops at this point
and lowers immediately
›››
.
●
Next, check why the window does not close
bef
ore attempting it again.
●
If you try within the following 10 seconds
and the window closes again with difficulty or
there is an obstruction, the automatic closing
will stop working for 10 seconds.
●
If the window is still obstructed, the window
will stop at this point.
●
If there is no obvious reason why the win-
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
back function is now deactivated.
●
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
will open fully when you operate one of the
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Elec-
trically opening and cl
osing the windows
on page 114.
●
The roll-back function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
accident.
Sunroof
Intr
oduction
The sunroof only works when the ignition is
s
witched on. Once the ignition has been
switched off, you can still open or close the
sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver
door and the front passenger door are not
opened.
114
Opening and closing
WARNING
If the sunroof is used negligently or without
paying due att
ention, it can cause serious
injury.
●
Open or close the sunroof and the sun
blind only when no one is in their path of
movement.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting.
●
Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle, espe-
cially if they have access to the vehicle
key. If using they key unattended, they
could lock the vehicle, start the engine,
switch on the ignition and activate the sun-
roof.
●
After switching off, it is still possible to
open or close the sunroof during a short
space of time provided that neither the
driver nor passenger door is opened.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage, during winter tem-
peratures remove any ice or snow that
might be on the car roof before opening the
sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.
●
Before leaving the vehicle or in case of
rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the
sunroof open or in a tilted position, water
can enter the interior and can cause con-
siderable damage to the electrical system.
As a result, other damage can occur in the
vehicle.
Note
●
L
eaves and other loose objects that ac-
cumulate on the sunroof rails should be
regularly cleaned away either by hand or
with a vacuum.
●
If the sunroof does not work correctly, the
anti-trap function will not work either. Con-
tact a specialised workshop.
Opening and closing the sunroof
Fig. 110
On the interior roof lining: turn the
s
witch to open and close.
Fig. 111 On the interior roof lining: press the
switch and pull on it to raise and lower the roof.
To open the sunroof, the switch must be in the
position
1
.
●
Open: turn the switch to position
›
››
Fig. 110
3
.
●
Comfort position: turn the switch to position
›
››
Fig. 110
2
.
●
Close: turn the switch to position
›
››
Fig. 110
1
.
●
Lift: Push the switch to position
›
››
Fig. 111
4
. For an intermediate position, hold down
the s
witch until you reach the desired posi-
tion.
●
Lower: pull the switch to position
›››
Fig. 111
5
. For an intermediate position, hold down
the s
witch until you reach the desired posi-
tion.
115
Operation
Opening and closing the sunshade
blind
3 V
alid for vehicles: with sun blinds
Fig. 112
On the interior roof lining: sunshade
blind butt
ons.
Once the ignition has been switched off, you
can still open or cl
ose the sun blind for a few
minutes provided the driver door and the
front passenger door are not opened.
Opening completely (automatic function)
●
Press button
›››
Fig. 112
1
briefly.
Cl
osing completely (automatic function)
●
Press the button
2
briefly.
St
op automatic operation
●
Press button
1
or button
2
briefly.
To set the intermediate position
●
Press button
1
or button
2
until the cor-
r
ect position is set.
Convenience function to open or
close the sunroof
Fig. 113 Door handle: sensor surface.
The sunroof can be opened and closed with
the conv
enience function, just like the win-
dows.
Using the remote control
●
Keep the locking or unlocking button press-
ed to open or close the roof. If you release the
button is the opening or closing will stop.
Using the Keyless Access system (only
closing)
●
Press and hold the locking sensor surface
›››
Fig. 113 (arrow) on the door handle to
close the sunroof. If you release the sensor
surface, the closing movement stops.
Anti-trap function of the panoramic
sunroof and sunshade
The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of
injury when cl
osing the sunroof and the sun
blind
›››
. If the sunroof or sun blind encoun-
t
er resistance or an obstacle when closing,
they reopen immediately.
●
Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not
close.
●
Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.
●
If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed
due to an obstacle or some resistance, it
stops at the corresponding position and then
opens. For automatic closing, a new closing
attempt might take place.
●
If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to
close, close it without the anti-trap function.
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without
the anti-trap function
●
The switch
›››
Fig. 110 should be in the
“closed” position
1
.
116
Lights
●
Gl
ass roof: within approx. 5 seconds of the
activation of the anti-trap function, keep the
control pulled backwards
›››
Fig. 111 (arrow
5
) until the roof is completely closed.
●
Sun blind: within appr
oximately 5 seconds
of activating the roll-back function, press and
hold button
›››
Fig. 112
2
until the blind is
fully cl
osed.
●
The sunroof or sun blind close without
the anti-trap function intervening!
●
If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close,
visit a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the
anti-tr
ap function can cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Always be careful when closing the sun-
roof and sun blind.
●
No person should ever remain in the way
of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when
closing without the anti-trap function.
●
The anti-trap function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body from be-
coming trapped against the roof frame and
injuries occurring.
Lights
V
ehicle lighting
Control lamps
It lights up
Driving light totally or partially faulty.
Fault in the cornering light .
Flashes
Fault in the cornering light system.
Cont
act a specialised workshop.
It lights up
Rear fog light switched on
›
››
page 119.
It lights up
Front fog lights switched on
›
››
page 119.
It lights up
Left or right turn signal.
The contr
ol lamp flashes twice as fast when a vehicle
or trailer turn signal is faulty. If necessary, check the
vehicle and trailer lighting.
Hazard warning lights on
›
››
page 122.
It lights up
Main beam on or flasher on
›
››
page 119.
It lights up
The Light Assist system is on
›
››
page 120.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Headlight switch
Fig. 114 Dash panel: lights control.
»
117
Operation
●
T
urn the switch to the required position
›››
Fig. 114.
Sym-
bol
Ignition switch-
ed off
Ignition is
s
witched on
Fog lights, dipped
beam and side
lights off
.
Light off or day-
time driving light
on.
The “Coming
home” and “L
eaving
home” guide lights
may be switched
on.
Automatic control
of dipped beam
and daytime run-
ning light.
Side light on.
Dipped beam off; if
necessary, the side
light comes on f
or a
time.
Dipped beam
switched on.
The driver is personally responsible for the
corr
ect use and adjustment of the lights in all
situations.
Automatic dipped beam headlight control
The automatic dipped beam control is merely
intended as an aid and is not able to recog-
nise all driving situations.
When the light switch is in position , the
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and
switch lighting switch on automatically in the
following situations
›››
:
●
The phot
o sensor detects darkness, for ex-
ample, when driving through a tunnel. They
switch off when adequate lighting is detec-
ted.
●
The rain sensor detects rain and activates
the wipers. They switch off when the wipers
have not been activated for a few minutes.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights consist of individu-
al lights, integrated in the front headlights.
These lights come on when the daytime run-
ning lights are switched on. On vehicles
equipped with LED tail lights, the rear side
light is switched on as well
›››
.
The daytime running lights t
urn on every time
the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in
position or , according to the level of ex-
terior lighting.
When the light switch is in position , a light
sensor automatically switches dipped beam
on and off (including the control and instru-
ment lighting) or the daytime running lights
depending on the level of exterior lighting.
Audible warnings to advise the driver that
the lights have not been switched off
If the key is not in the ignition and the driver
door is open, an audible warning signal is
heard in the following cases: this will remind
you to turn the light off.
●
When the parking light is on
›››
page 119.
●
When the light switch is in position or .
WARNING
If the road is not well lit and other road
users cannot see the v
ehicle well enough
or at all, accidents may occur.
●
The automatic dipped beam control
( ) only switches on the dipped beam
when there are changes in light conditions
but not, for example, when it is foggy.
WARNING
The side lights or daytime running lights
ar
e not bright enough to illuminate the road
ahead and to ensure that other road users
are able to see you.
●
Always use your dipped beam head
lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.
●
Never drive with daytime lights if the road
is not well lit due to weather or lighting
conditions.
●
On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,
when activating the daytime running light
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-
cle which does not have the rear lights on
may not be visible to other drivers in the
darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in
conditions of poor visibility.
118
Lights
WARNING
If the headlights are set too high and not
used corr
ectly, there is a risk of dazzling or
distracting other road users. This could re-
sult in a serious accident.
●
Always make sure that the headlights are
correctly adjusted.
Note
●
The l
egal requirements regarding the use
of vehicle lights in each country must be
observed.
●
The dipped beam headlights will only
work with the ignition on. The side lights
come on automatically when the ignition is
turned off.
Fog lights
Fig. 115 Dash panel: lights control.
The warning lamps or al
so show, on the
light switch or instrument panel, when the
front fog lights are on.
●
Turning on the front fog lights : pull the
light switch out from its first click position
›››
Fig. 115
1
, from positions , or .
●
Turning on the rear fog light : pull the
light s
witch fully out
2
from position , or
.
●
To switch off the fog lights, press the light
switch or turn it to position .
Note
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
you. Y
ou should use the rear fog light only
when visibility is very poor.
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 116
Turn signal and main beam lever.
More the lever to the required position:
Right t
urn light or right-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Left turn light or left-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Main beam on: control lamp lit up on
the instrument panel.
Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-
trol lamp lit up.
Push the lever all the way down to turn off the
corresponding function.
Convenience turn signals
When the ignition is switched on, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or down-
wards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times.
The convenience turn signals can be activa-
ted and deactivated from the Settings >
Lights & Visibility menu on the instru-
ment panel screen
›››
page 73.
In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
a specialised workshop.
Parking light
The parking lights will only work with the igni-
tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning
will sound while the driver door is open.
»
1
2
3
4
119
Operation
●
S
witch the ignition off.
●
Move the turn signal lever up or down.
When the parking light is switched on, the
front side light and the tail light on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle turn on.
WARNING
Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,
or f
orgetting to deactivate them can con-
fuse other road users. This could result in a
serious accident.
●
Always give warning when you are going
to change lane, overtake or when turning,
activating the turn signal in good time.
●
As soon as you have finished changing
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn
signal off.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause
accidents and serious injury, as the main
beam may distr
act or dazzle other drivers.
Note
●
If the t
urn signal lever is left on after the
key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
an acoustic signal sounds when the driver
door is opened. This is intended as a re-
minder to switch off the turn signal, unless
you wish to leave the parking light on.
●
If the conv
enience turn signals are oper-
ating (three flashes) and the other conven-
ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-
tive part stops flashing and only flashes
once in the new part selected.
●
The turn signal only works when the igni-
tion is switched on. The hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switch-
ed off.
●
If a turn signal on the vehicle or trailer is
faulty, the warning lamp flashes twice as
fast as usual.
●
The main beam headlights can only be
switched on if the dipped beam headlights
are already on.
●
In cold or damp weather conditions, the
headlights, tail lights and turn signals may
mist up inside temporarily. This is normal
and in no way effects the useful life of the
vehicle lighting system.
●
The parking light does not activate auto-
matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-
nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-
ted.
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
The main beam assist acts within the limits of
the syst
em and depending on environmental
and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the
system is activated as of a speed of about 60
km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below
about 30 km/h (18 mph)
›››
.
When the syst
em is activated and the cam-
era detects other vehicles that may be daz-
zled, the main beam is automatically switch-
ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati-
cally switched on.
The main beam assist generally detects illu-
minated areas and deactivates the main
beam when passing through a town, for ex-
ample.
Switching the main beam assist on
●
Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch
to the position
›››
Fig. 114.
●
From the base position, press the turn signal
and main beam headlights lever forwards
›››
Fig. 116
3
When the main beam assist is switched on,
the contr
ol lamp on the instrument cluster
screen turns on.
Switching the main beam assist off
●
Turn the light switch to a position other than
›››
Fig. 114.
●
EITHER: if light assist is on, pull the turn sig-
nal light and main beam headlights lever
backwards
›››
Fig. 116
4
.
●
OR: push the t
urn signal and main beam
headlight lever forwards to manually turn on
120
Lights
the main beam. The main beam assist will
then be deactiv
ated.
System limitations
In the following cases, the main beam head-
light must be switched off manually because
the main beam assist will not disconnect it on
time or disconnect it at all:
●
On roads with insufficient lighting with very
reflective signs
●
If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe-
destrians or cyclists.
●
On closed curves, when the traffic in the
opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-
nounced slopes or inclinations.
●
On roads with traffic in the opposite direc-
tion and with a central reservation barrier
where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry driv-
ers.
●
In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain
●
In the event of dust or sand storms
●
If the windscreen is damaged in the cam-
era's field of vision.
●
If the camera's field of vision is misted up,
dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.
●
If the camera is damaged or if the power
supply has been cut off.
WARNING
The convenience features of the main
beam assist shoul
d not encourage the tak-
ing of risks. The system is not a replace-
ment for driver concentration.
●
You are always in control of the main
beam and adapting it to the light, visibility
and traffic conditions.
●
It is possible that the main beam head-
light control does not recognise all driving
situations and is limited under certain cir-
cumstances.
●
When the field of vision of the camera is
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of
the main beam control may be affected.
This also applies when changes are made
to the vehicle lighting system, for example,
if additional headlights are installed.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
t
em, take the following points into consid-
eration:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
and ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the field of vision of the
camera.
Note
●
The headlight fl
asher can be turned on
and off manually at any time with the turn
signal and main beam lever
›››
page 119.
●
If there are objects that radiate light in
the camera's area of influence, e.g. a port-
able navigation system, this may affect the
operation of the main beam assist system.
Cornering lights
Dynamic cornering lights (AFS)
The adaptiv
e headlights only operate when
the dipped beam is on and at speeds of over
10 km/h (6 mph). On bends, the adaptive
headlights automatically improve lighting on
the road ahead.
The adaptive cornering lights can be activa-
ted or deactivated from the infotainment sys-
tem.
Static cornering lights
When turning slowly to change direction or
going round a tight bend, the static cornering
lights automatically come on. The static cor-
nering lights only work at speeds of less than
40 km/h (25 mph).
The static cornering lights may be incorpora-
ted into the fog lights or the front headlights,
depending upon the equipment.
121
Operation
“Coming home” and “Leav-
ing home” function
The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”
function lights up the v
ehicle’s immediate
proximity when getting into and out of it in the
dark. When switched on, the front position
and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-
cense plate light come on.
The “Coming home” function should be
switched on manually. However the “Leav-
ing home” function is automatically control-
led by a photo sensor.
The duration of the headlight turn off delay
can be set in the Settings > Lights and
Visibility menu, and the function can be
activated or deactivated
›››
page 73.
Activating the “Coming Home” function
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Activate the headlight flashers for appr
oxi-
mately 1 second.
When the driver door is opened, the “Coming
Home” lighting comes on. The delay in
switching off the headlights is counted from
when the last door or boot hatch is closed.
The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in
the following cases:
●
Automatically, once the headlight turn off
delay has elapsed.
●
Automatically, when a vehicle door or the
rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting
the engine.
●
When the rotary light switch is turned to po-
sition
›››
page 117.
●
With the ignition is switched on.
Activating the “Leaving Home” function
●
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
●
The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-
ted when the light switch is in position
and the light sensor detects darkness.
The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off
in the following cases:
●
Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”
delay period ends (default 30 sec).
●
When the vehicle is locked using the remote
control.
●
When the light switch is turned to position .
●
With the ignition is switched on.
Lighting around the exterior mirrors
The lighting around the exterior mirrors illumi-
nates the door area on entering and leaving
the vehicles. It comes on when the vehicle is
unlocked, when the vehicle door is opened
and when the “Coming home” or “Leaving
home” function is switched on. If the equip-
ment includes the light sensor, the lighting
around the exterior mirrors only comes when
it is dark.
Note
To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-
ing Home” function, the r
otary light switch
must be in position and the light sensor
must detect darkness.
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 117
Dash panel: hazard warning lights
s
witch
The hazard warning lights are used to draw
the att
ention of other road users to your vehi-
cle in emergencies.
If your vehicle is stationary:
1. Park the vehicle at a safe distance from
road traffic.
122
Lights
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
w
arning lights
›››
.
3. Stop the engine.
4. Apply the electronic parking brake.
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
f
or an automatic gearbox, move the gear
lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to indicate the
position of your vehicle so that it does not
pose a hazard to other road users.
7. Always carry the key with you when leav-
ing the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the
hazard warning lights are switched on. The
two turn signal turn signal lamps and the
turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at
the same time. The simultaneous hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is
switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-
ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50
mph), the brake light flashes several times per
second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If
you continue braking, the hazard warning
lights will come on automatically when the
vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off
automatically when the vehicle starts to
move again.
WARNING
●
The risk of an accident incr
eases if your
vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-
ard warning lights and a warning triangle to
draw the attention of other road users to
your stationary vehicle.
●
Due to the high temperatures that the
catalytic converter can reach, never park
in an area where the catalytic converter
could come into contact with highly inflam-
mable materials, for example dry grass or
spilt petrol. This could start a fire.
Note
●
The batt
ery will run down if the hazard
warning lights are left on for a long time,
even if the ignition is switched off.
●
The use of the hazard warning lights de-
scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-
utory requirements.
Headlight range control
Fig. 118
Next to the steering wheel: headlight
r
ange control.
The headlight range control
›
››
Fig. 118 is
modified according to the value of the head-
light beam and the vehicle load status. This
offers the driver optimum visibility and the
headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers
›››
.
The headlights can only be adjust
ed when
the dipped beam is switched on.
To reset, turn switch
›››
Fig. 118:
Value Vehicle load status
a)
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
ment empt
y
All seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment empt
y
»
123
Operation
Value Vehicle load status
a)
All seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment full
. With trailer and minimum
drawbar load.
Driver only, luggage compartment full
With tr
ailer and maximum drawbar load.
a)
If the vehicle load does not correspond to those
sho
wn in the table, it is possible to select intermediary
positions.
Dynamic headlight range control
The control is not mounted in vehicles with
dynamic headlight range control. The head-
light range is automatically adjusted accord-
ing to the vehicle load status when they are
switched on.
WARNING
Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean
that the headlights dazzl
e and distract oth-
er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-
cident.
●
Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load
status so that it does not blind other driv-
ers.
Stick stickers on the headlights or
adapt them
In those countries where vehicles drive on the
other side of the r
oad to the home country,
the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle
drivers of oncoming vehicles.
The direction of the headlights can be adjus-
ted from the instrument cluster, in the Tou-
rist light sub-menu of the menu Config-
uration> Lights and visibility
›››
page 74.
For those vehicles in which it is not possible to
adjust the headlights from the menu, adhe-
sive strips are used to cover certain parts of
the headlamp cover or the headlights may
be adjusted at a specialised workshop. For
further information, please refer to a special-
ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
technical service.
Note
Use of the Tourist light option and the
adhesiv
es on the headlights is only allowed
if they are to be used for a short period of
time. To modify the direction of the head-
lights permanently, please take the vehicle
to a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a technical service centre.
Interior lights
Instrument and s
witch lighting
Fig. 119
Next to the steering wheel: instrument
and s
witch lighting adjuster
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, the in-
t
ensity of the lighting of the instruments and
controls can be infinitely adjusted by turning
the regulator while the lights are on
›››
Fig. 119.
Interior and reading lights
Knob Function
Turns off the interior lights.
Turning the interior lights on or off.
124
Visibility
Knob Function
The interior lights come on automati-
cally when you unl
ock the vehicle,
open a door or remove the key from
the ignition.
The light goes out a few seconds after
closing all the doors, when locking the
vehicle or connecting the ignition.
Turning the reading light on and off
Glove compartment and luggage com-
par
tment lighting
When opening and closing the glove com-
partment on the front passenger side and the
rear lid, the respective light will automatically
switch on and off.
Background lighting
The background lighting in the front covering
of the ceiling lights up the controls on the
centre console from above when the side
light or dipped beam lights are on.
In addition, the lever on the door moulding
can also be illuminated.
Note
The reading lights switch off when the vehi-
cl
e is locked using a key or after several mi-
nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.
This prevents the battery from discharging.
Visibility
Windscr
een wiper and rear
window wiper systems
Control lamp
It lights up
Windscreen cleaning fluid level too low.
Refill the windscreen washer tank as soon as you
have the opportunity to do so
›››
page 323.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
Window washer lever
Fig. 120
Operating the windscreen wiper and
r
ear wiper.
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wipers off.
1
Wiper intervals.
Use contr
ol
›››
Fig. 120
A
to set the in-
t
erval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
2
Slow wipe.
3
Continuous wipe.
4
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.
Hol
d the lever down for more time to in-
crease the wipe frequency.
5
Windscreen washer. The windscreen
w
asher function is activated by push-
ing the lever towards the steering
wheel, and the wipers operate simulta-
neously.
»
125
Operation
More the lever to the required position:
6
Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-
er will wipe the windo
w approximately
every six seconds.
7
The rear window wash function is acti-
vated by pressing the lever, and the
rear wiper starts simultaneously.
WARNING
In cold conditions you should not use the
w
ash/wipe system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the heating
and ventilation system. The windscreen
washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the
windscreen and obscure your view of the
road.
CAUTION
If the ignition is switched off while the wind-
scr
een wipers are switched on, they com-
plete their wipe and return to the rest posi-
tion. When the ignition is switched back on,
the windscreen wiper will continue to oper-
ate at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and
other obstacles on the windscreen may
damage the wiper and the windscreen wip-
er motor.
●
If necessary, remove snow and ice from
the windscreen wipers before starting your
journey.
●
Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if
the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the
windscreen wipers while dry can cause
damage
.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
the wipers in service position
›››
page 50.
Note
●
The windscr
een and window wipers only
function when the ignition is switched on
and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are
closed.
●
The interval wipe speed varies according
to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle
is moving, the more often the windscreen is
cleaned.
●
The rear wiper is automatically switched
on when the windscreen wiper is on and the
car is in reverse gear.
Wiper functions
Windscreen wipers performance in differ-
ent sit
uations
●
If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi-
tion temporarily moves to the previous posi-
tion.
●
The air conditioner comes on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode
when the windscreen washer is activated,
to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-
er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.
●
When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary
according to the speed. The higher the vehi-
cle speed the shorter the intervals.
Heated windscreen washer jets
The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does
not thaw the water in the washer hoses.
When the ignition is switched on the heated
windscreen washer jets automatically adjust
the heat depending on the ambient tempera-
ture.
Headlight washer system
The headlight washer cleans the glass of the
headlights and only works when the dipped
beam headlights are on. After switching on
the ignition, the headlights are also washed
when the automatic wiper is activated for the
first time and then every fifth time.
Regularly clean dirt that has become encrus-
ted on the headlights, e.g., remains of insects.
To ensure the headlight washers work cor-
rectly in winter, clean away any snow that
may be present on the jet covers located on
the bumper. If necessary, remove ice with an
anti-ice spray.
Note
●
The wiper will try t
o wipe away any ob-
stacles that are on the windscreen. The
126
Visibility
wiper will stop moving if the obstacle
bl
ocks its path. Remove the obstacle and
switch the wiper back on again.
●
If you stop the vehicle with the wind-
screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto-
matically change to a lower position
speed. The set speed will be resumed when
the vehicle pulls away.
●
The windscreen will be wiped again ap-
proximately 5 seconds after the wind-
screen washer has been activated, provi-
ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).
If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec-
onds after the “drip” function, a new wash
sequence will begin without performing the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work
again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
Rain sensor
Fig. 121 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor
A.
Fig. 122 Rain sensor sensitive surface
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the
windscr
een wiper intervals, depending on the
amount of rain
›››
. The sensitivity of the rain
sensor can be adjust
ed manually. Manual
wipe
›››
page 125.
Move the lever to the required position
›››
Fig. 121:
Rain sensor off.
Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
sary.
Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
–
Set control to the right: high sensitivity.
–
Set control to the left: low sensitivity.
When the ignition is switched off and then
back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts
operating again when the windscreen wipers
are in position
1
and the vehicle is travelling
at mor
e than 16 km/h (10 mph).
0
1
A
Modified behaviour of the rain sensor
P
ossible causes of faults and mistaken read-
ings on the sensitive surface
›››
Fig. 122 of the
rain sensor include:
●
Damaged wipers: a film of water on the
damaged blades may lengthen the activa-
tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-
sult in a fast and continuous wipe.
●
Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger
the windscreen wiper.
●
Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on
the roads may cause an excessively long
wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.
●
Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus
effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or
make it react more slowly, later or not at all.
●
Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone
will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain
sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-
duction in the sensitive surface area and
adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the
sensor will vary with the size of the damage
caused by the stone.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
t
o switch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers man-
ually when water on the windscreen ob-
structs visibility.
»
127
Operation
Note
●
Cl
ean the sensitive surface of the rain
sensor regularly and check the blades for
damage
›››
Fig. 122 (arrow).
●
To remove wax and coatings, we recom-
mend a window cleaner containing alco-
hol.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor. This may cause
sensor disruption or faults.
Mirrors
Int
erior mirror anti-dazzle function
Fig. 123
Manual anti-dazzle function for rear
vision mirr
or
Fig. 124 Automatic anti-dazzle function for
r
ear vision mirror
Interior mirror with manual anti-dazzle
function
●
Basic position: place the lever at the bot-
t
om of the mirror in the forward position.
●
Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-
dazzle function
›››
Fig. 123.
Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior
mirror
Key to Fig. 124:
Control lamp
Control
Light incidence sensor
This function can be activated and deactiva-
ted by pressing the rear-view mirror switch
›››
Fig. 124
2
. When it is activated, the warn-
ing l
amp lights up
1
.
1
2
3
When the ignition is on, the sensor
3
aut
o-
matically moves the rear vision mirror to the
anti-dazzle position depending upon the inci-
dence of the light from behind.
The automatic anti-dazzle function is deacti-
vated when reverse gear is engaged or the
interior or reading lights are on.
WARNING
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
r
ear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-
id may leak. This could cause irritation to
the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you
come into contact with this liquid, it must
be rinsed with large quantities of water. If
necessary, get medial help.
CAUTION
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
r
ear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-
id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-
faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon
as possible.
Note
●
If the light f
alling on the interior mirror is
obstructed (e.g. with the sun blind), the an-
ti-dazzle mirror with automatic adjustment
will not operate perfectly.
●
When the interior lights are on or reverse
gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken
128
Visibility
with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle
position.
●
If you have to stick any type of sticker on
the windscr
een, do not do so in front of the
sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-
dazzle function from working well or even
from working at all.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 125 Detail of the driver's door: control for
the e
xterior mirror.
Turn the control to the corresponding posi-
tion:
T
urning the knob to the desired position,
adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,
L/R
left) and the passenger side (R, right) to
the direction desired.
Depending on the equipment fitted on
the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.
Folding in mirrors.
Synchronized regulation of the exterior
mirrors
In the Settings - Convenience menu, se-
lect whether or not the mirrors should move in
synchronisation
›››
page 73.
●
Turn the knob to position L
1)
.
●
Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The
right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the
same time (synchronised).
●
If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-
view mirror: rotate the control to position R
1)
.
Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror, driv-
er side
The automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror is
controlled in the same way as the automatic
anti-dazzle rear vision mirror
›››
page 128.
Store the reverse settings for the passen-
ger exterior mirror
●
Select the vehicle key in which the setting is
to be stored.
●
Use this key to unlock the vehicle.
●
Connect the automatic parking brake.
●
Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R
(passenger side).
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Move the gear lever to neutral.
●
Access the Settings menu on the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
steering wheel buttons and select Conven-
ience.
●
Select the Rear vision mirror adjust-
ment function (if it is already checked, un-
check it and check the option again).
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger side exterior mir-
ror so that you can see, for example, the kerb
area.
●
The new position of the mirror will be stored
automatically and allocated to the vehicle
key that was used to unlock the vehicle. For
vehicles with seat memory, please see
›››
page 136.
»
1)
Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-
metrical.
129
Operation
Activating the passenger exterior mirror
settings
●
Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R.
●
With the ignition switched on, select reverse
gear
.
●
The stored position of the passenger exteri-
or mirror for reverse gear is deleted when
driving forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph), or if the
knob is turned from position R to another po-
sition.
WARNING
Convex or wide-angle exterior mirrors give
a l
arger field of vision. However, they make
objects look smaller and further away than
they really are. If you use these mirrors to
estimate the distance to vehicles behind
you when changing lane, you could mis-
judge the distance. Risk of accident!
WARNING
Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking
car
e to avoid injuries.
●
Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror
when there is no-one in the way of the mir-
ror.
●
When moving the mirror, take care not to
trap fingers between the mirror and the
mirror bracket.
CAUTION
●
If one of the mirr
or housings is knocked
out of position (e.g. when parking), the mir-
rors must first be fully retracted with the
electric control. Do not readjust the mirror
housing by hand, as this will interfere with
the mirror adjuster function.
●
Before washing the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them
from being damaged. Electrically retracta-
ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or
out by hand. Always use the electrical
power control.
Note
●
If the el
ectrical adjustment should fail to
operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-
ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of
the mirror glass.
●
The fold-in function on the exterior mir-
rors will not activate at speeds over
40 km/h (25 mph).
Sun protection
Sun blind
Fig. 126
Sun visor
Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
senger sun visors
●
Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
scr
een.
●
The sun visor can be pulled out of its
mounting and turned towards the door
›››
Fig. 126
1
.
●
Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-
t
udinally backwards.
There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a
cover. When the cover is opened
2
a light
comes on.
The l
amp goes out when the vanity mirror
cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed
back up.
130
Seats and head restraints
WARNING
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
●
Always store sun blinds and visors in their
housing when not in use
.
Note
The light above the sun visor automatically
s
witches off after a few minutes in certain
conditions. This prevents the battery from
discharging.
Rear side window curtains
Fig. 127 On the rear right-hand window: cur-
t
ain.
The sun blinds for the vehicle interior are fit-
t
ed in the side panels of the windows.
●
Pull the sun blind by the handle
›››
Fig. 127
A
up to the top.
●
Fasten the support rod to both anchorages
in the corr
ect spaces
B
. Verify that the sun
blind when e
xtended is hooked safely in the
correct spaces
B
.
●
To put the sun blind away, unhook it at the
t
op and lower by hand
›››
.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the blind or the inte-
rior trim, do not l
ower the sun blind “quick-
ly”.
Seats and head restraints
Adjusting seats
Manual adjustment of the fr
ont
seats
Fig. 128
Front left seat controls
Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and
mo
ve the seat. The seat must engage
when the lever is released!
Lumbar support: move the lever until the
required position is achieved.
Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push
down (several times if necessary) from its
home position.
»
1
2
3
4
131
Operation
WARNING
Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-
cidents and se
vere injuries.
●
Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is
stationary, as the seats could move unex-
pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and
you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, an incorrect position is adopted
when adjusting the seat.
●
Adjust the height, position and inclination
of the front seats only when their move-
ment area is empty.
●
Make sure there are no objects in that
area.
●
Make sure that the movement and lock-
ing areas of the seats are clean.
WARNING
Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-
ers might cause an accident
al activation of
the electrical seat adjustment system and
make it move unexpectedly while driving.
This might cause loss of control of the vehi-
cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-
over, the electrical components of the front
seats might be damaged.
●
Never attach or place seat upholstery or
covers on the electric controls.
●
Never use upholstery or seat covers that
have not been explicitly authorised for the
seats of the vehicle.
Electric driver's seat adjustment
Fig. 129
Driver's seat: electric seat settings.
Adjust the lumbar support: press the but-
t
on according to the desired position.
Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-
ton forwards/backwards.
Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the
button up/down. To adjust the angle of
the seat cushion, press the front of the
button up/down.
Backrest further upright/further reclined:
press the button forwards/backwards.
Mechanically and electrically adjusted con-
trols can be combined on the seat.
A
B
C
WARNING
●
If the el
ectric front seats are used negli-
gently or without paying due attention, it
can cause serious injury.
●
The front seats can also be electrically
adjusted when the ignition is switched off.
Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle.
●
In the event of an emergency, electrical
adjustment can be stopped by pressing
any control.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the electrical compo-
nents of the fr
ont seats, please refrain from
kneeling on the seat or applying sharp
pressure at a single point to the seat cush-
ion and backrest.
Note
●
It may not be possibl
e to electrically ad-
just the seat if the vehicle battery is very
low.
●
If the engine is started while the seats are
being electrically adjusted, the adjustment
will stop.
132
Seats and head restraints
Adjusting the rear seats
Fig. 130
Adjusting rear seats
Adjusting the seat backrest
●
Pull the lever and adjust the seat backrest
t
o the desired position
›››
Fig. 130
1
›
››
.
The seat backr
est must be engaged when
the lever is released!
There is a handle instead of the lever on the
third row of seats and on the central seat of
the second row. It is used in the same manner
as the lever.
Move the seat backwards or forwards.
Only in the second row of seats:
●
Pull the lever and move the seat
2
. The
seat must be engaged when the l
ever is re-
leased!
CAUTION
●
Tilting the seat backr
est of the second
row of seats fully back could damage the
luggage compartment tray. Remove the
tray before adjusting the seat backrest.
●
Objects in the luggage compartment
could cause damage when moving the rear
seats forwards or backwards.
Headrest
Intr
oduction
The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-
sembly of the headr
ests are described below.
Always make sure that the seats are correctly
adjusted
›››
page 12.
All seats are equipped with a head restraint.
The rear headrests have been designed ex-
clusively for the corresponding seat of the
second or third row. Therefore, never mount
them on any other seat.
Correct adjustment of head restraint
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head and
under no circumstances below eye level.
Keep the back of your head always as close
to the head restraint as possible.
In vehicles with horizontally adjustable head
restraints on the front seats, move the head
restraint as close as possible to the back of
the head.
Adjusting the head restraint for short peo-
ple
Lower the head restraint completely, even if
your head is below its upper edge. In the low-
est position, there may be a small distance
between the head restraint and the backrest.
Adjusting the head restraint for tall people
Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
WARNING
If travelling with the head restraints re-
mo
ved or improperly adjusted, the risk of
severe or fatal injuries in the event of acci-
dents and sudden braking or manoeuvres
increases.
●
Always travel with the head restraint cor-
rectly installed and adjusted.
●
To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in
the event of an accident, adjust the head
restraint correctly based on your height,
always making sure that its upper edge is
at the same height as the top of the head,
but never below eye level. Keep the back of
your head always as close to the head re-
straint as possible and centred.
●
Never adjust the head restraint while the
vehicle is in motion.
»
133
Operation
●
Under no cir
cumstances should the rear
passengers travel while the head restraints
are in the non-use position.
CAUTION
When assembling and disassembling the
head r
estraints, do not let them meet the
top lining of the vehicle, the back rest of the
front seat or other parts of the vehicles. If
not, this could damage the vehicle.
Adjusting the headrests
Fig. 131 Front seat: headrest adjustment.
Fig. 132 Adjust the head restraints in the sec-
ond or thir
d row of seats
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
●
Move the headrest up or down in the direc-
tion of the corr
esponding arrow. Regarding
the rear headrest, to both raise and lower,
press the button
›››
Fig. 131
1
; for the rear
headr
ests it is only necessary to press the
button
›››
Fig. 132
1
to lower them
›
››
in
Intr
oduction on page 133.
●
The headrest must lock correctly in one po-
sition.
Adjusting the front head restraints hori-
zontally
●
Move the headrest forward or back in the
direction of the corresponding arrow while
pressing the button
›››
Fig. 131
1
.
●
The headrest must lock correctly in one po-
sition.
134
Seats and head restraints
Removing and fitting the headrests
Fig. 133
A: Fitting the head restraints with no
possibilit
y of lengthways direction adjustment;
B: Fitting the head restraints with lengthways
direction adjustment
Fig. 134 Fitting the head restraints in the sec-
ond or thir
d row of seats
Removing and fitting the front headrests
without l
ongitudinal adjustment
●
Push the head restraint up as far as it will go
›››
in Introduction on page 133.
●
Pull out the headrest by pressing the button
compl
etely
›››
Fig. 133
1
.
●
To refit, insert the headrest into the holes in
the backr
est, pushing it down until it engages,
while pressing button
1
.
R
emoving and fitting the front headrests
with longitudinal adjustment
●
Push the head restraint up and backward
as far as it will go
›››
in Introduction on
page 133.
●
Place a flat object, e.g. a plastic card
›
››
Fig. 133
2
, on both sides between the
seat backr
est cover and the end protector of
the seat backrest retaining bar and unlock
the retaining bars with a little pressure.
●
Completely pull out the head restraint.
●
When re-fitting, pull out the headrest's two
retaining bars as far as possible and insert
them into the holes in the seat back. Push
downwards until the two bars click into place.
Removing the rear head restraints
●
If necessary, adjust the backrest of the seat
so the head restraint can be removed.
●
Push the head restraint up as far as it will go
›››
in Introduction on page 133.
●
Remove the head restraint completely
whil
e pressing button
›››
Fig. 134
1
.
Fitting the r
ear head restraints
●
Unlock the rear seat backrest and fold it
forward slightly
›››
page 133.
●
Place the head restraint in the correct posi-
tion on the guides of the corresponding back-
rest and insert it.
●
Lower the head restraint while pressing but-
ton
1
.
●
Raise the rear seat backrest and lock it.
WARNING
Remove the rear headrests only when it is
necessary t
o fit a child seat. After removing
a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.
135
Operation
Seat functions
L
umbar massage function
Fig. 135
On the side of the front seat: button
f
or the lumbar massage function.
During the massage operation, the lumbar
support will mo
ve in a way that massages the
lumbar area of the back. While it is operating,
the arch of the lumbar support can be adjus-
ted using the corresponding control based on
your personal preferences
›››
page 12.
Connection
●
Press the button in the control panel of
the seat.
Disconnection
●
Press the button again in the control
panel of the seat.
Automatic disconnection
●
The lumbar massage will disconnect auto-
matically after approx. 10 minutes.
Memory function
Fig. 136
Memory buttons on the outside of the
driv
er seat
Memory buttons
The memory butt
ons can be used to save
and turn on settings for the driver seat and
the exterior mirrors.
Save the settings of the driver seat and
the exterior mirrors while driving forward
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir-
rors.
●
Press
for longer than 1 second
›
››
Fig. 136.
●
Press the memory button in which to store
the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A
warning sound will confirm they have been
stored.
Storing the passenger rear view mirror
settings while driving in reverse
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the required memory button.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so
that you can see, for example, the kerb area
well.
●
The new position of the mirror will be stored
automatically and allocated to the vehicle
key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
Activating exterior mirror settings
●
With the driver door open and the ignition
turned off, push the memory button of the
corresponding door briefly.
●
OR: with the ignition switched on, hold in
the corresponding memory button until the
memorised position is reached.
136
Seats and head restraints
To activate the memory function of the ve-
hicl
e key
Condition: a position must be memorised in
the memory.
●
Open the driver-side door.
●
Press and hold any memory button.
●
Within three seconds of the move being
completed, push the open button on the
vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the
settings have been activated.
Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and
assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle
key
●
Activate the memory function of the vehicle
key
●
Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir-
rors.
●
Lock the vehicle. The settings are assigned
to the vehicle key.
To deactivate the memory function of the
vehicle key
Condition: a position must be memorised in
the memory.
●
Press and hold the
button
›
››
Fig. 136.
●
Within the following 10 seconds, push the
open button on the vehicle key. An audible
warning confirms the settings have been de-
activated.
Initialising the seat position memory
The position memory system must be restar-
ted if, for example, the driver seat has been
changed.
Restarting deletes all memories and assign-
ments for the seat with position memory. The
memory buttons can then be reprogrammed
and the vehicle keys re-assigned.
●
Open the driver door and do not get into
the vehicle.
●
Operating the seat settings from outside
the vehicle.
●
Tilt the backrest fully forward.
●
Release the control to set the angle and
then press again until an audible warning is
heard.
WARNING
Adjust the memory function only when the
v
ehicle is stationary.
Note
The front passenger side exterior mirror au-
t
omatically changes from the position stor-
ed for reversing as soon as the vehicle
moves forward at a speed of at least
15 km/h (9 mph) or when the gear selection
lever is changed to a position other than R.
Access aid for the third row of seats
Fig. 137
Second row of seats: access aid con-
tr
ols.
The outer seats of the second row can be fol-
ded t
o make it easier to get in and out of the
third row of seats.
Folding down the second row seats
●
If necessary, open the belt loop and wind
up the seat belt by hand.
●
If necessary, remove the side head restraint
of the integrated child seat
›››
page 36.
●
If necessary, raise the armrests.
●
Remove any objects located in the footwell
of the second row of seats, where applicable
›››
.
●
Push the head restraint down as far as it will
go
›
››
page 12.
»
137
Operation
●
Push the l
ever
›››
Fig. 137
1
forwards and
f
old the backrest of the rear seat. This seat
folds forward completely
›››
and can still
be mo
ved further forward.
●
Always take care when entering and leav-
ing the vehicle
›››
.
R
epositioning the seat in the second row
●
Lift the backrest of the rear seat in an up-
right position. The entire seat folds back-
wards
›››
.
●
Make sure that the rear seat is securely en-
gaged so that the seat belts can pr
ovide
proper protection in the rear seats. The red
mark
›››
Fig. 137
2
should no longer be visi-
bl
e
›››
in Folding the rear seats down as
a car
go surface on page 144.
Emergency exit function
If the lever
›››
Fig. 137
1
does not work, e.g.
aft
er an accident, the seats on the second
row can be folded forwards from the third row
to allow vehicle occupants of the third row of
seats to get out of the vehicle
›››
.
●
Pull the handle
›
››
Fig. 137
3
back and fold
the backr
est of the rear seat. The complete
rear seat folds forward
›››
.
WARNING
Careless or uncontrolled use of the con-
v
enient entry assistant may result in severe
injury and accident.
●
Ne
ver use the convenient entry function
when the vehicle is in motion.
●
Avoid trapping or damaging the seat belt
when folding the rear seats back.
●
Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
body parts out of the hinges and the seat
locking mechanism when folding and un-
folding.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the seat backrests or rear
seat. This could prevent the seat backrest
from locking safely when positioned up-
right.
●
All seat backrests must engage correctly
for the seat belts on the rear seats to work
properly. When the seat backrest of an oc-
cupied seat is not correctly locked in place,
the passenger can be thrust forward with
the seat backrest in case of sudden brak-
ing, sudden manoeuvres or an accident.
●
A red mark on the side of the seat
›››
Fig. 137
2
indicates that the seat back-
r
est is not engaged. The mark is no longer
visible when it is correctly engaged.
●
If the seat backrest or seat are folded
down and are not correctly locked in place,
no passenger should use them.
●
When getting in or out, never lean or hold
onto the folded seat on the second row of
seats.
WARNING
If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the
second r
ow then it is possible that the
seats of this row cannot be folded down
from the third row of seats in the event of an
accident. In the event of an emergency,
passengers in the third row of seats will not
be able to leave the vehicle or to help
themselves.
●
Child seats should not occupy all the
seats of the second row if other passengers
are to occupy the third row.
CAUTION
●
Bef
ore folding down the rear seat back-
rest for returning it to its position, adjust the
front seats so that the head restraints and
seat backrests do not hit each other when
folding and unfolding.
●
Any objects located in the footwell of the
second row of seats may be damaged on
folding the rear seat forwards. Remove any
objects before folding the seat down.
138
Seats and head restraints
Adjusting or folding the backrest of
the fr
ont passenger seat
Fig. 138
Front passenger seat: fold the back-
r
est of the seat forwards.
Fig. 139
Unlocking the folding backrest of the
fr
ont passenger seat
The backrest of the front passenger seat can
be f
olded and locked horizontally.
Folding the backrest of the front passen-
ger seat forward
●
Remove any objects from the front passen-
ger seat cushion
›››
.
●
Move the passenger seat to its lowest posi-
tion.
●
Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possibl
e.
●
Unlock the backrest of the front passenger
seat in the direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 138
1
.
●
Fold the backrest of the front passenger
seat f
orwards in the direction of the arrow
2
until it is horizontal.
●
Once folded down, the backrest has to be
l
ocked safely.
When carrying objects on the folded down
backrest of the passenger seat, the front air-
bag of this seat must be disabled
›››
page 26.
Lifting the backrest of the front passenger
seat
●
When lifting the passenger backrest, make
sure there are no objects or body parts within
the hinge movement area.
●
Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat
by first unlocking it again
›››
Fig. 139.
●
Lift the backrest of the seat in an upright
position.
●
Once it is raised again, the backrest must
be correctly engaged.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the pas-
senger seat backr
est is lowered or lifted
without due care and attention.
●
Only fold and lift the backrest of the front
passenger seat when the vehicle is station-
ary.
●
When folding down the passenger seat,
always make sure there are no people or
animals in the backrest area.
●
While the passenger backrest is down,
the front airbag must always be disabled
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG warning
lamp must be on.
●
When moving the passenger backrest up
and down, keep your hands, fingers, feet
and other body parts out of the operating
area of the hinges and the locking mecha-
nism of the seat.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the backrest of the front pas-
senger seat. This would cause the backrest
not to be locked in an upright position when
lifting it.
●
Once the backrest is up, it must be cor-
rectly engaged in an upright position. Oth-
erwise, it could move unexpectedly and
cause severe injuries.
»
139
Operation
WARNING
When folding down the passenger back-
r
est, its anchor points and hinges are left
uncovered and may cause severe injuries in
the event of a sudden brake or accident.
●
When the passenger seat backrest is
lowered nobody else can travel in the cor-
responding seats (not even a child).
●
When the passenger seat backrest is
lowered, the only permitted seat is the rear
seat behind the driver seat. This also ap-
plies to children travelling on a child seat.
Front centre armrest
Fig. 140
Front centre armrest
To lift the centr
al armrest, lift it upwards in the
direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 140, setting by
setting.
To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest
position. Then lower it down.
To move the armrest horizontally, move it for-
ward
›››
Fig. 140 or backward as much as
possible in the direction of the corresponding
arrow.
WARNING
The front centre armrest may obstruct the
driv
er's arm movements, which could
cause an accident and severe injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
●
Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-
rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even
a child. This position is incorrect and may
cause severe injuries.
Transport and practical
equipment
St
oring objects
Positioning the luggage and cargo
It is possible to carry objects and luggage in
the v
ehicle, in a trailer
›››
page 299 and on
the roof
›››
page 150. When doing so, please
consider all legal provisions.
Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely
●
Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly
as possibl
e.
●
Always place equipment and heavy ob-
jects in the boot
›››
.
●
Position heavy items in the boot as far for-
w
ard as possible.
●
Take into account the maximum authorised
weight per axle, as well as the maximum au-
thorised weight of the vehicle
›››
page 357.
●
Secure the objects to the fastening rings of
the boot using appropriate chains or belts
›››
page 145.
●
Also place small objects safely.
●
Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into
account the pressure sticker of the tyres
›››
page 330.
140
Transport and practical equipment
●
In v
ehicles equipped with tyre control sys-
tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa-
ry
›››
page 333.
WARNING
Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri-
ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring
or br
aking or in case of an accident. Partic-
ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-
ing and they are thrown across the inside of
the vehicle. Please observe the following
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-
ly.
●
Secure all objects, little and large.
●
Place the objects in the cabin in such a
way that they can never reach the airbag
deployment areas while the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
●
Place the objects in such a way that they
never force any occupant of the vehicle to
sit in an incorrect position.
●
When transporting objects that take up a
seat, never let anyone use that seat.
●
Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
loose in open storage compartment of the
vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat
or on the instrument panel.
●
Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects
from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin
and store them safely.
WARNING
The transport of heavy object changes ve-
hicl
e handling and increases braking dis-
tance. Heavy objects that are not properly
placed or secured may cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.
●
Never put too much load in the vehicle.
Both the carrying capacity as well as the
distribution of the load in the vehicle have
effects on the driving behaviour and brak-
ing ability.
●
When transporting heavy objects, the
driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due
to the displacement of the centre of gravi-
ty.
●
Always distribute the load in the vehicle
as evenly and horizontally as possible.
●
Always place heavy objects in the boot
before the rear axle and as far away from it
as possible.
●
Objects in the luggage compartment
that are unsecured could move suddenly
and modify the handling of the vehicle.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual.
WARNING
●
Ne
ver leave your vehicle unattended, es-
pecially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Close and lock all the doors and the rear
lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Electrical wires or, depending on the fea-
t
ures, the antenna embedded into the rear
windows could be damaged, even irrepara-
bly, if they are in contact with objects.
Note
Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings ar
e commercially available from
accessory shops.
141
Operation
Luggage compartment
L
uggage compartment shelf
Fig. 141 In the luggage compartment: luggage
compartment tr
ay.
Fig. 142 Remove the shelf supports A then put
them aw
ay safely B.
The rear shelf can be fitted behind the sec-
ond or thir
d row of seats
›››
.
Opening the shelf
●
Pull the shelf handle
›
››
Fig. 141
A
a little bit
backw
ards.
●
Release the shelf upwards by the side sup-
ports and guide it forward.
Closing the shelf
●
Pull the unfolded shelf evenly on the guide
backwards.
●
Secure the shelf using the left and right side
supports.
Installing the shelf behind the second row
of seats
●
Place the shelf in its position in the side lin-
ing, left-hand side first.
●
Release the shelf in the direction of the ar-
row
›››
Fig. 141
B
.
●
Insert the shelf into the right-hand support,
pr
essing down.
Installing the shelf behind the third row of
seats
●
Remove the shelf from the side trim support
›››
Fig. 142 A. To do this, press the shelf up-
wards (arrow) and remove it.
●
Open the compartment in the left-hand
side boot lining
›››
page 152 and hook the
shelf to the rear of the compartment lid
›››
Fig. 142 B.
●
Close the rear left-hand side lining com-
partment.
●
Place the shelf in its position in the side lin-
ing, left-hand side first.
142
Transport and practical equipment
●
Lift the shelf off in dir
ection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 141
B
.
●
Insert the shelf into the right-hand support,
pr
essing down.
Removing the shelf
●
Release the shelf in the direction of the ar-
row
›››
Fig. 141
B
and lift it in the direction of
the arr
ow
C
.
●
Remove the shelf from the right-hand side
support.
●
Moreover, when detaching the shelf be-
hind the thir
d seat row: cover the supports
of the side trims with their covers.
●
With only 5 seats: support the released
shelf by placing it on the front section of the
boot floor
›››
page 152.
WARNING
If the shelf is placed on one of the rear
seats, this coul
d cause serious injury in
case of sudden braking or an accident.
●
Whenever it the third row seats are occu-
pied, the shelf should be put behind this
row.
WARNING
Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects
or animal
s on the rear shelf could cause
serious injuries in case of a sudden ma-
noeuvre or braking or even an accident.
●
Do not l
eave hard, heavy or sharp ob-
jects (loose or in bags) on the rear shelf.
●
Never transport animals on the rear shelf.
Folding the rear seats down as a
car
go surface
Fig. 143 Second row of seats: fold down the
r
ear seat , rear seat as cargo surface .
Fig. 144 Third row of seats: folding down the
r
ear seat for loading putting it back into
place .
Each rear seat can fold down individually to
e
xtend the luggage compartment.
»
143
Operation
Folding the seats in the second row of
seats f
or loading
●
If necessary, open the belt loop and wind
up the seat belt by hand.
●
If required, remove the head restraints from
the integrated seats for children and refit
them
›››
page 36.
●
If necessary, raise the armrests.
●
Remove objects from the footwell in front of
and behind the rear seat
›››
.
●
Move the rear seat all the way back.
●
Push the head restraint down as far as it will
go
›
››
page 12.
●
In the middle seat, close the drinks carrier in
the rear of the centre console, if necessary.
●
Pull lever
›››
Fig. 143
1
back and fold the
seat backr
est forwards. The complete rear
seat folds forward
›››
.
●
Fold the seat backrest forwards until it locks
int
o the load surface position
›››
Fig. 143 .
●
If necessary, pull on the lever
›››
Fig. 144
2
to move the seat to the required position.
●
When the seat is folded down, no adults or
chil
dren should travel in it
›››
.
F
olding the seats in the third row of seats
for loading
●
If necessary, open the belt loop and wind
up the seat belt by hand.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Push the head restraint down as far as it will
go
›››
page 12.
●
Remove objects from the footwell in front of
and behind the rear seat
›››
.
●
Remove objects from the space below the
r
ear seat.
●
Remove the attachment elements and sup-
ports for the net from the rail system.
●
Pull lever
›››
Fig. 144
1
back and fold the
seat backr
est forwards. The rear seat folds
forward
›››
and the cushion also moves for-
w
ard.
●
Fold the seat tray forward on top of the fol-
ded seat.
●
When the seat is folded down, no adults or
children should travel in it
›››
.
Putting the seats in the second r
ow back in
place
●
Pull lever
›››
Fig. 143
1
upwards and place
the seat backr
ests in vertical position. The
entire seat folds backwards.
●
Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest
to ensure that they are correctly locked in
place and that the seat belt protection is
guaranteed for rear seat passengers.
Putting the seats in the third row back in
place
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull on the handle
›››
Fig. 144
2
to put the
seat tr
ay back in position.
●
Pull the handle
›››
Fig. 144
3
. The entire
seat f
olds backwards.
●
Press on the seat tray in the seat backrest
until it is held in position by its magnets.
●
Open the sliding door.
●
Put the seat backrest into position and
press firmly until it clicks into place.
●
Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest
to ensure that they are correctly locked in
place and that the seat belt protection is
guaranteed for rear seat passengers.
WARNING
Folding and lifting the rear seats carelessly
without paying att
ention could cause seri-
ous injury.
●
Never fold or lift the seats while driving.
●
Do no trap or damage seat belts when
raising the seat backrest.
●
Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
body parts out of the hinges and the seat
locking mechanism when folding and un-
folding.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the seat backrests or rear
seat. This could prevent the seat or seat
backrest from locking securely in the verti-
cal position.
144
Transport and practical equipment
●
All seat backr
ests must engage correctly
for the seat belts on the rear seats to work
properly. When the seat backrest of an oc-
cupied seat is not correctly locked in place,
the passenger can be thrust forward with
the seat backrest in case of sudden brak-
ing, sudden manoeuvres or an accident.
●
No seat must be occupied if the seat
backrest or seat is folded or not correctly
engaged.
CAUTION
●
Bef
ore folding the rear seat backrest, ad-
just the front seats so that neither the head
restraint or backrest hit them when folded.
●
Objects placed in the footrest area in
front of and behind the rear seats can be
damaged when seats are folded down or
put back into position. Remove any objects
in the way before folding seats down or re-
positioning them.
●
Objects placed in the moulding on the
back of the third row of seats can be dam-
aged when folding down the seats or put-
ting them back into position. Remove any
objects in the way before folding seats
down or repositioning them.
●
The attachment elements and supports
for the net partition placed on the rail sys-
tem can be damaged when folding down
seats from the third row or putting them
back into position and these can also dam-
age the seats themselves. Before folding
down or repositioning the seats, remove
the att
achment elements and supports for
the net from the rail system.
Fastening rings
Fig. 145 In the luggage compartment: fasten-
ing rings.
There are fastening rings
›
››
Fig. 145 on the
front and rear of the boot to secure loose ob-
jects and luggage with fastening belts and
cords.
On some models, the fastening rings are lo-
cated right at the back, in the area of the lock
carrier plate.
There are other fastening rings located to the
left and right hand side of the second row
footrests.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining
str
aps are used, they could break in the
event of braking or an accident. Objects
could then be launched across the passen-
ger compartment and cause serious or fa-
tal injuries.
●
Always use belts or straps that are suita-
ble and in good condition.
●
Tighten the belts and straps in a cross
layout over the load placed on the boot
floor and secure them to the fastening rings
safely.
●
Never exceed the maximum tensile load
of the fastening rings when securing ob-
jects.
●
Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-
jects, the upper edge of the load is higher
than the fastening rings.
●
Depending on the features, take into ac-
count the instruction panels on the boot on
how to place the load.
●
Never secure a child seat to the fastening
rings.
Note
●
The maximum t
ensile load that the fas-
tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.
●
Belts, straps and securing systems for the
appropriate load can be obtained from
specialised dealerships. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
145
Operation
Rail system with fasteners
Fig. 146
In the luggage compartment: system
including r
ails, adjustable attachment ele-
ments
1
and adjustable tightening straps
2
.
The rails and attachment system consists of
f
our rails, movable attachment elements,
straps to be secured to the rails and a net
with supports to cover baggage
›››
page 147. The rail and attachment sys-
tem is designed to secure light objects. If the
seats in the third row are to be occupied by
passengers then attachment elements
should never be placed in the section of the
rails close to the seats
›››
.
Inst
alling the attachment elements
●
Fit the attachment element with the ruts
facing upwards
›››
Fig. 146
1
to the upper
part of the guide and pr
ess downwards.
●
Move the attachment element to the de-
sired position.
●
Always ensure that the attachment inserts
into the guide system
›››
.
R
emoving the attachment elements
●
Remove the attachment element from the
guide and pull downwards.
Securing a load
●
Pull the strap through the attachment ele-
ment and secure the load
›››
.
WARNING
In case of an accident or sudden braking,
the att
achment elements in the parts of the
rails close to the seats of the third row
could injure seat occupants.
●
Whenever the seats on the third row are
to be occupied, remove the attachment el-
ements from the rails or move them all the
way back.
WARNING
Movable attachment elements that are not
secur
ed correctly can be released from the
guide in case of sudden braking or acci-
dent. As a result, objects may be fired
through the vehicle interior causing serious
injury or death.
●
Always ensure that the movable attach-
ment elements are correctly inserted into
the guides.
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps
may be r
eleased in case of sudden braking
or an accident. As a result, objects may be
fired through the vehicle interior causing
serious injury or death.
●
Always use the attachment straps of the
rail and attachment system.
●
Secure the attachment straps firmly to
the attachment elements.
●
Loose objects in the luggage compart-
ment can suddenly slide and change the
way the vehicle handles.
●
Secure all objects, little and large.
●
Never secure a child seat to the attach-
ment elements.
CAUTION
The attachment elements placed on the
r
ail system can be damaged when folding
down seats from the third row or putting
them back into position and these can also
damage the seats themselves. Before fold-
ing down or repositioning the seats, remove
the attachment elements and supports for
the net from the rail system.
146
Transport and practical equipment
Net to cover the luggage
Fig. 147
Hook the baggage net A and use it as
a bag B.
Fig. 148 Release the baggage net
If the seats in the third row are to be occupied
by passengers then att
achment elements
should never be placed in the section of the
rails close to the seats
›››
.
Inst
alling the baggage net supports
●
Fit the baggage net support into the guide
from the back and press downwards.
●
Move the baggage net support to the re-
quired position.
●
Always ensure that the net support inserts
into the rail system
›››
.
Hooking the baggage net int
o the support
Place the attachment rod on the baggage
net support
›››
Fig. 147
1
and rotate 90° to
the l
eft
2
. The red mark on the attachment
r
od should not be visible
›››
.
Using the net for bag type baggage
●
Fit the baggage net supports to each one
of the upper r
ails.
●
Fit a movable baggage net attachment el-
ement to each one of the lower guides
›››
page 146.
●
Hook the baggage net into the supports.
●
Hook the baggage net attachment strap
underneath into one of the movable attach-
ment elements
›››
Fig. 147 B.
●
Join the baggage net supports to the upper
rails as much as possible by pushing them.
●
Press the sides of the baggage net togeth-
er so that they are held by the Velcro.
Using the baggage net to separate the
luggage compartment
●
Fit the baggage net supports to each one
of the upper rails.
●
Fit the baggage net supports to each one
of the lower rails.
●
Hook the baggage net into the supports.
To release the baggage net
●
Rotate the attachment rod 90° to the right
›››
Fig. 148
1
until you can see the red mark
on the r
od. Pull the attachment rod upwards
2
.
●
With only 5 seats: aft
er removing, place
the baggage net safely in the front
»
147
Operation
compartment on the floor of the boot
›
››
page 152.
Removing the baggage net supports
●
Remove the net attachment element from
the rail and pull it out downwards.
WARNING
In case of an accident or sudden braking,
the net att
achment elements in the parts of
the rails close to the seats of the third row
could injure seat occupants.
●
Whenever the seats on the third row are
to be occupied, remove the attachment el-
ements from the rails or move them all the
way back.
WARNING
Baggage net supports that are not secured
corr
ectly can be released from the guide in
case of the sudden braking or accident. As
a result, objects may be fired through the
vehicle interior causing serious injury or
death.
●
Always ensure that the baggage net sup-
ports are correctly inserted into the rails;
the red mark should not be visible.
●
Never secure a child seat to the baggage
net supports.
CAUTION
The baggage net supports placed on the
r
ail system can be damaged when folding
down seats from the third row or putting
them back into position and these can also
damage the seats themselves. Before fold-
ing down or repositioning the seats, remove
the baggage net supports from the rail sys-
tem.
Luggage net
Fig. 149 In the luggage compartment: net for
hanging luggage
.
The baggage net can be used to secure
light
er items.
Hooking the baggage net into the boot
floor
●
Hook the baggage net into the fastening
rings
›››
Fig. 149
1
and
2
.
Releasing the baggage net
The secur
ed baggage net is taut
›››
.
●
Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks
fr
om the fastening rings
›››
Fig. 149
1
.
●
Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks
fr
om the fastening rings
›››
Fig. 149
2
.
WARNING
The elastic baggage net stretches when it
is secur
ed to the luggage compartment
fastening rings. The secured baggage net
is taut. The hooks on the net can cause in-
jury if the net is incorrectly hooked or un-
hooked.
●
Always ensure that the hooks do not sud-
denly release from the fastening rings
when hooking or un-hooking.
●
Always keep your face and eyes protec-
ted at a safe distance to avoid injury should
a hook slip while hooking or unhooking.
●
Always engage the hooks in the order
given. If a baggage net hook springs back
this can cause injury.
148
Transport and practical equipment
Bag hooks
Fig. 150
In the luggage compartment: bag
hooks.
On the right hand side of the luggage com-
partment ther
e are some fold-out hooks for
hanging bags
›››
Fig. 150.
●
Press the retaining hooks down
›››
Fig. 150
(arrow) and fold them.
After use, raise the hooks again.
The retaining hooks have been designed to
secure light shopping bags.
WARNING
Never use the hooks to hang luggage or
other ob
jects. In case of sudden braking or
an accident, the hooks could break.
Net partition
Unf
olding and folding the net parti-
tion
Fig. 151
Deploying the net partition.
Fig. 152
Folding in the net partition.
Before fitting the net partition in the vehicle it
must be unf
olded.
Fold out the net partition
Take out the partition net from the corre-
sponding bag and unroll it.
Extend the cross rods
›››
Fig. 151
1
and
2
of
the net in the dir
ection of the arrows until it
“clicks”.
Folding in the net partition
●
Press on the release button
›››
Fig. 152
1
and bend the cross rod in the direction of the
arr
ow with the button pressed.
●
Press on the release button
›››
Fig. 152
2
and bend the cross rod in the direction of the
arr
ow with the button pressed.
●
Fold in the net partition and store it in its
bag.
●
Store the net partition safely in the vehicle.
149
Operation
Using the net partition
Fig. 153
Net partition fitted.
The purpose of the net partition is to prevent
the it
ems in the boot from moving into the
cabin, e.g. in the event of sudden braking.
Fitting the net partition
The partition net can be fitted behind the rear
seat or, depending on the features, behind
the front seats with the second row of seats
lowered.
●
If required, remove the rear shelf
›››
page 142.
●
Folding out the net partition
›››
page 149.
●
Secure the net partition in the left housing
of the roof
›››
Fig. 153
A
. Make sure to move
the cr
oss rod down beyond the upper posi-
tion.
●
Hook in the net partition on the rear right-
hand side roof housing by pressing on the rod
›››
Fig. 153
A
.
●
Secure two hooks of the partition net to the
f
astening rings of the boot
›››
Fig. 153
B
and
tight
en the straps firmly.
Removing the net partition
●
If required, remove the rear shelf
›››
page 142.
●
Loosen the straps from the net partition.
●
Release the net hooks from the fastening
rings
›››
Fig. 153
B
.
●
Unhook the net partition on the right-hand
side r
oof support
›››
Fig. 153
A
by pressing
on the r
od.
●
Unhook the net partition from the left-hand
side roof housing.
●
Fold in the net partition
›››
page 149.
●
If required, fit the rear shelf
›››
page 142.
WARNING
In order to ensure the proper functioning of
the luggage r
estraint systems (backrests
together with the net partition), place the
second row of seats in their rearmost posi-
tion to avoid the possibility of the load on
top moving forward. Risk to vehicle occu-
pants.
WARNING
During a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvr
e, or in the event of an accident, ob-
jects could be flung though the interior and
cause serious or fatal injuries.
●
Check whether the cross rods are cor-
rectly engaged.
●
Always secure objects, even when the
net partition is properly assembled.
●
There should be nobody behind the net
partition when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
If the net partition is secured incorrectly or
t
o incorrect points, this may damage the
vehicle.
Roof carrier
Intr
oduction
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
mise aer
odynamics. For this reason, cross
bars or conventional roof carrier systems
cannot be secured to the roof water drains.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems
can be used.
150
Transport and practical equipment
Cases in which cross bars and the roof
carrier syst
em should be disassembled.
●
When they are not used.
●
When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
●
When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
mum height, for example, in some garages.
WARNING
●
Al
ways secure the load properly using
belts or retaining straps that are suitable
and in a good condition.
●
Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a
negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-
tre of gravity and driving performance.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
CAUTION
●
R
emove the cross bars and the roof carri-
er system before entering a car wash.
●
Vehicle height is increased by the instal-
lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system
and the load secured on them. For this pur-
pose, check that your vehicle's height does
not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-
ple, for underpasses or for entering garage
doors.
●
Cross bars, the roof carrier system and
the load secured on them should not inter-
fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path
of the panor
amic sun roof and the rear lid.
●
On opening the rear lid make sure that it
does not knock into the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
When cross bars and a roof carrier system
ar
e installed, the increased air resistance
means that the vehicle uses more fuel.
Securing the crossbars and the
r
oof carrier system
Fig. 154
Attachment points for the roof railings
f
or the roof carrier system.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of
special r
oof carrier systems. For safety rea-
sons, special fixtures must be used to safely
transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards
or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories
can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof
carrier system properly. Always take the as-
sembly instructions that come with the cross-
bars and the roof carrier system in question
into account.
The attachment openings are located on the
inner side of the side roof rods
›››
Fig. 154.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars and the r
oof carrier system may cause
the whole system to detach from the roof
and cause an accident and injuries.
●
Always take the manufacturer assembly
instructions into account.
●
Check threaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them af-
ter you have travelled a short distance.
When making long trips, check the threa-
ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.
●
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
roof carrier system.
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that
come with the cr
ossbars and the roof carri-
er system carefully and keep them in the
vehicle.
151
Operation
Loading the roof carrier system
The load can only be secured if the crossbars
and the r
oof carrier system are properly in-
stalled
›››
.
Maximum authorised car
go on the roof
The maximum authorised load allowed to be
transported on the roof is 100 kg (220 lbs).
This figure comes from the combined weight
of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load
itself on the roof
›››
.
Al
ways check the weight of the roof carrier
system, the cross bars and the weight of the
load to be transported and weigh them if
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
thorised roof load.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
with a lower weight rating, you will not be
able to carry the maximum authorised roof
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-
mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is
listed in the fitting instructions.
Distributing a load
Distribute loads uniformly and secure them
correctly
›››
.
Check att
achments
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system
have been installed, check the bolted con-
nections and attachments after a short jour-
ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-
cy.
WARNING
●
Ne
ver exceed the maximum authorised
load on the roof and on the axles or the ve-
hicle's maximum authorised weight.
●
Never exceed the load capacity of the
cross bars and the roof carrier system,
even if the maximum authorised roof load
has not been reached.
●
Secure heavy items as far forward as
possible and distribute the vehicle load
uniformly.
WARNING
If the load is loose or not secured, it could
f
all from the roof carrier system or cause
accidents and injuries.
●
Always use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition.
Storage compartment
Intr
oduction
Use the storage compartments only for small
or light it
ems.
In the front centre armrest compartment the
following connection inputs can be found.
WARNING
Objects inside the vehicle that are not se-
cur
ed could be thrown across the cabin in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
vring. This may cause severe injuries as
well as loss of control of the vehicle.
●
Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or
heavy items in open storage compartments
of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the
cover behind the rear seats, or inside
pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-
cle.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi-
cult the use of the pedal
s. This may cause
loss of control of the vehicle and increases
the risk of severe injuries.
●
Make sure that nothing prevents you from
using the pedals at any time.
●
Always secure the mat in the footwell.
●
Never place other mats or other type of
covers on the factory-fitted mat.
●
Ensure that no objects can fall into the
driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
●
When the vehicle is stationary, remove
the objects in the footwell.
152
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING
If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they
might be damaged or lit inadv
ertently. This
could lead to severe burns and damage to
the vehicle.
●
Before moving a seat, make sure there
are no lighters in the moving part area of
the vehicle.
●
Before closing a storage compartment,
make sure there are no lighters in the clos-
ing area.
●
Never leave a lighter inside a storage
compartment or any other surface of the
vehicle as it could ignite due to the high
temperatures on such surfaces, particular-
ly during the summer.
CAUTION
●
Do not st
ore heat- or cold-sensitive ob-
jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat
and cold could damage them or render
them useless.
●
Objects made from transparent materi-
als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,
magnifying glasses or transparent suction
pads stuck to the windows can concentrate
sunlight and damage the vehicle.
Glove compartment
Fig. 155
On the front passenger side: glove
compartment.
Fig. 156 On the front passenger side: glove
compartment open.
Opening and closing the glove compart-
ment
Unl
ock the glove compartment where neces-
sary. The glove compartment is locked when
the key slot is vertical.
Opening: Pull the handle
›››
Fig. 155 and
open the glove compartment.
Closing: Press the glove compartment up-
wards.
Glove compartment cooling
With the AC on, cool air can be directed to-
wards the inside of the compartment. Turn
the air vent to open and close it.
WARNING
If the glove compartment is left open, the
risk of causing se
vere injuries in the event
of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-
vring increases.
●
Always keep the glove compartment
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
For structural reasons, some vehicle ver-
sions will hav
e gaps behind the glove com-
partment (for instance, behind the com-
partment for on-board documentation) into
which small objects may fall. This could
lead to strange noises and damage to the
vehicle. You should therefore not keep very
small objects in the glove compartment.
153
Operation
Storage compartment in the front
centr
al armrest
Fig. 157
In the front central armrest: storage
compartment.
Opening: Giv
en the case, press the unlock
button and raise the centre armrest in the di-
rection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 157.
Closing: Lower the armrest.
WARNING
The centre armrest may obstruct the driv-
er
's arm movements, which could cause an
accident and severe injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Storage compartment in the roof
consol
e (glasses case)
Fig. 158
On the roof console: object holder for
gl
asses.
Opening: Pr
ess and release the button
›››
Fig. 158.
Closing: Press the cover upwards until it clicks
into place.
Note
For the surveillance of the cabin to work
corr
ectly, the storage compartments must
be closed when locking the vehicle
›››
page 95.
Storage compartment in the roof
consol
e
Fig. 159
On the roof console: storage com-
partment.
To open pr
ess the button and release it
›››
Fig. 159.
To close, press the storage compartment up-
wards until it clicks into place.
To ensure interior monitoring works properly,
the storage compartments must be closed
when the vehicle is locked
›››
page 102.
154
Transport and practical equipment
Compartment in the instrument
panel
Fig. 160
Storage compartment on the dash
panel
The storage compartment on the instrument
panel may hav
e a cover.
To open, press the button on the cover
›››
Fig. 160 (arrow).
To close, press the cover down until it clicks
into place.
Compartment in the front centre
console.
Fig. 161
Compartment in the front centre con-
sol
e.
There is an open compartment on the centre
consol
e
›››
Fig. 161 in which there may be a 12
volt power socket
›››
page 159.
Card compartment
Fig. 162 Lower part of the centre console: card
compartment.
To the bottom of the centre console there is a
compartment
›
››
Fig. 162
1
for coins, cards,
car park tick
ets and similar items.
Note
To avoid theft or use by others, do not use
the compar
tment to store credit or ATM
cards or similar.
Folding table
Fig. 163 Folding table on the front seat
Depending on the model version, at the rear
of the fr
ont seats, there may be “plane-style”
folding tables for passengers in the rear
seats.
●
To open the tray, open it up in the direction
of the arrow
›››
Fig. 163.
●
To fold it back, push the folding table down
as far as possible.
»
155
Operation
A drink holder is built into the folding table
›
››
page 158.
WARNING
The table must always be closed while
driving t
o decrease the risk of injuries.
Compartments in the rear footwell
ar
ea
Fig. 164
Storage compartments in the footwell
of the second r
ow of seats.
Move the mat to one side (where applicable).
T
o open, pull on the rear centre part of the
cover
›››
Fig. 164 (arrow).
To close, press the cover down.
WARNING
Make sure children are properly belted in
and corr
ectly secured to avoid severe or
fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion.
●
If you are using a child seat with a base or
foot, always install this base or foot cor-
rectly and safely.
●
If the vehicle has a storage compartment
in the footwell in front of the last row of
seats, this compartment cannot be used as
designed; on the contrary, it must be filled
using the specially designed accessory so
that the base or foot is correctly supported
by the closed compartment and the child
seat is secured properly. If this compart-
ment is not suitably secured when using a
child seat with a base or foot then the com-
partment cover could rupture in an acci-
dent and the child will be ejected and suf-
fer serious injury.
●
Please read and observe the child seat
manufacturer's handling instructions.
Object holder under front seats
Fig. 165
Drawer under the front seat
Opening: Pr
ess the tab on the drawer handle
and take the drawer out.
Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until
it engages.
WARNING
If the drawer is left open, it could prevent
use of the pedal
s. This may cause serious
accidents and injuries.
●
Always keep the drawer closed while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer
and any objects in it could fall into the driv-
er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.
CAUTION
The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.
156
Transport and practical equipment
Portable rubbish bin
Fig. 166
Left sliding door trim: portable waste
bin.
The portable waste bin fits onto the bottle
hol
der on the trim of the left-hand sliding
door.
WARNING
Do not use the portable waste bin as an
ashtr
ay to avoid the risk of fire.
Other storage compartments
Fig. 167
In the luggage compartment: side
st
orage compartment.
Fig. 168 Other compartments in the boot floor.
Side compartments in the luggage com-
par
tment
There are other compartments
›››
Fig. 167
1
and
2
in the side of the boot. To open the
compartment
1
, turn the catch clockwise. To
open the compartment
2
, lift the cover. The
shelf support co
vers can be safely stored in
the luggage compartment cover
1
.
Compar
tments in the boot floor
More storage compartments can be found in
the boot floor.
●
Opening: use the handle to lift the rear part
of the luggage compartment floor
›››
Fig. 168
4
.
●
To hold it open, fold out the hook from the
r
ear right of the luggage compartment and
hook the luggage compartment floor onto it
›››
page 142.
●
Closing: fold the hook away and press
down on the rear part of the luggage com-
partment floor
4
Other storage compartments:
●
in the centre console, front and rear.
●
in the door trims, front and rear.
●
Coat hooks on the centr
al door pillars and
on the rear roof handles.
●
Bag hook in the luggage compartment
›››
page 142.
WARNING
Clothing hung on the coat hooks could re-
strict the driv
er's view and lead to serious
accidents.
»
157
Operation
●
Hang the cl
othes from the hooks so that
driver's view is not restricted.
●
The coat hook is suitable for light items of
clothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharp
objects in the bags.
Note
The first aid kit is located in the rear left
compar
tment of the luggage compart-
ment.
Drink holder
Intr
oduction
There are bottle holders in the storage com-
partments of the driv
er, front passenger door
and sliding doors.
The folding tables of the front seats contain
more bottle holders
›››
page 155.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bottle holders may
cause injuries.
●
Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.
In the e
vent of sudden braking or an acci-
dent while driving, hot beverages in the
bottle holders might spill and cause burns.
●
Ensure that no bottles or other objects
are dropped in the driver footwell while
driving, as they could get under the pedals
and obstruct their w
orking.
●
Never place glasses, food or other heavy
objects drink holders. These heavy objects
may be thrown across the cabin in the
event of an accident and cause serious in-
juries.
WARNING
Closed bottles may explode inside the ve-
hicl
e due to cold or heat.
●
Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle
if the temperature inside is very high or very
low.
CAUTION
Do not leave open cans in the drink holders
when the v
ehicle is in motion. If the drink is
spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may
damage the vehicle and its electrical sys-
tem.
Note
The inside elements of the drink holders
can be e
xtracted for cleaning.
Front drink holders
Fig. 169
Front centre console: drinks holder.
●
To open, mo
ve the cover backwards
›››
Fig. 169.
●
To close, move the cover forwards.
Rear drinks holder
Fig. 170 Back of the centre console: unfolding
the drinks hol
ders.
158
Transport and practical equipment
Opening: F
olding the drinks holder
›››
Fig. 170 .
Closing: Lift the drinks holder.
The third row of seats has a drink holder in the
side trim compartment on the rear left.
Power sockets
Introduction
Electrical equipment can be connected to
the po
wer sockets in the vehicle.
All connected appliances should be in per-
fect working order without any faults.
WARNING
Improper use of the power sockets or elec-
trical de
vices could lead to a fire and
cause serious injuries.
●
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. The power sockets and equipment
connected to them can be used when the
ignition is switched on.
●
Should a connected electrical device
overheat, switch it off and unplug it imme-
diately.
CAUTION
●
T
o avoid damage to the vehicle's electri-
cal system, never connect equipment that
generates electrical current, such as solar
panels or battery chargers, to the 12 volt
power sockets in order to charge the vehi-
cle's battery.
●
Only use accessories with approved
electromagnetic compatibility according
to current regulations.
●
To avoid damage due to voltage varia-
tions, switch off all devices connected to
the 12 V power sockets before switching the
ignition on or off and before starting the en-
gine.
●
Never connect an appliance to the 12 volt
power socket that consumes more than the
power indicated in watts. Exceeding the
maximum power absorption could damage
the vehicle's electrical system.
For the sake of the environment
Do not leave the engine running when the
v
ehicle is at a standstill.
Note
●
Using de
vices with the engine stopped
and the ignition switched on will drain the
battery.
●
Unshielded equipment can cause inter-
ference on the radio equipment and the ve-
hicle's electrical system.
●
Int
erference can occur on the radio's AM
waveband if electrical appliances are used
near the rear window aerial.
Vehicle power sockets
Fig. 171 Back of the centre console: 12 volt
po
wer socket.
Fig. 172 Detailed view of the rear centre con-
sol
e: 230 volt European power socket.
»
159
Operation
Depending on your vehicle version, you may
hav
e a 12-volt power socket and/or a 230
volt power socket.
Maximum power consumption
Power socket
Maximum power con-
sumption
12 Volts 120 Watts
230 Volts 150 watts (300 watt peaks)
Make sure that the maximum power con-
sumption displ
ayed on each outlet is not ex-
ceeded. The power consumption of devices is
shown on the model plate.
When connecting two or more electrical de-
vices at the same time, make sure that their
total consumption never exceeds 190 watts
›››
.
12 v
olt power socket
The 12 volt power socket will only work with
the ignition on.
Using electrical appliances with the engine
stopped and the ignition switched on will
drain the battery. Therefore, electrical devi-
ces connected to the power socket can only
be used when the engine is running.
To prevent voltage variations from causing
damage, switch off the electrical consumer
connected to the 12 volt power socket before
switching the ignition on or off and before
starting the engine.
12 volt power sockets can be found in the fol-
lowing locations in the vehicle:
●
Compartment in the centre of the centre
console.
●
Compartment in the front centre console.
●
Storage compartment in the front central
armrest.
●
Rear centre console
›››
Fig. 171.
●
At the rear right of the luggage compart-
ment.
230 volt power socket
The power socket
›››
Fig. 172 can only be
used when the engine is running
›››
.
Connect an el
ectrical device: Open the cov-
er and insert the plug into the power socket
as far as possible to unlock the built-in child
lock. The socket only supplies power once
the child lock is unlocked.
LED on the power socket
Steady green
light:
The childproof lock is unlocked.
The sock
et is ready to operate.
Flashing red
light:
There is an anomaly, e.g. dis-
connection due t
o a current
surge or overheating.
Disconnection due to overheating
When the t
emperature exceeds a certain val-
ue, the 230 volt socket inverter is automati-
cally disconnected. The disconnection pre-
vents overheating when the power consump-
tion of the connected devices is excessive or
the ambient temperature is very high. The
230-volt power supply can be used once
again after a cooling time. First unplug the
connector of the connected device and then
plug it back in again. This prevents the elec-
trical device from being switched on again if
this is not wanted.
WARNING
The electrical system is under high voltage!
●
Do not spill liquids onto the socket.
●
Do not plug adapters or extension cords
int
o the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise,
the integrated child lock will be unlocked
and the power socket will operate.
●
Do not insert conductive objects (a knit-
ting needle, for example) into the 230 volt
power socket.
CAUTION
●
Al
ways follow the operating instructions
for the appliances to be connected!
●
Never exceed the maximum power rating
as this could damage the vehicle's general
electrical system.
●
12 volt power socket:
160
Air conditioning
–
Only use accessories with appr
oved
electromagnetic compatibility accord-
ing to current regulations.
–
Never power the socket.
●
230 volt power socket:
–
Do not leave devices or connectors
that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer)
hanging directly from the power sock-
et.
–
Do not connect neon lamps.
–
Only connect devices to the socket if
the device and socket voltage match.
–
The built-in overload disconnect func-
tion prevents any electrical devices
that require a high start-up current
from turning on. In this case, unplug the
electrical device's power supply and
re-try the connection after about 10
seconds.
Note
●
Some appliances may not w
ork properly
when connected to the 230 volt sockets
due to a lack of power (watts).
●
The 230 Watt Euro power connector can
be modified for 115 Watt appliances and
vice versa. Consult a specialist shop for
advice on accessories to adapt the con-
nector. SEAT recommends taking your car
in for technical service.
Air conditioning
Heating, v
entilation and
cooling
Introduction
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, sever-
al syst
ems may have been fitted:
●
The manual air conditioning and the Cli-
matronic cool and dehumidify the air. They
operate most effectively with the windows
and the sunroof closed.
To switch a specific function on, press the ap-
propriate button. Press the button again to
switch off the function.
The LED on each control lights up to indicate
that the respective function of a control has
been switched on.
Dust and pollen filter
The dust and pollen filter with its activated
charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier
against impurities in the air taken into the ve-
hicle interior.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed
regularly so that air conditioner performance
is not adversely affected.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to
use in ar
eas with very high levels of air pollu-
tion, the filter must be changed more fre-
quently than stated in the Service Schedule.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows in-
cr
eases the risk of serious accidents.
●
Always ensure that all windows are free
of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-
ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-
erything outside.
●
Only drive when you have good visibility.
●
Always ensure that you use the air condi-
tioning, heater or rear window heating to
maintain good visibility to the outside.
●
Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system is
switched off and air recirculation mode
switched on, the windows can mist over
very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it
is not required.
WARNING
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and
r
educe driver concentration possibly re-
sulting in a serious accident.
●
Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
use the air recirculation for long periods of
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not
be refreshed.
»
161
Operation
CAUTION
●
T
o replace the pollen filter, always visit a
service centre.
●
Switch the climate control or air condi-
tioner off if you think it may be broken. This
will avoid additional damage. Have the cli-
mate control or air conditioning checked
by a specialised workshop.
●
Repairs to the climate control or air con-
ditioning require specialist knowledge and
special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT Official Service.
Note
●
When the cooling syst
em is turned off, air
coming from the outside will not be dried.
To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT
r
ecommends leaving the cooling system
(compressor) turned on. To do this, press
the
button. The button lamp should
light up
.
●
The maximum heat output required to de-
frost windows as quickly as possible is only
available when the engine has reached its
normal running temperature.
●
Keep the air intake slots in front of the
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to
ensure heating and cooling are not im-
paired, and to prevent the windows from
misting over.
●
The air from the vents flows through the
vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in
the luggage compartment designed for this
purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-
structing these sl
ots with any kind of ob-
ject.
●
Do not smoke while air recirculation
mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air
conditioning system leaves residue on the
evaporator, producing a permanent un-
pleasant odour.
●
It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
ing at least once a month, to lubricate the
system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
crease in the cooling capacity is detected,
a Technical Service should be consulted to
check the system.
●
When the engine is under extreme strain,
switch off the compressor for a moment.
Climatronic control
Fig. 173 In the centre console: Climatronic con-
tr
ols.
Some Climatronic controls may also be on
the air conditioner contr
ol panel located in
162
Air conditioning
the rear centre console. These controls are
used t
o make the appropriate settings for the
rear seats.
Automatic mode
Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan,
and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa-
bled when the ventilation is modified manual-
ly.
Cooling mode
Press the button to switch on or off the cool-
ing system.
Temperature
1
/
2
The temperature of the right and left sides
can be adjust
ed separately using the adjust-
ers. The selected temperature is shown on
the display of the climate control panel.
Synchronisation: press button so that
settings on the driver's side apply to the pas-
senger side. Use the temperature regulator
for the passenger side to set a different tem-
perature.
Fan
The power of the fan is automatically adjus-
ted.
The fan is also adjusted manually by turning
the control.
Air distribution / /
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort.
It can also be manually distributed to the de-
sired zone by pressing the corresponding
button:
The airflow is directed towards the chest
The airflow is directed towards the foot-
well.
The airflow is directed at the windscreen.
Defrost/demist function
The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di-
rected at the windscreen and air recirculation
is automatically switched off. To defrost the
windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi-
fied at temperatures over approximately
+3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum
output.
Residual heat
When the engine is still warm but the ignition
switched off, the residual heat of the engine
can be used to keep the vehicle interior
warm. The function is disabled after 30 mi-
nutes or when the charge of the 12-volt bat-
tery is low.
Air conditioning settings for the rear seats
The air conditioning settings for the rear seats
can be changed using the front control pan-
el. Press the button again to switch the func-
tion off or do not touch any other button for
around 10 seconds.
Auxiliary heating
›››
page 168.
Heated rear window
This only works when the engine is running
and switches off automatically after a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
It should be switched off as soon as the glass
is demisted. By saving electrical power you
can also save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish-
ed.
Windscreen heating
It only works when the engine is running and
switches off automatically after a few mi-
nutes.
Air recirculation
›››
page 166
Seat heating
›››
page 167
»
163
Operation
Switching off
Pr
ess button or manually set the fan to .
Note
●
Not all Climatr
onic buttons are opera-
tional in mode.
●
The
button is locked in defrost mode.
Manual air conditioning controls
Fig. 174 In the centre console: manual air condi-
tioning contr
ols.
Cooling mode
Press the button to switch on or off the cool-
ing system.
Temperature
1
Turn the control to adjust the temperature.
F
an
Turning the regulator
2
sets the fan power.
At l
evel 0 the fan and manual air conditioning
are disconnected. Level 4 is the maximum.
Air distribution / / / /
Turning regulator
3
distributes the air to the
desir
ed zone:
The airflow is directed towards the chest
The airflow is directed towards the foot-
well.
The airflow is directed towards the wind-
screen and the footwell area.
Defrost/demist function
When control
3
is in position the air fl
ow is
directed at the windscreen and air recircula-
tion is disconnected automatically or not ac-
tivated. Increase the fan power to clear the
windscreen of condensation as soon as pos-
sible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling sys-
tem will automatically switch on.
Maximum cooling power
When the regulator is in position air re-
circulation and the cooling system connect
automatically.
Heated rear window
This only works when the engine is running
and switches off automatically after a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
164
Air conditioning
It should be switched off as soon as the glass
is demist
ed. By saving electrical power you
can also save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish-
ed.
Auxiliary heating
›››
page 168.
Air recirculation
›››
page 166
Seat heating
›››
page 167
Controls on the rear seats
Fig. 175
Centre console: details of the rear
seat contr
ols.
●
Turn the control
A
to adjust the tempera-
t
ure.
●
Turn control
B
to adjust the air flow.
Climate control usage instructions
The interior cooling system only works when
the engine is running and f
an is switched on.
Economic use of the air conditioning
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compressor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption.
The air conditioner operates most effectively
with the windows and the panoramic sliding
sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has
heated up after standing in the sun for some
time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-
ly by opening the windows and the panoram-
ic sliding sunroof briefly.
Change the temperature unit (Climatron-
ic)
The temperature indication can be changed
from Celsius to Fahrenheit using the instru-
ment panel menu of the infotainment system
›››
page 74.
The cooling system cannot be activated
If the air conditioning system cannot be
switched on, this may be caused by the fol-
lowing:
●
The engine is not running.
●
The fan is switched off.
●
The air conditioner fuse has blown.
●
The outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +3°C (+38°F).
●
The air conditioner compressor has been
temporarily switched off because the engine
coolant temperature is too high.
●
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
conditioner checked by a specialised work-
shop.
Special characteristics
If the humidity and temperature outside the
vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
»
165
Operation
the evaporator in the cooling system and
f
orm a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
normal and does not indicate a leak!
Note
After starting the engine, any residual hu-
midit
y in the air conditioner could mist over
the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-
tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-
screen of condensation.
Air vents
To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-
l
ation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must
remain open.
●
Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in the
required direction to open and close the air
vents. When the thumbwheel is in the posi-
tion, the corresponding air vent is closed.
●
Change the air direction using the ventila-
tion grille lever.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air
vents in the instrument panel, in the footwells
and in the rear area of the passenger com-
partment.
Note
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen-
sitiv
e objects should never be placed in
front of the air outlets as they may be dam-
aged or made unsuit
able for use by the air.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient
air fr
om entering the interior.
When the outside temperature is very high,
selecting manual air recirculation mode for a
short period refreshes the vehicle interior
more quickly.
For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is
switched off when the button is pressed
or the air distributor is turned to .
Manual air recirculation mode
●
Manual air conditioning: Pr
ess the button
on the control panel to connect or dis-
connect the manual air recirculation mode.
●
Climatronic: Press the button until its
left LED lights up.
Climatronic automatic air recirculation
mode
With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-
tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-
terior is enabled. If the system detects a high
concentration of hazardous substances in the
ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically. When the level of impurities
drops to within a normal range, recirculation
mode is switched off.
The system is unable to detect unpleasant
smells.
●
To activate the automatic air recirculation
mode press the button on the control
panel until its right LED lights up.
The air recirculation will not connect auto-
matically in versions without humidity sensor
and in the following external conditions:
●
The outside temperature is lower than +3°C
(+38°F).
●
The cooling system is switched off and the
outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).
●
The cooling system is switched off, the out-
side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and
the windscreen wipers are switched on.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Intro-
duction on page 161.
●
If the cooling system is switched off and
air r
ecirculation mode switched on, the
windows can mist over very quickly, con-
siderably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it
is not required.
166
Air conditioning
CAUTION
Do not smoke when air recirculation is
s
witched on in vehicles with an air condi-
tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the
cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-
vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and
pollen filter, leading to a permanently un-
pleasant smell.
Note
Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-
v
ated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant
odours from entering the vehicle interior
when it is in reverse and while the automat-
ic windscreen wiper is working.
Seat heating
The seat cushions can be heated electrically
when the ignition is s
witched on. The backrest
is also heated in some versions.
With the engine on, the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be heated electrically.
Control seat heating
●
Press buttons or on the control panel
to turn on the seat heating as high as possi-
ble.
●
Press buttons or repeatedly to adjust it
to the required level.
●
To turn off the seat heating, press button
or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.
Cases in which the heat seating should
not be switched on
Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the
following conditions are met:
●
The seat is not occupied.
●
The seat has a cover.
●
A child seat has been installed on the seat.
●
The seat cushion is wet or damp.
●
The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-
er than +25°C (77°F).
WARNING
People who cannot perceive pain or tem-
per
ature because of medications, paralysis
or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have
a limited perception of these, may suffer
burns to the back, buttocks or legs when
using seat heating.
●
People with limited pain and temperature
thresholds must never use seat heating.
●
If an abnormality in the device's temper-
ature control is detected, have it checked
by a specialist workshop.
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can
adv
ersely affect the operation of the seat
heating, increasing the risk of burns.
●
Mak
e sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
using the seat heater.
●
Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.
●
Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
on the seat.
●
Do not spill liquids on the seat.
CAUTION
●
T
o avoid damaging the heating elements
of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on
the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single
point on the seat cushion or backrest.
●
Liquids, sharps objects and insulating
materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can
damage the seat heating.
●
In the event of smells, switch off the seat
heating immediately and have it inspected
by a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The seat heating should remain on only
when needed. Otherwise
, it is an unneces-
sary fuel waste.
167
Operation
Auxiliary heating (additional
heating)
Intr
oduction
The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve-
hicl
e's tank and can be used while you are
driving and when the vehicle is stationary.
The auxiliary heater can be switched on using
the fast heating button of the air conditioning
controls, with the remote control or by previ-
ously programming a departure time in the
auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment sys-
tem.
In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched
on, you can defog the windscreen and leave
it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be-
fore you start driving.
If the outside temperature is very high, the ve-
hicle interior can be ventilated with the en-
gine off using the auxiliary heater.
WARNING
The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain
carbon mono
xide, an odourless and colour-
less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause
people to lose consciousness. It can also
cause death.
●
Never switch on the auxiliary heater or
leave it running in enclosed spaces or
areas with no ventilation.
●
Ne
ver programme the auxiliary heater so
that it switches itself on and is running in an
enclosed space or an area with no ventila-
tion.
WARNING
The components of the auxiliary heater are
e
xtremely hot and could cause a fire.
●
Always park your vehicle so that no part
of the exhaust system can come in contact
with easily flammable materials that might
be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.
CAUTION
Never place food, medicines or other tem-
per
ature-sensitive objects close to the air
vents. Food, medicines and other objects
sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged
or made unsuitable for use by the air com-
ing from the vents.
Switching the auxiliary heater on
and off
Connection
The independent heating can be connect
ed
in the following ways:
●
Press the fast heating button on the air con-
ditioning control panel
›››
page 162. The
control lamp of the button will light up.
●
Press button on the remote control
›››
page 169.
●
Automatically scheduling a departure time
›››
page 170.
Disconnection
The independent heating can be switched off
in the following ways:
●
Press the fast heating button on the air con-
ditioner's control panel . The control lamp
on the button turns off.
●
Press button on the radio-operated re-
mote control
›››
page 169.
●
Automatically at the scheduled departure
time or after the programmed operating time
has elapsed
›››
page 170.
●
Automatically when the control lamp
(fuel level indicator) lights up
›››
page 310.
●
Automatically when the 12-volt battery
charge drops too low
›››
page 324.
Things to note
Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will
continue to operate for a short period of time
in order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys-
tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes.
168
Air conditioning
Radio-operated remote control
Fig. 176
Auxiliary heating: remote control.
Fig. 176
S
witch the auxiliary heater on
Switch the auxiliary heater off
Control lamp
Antenna
If the buttons of the remote control are press-
ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxili-
ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of
range or when the control lamp is flashing.
To switch on and off the independent heating,
the button must be pressed and held for ap-
proximately 1 second.
Control lamp on the remote control
When the buttons are pressed, the control
lamp on the remote control
1
provides the
user with diff
erent information:
1
2
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: The auxiliary heat
er has been
switched on using the button.
●
In red: The auxiliary heater has been
switched off con with button .
Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: No on signal has been received.
The remote control is out of range. Move
closer to the vehicle.
●
In red: No off signal has been received. The
remote control is out of range. Move closer to
the vehicle.
Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: The independent heating is
blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al-
most empty, the 12-volt battery charge is
very low or there is a fault.
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
●
In orange (then in green or in red): The re-
mote control battery is almost flat. However,
the on or off signal has been received.
●
In orange (then flashes green or red): The
remote control battery is almost flat. No on or
off signal has been received.
Flashes for around 5 seconds
●
In orange: The remote control battery is flat.
No on or off signal has been received.
Changing the battery of the radio-operat-
ed remote control
When pressing the buttons, if the control
lamp of the remote
1
flashes for approx. 5
or
ange or does not light up, the batteries
must be replaced.
The battery is located beneath a cover on
the back of the remote control.
●
To open the cover, turn the slot to the left
using a flat, blunt object (e.g. a coin).
●
Remove the old battery.
●
Insert the new battery. When doing so, take
into account the polarity and use batteries of
the same type
›››
.
R
ange
The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remote
control, when fitted with new batteries, has a
range of several hundred metres. Obstacles
between the remote control and the vehicle,
bad weather conditions and discharged bat-
teries can considerably reduce the range of
the remote control.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-
t
er or any other button battery can cause
serious and even fatal injuries within a very
short time.
●
Always keep the remote control, keyrings
with batteries, the spare batteries, button
»
169
Operation
batteries and all other batteries over 20
mm out of r
each of children.
●
If you suspect that someone may have
swallowed a battery, seek immediate med-
ical attention.
CAUTION
●
The r
adio frequency remote control con-
tains electronic components. Therefore,
avoid getting it wet and exposing it to
knocks or direct sunlight.
●
The use of inappropriate batteries may
damage the radio frequency remote con-
trol. For this reason, always replace the
used battery with another of the same volt-
age, size and specifications.
For the sake of the environment
●
Pl
ease dispose of your used batteries
correctly and with respect for the environ-
ment.
●
The remote control battery may contain
perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions
regarding disposal.
●
Care should be taken so as not to oper-
ate the remote control unintentionally so
as to prevent the auxiliary heater being
switched on accidentally.
Programming the auxiliary heater
Before pr
ogramming it, check that the vehi-
cle's date and time are set correctly
›››
.
Opening the Auxiliary heater menu on
the instrument panel
●
From the main menu, select the Auxiliary
heater submenu and pr
ess the
but-
t
on on the wiper lever.
●
OR: press the
or buttons on the
multifunction st
eering wheel until the Auxil-
iary heater menu is displayed.
Function button: function
Activate, Deactivate: The auxiliary heat
er can
be set to come on automatically if required. Select a
timer for this purpose:
– The timer will be marked with a .
– Only one timer can be sel
ected at a time. If a
timer has been selected, the screen will display
Program. ON. If no timer has been selected,
the instrument panel display will show
Prog. OFF.
– To change a programmed timer you must ei-
ther select a different timer or select Deacti-
vate.
Timer 1 - 2 - 3: Thr
ee different timers (hh.mm)
can later be selected using the On option. If the auxil-
iary heater is to be switched on for just a certain day
of the week, select the day of the week and the time
for the auxiliary heater to come on.
Function button: function
Running time: The oper
ating time may vary be-
tween 10 and 60 minutes and can be set to 5-minute
intervals.
Operating mode: Set t
o heat or ventilate the vehi-
cle interior when the auxiliary heater is switched on.
Day: Set the curr
ent day of the week.
Factory settings: The pr
edefined factory val-
ues for the functions of this menu are restored.
Back: This r
eturns to the main menu.
Checking the programming
When a depart
ure time is activated and the
ignition is switched off the control lamp of the
fast heating button
lights up for approxi-
mately 10 seconds.
WARNING
Never programme the auxiliary heater so
that it s
witches itself on and is running in an
enclosed space or an area with no ventila-
tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes
contain carbon monoxide, an odourless
and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide
can cause people to lose consciousness. It
can also cause death.
170
Air conditioning
Usage instructions
The auxiliary heater exhaust system located
bel
ow the vehicle must be kept clear of snow,
mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes
must be able to exit freely. The emissions
generated by the auxiliary heater are re-
moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath
the vehicle.
On heating the vehicle interior, depending on
the outside temperature, the warm air is first
directed at the windscreen and then to the
rest of the vehicle interior through the air
vents. Directing the diffusers – towards the
windows for example – can affect air distribu-
tion.
Depending on the outside temperature, the
temperature at which the auxiliary heater
warms the vehicle interior may be somewhat
higher if the heating or air conditioner tem-
perature control is set to maximum before
switching the heating on.
Depending on the engine, vehicles with auxili-
ary heater may be fitted with a second bat-
tery in the luggage compartment that is re-
sponsible for powering the auxiliary heater.
When the auxiliary heater is not switched
on
●
The auxiliary heater requires about as
much po
wer as the dipped beam headlights.
If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the
auxiliary heater switches off automatically
and cannot be switched on. This avoids prob-
lems when starting the engine.
●
The heating must be activated every time
you want to set off. Similarly, the departure
time must reactivate each time.
●
The control lamp (fuel level indicator)
lights up.
Note
●
Noises will be hear
d while the auxiliary
heater is running.
●
When the air humidity is high and the in-
side temperature low, condensation from
the heating and ventilating system may
evaporate when the auxiliary heater is
switched on. In this case, steam may be re-
leased from underneath the vehicle. This
does not mean that there is a vehicle mal-
function.
●
If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a
slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater
may be restricted if the fuel tank level is
low (just above the reserve level).
●
If the auxiliary heater is used a number of
times for a long period of time, the 12-volt
battery will lose its charge. To recharge the
battery, the vehicle must be driven for a
number of kilometres from time to time. As
a guideline: the journey should last approx-
imately as long as the heater was connec-
ted.
●
At t
emperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the
auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto-
matically when the engine is switched on.
The auxiliary heater is switched off again
after a certain time.
171
Infotainment system
Infotainment system
Intr
oduction
Safety warnings
Safety warnings regarding the Info-
tainment system
Only operate the infotainment system and its
v
arious functions when the traffic situation
really permits this.
WARNING
●
Bef
ore starting the trip, you should famili-
arise yourself with the different infotain-
ment system functions.
●
High audio volume may represent a dan-
ger to you and to others. Hearing may be
impaired if the volume is too high, even for
short periods of time.
●
Changes to the Infotainment system set-
tings should be made when the car is stop-
ped, or by a passenger.
WARNING
Current traffic requires maximum attention
fr
om public road users. Distracting the driv-
er in any way can lead to an accident and
cause injuries. Operating the Infotainment
system can distract your attention from the
tr
affic.
●
Always drive carefully and responsibly.
●
Select volume settings that allow you to
hear sounds from outside the vehicle at all
times (e.g. emergency services sirens and
horns).
WARNING
The volume level may suddenly change
when you s
witch audio source or connect a
new audio source.
●
Lower the basic volume before connect-
ing or switching audio sources.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications sho
wn on the navigation system
may differ from the current traffic situation.
●
Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the navigation system.
WARNING
Connecting, inserting or removing a data
medium whil
e driving can distract your at-
tention from the traffic and cause an acci-
dent.
WARNING
Place the connecting cables of external
equipment so that they do not int
erfere
with the driver’s mobility.
WARNING
External devices that are loose or not prop-
erly secur
ed could move around the pas-
senger compartment during a sharp ma-
noeuvre or accident.
●
Avoid placing external devices on the
doors, windscreen, steering wheel, instru-
ment panel, the backs of the seats, on top
of or near the area marked “AIRBAG” or be-
tween these areas and the occupants.
They could cause serious injury in an acci-
dent, especially when the airbags inflate.
WARNING
The armrest must always remain closed
during the journey as it coul
d restrict the
driver’s movements.
WARNING
Opening the CD or DVD player can lead to
injuries fr
om invisible laser radiation.
●
Have CD players repaired only by a
qualified workshop.
172
Introduction
CAUTION
The Infotainment system can be damaged
by the incorr
ect insertion of a data storage
device or the insertion of an incompatible
data storage device.
●
When inserting a data storage device,
make sure it is correctly positioned.
●
Applying force may irreparably damage
the memory card slot locking mechanism.
●
Only use compatible memory cards.
●
When inserting and removing CDs, al-
ways hold them at right angles to the front
of the CD drive without tilting so as not to
scratch them.
●
If a CD is inserted while another is al-
ready in the unit or being ejected, the CD
drive may be damaged. Always wait until
the data medium is completely ejected.
CAUTION
Foreign objects stuck to a CD, or if it is not
r
ound, may damage the player.
●
Only clean, standard 12-cm CDs should
be used.
–
Do not affix stickers or other items to
the data medium. Stickers may peel off
and damage the drive.
–
Do not use printable data media. Prin-
ted labels and coverings may peel off
and damage the CD drive.
–
Do not inser
t 8-cm “single” CDs or ir-
regularly shaped CDs.
–
Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual
Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker
than normal CDs.
CAUTION
The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-
aged if the v
olume is too high or the sound
is distorted.
Note
For the proper functioning of the Infotain-
ment syst
em it is important that the date
and time set in the vehicle are correct.
173
Infotainment system
Overview of the unit
Media Syst
em Plus / Navi System
Fig. 177
Overview of the controls. The infotainment
syst
em is available in different versions that may
have different titles and functions of some buttons
Volume. Off/on
›
››
page 176
Infotainment buttons:
–
: Radio Mode (change of band fre-
quency
›››
page 193.
–
: Media mode (audio sources)
›››
page 202.
–
: Phone mode
›››
page 224.
–
: Voice control
›››
page 181.
1
2
–
: Mut
e the sound from the audio
source.
–
: Eject the CD
›››
page 202.
–
: Navigation Mode
›››
page 213.
–
: Menu and system settings
›››
page 179.
–
: Traffic reports
›››
page 220.
–
: Volume and sound settings
›››
page 180.
–
: Selection from the main menu
›››
page 175.
Touchscreen
›››
page 177
CD drive
›››
page 202
Settings button (search and selection)
›››
page 176
Slots for memory cards
›››
page 209
Proximity sensor
›››
page 179
3
4
5
6
7
174
Introduction
Main menus
These menus depend on the equipment in
question.
Radio
›
››
page 193
RADIO main menu
›
››
page 193
RDS radio data services
›››
page 194
Digital radio mode
›››
page 195
Memory buttons
›››
page 196
Save station logos
›››
page 196
Select, tune and save stations
›››
page 197
SCAN automatic playback
›››
page 199
TP traffic information
›››
page 199
Settings
›››
page 200
Media
›
››
page 202
Data and file formats
›
››
page 203
Playback order
›››
page 204
›››
page 204
Change the media source
›››
page 206
Change track
›››
page 206
Selecting a track from a track list
›››
page 207
Insert or remove a CD or DVD
›››
page 208
Memory card
›››
page 209
External data storage device connected to the USB
port
›››
page 209
External audio source with Bluetooth®
›››
page 210
Images
›››
page 211
Settings
›››
page 212
Navigation
›
››
page 213
New destination
›
››
page 214
Route options
›››
page 215
›››
page 216
My destinations
›››
page 216
Special destinations (POI)
›››
page 218
View
›››
page 219
Split screen
›››
page 219
Map display
›››
page 220
Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide
›››
page 220
Import vCards
›››
page 221
Navigation with images
›››
page 222
Road signs
›››
page 222
Route guidance in Demo mode
›››
page 222
Settings
›››
page 222
Traffic
›
››
page 220
Traffic information (TP)
›
››
page 199
Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide
›››
page 220
Telephone
›
››
page 224
Bluetooth®
›
››
page 225
Tethering
›››
page 226
Function buttons
›››
page 228
Enter number
›››
page 230
Agenda
›››
page 231
Short messages (SMS)
›››
page 233
Call list
›››
page 234
Quick dial keys
›››
page 235
Settings
›››
page 235
Sound
›
››
page 180
Full Link
›
››
page 185
Requirements
›
››
page 186
Activation of Full Link
›››
page 187
MirrorLink®
›››
page 190
Apple CarPlay™
›››
page 188
Android Auto™
›››
page 189
Frequently Asked Questions
›››
page 191
Images
›››
page 211
Settings
›
››
page 179
175
Infotainment system
General instructions for use
Intr
oduction
If the setup is changed, this may change the
displ
ay on the screen and the Infotainment
system may behave in a manner different to
that described in this manual.
Note
●
Just pr
ess a button or the screen to use
the infotainment system's functions.
●
The equipment’s software depends on
the market in question, so it is possible that
not all of the function buttons or described
functions are available. The equipment is
not faulty if a function button is missing.
●
Due to country-specific legislation, cer-
tain functions may not be available on the
screen when the vehicle is travelling above
a certain speed.
●
Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-
cle may cause noise in the speakers.
●
Restrictions on the use of devices using
Bluetooth® technology may apply in some
countries. For further information, contact
the local authorities.
●
On vehicles with ParkPilot, the audio vol-
ume is automatically lowered when reverse
gear is selected. The volume can be low-
ered in the menu Sound > Volume.
Rotary push buttons and infotain-
ment butt
ons
Rotary push buttons
The l
eft rotary push button is the on/off
button if pressed and the volume knob if
turned.
The right rotary pushbutton is the search but-
ton if turned and the selection button if press-
ed.
Infotainment buttons
The buttons on the unit are shown in this
manual with the word “infotainment button”
and their function within a rectangle, for ex-
ample, the infotainment button .
The Infotainment buttons are used by press-
ing them or pressing and holding.
Switching on and off
When turned on, the system it starts up with
the v
olume at which it was turned off, as long
as it does not exceed the preset maximum
start-up volume
›››
page 180.
The unit will switch off automatically when
the key is removed from the ignition or when
the on/off button is pressed (depending on
the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-
fotainment system is switched on again, it will
switch off automatically after approximately
30 minutes (switch-off delay).
Note
●
The Inf
otainment system is a part of the
vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-
cle.
●
If the battery has been disconnected, the
ignition must be activated before switching
on the Infotainment system.
Changing the basic volume
Increasing or decreasing the volume or
muting the sound
R
aise the volume: turn the volume control
clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel upward .
Lower the volume: turn the volume control
counterclockwise or move the left thumb-
wheel on the multifunction steering wheel
downward .
Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-
ume bar on the screen. The volume can be
controlled using the steering wheel controls.
In this case, the changes in volume are dis-
played on the instrument panel by a volume
bar.
It is possible to preset certain volume settings
and adjustments
›››
page 180.
176
Introduction
Muting the Infotainment system sound
●
Turn the volume control anti-cl
ockwise
until it displays .
●
OR: press the
1)
infotainment button.
●
OR: press the left wheel of the multifunction
steering wheel.
Playback is paused while in Media mode. The
screen displays .
Operation of the function buttons
and the instructions on the screen
Fig. 178
View of some of the function buttons
on the scr
een.
Active areas of the touchscreen that call up a
cert
ain function are called “function buttons”.
These buttons are operated by pressing them
on the screen or holding them down.
The function buttons appear in this manual as
a “function button” and a button symbol
inside a rectangle
.
These activ
ate functions or open submenus.
The currently selected menu is displayed in
the title bar
›››
Fig. 178
A
of the submenus.
Inactiv
e (grey) function buttons cannot be se-
lected.
Increase or decrease the size of the im-
ages displayed on the screen
The size of the navigation map image and im-
age views can be enlarged or reduced. To do
this, slide 2 fingers across the screen to sepa-
rate them or bring them together.
Overview of screen and function buttons
Display and function buttons: operation
and eff
ect
A
The title bar shows the selected menu
and other function butt
ons.
B
Press it to open another menu.
Display and function buttons: operation
and eff
ect
C
The scroll bar is shown on the right. Scroll
the bar by sliding your finger v
ertically on
it
›››
page 178, Open list entries and
search in lists.
D
Movable cursor: Move the cursor by slid-
ing your finger across the screen.
OR: Pr
ess a point on the screen where
you want the sound to be directed.
Fixed crosshair: Pr
ess on the arrows to
move the sound around according to your
preferences.
OR: Pr
ess the central button to centre the
stereo sound in the centre of the passen-
ger compartment
Press it on some lists to move up a level,
one by one.
Button to return to the previous menu or
move up through the folder structure.
When pressed, a pop-up window opens
(options window) which displays other
setup options.
/
Some functions are activated or deac-
tiv
ated by pressing this box.
OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.
»
1)
Depends on the device.
177
Infotainment system
Display and function buttons: operation
and eff
ect
×
Press to close a pop-up window or an in-
put windo
w.
/
Press them to change the setup adjust-
ments one at a time
.
Move the scroll button across the screen
by sliding your finger
.
Open list entries and search in lists
Fig. 179
Entries on a setup menu list.
The entries on a list can be activated by
pr
essing them on the screen or by using the
settings button.
Mark list entries using the setup button
and open them
●
Turn the adjustment knob to search and se-
lect from the list.
●
Press the setup button to activate the
marked entry on the list.
Search lists (scrolling the screen)
The scroll bar is shown on the right and its
size depends on the entries in the list
›››
Fig. 179
1
.
●
On the bar: Pr
ess above or below the mark
or slide your finger vertically over the mark
until you reach the desired position.
Input window with on-screen key-
pad
Fig. 180
Text input in entry mask.
The on-screen keypad is used for functions
such as ent
ering an memory name, selecting
a destination address or entering a search
term for searching long lists.
The input line with cursor is located in the top
bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed
here.
Input windows for “free text input”
In the input masks for open text, you may en-
ter letters, numbers and characters in any
combination.
Input windows for selecting a saved entry
(e.g. selection of a destination address)
It is only possible to enter a sequence of let-
ters, numbers and characters that matches a
stored entry.
Matches are suggested on the input line. In
the case of compound names, it is necessary
to enter a space.
Overview of the function buttons
Function button: operation and effect
1
Zip code
a)
: Pr
ess this button to enter a zip
code in the Navigation mode.
123
: Press this button to open the num-
ber and special character input screen.
ABC : Press this button to go back to the
l
etter input screen.
178
Introduction
Function button: operation and effect
2
Press this button to change the keypad
l
anguage. Keypad languages can be se-
lected from the menu system setup.
3
Displays the number and opens the list of
remaining selectable entries that match
the entered text.
Letters
and dig-
its
Press them to copy them into the input
line
.
Letters
with
If the button is held down, special char-
act
ers based on that letter are displayed.
Press the desired character to enter it.
Some special char
acters can be written
out instead (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”).
Press this button to change between up-
percase and lowercase.
Space bar
OK
Press this button to confirm the sugges-
ted input and close the input screen.
Deletes characters on the input line from
right to left.
Press and hold to delete several charac-
ters.
Close the input window.
a)
Depends on the market and unit in question.
Proximity sensor
The Infotainment system is equipped with an
int
egrated proximity sensor
›››
Fig. 177
7
.
The scr
een switches from display mode to
automatic operation when your hand moves
toward it. In operation mode, the function but-
tons are automatically highlighted to facili-
tate their use.
Additional information and display
options
The displays appearing on the screen may
v
ary depending on the settings, and may dif-
fer from those described here.
The status bar on the screen can display, for
example, the current time and outside tem-
perature.
All displays can be viewed only after com-
pletely restarting the Infotainment system.
Menu and system settings
The settings that can be selected varies de-
pending on the country and the equipment in
question, and on the v
ehicle's equipment.
●
Press the infotainment button and then
press the Settings
function button.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment button.
Press the function button of the main menu or
the functions for which you want to change
the settings. All settings are automatically
applied when the menus are closed.
Function buttons
Screen : To change the screen settings.
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) : If this function is
active and the infotainment system is not used,
the screen will automatically switch off after ap-
prox. 10 seconds. Pressing the screen or pressing
one of the infotainment buttons will turn the
screen on again.
Brightness : To select the brightness level of the
scr
een.
Day / Night
: To select the type of display (Day,
Night or Automatic).
Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a
function butt
on is pressed is active.
Proximity sensor
: The proximity sensors are active.
Al
so see
›››
page 179, Proximity sensor.
Show clock in standby mode
: In standby mode, the
time is displ
ayed on the infotainment system
screen.
Date and time
: Change the time and date settings.
Clock time source : To select the time source (GPS
or manual).
»
179
Infotainment system
Function buttons
GPS : The time and date can be selected using
the T
ime zone
function button. In this case, the
Time and Date function buttons for manual
entry will not be active.
Manual : The time and date can be set manual-
ly using the Time and Dat
e
function buttons.
Time : To set the time manually.
Time zone : To adjust the desired time zone.
Time format : To select the time display format (12
or 2
4 hours).
Date
: To set the current date.
Date format : To select the date display format
(DD.MM.YYYY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY).
Language : To select the desired language for texts
and phr
ases in the voice control system.
Keyboard
a)
: T
o select the type (alphabetical or key-
board).
Additional keypad languages
a)
: T
o select additional
keyboard languages.
Units
: To set the units of measurement of the vehi-
cl
e's displays: distance, speed, temperature, volume,
consumption and pressure.
Data transfer for SEAT apps
a)
External apps : The mobile device app profile inter-
f
ace is active. Deactivating this function avoids
other settings.
Function buttons
Operation via apps : Change the level of interaction
with apps.
Deactivate: This limits specific functions that
require a higher level of security.
Confirm : Allows 100% of functions of the app,
and cert
ain specific actions on the Infotain-
ment system have to be confirmed.
Allow
. Allows all available functions to be exe-
cut
ed from the app.
Voice control
: To change the voice control settings
›
››
page 181.
Remove safely
: To eject the data medium (SD/USB
car
d) from the system. After correctly ejecting the
data storage device from the system, the function
button becomes inactive (grey colour).
Factory settings
: When the original factory settings
ar
e restored, all inputs and settings that are made
are deleted, depending on the selected settings.
Bluetooth
: To change the Bluetooth® settings
›
››
page 235 .
System information
: Display of the system information
(de
vice number, hardware and software versions).
Update
a)
: T
o update the navigation data, do
›››
page 213 No remove the memory card while
the navigation data are being installed.
Copyright
: Information about copyright.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
Note
For the proper functioning of the Infotain-
ment syst
em it is important that the date
and time set in the vehicle are correct.
Volume and sound settings
The settings that can be selected varies de-
pending on the country and the equipment in
question, and on the v
ehicle's equipment.
●
Press the Infotainment button
and then
press the Sound
function button.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment button
1)
.
●
Press the main menu function button for the
settings that have to be changed. All settings
are applied instantly.
Overview of screen and function buttons
Function buttons
Volume : To change the volume settings.
Warnings
a)
: To set the playback volume of warn-
ings, such as traffic announcements.
Navigation announcements
a)
: T
o set the playback
volume of audio driving recommendations.
Voice control
a)
: T
o set the playback volume of
voice control.
1)
Depends on the equipment in question
180
Introduction
Function buttons
Maximum switch-on volume : To set the equipment's
maximum s
witch-on volume.
Speed-dependent volume adjustment
(GALA): To set
the extent to which the volume is adjusted de-
pending on the speed. The volume of the audio
will increase automatically as the speed of the
vehicle increases.
Bluetooth audio : To set the playback volume of
the audio sour
ces connected by Bluetooth®
(Low, Medium or High). Also see
›››
page 180,
Overview of screen and function buttons.
Equaliser
b)
: T
o adjust the sound properties.
Balance - Fader
b)
: T
o adjust the sound distribution.
The cursor indicates the current sound distribution in
the passenger compartment. To modify the sound
distribution, briefly press on the desired position in
the passenger compartment view or use the arrow
keys for a step-by-step modification. To centre sound
distribution in the passenger compartment view,
press the central function button located between
the arrows.
Subwoofer
: Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer.
Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a func-
tion butt
on is pressed is active.
No navigation announcements during calls
a)
: During a
t
elephone conversation, audio driving recommenda-
tions will not be given.
Function buttons
Dynaudio sound properties
a)
: T
o select or adjust the
sound properties.
Individual
: Individual adjustment of sound prop-
erties.
Profile : To adjust the sound properties by select-
ing one of the 4 pr
eset sound profiles ( Authentic
,
Soft , Dynamic or Speech ).
Dynaudio sound focus
a)
: T
o adjust the sound distribu-
tion (Balance - Fader).
Individual
: To adjust the sound distribution. The
cr
osshair indicates the current distribution of
sound in the passenger compartment. To modify
the sound distribution, briefly press on the de-
sired position in the passenger compartment
view or use the arrow keys for a step-by-step
modification. To centre sound distribution in the
passenger compartment view, press the func-
tion button located between the arrows.
Profile
: 4 preset sound distributions can be se-
l
ected, which are optimized for the indicated po-
sitions ( Front left
, Fr
ont right
, R
ear
or
Fr
ont and Rear
). Select the desired sound distri-
bution by pr
essing it.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
b)
The function is not available in equipment with Dy-
naudio
. The corresponding settings will be changed in
the Dynaudio menus.
Adjust the playback volume of external
audio sources
If you need to increase the playback volume
for the external audio source, first lower the
base volume on the infotainment system.
If the sound from the connected audio source
is very low, increase the output volume on
the external audio source. If this is not
enough, change the input volume to medium
or high.
If the sound from the connected external au-
dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the
output volume on the external audio source.
If this is not enough, change the input vol-
ume to medium or low.
Voice control
Introduction
The Navigation
1)
, T
elephone, Radio and Me-
dia menu functions, can be activated by giv-
ing the corresponding commands (voice
commands).
Instructions are given during voice control to
facilitate the operation. These instructions will
»
1)
This depends on the country and unit in ques-
tion.
181
Infotainment system
be given as a long or short dialogue, depend-
ing on the settings
›
››
page 184.
Available languages
Voice control is available for most languages
that can be set in the infotainment system.
If voice control is not available for the lan-
guage you wish to set, a message is dis-
played on the screen when you try to acti-
vate it.
Voice control will be used in the set language
of the infotainment system.
●
Set the desired language in the System
Settings menu
›››
page 179.
Note
Voice control is not available during a tele-
phone call. Incoming call
s interrupt voice
control.
Tips for voice control
To use voice control correctly, keep the fol-
l
owing in mind:
●
Avoid external and background noise (such
as conversations in the vehicle). Keep all win-
dows, doors and the sunroof closed.
●
Do not direct the air flow from the outlets
towards the interior lining of the roof.
●
Speak the commands when the audio and
audio signals have finished playing, and the
symbol
›››
Fig. 181
1
is displayed on the
scr
een.
●
If possible, speak clearly at a normal
speed. If you pronounce words or figures
confusingly or mumble syllables, the system
will not be able to recognise them.
●
Speak in a normal tone without stressing
the words too much and avoid long pauses.
Do not articulate or emphasize too much, or
mumble, whisper or shout
●
Speak a little louder if you are driving at
high speed.
●
Phone numbers can be spoken digit by digit
or in blocks of 1-999.
●
After a few commands, the voice control
adapts to the speaker and recognises his/her
commands better.
Using voice control
Fig. 181 Voice control: indication of the help
menu el
ements that can be pronounced.
Switching on the speech control system
●
To activate voice control, briefly press the
inf
otainment button or button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
When voice control is activated, a rising audio
signal is heard.
A help menu is displayed with the most im-
portant orders in the active mode at the time
(e.g. Navigation)
›››
Fig. 181
A
. Other ele-
ments that can be spok
en are shown in red
on the corresponding screen
›››
Fig. 181. The
help menu indication can be activated and
deactivated in the Voice control set-
tings menu
›››
page 184.
182
Introduction
Speak commands
Speak the commands when the audio and
audio signal
s have finished playing, and the
symbol
1
is displayed on the screen.
●
Say the desired command (e.g. “St
art intro-
duction” ) to listen to the voice control intro-
duction. See also
›››
page 183, Introduction
to voice control and
›››
page 183, Voice
control help.
●
The system speech will guide you through
the following dialogue.
●
When an operation is completed, voice
control ends with a downward audio signal.
●
To interrupt a voice control phrase and say
the next command directly, briefly press the
infotainment button or button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
The displayed lists are numbered if voice
control is active. The figures are shown on the
left in the function buttons. Activate the de-
sired entry, e.g. figure 5, with the command
“line 5”.
The “Back” command always takes you to
the previous step of the dialogue.
Ending voice control
To end voice control, manually press and
hold, or briefly press the button of the in-
fotainment system twice (double click), or
press button on the multifunction steering
wheel until the downward audio signal
sounds.
Voice control also ends in the following cir-
cumstances:
●
When a function button is pressed.
●
When an infotainment button is pressed.
●
When activating ParkPilot.
●
With an incoming call.
●
With the reception of a traffic announce-
ment.
Introduction to voice control
We recommend listening to the introduction
to voice control when you use it for the first
time. The introduction is divided into sections
that can be listed to in the set or, or by select-
ing them.
Briefly press the infotainment button or
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Speak the command to start the introduction
in the language set in the infotainment sys-
tem and follow the instructions in the dia-
logue.
Language Order
German Einführung starten
English Start tutorial
English (U S) Start introduction
Language Order
Spanish Iniciar introducción
French Démarrer introduction
Portuguese Iniciar introdução
Italian Avvia introduzione
Czech Zahájit úvod
Dutch Snelcursus starten
Russian Запустить программ
у
обучения
Swedish Starta introduktion
Turkish Tanıtımı başlat
Polish Rozpocznij
wpr
owadzenie
Voice control help
The functions f
or which voice control is avail-
able have contextual help.
Select the function and briefly press infotain-
ment button , or button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
Say one of the following commands, de-
pending on the language set in the infotain-
ment system.
Language Order
German Hilfe
»
183
Infotainment system
Language Order
English Help
Spanish Help
French Aide
Portuguese Ajuda
Italian Aiuto
Czech Nápověda
Dutch Help
Russian Справка
Swedish Hjälp
Turkish Yardım
Polish Pomoc
Voice control settings
Open the Voice control settings menu
●
Press the infotainment
button.
●
Press the SETTINGS
function button.
●
Then press the V
oice control
function but-
t
on.
Function buttons
Dialogue style : To select the style of the dialogue.
Function buttons
Length : During voice control the phrases are
l
onger and additional verbal indications may be
given.
Short
: Some additional indications are removed
from the long dialogue.
Show possible commands : The help menu is displayed
with the commands of the activ
e function on the
screen when voice control is activated.
Voice control start tone
: When voice control is activa-
t
ed, an upward confirmation audio signal is heard.
Press to deactivate the audio signal.
Voice control end tone
: When voice control is deactiva-
t
ed, a downward confirmation audio signal is heard.
Press to deactivate the audio signal.
Dialogue input tone
: In addition to the indication a
short acoustic signal is hear
d on the screen as soon
as you can speak. Press to deactivate the audio sig-
nal.
Note
The volume of the voice control indications
can be adjust
ed in the Sound settings
menu
›››
page 180 or during a speech using
the volume control .
184
Connectivity
Connectivity
Full Link
Full Link t
echnology description
The Full Link connection is made through a
USB cabl
e.
The Full Link system brings together technol-
ogies that allow communication between the
Infotainment System and mobile devices:
●
MirrorLink®
●
Android Auto™
●
Apple CarPlay™
Int
erfaces
To access the Full Link system, press the Info-
tainment button (Full Link) and then se-
lect the Full Link context.
WARNING
Any applications that are not suitable or
e
xecute incorrectly may cause damage to
the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.
●
SEAT recommends the use of the Apps
that SEAT provides for this vehicle.
●
To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must
activate the Settings > Data transfer
for SEAT apps option.
●
The int
eraction level of the Apps on the
system must be: Allow.
●
Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-
cations from improper use.
●
Never make modifications to the applica-
tions.
●
Consult the instruction manual for the
mobile terminal.
WARNING
The use of applications while driving can
distr
act your attention from the traffic. Dis-
tracting the driver in any way can lead to
an accident and cause injuries.
●
Always drive carefully and responsibly.
CAUTION
●
In ar
eas where special regulations apply
or the use of mobiles forbidden, it must be
switched off at all times. The radiation pro-
duced by the mobile when switched on
may interfere with sensitive technical and
medical equipment, possibly resulting in
malfunction or damage to the equipment.
●
SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-
age caused to the vehicle as a result of the
use of applications that are of poor quality
or are defective, the inadequate program-
ming of the applications, the insufficient
coverage of the network, the loss of data
during transmission or the improper use of
mobiles.
Note
●
The use of Full Link t
echnology could in-
crease the amount you pay for data.
●
SEAT recommends having a high battery
charge on the device when connected to
Full Link.
●
SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,
the “Date and time” should be correctly
configured. Select Settings > Date and
Time.
●
SEAT apps are designed to communicate
with the vehicle and interact with it through
the Full Link connection.
●
You can find further information on the
technical requirements, compatible devi-
ces, suitable applications and availability
at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.
185
Infotainment system
Is Full Link blocked?
Fig. 182
Message on Infotainment system
scr
een.
If your vehicle does not have Full Link, you
can pur
chase it as an accessory at your
SEAT dealer
›››
Fig. 182.
Requirements for Full Link
Fig. 183 Full Link Requirements
Full Link Activated: If you do not hav
e
Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it
as an accessory at your Authorised Serv-
ice.
Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-
Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™
1
2
websites to confirm whether your phone
is compatibl
e with the system.
MirrorLink
–
Check smartphone compatibility:
www.mirrorlink.com/phones
–
MirrorLink® 1.1 or later
–
Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or
the CCC must be installed in the de-
vice.
Android Auto
–
Check smartphone compatibility. An-
droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/
–
Android 6.0 or later
–
Install Android Auto™ App for earlier ver-
sions of Android 10.
Apple CarPlay
–
Check smartphone compatibility. Apple
CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay
–
iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher
–
Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see
phone settings)
USB cable connecting car to phone:
Use the approved USB cable supplied
with the phone.
3
186
Connectivity
Activation of Full Link
Fig. 184
Centre front armrest: USB/AUX-IN in-
put.
Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not
necessary t
o establish the connection be-
tween the smartphone and Full Link.
Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-
sary to enable all of the app features
1)
.
Proceed as follows to use Full Link:
●
Switch on the Infotainment system
●
Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's
USB port using a USB cable
›››
Fig. 184.
●
On the main menu of the Full Link settings,
select
›››
page 191:
Enable data transfer for SEAT apps.
Preferred connection type: Choose be-
tween MirrorLink™ or Android Auto™ only
for Android™ phones compatible with
both technologies. For iOS (Apple™) sys-
tems, the connection is automatic if the
device is compatible.
Select the device.
Finally, a message will appear stating that
data transfer will commence when the device
is connected. Press OK. Once selected, the
technology compatible with your device can
be used.
Note
Depending on your smartphone, it may
hav
e to be unlocked for the connection to
occur.
What should I do if it does not con-
nect?
Restart the mobile device.
Check the USB cabl
e. Check whether the
USB cable is damaged. Check that neither
1
2
3
connection (USB/micro USB) is damaged or
worn.
Check that the USB ports are correctly
connected. Check that the USB port of the
vehicle and the device are not damaged
and/or deteriorated.
●
Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle).
●
Try with another compatible mobile device.
●
Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT au-
thorised service.
●
Have the mobile device repaired or replace
it.
1)
Using the data connection to transfer the
smartphone apps t
o Full Link may involve addi-
tional charges. Please check the charges with
your operator.
187
Infotainment system
Full Link main menu
Fig. 185 Full Link main menu.
List of devices : display of connected devi-
ces.
Disconnect : disconnect active connec-
tion.
Settings : Full Link settings.
1
2
3
Apple CarPlay™
Fig. 186 Apple CarPlay™ main menu
Apple CarPlay™ prior requirements
T
o use Apple CarPlay™ you must meet the
following requirements:
●
The mobile device must support Apple
CarPlay™.
●
The mobile device must be connected to
the Infotainment system through USB.
Establish connection
If a mobile device is paired for the first time,
follow the instructions on the Infotainment
system display and the mobile device dis-
play.
●
The prior requirements must be met in order
to use Apple CarPlay™.
●
Press the Infotainment button and then
select the Full Link
context.
●
Press the De
vice list
›
››
Fig. 185
1
button
and then sel
ect the mobile device from the
list of devices.
End connection
●
On the Apple CarPlay™ service press the
›››
Fig. 186
1
button to access the Full Link
main menu.
●
Press the
›
››
Fig. 185
2
button to end the
activ
e connection.
Special characteristics
During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
Bluetooth connections between mobile de-
vices and the Infotainment system are not
possible.
●
Any active Bluetooth connections are auto-
matically terminated.
●
Operating the phone is only possible
through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de-
scribed in these instructions for the Infotain-
ment system are not available.
●
The mobile device connected cannot be
used as a media device on the Media menu.
188
Connectivity
●
It is not possibl
e to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga-
tion system at the same time. The latest navi-
gation system launched will terminate the
previous one.
●
The display of the instrument panel does
not display any turning indications or notifi-
cations from the phone or other communica-
tion media.
Voice control system
●
Briefly press or to start the Infotain-
ment system's voice control system.
●
Press and hold or to start the voice
control system of the connected device.
Note
The information on technical requirements,
compatibl
e end devices, applications and
availability are available on www.ap-
ple.com/ios/carplay or SEAT Authorised
Services.
Android Auto™
Fig. 187 Android Auto™ Menu
Android Auto™ Prior Requirements
T
o use Android Auto™ you must meet the fol-
lowing requirements:
●
The Android Auto™ application must al-
ready be downloaded and installed on the
mobile device.
●
The mobile device must support Android
Auto™.
●
The mobile device must be connected to
the Infotainment system through USB.
Initiating the connection
In order to initiate the connection with the
mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-
nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB
connection, and to be sure to follow the in-
structions of the device being paired.
●
Select the Android Auto™ connection type
on Full Link™ Settings.
●
The first connection to Android Auto™ must
be done while the vehicle is stationary.
●
Press the Device list
›
››
Fig. 185
1
button
and then sel
ect the mobile device from the
list of devices.
●
If you are initiating the session using
Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo-
bile telephone connects automatically via
Bluetooth™ to the Infotainment system tele-
phone and it will not be possible to pair an-
other mobile telephone via Bluetooth™.
End connection
●
On the Android Auto™ service press
›››
Fig. 187
1
.
●
Select Return to SEAT t
o access to the
Full Link main menu.
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 185
2
button to end the
activ
e connection.
Special characteristics
During an active Android Auto™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
Bluetooth connections between other mo-
bile devices and the Infotainment system are
not possible.
●
Operating the phone is only possible
through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™
»
189
Infotainment system
device is connected to the Infotainment sys-
t
em through Bluetooth at the same time, the
telephone function of the Infotainment sys-
tem can also be used.
●
An active Android Auto™ device cannot be
used as a media device on the Media menu.
●
It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Android Auto™ navigation
system at the same time. The latest naviga-
tion system launched will terminate the previ-
ous one.
●
The display of the instrument panel does
not display any turning indications or notifi-
cations from the phone or other communica-
tion media.
Voice control system
●
Briefly press or to start the Infotain-
ment system's voice control system.
●
Press and hold or to start the voice
control system of the connected device.
Note
The information on technical requirements,
compatibl
e end devices, applications and
availability are available on www.seat.com
or SEAT Authorised Services.
MirrorLink™
Fig. 188 Function buttons in the general view
of compatibl
e applications.
Fig. 189
Other MirrorLink™ function buttons.
MirrorLink™ prior requirements
In or
der to use MirrorLink™, the following re-
quirements must be met:
●
The mobile device must be compatible
with MirrorLink™.
●
The mobile device must be connected to
the Infotainment system via USB.
●
Depending on the mobile device used, a
suitable application must be installed for the
use of MirrorLink™ on the device.
Establish connection
The requirements must be met to use Mirror-
Link™.
●
Press the MENU
button on the Infotainment
syst
em.
●
Press the Full Link
button.
●
Select the Mirr
orLink™
connection type on
Full Link Settings.
●
Press the De
vice list
›
››
Fig. 185
1
button
and then sel
ect the mobile device from the
list of devices.
Function buttons and possible messages
Function buttons
Switch-
ing off
Terminating the MirrorLink™ connec-
tion.
Cl
ose
Apps
Press to close the open apps.
Then press the apps to be closed or
the Cl
ose all
function button to close
all the open applications.
:
Press to change to the mobile device
scr
een.
190
Connectivity
Function buttons
Set
-
tings
To open the Full Link™ settings
›
››
ta-
ble on page 191.
1
Press to return to the main menu.
2
Press to show the Infotainment Sys-
t
em on the display.
3
Press to hide all function buttons.
OR: Pr
ess the right setting button to
show or hide all function buttons.
4
Press to display all the function but-
t
ons in the right-hand margin of the
screen.
5
View other function buttons.
The display of other function buttons
and the number of butt
ons displayed
depend on the mobile device used.
6
The symbol refers to the right setting
butt
on.
Press the right setting button to show
or hide all function buttons.
Full Link Settings
Full Link™ Settings
Open the menu Full Link Settings
●
On the Full Link main menu, pr
ess the
Settings
function button.
Function buttons
Select device : Press to select the mobile device that
will connect t
o the Infotainment system.
Preferred connection type
: In devices that support Mir-
rorLink™ and Android Auto™ technologies, you can
select the default technology that you want to use to
pair the mobile device to the Infotainment System.
Activate data transfer for an app, SEAT : Allows the ex-
change of inf
ormation between the vehicle and ex-
ternal apps.
MirrorLink™ settings
Function buttons
Screen orientation : Allows the screen display orienta-
tion t
o be selected from one of the following types, on
supported devices:
Landscape
Portrait
Rotated 180°
: It allows the image provided by the de-
vice t
o be rotated 180°.
Prioritize keyboard of the Infotainment System
a)
: It all
ows
the keyboard that is made available to the user to be
the one in the Infotainment System before the one in
the device itself.
a)
This function depends on the device that is used.
Frequently asked questions about
Full Link
What connection method is used?
USB Cabl
e.
Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle?
No
. The USB cable supplied with the device should
be used.
Is it possible to navigate?
Navigation is possibl
e in each one of the Full Link
technologies if the technology is available in your
country and if you have the Navigation app.
What is the difference between using the Full Link
syst
em navigator (via a device) instead of anoth-
er navigator?
Advantages: Daily updates.
Issues: data consumption, reception problems.
Can I send voice messages?
With certified applications, you can reply, not send.
What applications will be visible while driving?
Depending on the technology:
– for MirrorLink®: Apps certified by SEAT and the
CCC,
– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,
– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.
»
191
Infotainment system
Where can I find compatible Apps?
Compatibl
e apps are listed at the following links:
www.mirrorlink.com/
www.android.com/auto/
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
Where can I download the apps?
On Googl
e Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® and
on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.
If Full Link stops working, where can I go to repair
it?
If the pr
oblem is in the car, you should go to the deal-
er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should
see your mobile telephone vendor.
Will WhatsApp be certified?
The WhatsApp sit
uation depends on the technology.
Is MirrorLink® available in my country?
Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all countries and re-
gions where SEAT is located.
What are the differences between MirrorLink®,
Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™?
MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ and
Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.
They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is
designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-
ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.
Can MirrorLink® be installed in an older SEAT
model?
No
, it is not possible.
Where can I find more information about Full
Link?
If you hav
e any questions, please see our Innova-
tion/Connectivity sections on our website:
www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re-
192
Operating modes
Operating modes
R
adio
RADIO main menu
Fig. 190
RADIO main menu.
Fig. 191 Radio mode: station list.
Press the infotainment button
to open
the Radio main menu
›››
Fig. 190.
RADIO main menu function buttons
Function buttons
1
To select the desired frequency
band.
2
To change the preset key group us-
ing the function button.
3
Sort the FM station list.
Alphabetically : The station list is
sort
ed alphabetically.
Group
: The station list is sorted by
st
ation groups.
St
ations
List of radio station that can be
tuned.
Manual
Selecting the frequency manually.
Vie
w
a)
Shows additional services. Only
av
ailable in DAB mode.
Settings
Settings menu for the current fre-
quency band.
/
To change between stored stations
or available stations.
Adjustment of the arrow buttons in
the menu.
Function buttons
SCAN
This function button is only available
when aut
omatic playback is on.
Press the settings button to start au-
t
omatic playback.
1 t
o 15
Preset buttons to store stations
›››
page 196.
To update the station list (frequency
band AM or D
AB).
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
Indications and possible icons
Display: Meaning
A
Frequency or name of the station or
r
adio text. The name of the radio sta-
tion and the radio text will only be dis-
played if RDS is active.
RDS off
a)
The RDS radio data service is deacti-
v
ated.
TP
a)
Traffic information can be retrieved:
sel
ect Radio > Settings >
Traffic programme (TP).
No TP
a)
No stations with traffic news are avail-
abl
e.
The radio station is stored on a memo-
ry butt
on.
a)
DAB not available.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
»
193
Infotainment system
Note
●
Being under
ground, in tunnels, in areas
with tall buildings or mountains can inter-
fere with the radio reception.
●
Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to
the windows may affect reception on vehi-
cles with a window aerial.
●
Radio stations are responsible for the
content of the information they transmit.
Radio data services RDS (FM band)
Fig. 192 RADIO main menu.
Fig. 193 Radio mode: station list (FM).
RDS (Radio Data System) is a radio data sys-
t
em that provides additional FM services such
as the name of stations, automatic station
tracking, radio text and traffic information
(TP).
Depending on the country and the equip-
ment in question, RDS can be deactivated in
the FM Settings menu
›››
page 200.
In general, no radio data services are avail-
able without RDS.
Station name and automatic station track-
ing
If the RDS function is available, the names of
the stations can be displayed on the RADIO
main menu and on the Station list .
FM stations temporarily or permanently
broadcast different contents on different re-
gional frequencies under the same name (for
example, Radio 3).
In general, automatic station tracking takes
charge of switching to the frequency with the
best reception of the station that is tuned at
any given time, while driving. However, this
may cause a regional broadcast to be inter-
rupted.
Automatic frequency switching and automat-
ic station tracking can be deactivated in FM
Settings
›››
page 200.
Radio text
Some stations that have RDS transmit addi-
tional information in text, the so-called radio
text.
The radio text is displayed in the upper half of
the screen above the memory buttons
›››
Fig. 190
A
.
The r
adio text display can be deactivated in
the Settings
›››
page 200.
194
Operating modes
Digital radio mode (DAB, DAB + and
DMB audio)
3 Not v
alid in Japan, China, Mexico, Brazil, Can-
ada or the USA.
Fig. 194
DAB Radio mode main menu.
Fig. 195 Station information display in DAB ra-
dio mode
.
The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB +
and DMB audio tr
ansmission standards.
In Europe, digital radio is transmitted over
band III frequencies (from 174 MHz to 240
MHz).
The frequencies are called “channels” and
have an abbreviation (eg 12 A ).
In a channel, several available DAB stations
are grouped together in an “ensemble”.
Starting the Digital radio mode
●
In the RADIO main menu, press the
›››
Fig. 194
1
function button and select
D
AB
.
The l
ast DAB station that was selected will be
played, if it can still be tuned in that location.
The selected DAB station is shown in the top
bar of the DAB-3 screen. The selected station
ensemble is shown below ENSEMBLE-A
›››
Fig. 194.
Additional DAB stations (Secondary Serv-
ice Components)
Some DAB stations temporarily or perma-
nently offer additional stations (for example,
for the transmission of sporting events).
DAB stations containing additional stations
are identified on the station list by the symbol
.
Select additional stations
Press the name of the main station on the
DAB main menu to select an additional sta-
tion. Or, select the additional station from the
station list.
On the DAB main menu, the name of the ad-
ditional tuned station is displayed next to the
abbreviated name of the main DAB station.
Additional stations can not be saved.
Automatic station tracking
DAB radio is not currently available every-
where. DAB radio mode displays the areas
without DAB coverage .
For automatic station tracking, a change to
the FM frequency band can be allowed in the
DAB settings
›››
page 201.
If the DAB station being listened to can no
longer be tuned in (e.g., there is no DAB cov-
erage), the infotainment system tries to find
and tune the same station on the FM frequen-
cy band.
For a station to be tracked on all frequencies,
the DAB and FM station need to be broad-
casting the same identification.
OR: DAB indicates which FM station corre-
sponds to the DAB station, and the FM station
in question can be tuned without any prob-
lems.
»
195
Infotainment system
When the corresponding FM station has been
f
ound, (FM) is displayed behind the name of
the station. If the corresponding DAB station
becomes available again, it returns to DAB
mode after a while. The (FM) indication dis-
appears.
If the signal is too weak and the DAB station in
question cannot be found again in the FM
band, the radio sound is muted.
Screen Menu
The function buttons refer to the menu that is
displayed when the View
button is pressed
›
››
Fig. 194.
Function buttons
Preset list : Viewing the preset buttons
›
››
Fig. 194.
Station List
: Simultaneous display of radio text and
slideshows instead of memory keys
›››
Fig. 195.
Radio text : The radio text is displayed instead of the
memory butt
ons.
Slideshow
: Slideshows are shown in full screen mode.
Some DAB stations also offer an image “slideshow”.
Thr
ough this slideshow the stations can transmit in-
formation to the infotainment system in the form of
digital images.
When a station is switched it may take some time un-
til the slidesho
w of the tuned DAB station is loaded in
the background.
Note
Not all DAB stations broadcast radio text
and slidesho
ws.
Memory buttons
Fig. 196 RADIO main menu.
In the R
adio main menu, you can store sta-
tions from all available frequency wave-
lengths on the numbered function buttons.
These function buttons are called “memory
buttons”.
Storing the station on the memory buttons
See: Preset stations
›››
page 198.
Change the memory bank (screens)
●
Move your finger over the screen from left
to right or vice-versa.
●
OR: Press one of the function buttons
›››
Fig. 196
1
Selecting the station from the memory
butt
ons
●
Press the memory button corresponding to
the desired station.
The stored stations can only be played by
pressing the corresponding memory button
provided it can be received at your current
location.
Storing the station logo on the memory
buttons
Saved stations can be assigned logos
›››
page 196.
Storing or deleting station logos on
the preset buttons
Depending on the country and the equip-
ment, st
ation logos for the FM and DAB fre-
quency bands are pre-installed in the info-
tainment system. If a station is stored in a pre-
set button, the logo corresponding to the sta-
tion can be displayed on the preset button,
provided that the Automatic saving
function is
activ
e in the advanced settings
›››
page 200,
Settings (FM, AM, DAB). (station logos)
.
St
ation logos can be manually assigned to
stations that are stored on preset buttons,
196
Operating modes
which will then be displayed on the preset
butt
ons.
Images in standard formats (e.g. jpg, bmp or
even png) with a maximum size of 400 x 240
pixels, may be used as station logos.
In some countries, station logos can be
downloaded from the Internet through a link
on the “SEAT Senderlogos” website (SEAT
logos).
Copy the logos to a compatible data medium
(e.g. a SD card or USB memory) to import
them into the infotainment system.
Automatically saving station logos on the
preset buttons (FM and DAB)
●
Press the function button Settings
on the
RADIO main menu (FM and D
AB frequency
band).
●
Press the Advanced settings
function button.
●
Activate the Aut
omatic storage (station logos)
by pressing .
Manually st
oring the station logos on the
preset buttons
●
Copy the logos to a compatible data medi-
um (e.g. a SD card or USB memory) to import
them into the infotainment system.
●
Select the desired frequency band in the
RADIO main menu.
●
Press the function button Settings
and
then St
ation logos
.
●
Pr
ess the preset button to which a logo is to
be assigned.
●
Select the source in which the logo has
been stored (e.g. SD 1
).
●
Select the logo. Repeat this process to as-
sign other l
ogos.
●
Press the infotainment button to return
to the RADIO main menu.
Deleting the station logos from the preset
buttons
●
Select the desired frequency band in the
RADIO main menu.
●
Press the function button Settings
and
then St
ation logos
.
●
Press the preset button from which the sta-
tion l
ogo is to be deleted.
●
OR: Press the Delete all
function button to
er
ase the station logos of all the presets.
Selecting, tuning and saving a sta-
tion
Fig. 197
RADIO main menu.
Fig. 198
Radio mode: station list (AM).
Selecting stations
Select the sta-
tion using the
arr
ow keys
Press the <
or >
›
››
Fig. 197func-
tion button.
»
197
Infotainment system
Selecting stations
/
Depending on the setting of the ar-
r
ow keys, you can switch between
preset stations or tuneable sta-
tions. Setting the arrow buttons in
the menu
›››
page 200, Settings
(FM, AM, DAB),
›››
page 201, DAB
settings.
Selecting sta-
tions fr
om the
station list
To open the station list press the
function St
ations function button
›
››
Fig. 197.
OR: T
urn the adjustment knob.
Browse the list and tune to the sta-
tion you want by pressing it.
Press the
›
››
Fig. 198 function
button to close the list. If it is not
used, the list will close automati-
cally after a while.
Updating the
st
ation list
The FM , AM and D
AB frequency
band station lists are updated au-
tomatically.
In the AM and DAB frequency
bands you can also update the
station list manually by pressing
the function button
›
››
Fig. 198.
Manually tuning a station frequency
Display the
fr
equency
band
Press the Manual
function but-
t
on
›››
Fig. 197.
Manually tuning a station frequency
Changing the
fr
equency step
by step
Turn the adjustment knob.
OR: Pr
ess the arrow buttons to the
right or to the left of the frequency
band.
Quickly track
the fr
equency
band
Press one of the arrow buttons at
the t
op of the screen
›››
Fig. 197.
The next tuneable station is set au-
tomatically.
OR: Pr
ess and hold one of the ar-
row buttons at the top of the
screen
›››
Fig. 197.
Once released, the system auto-
matically s
witches to the next
tuneable radio station. In DAB
mode, it switches to the next tunea-
ble ensemble.
OR: Place your finger on the fre-
quency band’s scroll button and
move your finger to move the but-
ton.
Hide the fre-
quency band
Briefly press the settings button.
Selecting a station with the preset
button also ends the manual fre-
quency selection. If no operations
are performed, the frequency
band is hidden after a while.
Presetting stations
Store the cur-
r
ent station on
a preset button
Press and hold the desired preset
butt
on
›››
Fig. 197 until an audible
signal is heard.
The tuned station will be stored on
that pr
e-set button.
Save a station
fr
om a stations
list with a pre-
set button
Press the St
ations
›››
Fig. 197function butt
on or turn
the settings button to open the sta-
tion list.
The stations that are already stor-
ed on a preset button are marked
on the station list with the symbol
›››
Fig. 198.
Select the desired station by
pr
essing and holding it down on
the screen.
Press the preset button on which
the station in question is to be
saved.
A signal sounds and the station is
saved on the preset button. Repeat
the process to continue saving oth-
er station on the list.
Delete preset
st
ations
All saved stations on the frequency
band in question can be del
eted
one by one, or all at the same
time
›››
page 200, Settings (FM,
AM, DAB),
›››
page 201, DAB set-
tings.
198
Operating modes
Setting a station name (FM fre-
quency band)
Some radio stations transmit very long names
that ar
e represented as plain text on the
screen.
To set the text that is displayed at that mo-
ment, press and hold the name of the station
until an audible signal is heard.
The set station names are displayed with
dots to the left and right of the station name.
The set text is applied to all the preset but-
tons on which that radio station is saved.
Automatic playback (SCAN)
Fig. 199 Radio mode: automatic playback
(SCAN) activ
e.
When automatic playback is active, all tune-
abl
e stations in the selected frequency band
are played for approximately 5 seconds
each. SCAN
›
››
Fig. 199 is displayed on the
screen.
Start automatic playback
●
Briefly press the settings button.
●
OR: Press the Settings
function button
and then sel
ect Scan
.
End aut
omatic playback
●
Briefly press the settings button.
●
OR: Press the SCAN
function button to end
aut
omatic playback on the station that is be-
ing played.
Automatic playback also ends when a station
is selected manually using the memory but-
tons.
TP function (traffic information sta-
tion)
Fig. 200
RADIO main menu with the TP indica-
tion.
Fig. 201
List of stations with the TP indication.
The TP function (traffic information station) is
not av
ailable on all equipment, in all places
or on all FM stations.
»
199
Infotainment system
Using the TP function to track traffic informa-
tion is only possibl
e if a station with traffic in-
formation can be tuned. Stations with the
traffic information function are displayed on
the RADIO main menu along with TP
›››
Fig. 200 and
›››
Fig. 201.
Some stations without their own traffic infor-
mation support the TP function by broad-
casting traffic announcement from other sta-
tions (EON).
Activating and deactivating the TP func-
tion
●
Activate or deactivate the
Traffic information station (TP)
function button
by pr
essing it
›››
page 200, Settings (FM,
AM, DAB),
›››
page 201, DAB settings.
If the station you are listening to does not
have the TP function, No TP will be displayed
on the upper part of the screen.
Active TP function and station selection
If traffic station tracking is active, the acro-
nym TP is displayed on the top right of the
screen in audio mode
›››
Fig. 200. The traffic
bulletins of the station that is being listened
to, or of the station that provides traffic infor-
mation, are played in Audio mode.
In FM mode, the station that is being lis-
tened to must have the TP function. If after
activating the TP function a station is selec-
ted using the preset buttons, or by tuning
manually, that does not have the TP func-
tion, the traffic information station will not be
tracked (indication: No TP).
If it is not possible to continue tuning the cur-
rent traffic station, No TP is also displayed
and a manual station search will have to be
started
›››
page 197.
In AM mode or in Media mode, a traffic sta-
tion is automatically tuned in the background,
as long as the station has a good signal. De-
pending on the situation this operation may
take some time.
Incoming traffic announcement
In Audio mode, traffic announcements are
pl
ayed automatically when they are re-
ceived.
While the traffic announcement is playing, a
pop-up window is displayed and the radio
changes, if necessary, to the traffic informa-
tion station (EON).
Media mode is interrupted and the volume is
set as adjusted
›››
page 180.
The traffic announcement volume can be
changed with the volume control . The
modified volume remains as set for subse-
quent bulletins.
●
Press the Interrupt
function button to stop
pl
ayback of the traffic bulletin that is being
listened to. The TP function remains active.
●
OR: Press the Deactivate
function button to
st
op the traffic announcement that is being
played and to permanently disconnect the
TP function.
Settings (FM, AM, DAB)
FM settings
Sel
ect the FM frequency band by pressing
the Infotainment button .
OR: Press function button
›››
Fig. 200
1
and
sel
ect the FM frequency band.
Press the Settings
function button to open the
FM settings menu.
Function buttons
Sound : Sound settings
›
››
page 180.
Scan
: Automatic playback (SCAN function). When
automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable
stations in the selected frequency band are played
for approximately 5 seconds each
›››
page 199.
Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons
and . The setting applies t
o all frequency bands
(FM, AM and DAB).
Preset list
: The arrow keys are used to switch be-
tw
een all of the saved stations in the selected
frequency band.
200
Operating modes
Function buttons
Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch
betw
een all of the tuneable stations in the selec-
ted frequency band.
Traffic programme (TP)
: The TP function (tracking of
traffic information stations) is active
›››
page 199.
Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta-
tions.
Station logos : To assign or delete manually the sta-
tion l
ogos saved in the memory keys
›››
page 196.
Radio text
: The radio text is active
›
››
page 194, Ra-
dio text.
Advanced settings
a)
: R
adio data services (RDS) set-
tings.
Autostore station logos
a)
: The st
ations saved on the
memory buttons are automatically assigned ra-
dio station logos if they are available in the info-
tainment system. Also see
›››
page 196.
Station logo region
a)
: This all
ows the vehicle's re-
gion (country) to be selected. This optimizes the
automatic assignment of station logos. The op-
tion also allows the system to select the region
automatically.
Automatic frequency control (AF)
a)
: Aut
omatic sta-
tion tracking is active. When there is no check in
check box , the function button RDS regional
will be inactive (grey).
Radio data system (RDS)
a)
: The R
adio Data Sys-
tem (RDS) is deactivated
›››
page 194. If there is
no check in check box , the traffic information
station (TP), radio text, station name and pro-
gram type functions will not be available.
Function buttons
RDS regional
a)
: Set the RDS aut
omatic station
tracking
›››
page 194.
Fixed
: Only alternative frequencies of the
set station with an identical region program
are set.
Automatic : It always changes to the frequen-
cy of the set st
ation that has the best signal
at the time, even if a regional broadcast that
is in progress is interrupted.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
AM settings
Sel
ect the AM frequency band by pressing
the Infotainment button .
OR: Press function button
›››
Fig. 200
1
and
sel
ect the AM frequency band.
Press the Settings
function button to open the
AM settings menu.
Function buttons
Sound : Sound settings
›
››
page 180.
Scan
: Automatic playback (SCAN function). When
automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable
stations in the selected frequency band are played
for approximately 5 seconds each
›››
page 199.
Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons
and . The setting applies t
o all frequency bands
(FM, AM and DAB).
Function buttons
Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-
tw
een all of the saved stations in the selected
frequency band.
Station List
: The arrow keys are used to switch
between all of the tuneable stations in the selec-
ted frequency band.
Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of
tr
affic information stations) is active
›››
page 199.
Delete presets
: To erase all or some of the preset sta-
tions.
Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on
memory butt
ons
›››
page 196.
DAB settings
Sel
ect the DAB frequency band by pressing
the Infotainment button
.
OR: Press function button
›››
Fig. 200
1
and
sel
ect the DAB frequency band.
Press the Settings
function button to open the
DAB settings
menu.
Function buttons
Sound : Sound settings
›
››
page 180.
Scan
: Automatic playback (SCAN function). When
automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable
stations in the selected frequency band are played
for approximately 5 seconds each
›››
page 199.
»
201
Infotainment system
Function buttons
Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons
and . The setting applies t
o all frequency bands
(FM, AM and DAB).
Preset list
: The arrow keys are used to switch be-
tween all of the saved stations in the selected
frequency band.
Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch
betw
een all of the tuneable stations in the selec-
ted frequency band.
Traffic programme (TP)
: The TP function (tracking of
tr
affic information stations) is active
›››
page 199.
Delete presets
: To erase all or some of the preset sta-
tions.
Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on
memory butt
ons
›››
page 196.
Radio text
: The radio text is active
›
››
page 194, Ra-
dio text.
Advanced settings
: DAB services settings.
Autostore station logos
a)
: St
ation logos are as-
signed automatically when the radio stations are
stored on the memory buttons
›››
page 196.
DAB traffic announcements
: DAB traffic announce-
ments ar
e played in the same way as TP traffic
announcements in any equipment mode.
Function buttons
Other DAB announcements : DAB announcements
(ne
ws, sports information, weather, warnings,
etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode is ac-
tive.
DAB - DAB station tracking
: Automatic station track-
ing within the DAB frequency range is active.
Automatic DAB - FM switching : Switching to the FM
fr
equency band is permitted for automatic sta-
tion tracking.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
Media
Intr
oduction
Audio or image sources containing files in dif-
f
erent media are known as “media sources”.
These audio files can be played through the
corresponding players or the infotainment
system's audio inputs.
Only supported files are displayed and
played. Other files are ignored.
Copyright
Consider the legislation on the intellectual
property of audio and video files.
Note
●
MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding t
echnolo-
gy and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer
IIS.
●
This product is protected by certain Mi-
crosoft Corporation copyright and proper-
ty rights. The use or commercialization of
technology of this type outside the config-
uration of this product, without a licence
from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft
branch is prohibited.
●
The infotainment system only plays com-
patible undamaged audio files; other files
are ignored.
●
Check the list of compatible devices on
the SEAT website.
202
Operating modes
Requirements for data media and files
The factory-fitted CD and DVD players are
cl
ass 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6 / VDE
0837.
Only standard 12 cm CD/DVDs and 32 mm x
24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm memory cards can
be inserted in the infotainment system.
Any playable file formats on the list will here-
inafter be known as “audio files”. A CD con-
taining these types of audio files is called an
“audio data CD”.
Data media Requirements for playing audio files
Optical discs:
– Audio CD (up t
o 80 min).
– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) with
the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.
Memory cards:
– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB).
– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems.
USB data media:
– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications.
– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system.
– Different generations of iPods™
a)
, iPads™
a)
and iPhones™
a)
.
– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “ReadyForVista”..
– Digital Audio Specification.
– MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) fil
es with transfer rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or varia-
ble transfer rate.
– WAV files (.wav).
– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer rates
of up to 384kbit/s.
– AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy protection.
– OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s.
– FLAC files (.flac).
– Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.
– Pl
aylists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.
– File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.
– On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per di-
rectory.
Pl
ay audio files over Bluetooth®
b)
.
– The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth® profile
›
››
page 210.
a)
iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.
b)
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
Read and bear in mind the instruction manual
f
or the external data storage device.
Limitations and indications
Dirt, high temperatures and mechanical
damage can cause data media to fail. Con-
sider the indications provided by the manu-
facturer of the data media.
Quality differences between data media pro-
duced by different manufacturers can cause
playback interference.
Consider copyright legislation!
The configuration of data media or of the
equipment or programs used for recording
may cause some tracks or data media to be
unreadable. On the Internet, for example, can
be found information about the best way to
record audio files or data media (compres-
sion rate, ID3 tag, etc.).
»
203
Infotainment system
The reading speed can vary considerably
depending on the siz
e, the usage status
(copying and deleting processes), the struc-
ture of the folders and the type of files of the
data media used.
Playlists only establish a certain playback
order. The files are not saved in them. Play-
lists cannot be played if the files on the data
media are not saved to the path to which the
playlist refers.
A cover can only be displayed when the
name starts with “Cover”, “Folder” or “Al-
bum”.
Note
●
Do not use memory car
d adaptors, USB
extension cords or USB hubs!
●
SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-
ration or loss of files on data storage devi-
ces.
Playback order of files and folders
Fig. 202
Example of the structure of an audio
dat
a CD.
The audio files
st
ored on data media are
often arranged by file folders
and playlists
to establish a certain playback order.
Depending on their name on the data media,
tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu-
merically and alphabetically.
The illustration shows an example of a con-
ventional audio data CD, containing tracks
, folders and subfolders
›››
Fig. 202.
In this case the tracks will be played as fol-
lows
1)
:
Tracks
1
and
2
in the root directory
(R
oot) of the CD
Tracks
3
and
4
in the first F1 f
older of
the CD root directory
Track
5
in the first subf
older F1.1 of fold-
er F1.
Track
6
in the first subf
older F1.1.1 of
subfolder F1.1
Track
7
in the second subf
older F1.2 of
folder F1
Track
8
and
9
in the second f
older F2
Note
●
The pl
ayback sequence can be modified
by selecting the different playback modes
›››
page 205.
●
Playlists do not play automatically, they
have to be selected directly from the track
selection menu
›››
page 207.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1)
The Mix/r
epeat including subfolders
function must
be activ
e in the Media settings menu
›››
page 212.
204
Operating modes
MEDIA main menu
Fig. 203 MEDIA main menu.
Using the Media main menu, diff
erent media
sources can be selected and played.
●
Press the infotainment button to open
the Radio main menu
›››
Fig. 203.
It will continue playing the last media source
selected from the same point.
The media source being played is indicated
on the dropdown list when the
1
function
butt
on is pressed.
If there is no available media source, the Me-
dia main menu is displayed.
MEDIA main menu function buttons
Function buttons
1
Indicates the media source being
pl
ayed. Press to select another media
source
›››
page 206.
CD
: Internal CD drive
›››
page 208.
SD Car
d 1
, SD Car
d 2
: SD card
›
››
page 209.
USB 1
and USB 2 : External data stor-
age de
vice connected to a USB port
›››
page 209.
B
T Audio
: Bluetooth® audio
›
››
page 210.
Sel
ec-
tion
Opens the track list
›
››
page 207.
/
Changes track in Media mode
›››
page 206.
Playback stops. The
function button
changes t
o
›
››
page 206.
Playback is resumed. The
function
butt
on changes to
›
››
page 206.
Set
-
tings
Opens the Media Settings
›
››
page 212menu.
Function buttons
Press it to change mode.
: To repeat the current track.
: To repeat all tracks.
Repeats all the tracks that are on the
same memory level as the track being
played now. If in the Media Settings
menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders
option is enabled, it also includes the
subf
olders
›››
page 212.
Random play. The
function button
changes t
o
.
Includes all the tracks that are on the
same memory l
evel as the track being
played now. If in the Media Settings
menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders
option is enabled, it also includes the
subf
olders
›››
page 212.
Indications and symbols of the MEDIA
main menu
Display: Meaning
A
Display track information (CD text , ID3 l
a-
bel in MP3 files).
Audio CD: Displays the track and tr
ack
number, according to the order on the data
storage device.
Audio files: Displays the name of the ar
tist,
the name of the album and the track if
available.
»
205
Infotainment system
Display: Meaning
B
Displays the album cover if available in the
dat
a storage device.
C
The progress bar and the playing time so far
and time remaining in minutes and seconds.
VBR: In the case of audio fil
es with variable
bit rates the remaining time may vary.
Press the pr
ogress bar or press it and move it
to skip to a different part of the track.
Note
When the media source is inserted, playing
will not st
art automatically; it is necessary
for the user to select the source. Nor will
the media source change when it is ejec-
ted.
Switching the Media source
Fig. 204
MEDIA main menu.
●
L
ower the base volume on the Infotainment
system.
●
From the Media main menu, press the
SOURCE
function button
›
››
Fig. 204 and se-
lect the desired media source.
●
OR: From the MEDIA main menu, press the
1
function button and select the desired Me-
dia sour
ce.
In the pop-up window, the Media sources not
selected are shown as deactivated (in grey).
When a Media source that has already been
played is selected again, playback is re-
sumed from the point at which it was stop-
ped.
Note
The Media source can be changed in the
T
rack list view: select Media > View.
Changing track in the MEDIA main
menu
Fig. 205
MEDIA main menu.
The tracks of the Media source that is being
list
ened to can be changed successively us-
ing the arrow buttons.
The arrow keys cannot be used to switch to
playback from a playlist. Playback from a
playlist must be started manually in the title
selection menu
›››
page 207.
206
Operating modes
Control through the MEDIA main menu
Meaning Function
Briefly press the func-
tion butt
on <
once.
If the title has been play-
ing f
or less than 3 sec-
onds, it goes back to the
start of the previous title.
If the title has been play-
ing f
or 3 seconds or more,
it returns to the beginning
of the title.
Briefly press the func-
tion butt
on >
once.
To the next title. From the
l
ast title, pressing this but-
ton switches to the first ti-
tle of the data media that
is being played.
Press and hold the
function butt
on <
.
Rewind.
Press and hold the
function butt
on >
.
Fast forward.
Briefly press the func-
tion butt
on
once.
Playback stops. The
function button changes
t
o
.
Briefly press the func-
tion butt
on
once.
Playback is resumed. The
function button
changes t
o
.
Selecting a track from a track list
Fig. 206 List of titles of a Media source (folder
vie
w).
Fig. 207
USB data storage device: data bank
vie
w.
Open a title list
●
Press the Sel
ection
function but-
t
on
›››
Fig. 205.
●
OR: Turn the adjustment knob. The track
that is playing is highlighted
›››
Fig. 206.
Search the title list and press the title that you
want. If there is title information available, the
title and title number (on audio CDs) or file
name (MP3) is displayed instead of Title +
number.
Depending on the media source that is selec-
ted, you can choose between the folder
view and the data bank view
›››
page 208.
Overview of the function buttons in the ti-
tle list
Fig. 206 Function buttons
Open the Sources menu. Pr
ess to select
another Media source.
1
The currently selected Media source is dis-
played on the bar at the top of the screen.
Press to change the media source.
CD : Internal CD drive
›
››
page 208.
SD Car
d 1
, SD Car
d 2
: SD card
›
››
page 209.
USB 1
and USB 2 : External data support
connect
ed
›››
page 209.
B
T Audio
: External media player connected
via Bluet
ooth®
›››
page 210.
Press the function button to open the top
folder of the Media source.
»
207
Infotainment system
Fig. 206 Function buttons
Start playback of the first title.
Repeat all titles. The function button
changes t
o
.
Repeats all the tracks that are on the same
memory l
evel as the track being played now.
If in the Media Settings menu the
Mix/Repeat including subfolders
option is ena-
bl
ed, it also includes the subfolders
›››
page 212.
Random play. The
function button
changes t
o
.
Includes all the tracks that are on the same
memory l
evel as the track being played now.
If in the Media Settings menu the
Mix/Repeat including subfolders
option is ena-
bl
ed, it also includes the subfolders
›››
page 212.
×
To close the list of titles.
Data bank view
The data bank view can only be gener
ated
by mass storage devices (USB and SD cards).
Depending on the volume of data, it can take
a few minutes to generate the data bank
view.
If there are too many files in the mass storage
device, it may not be possible to generate the
Databank view.
When generating the data bank view, exist-
ing titles are ordered according to the infor-
mation available about titles in different cate-
gories and lists.
The existing tracks can be viewed and
opened from these lists according to different
classifications.
To switch between the Data bank view and
the Folder view, press function button
›››
Fig. 207
2
.
Fig. 207 Function button: name
List of tracks
Artists
Albums
Genres
Title
Note
Titles, folders and playlists can also be se-
l
ected by turning the setting button and
playing or opening them by pressing on
them.
Insert or eject a CD
The driver should refrain from operating the
unit whil
e the vehicle is in motion. Insert or
change the data storage device before mov-
ing off!
The CD drive can play audio CDs and audio
data CDs.
Inserting a CD
●
Insert the CD into the CD reader
›››
Fig. 177
4
with the printed side facing upwards, until
the equipment inserts it aut
omatically.
Ejecting a CD
●
Press button .
●
The CD is ejected and you have approxi-
mately 10 seconds to remove it.
If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, it
is automatically retracted for security rea-
sons without activating the CD mode.
Illegible or faulty CD
If the data on an inserted CD cannot be read
or a defective CD is inserted, the correspond-
ing warning appears on screen.
Depending on the equipment, unreadable
CDs are automatically ejected 3 times and
reinserted to start another three read at-
tempts before this indication is displayed.
Note
●
Une
ven road surfaces and strong vibra-
tions can cause playback to jump.
208
Operating modes
●
When the t
emperature inside the equip-
ment is too high, loading and playback of
CDs is disabled.
●
If after inserting a number of different
CDs and receiving the CD drive error ev-
ery time, contact a qualified workshop.
Insert or eject an SD card
The driver should refrain from operating the
inf
otainment system while the vehicle is in
motion. Insert or change the data storage de-
vice before moving off!
Only compatible audio files are displayed.
Other files are ignored.
Inserting the SD card
1)
Media System Plus / Navi System:
●
Left slot: Ent
er a compatible SD card with
the corner cut upwards and the title on the
left (the contact surfaces pointed to the right)
in the left SD card slot
›››
Fig. 177
6
until it
clicks.
●
Right slot: Ent
er a compatible SD card with
the corner cut downwards and the title on
the right (the contact surfaces pointed to the
left) in the right SD card slot
›››
Fig. 177
6
un-
til it clicks.
If an SD car
d cannot be inserted, make sure it
is positioned correctly and is compatible with
the unit.
Playback does not start automatically if
there are audio files stored in the SD card and
they can be read.
Ejecting the SD card
The inserted SD cards must be prepared for
ejection.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press the
Settings
button to open the Media Set-
tings menu.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment button and
then press Settings
to open the System set-
tings menu.
●
Press the R
emove safely
function button and
then SD Car
d
. After correctly ejecting the
dat
a storage device from the system, the
function button becomes inactive (grey col-
our).
●
Press the inserted SD card. The SD card
“jumps” to the eject position.
●
Remove the SD card.
Illegible SD card
If the data on an SD card cannot be read, a
warning will be displayed on the infotainment
system.
The infotainment system switches to the last
source selected.
Note
The navigation SD card may not be used as
memory st
orage for other files. The Info-
tainment system will not recognise the files
saved on it.
External data storage device con-
nect
ed to the USB port
Depending on the features and the country,
the v
ehicle may have one or two USB con-
nections
›››
page 237.
The location of the USB ports depends on
the vehicle in question.
Where this manual refers to external data
storage devices, this means USB mass stor-
age devices containing supported audio files,
such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.
»
1)
The number of slots for SD cards depends on
the country and de
vice in question.
209
Infotainment system
Only supported audio files are displayed and
pl
ayed. Other files are ignored.
Playback does not start automatically if
there are audio files stored and readable in
the SD card.
Further operation of the external data medi-
um (changing track, selecting tracks and
playback modes) is described in the appro-
priate chapters of this manual
›››
page 202.
Instructions and restrictions
Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other
media players depends on the unit.
The USB port supplies the usual USB volt-
age of 5 volts for a USB connection.
Due to the large number of different data
storage devices and various iPod™, iPad™
and iPhone™ generations available, it is not
possible to guarantee fault-free operation of
all functions described here.
Take into account all other instructions and
limitations regarding requirements for media
sources.
iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™
Depending on the country and equipment,
iPods™, iPads™ or iPhones™ can be connec-
ted via the device's own USB cable to the ve-
hicle’s USB port and used as audio sour-
ces.
After connecting an iPod™, iPad™ or iPhone™,
the list views specific to the iPod™ are dis-
played at the top selection level ( Play-
lists, Artists, Albums, Tracks,
Podcasts, etc.).
Disconnecting
Data media be prepared for disconnection.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press the
Settings
button to open the Media Set-
tings menu.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment button and
then press Settings
to open the System set-
tings menu.
●
Press the R
emove safely
function button. A
dr
opdown menu appears with the following
options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card, USB1 and USB2.
Pressing the corresponding function button
disables it.
●
Now the data storage device can be dis-
connected.
Unreadable data storage device
If a data storage device with unreadable data
is connected, the infotainment system display
will show a warning.
Note
●
Do not connect an e
xternal media player
at the same time to play music via Blue-
tooth® and via the USB port with the in-
fotainment system, as this could cause
pl
ayback limitations.
●
If the external player is an Apple device™,
it cannot be simultaneously connected by
USB and by Bluetooth®.
●
If a connected source is not recognized,
disconnect and reconnect it. If the data
cannot be played, the corresponding indi-
cation will be displayed.
Connect an external audio source
via Bluet
ooth®
Fig. 208 MEDIA main menu.
In the Bluetooth® Audio mode, audio files that
ar
e playing on a device connected by Blue-
tooth can be listened to on the infotainment
system.
210
Operating modes
Conditions
●
The Bluetooth® audio source must support
the A2DP Bluet
ooth® profile.
●
In the Bluetooth® Settings menu the
Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
function must be
on. Sel
ect Telephone > Settings >
Bluetooth
Starting a Bluetooth® audio transfer
●
Turn on Bluetooth® visibility in the external
Bluetooth® audio source.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press function but-
ton
›››
Fig. 208
1
and select B
T audio
.
●
Press Sear
ch for new device
to connect an
e
xternal Bluetooth® audio source for the first
time
›››
page 225.
●
OR: Select a Bluetooth® audio source from
the list.
●
Please refer to the instructions on the
screen of the infotainment system and on the
Bluetooth® audio source regarding the rest of
the procedure.
You may need to manually start playback on
the Bluetooth® audio source.
When the Bluetooth® device is disconnected,
the infotainment system remains in Blue-
tooth® audio mode.
Controlling playback
The extent to which the Bluetooth® audio
system can be operated through the infotain-
ment system depends on the connected
Bluetooth® device.
Note
●
Due t
o the large number of possible Blue-
tooth® audio sources, it is not possible to
guarantee fault-free operation of all de-
scribed functions.
●
Always switch off the warning and serv-
ice tones on a connected Bluetooth® audio
source, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele-
phone, to prevent possible interference
noise and malfunctions.
●
The system response time may vary, de-
pending on the connected external play-
back device.
●
If the external player is an Apple device™,
it cannot be simultaneously connected by
USB and by Bluetooth®.
Images
Fig. 209 Images main menu.
Using the Images menu, image fil
es can be
viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-
show.
The image files must be stored on a compati-
ble data storage device.
Image files linked to complete address data
can be used for image-based navigation
›››
page 222
1)
.
●
Press the Infotainment button and then
select the Images context.
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 209
1
function button to
sel
ect the source where the picture files in
question are located.
»
1)
Valid for: Navi System
211
Infotainment system
Function buttons
1
Display and selection of the source.
Only sources with compatible image
formats can be selected
›››
page 212.
/
To rotate the view of the image 90 de-
gr
ees to the left or the right.
Reset the view of the image.
Sel
ec-
tion
Opens a list of image files.
/
To change to the previous or next im-
age
.
To stop the playback of a slideshow.
The
function button changes to .
To continue the playback of a slide-
sho
w. The
function button changes
t
o
.
Set
-
tings
Image settings
›
››
page 212.
Enlarging or reducing the view
●
Slide 2 fingers across the screen, moving
them further apart or cl
oser together.
●
OR: turn the settings button.
Requirements for viewing images
Image files Maximum resolu-
tion
BMP 4MP
JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)
JPG 64MP
GIF 4MP
PNG 4MP
Image settings
Open the Image settings menu
●
Press the Settings function button in the
main Images menu.
Function buttons
Image view : To adjust the image view format.
Automatic: Images scale to the size of the
screen (the image may not be displayed com-
pletely).
Complete: The images ar
e displayed fully on
the screen.
Display time
: To adjust the display time of images
during a slidesho
w.
Function buttons
Repeat slideshow : The active slideshow is repeated
infinit
ely.
Media settings
●
Select the MEDIA main menu by pr
essing
the Infotainment button .
●
Press the Settings
function button to open
the Media settings menu.
Function buttons
Sound : Sound settings
›
››
page 180.
Mix/repeat including subfolders
: Subfolders are inclu-
ded in the selected playback mode
›››
page 202.
Bluetooth® : Bluetooth® settings
›
››
page 235
Remove safely
: To prepare external data media for ex-
tr
action or disconnection. See also
›››
page 209, In-
sert or eject an SD card and
›››
page 209, Exter-
nal data storage device connected to the USB
port .
Traffic programme (TP)
: The TP function (tracking of
tr
affic information stations) is active
›››
page 199.
212
Operating modes
Navigation
1)
Intr
oduction
General information
A GPS (Gl
obal Positioning System) satellite
system locates the current position of the ve-
hicle. The vehicle’s sensors measure the dis-
tance travelled. The measurements are com-
pared with the stored detailed map resour-
ces, according to road indications stored in
them. Traffic reports, if any, will also be taken
into account in the route calculation (dynam-
ic route guidance
›››
page 220). Using all the
data available, the Infotainment system cal-
culates the optimum route to the destination.
The destination is defined by entering an ad-
dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-
tion or hotel.
Navigation announcements and graphic rep-
resentations will guide you to your destina-
tion.
Depending on the country, some functions of
the infotainment system will not be available
on the screen when travelling higher than a
certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is
due to compliance with legislation.
CAUTION
The navigation announcements may be in-
accur
ate (e.g. due to out-of-date data).
Instructions for navigation
When the Infotainment system is unable to re-
ceiv
e any data from GPS satellites (tunnels,
garages), navigation can still continue using
the vehicle sensors.
Possible limitations in navigation
In areas that are not or are only partially digi-
tised (e.g. insufficient definition of one-way
streets and road categories), the Infotain-
ment system will still attempt to provide route
guidance.
In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-
tion data, it may not be possible to determine
the exact position of the vehicle. This may
mean that navigation is not as precise as usu-
al.
Navigation area and update of navigation
data
Road layouts change continuously. There-
fore, if the navigation data are not updated,
then errors or inaccuracies may occur.
SEAT recommends updating navigation data
on a r
egular basis.
Updating and using navigation da-
ta from an SD card
The SD card is factory fitted in slot 2 for SD
car
ds.
Navigation data that is currently valid for this
unit in order to allow all functions to be used
in full.
Updating navigation data
The current navigation data can be downloa-
ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-
ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.
Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT
dealerships.
The procedure is described on the internet at
www.seat.com.
Using navigation data
●
Insert the memory card
›
››
page 209.
●
Wait for the testing icon to disappear.
If the inserted memory card contains valid
navigation data, the following message ap-
pears: “The source contains the
»
1)
Only available for the model: Navi System
213
Infotainment system
navigation database.”. Navigation can be
st
arted.
Note
●
The inser
ted memory card must be pre-
pared before it is ejected
›››
page 209.
●
Navigation is not possible without the SD
card.
●
Do not remove the memory card while
the navigation data is in use. This could
damage the memory card!
●
The navigation memory card cannot be
used as a memory for other files.
●
SEAT recommends using only the original
SEAT cards. The use of other memory cards
could limit its operation.
Navigation main menu
Fig. 210 Navigation main menu
Navigation functions can only be used if the
navigation dat
a for the area where the vehi-
cle is driving is available in the infotainment
system.
The Navigation main menu allows you to se-
lect a new destination, call up a previously
used or stored destination and search for
points of interest.
Opening the main Navigation menu
●
Press the Infotainment system button to
open the last menu that was open in naviga-
tion.
●
If the main Navigation menu is not dis-
played, press the infotainment button
again until the main Navigation menu is dis-
played.
●
OR: Press the function button to return
menu by menu to the Navigation menu.
Navigation main menu function buttons
and indicators
Function buttons
A
The split screen is displayed
›
››
page 219.
B
Messages and function buttons on
the map display
›››
page 220.
Function buttons
1
New destination : To enter a new des-
tination
›
››
page 214.
Route
: During route guidance
›
››
page 216.
2
View the audio source selected (radio
or Media).
My
destina-
tions
To activate or manage stored destina-
tions
›
››
page 216.
My
r
oute
To create or manage a route
›
››
page 217.
POI
Search for points of interest (e.g. ho-
tels, fuel stations, etc.) within a partic-
ular search area
›››
page 218.
Vie
w
To modify or activate or deactivate
the split scr
een
›››
Fig. 210
A
›››
page 2
19.
Set
-
tings
Open the Navigation Settings
›
››
page 222 menu.
New destination (entering the des-
tination)
●
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
New destination
function button.
214
Operating modes
●
Pr
ess the Options
function button and se-
l
ect the required type of destination (Ad-
dress, Address, POI or On map).
Steering
When narrowing down the destination ad-
dress, please note that every entry restricts
the available range of subsequent selections.
To enter an address press the function but-
tons in the following order:
●
Country, City (or postcode), Centre
(starts the route to the centre of the indicated
city), Street, Number, Junction, LAST DES-
TINATIONS, START (starts route guidance to
the selected destination).
Point of interest
Start the route towards a point of interest.
Function buttons
Search area : To select the area in which special des-
tinations must be sear
ched.
Surroundings of the location
: Points of interest will
be searched around the location.
Surroundings of the destination
a)
: P
oints of interest
will be searched around the destination.
On the route
a)
: P
oints of interest will be searched
along the route.
Surroundings of the address
: Points of interest will
be sear
ched around the address entered.
Function buttons
Select on the map : Points of interest will be
sear
ched around the destination selected on
the map. To select a destination on the map,
press the Edit
button.
Search category : Select the main category (e.g. Ve-
hicle and travel), the category (e.g. Air-
ports) and then the desired entry on the list.
Store : To save the selected point of interest in
the destination memory
›
››
page 216.
Dial number
: Establishes a telephone connec-
tion with the number st
ored for the point of inter-
est.
Start
: Starts guided navigation to the selected
point of int
erest.
Search name
: To search a point of interest entering
the name or using synonyms of the cat
egories
(e.g. “Sleep” for hotels and hostels).
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activ
ated.
On the map
●
Select the destination on the map or enter
it using GPS coordinates and confirm with
OK
.
●
OR: Ent
er the coordinates and confirm with
OK
.
Function buttons
Store : Store the point of interest in the destination
memory
›
››
page 216.
Function buttons
Edit : Edit the destination or enter another one.
Route options : Setting route options, see Naviga-
tion Settings > Route options.
Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point
of int
erest.
After starting route guidance
Fig. 211
Route calculation.
When starting route guidance, the route is
cal
culated based on the data that have been
selected in the Route options menu.
Three alternative routes are proposed
›››
Fig. 211. These 3 routes correspond to the
selectable route options: Economical, Fast
and Short.
Blue route: Economic route.
»
–
215
Infotainment system
Red route: F
astest route.
Orange route: Shortest route to the
destination, even if it results in longer
travelling time.
●
Select the desired route by pressing it.
The route criteria settings in the Route op-
tions menu are modified accordingly.
If a route is not selected, the route guidance
starts automatically after approx. one minute
according to the setting selected in Route
options.
Once the route has been calculated, the sys-
tem gives the first navigation announcement.
Up to 3 navigation announcements are given
before a turn.
●
Press the adjustment knob to listen to the
last audible navigation instruction.
The indicated distances depend to a great
extent on the type of road and the traffic
speed. On motorways, for example, naviga-
tion announcements are received much earli-
er than in urban traffic.
The corresponding navigation announce-
ments are also given on roads with several
lanes that split, and on roundabouts, for ex-
ample: “Leave the roundabout at the second
exit.”
A navigation announcement informs you
when you have reached your “destination”.
–
–
A navigation announcement informing you
that you have reached the “destination area”
is given if the exact destination cannot be
reached.
During dynamic route guidance, you re-
ceive information about reported traffic con-
gestion on the route. An additional navigation
announcement is given if the route is recalcu-
lated.
During a navigation announcement, you can
change its volume using the button .
For other announcement settings, select
Navigation > Settings > Navigation
announcements.
Note
●
If you miss a t
urning during route guid-
ance and are currently unable to turn back,
keep on driving until the navigation system
offers a new route.
●
The quality of the announcements and
recommendations depends on the naviga-
tion data available and any reported traffic
problems.
Route
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
Route
function button.
The R
oute
function button is only displayed
when r
oute guidance is activated.
Function buttons
Stopping route guidance : Aborts current route guid-
ance
.
New destination/leg
: To enter a new destination or a
new stopover
›››
page 214.
Route information : View route information for current
r
oute.
Save destination
: To save the selected destina-
tion in the destination memory .
Route : Press to open the route mode
›
››
page 217.
Congestion ahead
: To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10
km in l
ength) from the current route, e.g. to avoid
congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the
Route
function button and then
Cancel congestion ahead .
My destinations (destination mem-
ory)
The stored destinations can be selected from
the My destinations menu.
●
Press the My destinations function button
in the main Navigation menu.
●
Select the desired function: St
ore position
,
Destinations or Home .
216
Operating modes
Store position
●
By pressing the St
ore position
function but-
t
on, the entered position is stored as a Flag-
ged destination in the Destination mem-
ory.
To save the stored position permanently as a
flagged destination, change the name of
the position in the destination memory.
Otherwise, the saved position is overwritten
when another flagged destination is saved.
●
Mark the Flagged destination in the
Destination memory.
●
Press the Store
function button.
The name can be changed in the f
ollowing
input window. Press the
function button to
st
ore the destination.
Destinations and contacts
●
Select the desired function button.
Function buttons
Latest destinations : View of destinations for which a
r
oute has already been started.
Destination memory
: View of destinations stored
manually and from imported vCards
›››
page 221,
Importing vCards (electronic business cards).
Favourites : View of destinations stored as favour-
it
es.
Function buttons
Contacts : View contacts that have a stored ad-
dr
ess (postal address).
Home address
Only one addr
ess or position can be stored
as the home address at any one time. The
stored home address can be edited or over-
written.
If a home address has already been stored,
route guidance will be started to the stored
home address.
If a home address has not yet been stored, an
address can be assigned as the home ad-
dress.
Assigning the home address for the first time:
Current position : Press to store the vehicle's current
position as the home addr
ess.
Address
: Press to enter the home address manually.
Editing the home address:
The home address can be edited in the Naviga-
tion settings
›
››
page 222 menu.
My route (route mode)
Fig. 212 Details of the route during route guid-
ance
.
Several destinations can be defined in the
r
oute mode. A trip with several destinations is
known as a “route”.
The “starting point” of a route is always the
current vehicle position determined by the In-
fotainment system. The “destination” is the
end point of a route. “Stopover destinations”
are driven to before the destination.
●
Press the My destinations
function button
in the main Navigation menu.
●
Select the desired function button (Edit
route, New route or Route mem.).
»
217
Infotainment system
Pop-up window function buttons My route
Function buttons
Edit route
a)
: T
o edit and store the active route.
New route
: To create a new route.
Route mem. : To Delete, Edit or Start the r
outes
stored.
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activ
ated in the route mode.
Function buttons and indications in the New
route and Edit route
Function buttons
A
: St
opover.
: Destination.
...: Estimat
ed time of arrival at destination.
...: Cal
culated distance to destination.
B
Press on the destination to display the function
butt
ons.
: Del
ete destination.
: T
o start guidance direct to the selected
destination. Destinations that come before the
selected destination are ignored.
: T
o open the detailed view of the destination
in question.
Function buttons
C
Available function buttons.
New dest.: To add a new destination to the tour.
Destinations: T
o add a new destination from
My destinations to the tour.
Store: T
o store the created tour in the tour
memory.
Start: T
o start route guidance.
Calculate
a)
: T
o update calculated distance
and estimated arrival time.
Stop
b)
: T
o stop route guidance to the active
destination.
1
To move a stopover or a destination to another
position on the list. Pr
ess and hold to move the
destination.
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activ
ated and when a destination has been
added to the tour.
b)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activated.
Special destinations (POI)
Fig. 213 Points of interest on the map.
The points of interest saved in the memory
ar
e divided into different categories. Each
category of special destinations has a sym-
bol assigned to it.
In the Map settings menu, you can indicate
the special destinations that you want to dis-
play on the map. Up to 10 categories can be
selected.
Display of points of interest on the map can
be enabled or disabled with the View
›››
page 2
19 button.
Selecting a point of interest on the map
Function buttons
1
There are several points of interest in the area.
Pr
ess this symbol to open a list of points of in-
terest.
218
Operating modes
Function buttons
2
The only point of interest in this zone. Press the
symbol t
o open the detailed view of the point of
interest.
Search for a point of interest
In the Navigation main menu, press the
Points of interest function button.
Press the Mor
e points of interest
button.
Function buttons
Search area : To select the area in which special des-
tinations must be sear
ched.
Surroundings of the location
: Points of interest will
be sear
ched around the location.
Surroundings of the destination
a)
: P
oints of interest
will be searched around the destination.
On the route
a)
: P
oints of interest will be searched
along the route.
Surroundings of the address
: Points of interest will
be sear
ched around the address entered.
Select on the map
: Points of interest will be
sear
ched around the destination selected on
the map. To select a destination on the map,
press the Edit
button.
Search category : Select the main category (e.g. Ve-
hicle and travel), the cat
egory (e.g. Air-
ports) and then the desired entry on the list.
Store
: To save the selected point of interest in
the destination memory
›
››
page 216.
Function buttons
Dial number : Establishes a telephone connec-
tion with the number st
ored for the point of inter-
est.
Start
: Starts guided navigation to the selected
point of interest.
Search name : To search a point of interest entering
the name or using synonyms of the cat
egories
(e.g. “Sleep” for hotels and hostels).
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activ
ated.
View
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
View
function button.
Function buttons
Map display in two dimensions (con-
v
entional).
Map display in three dimensions (bird's
eye vie
w).
a)
To display the destination on the map.
a)
To display the route on the map.
Auto /
Day / Night
To switch between day and night for-
mat.
Function buttons
SPLIT
SCREEN
Show the split screen
›
››
page 219.
POI
Press to display the categories of the
points of int
erest selected on the map.
Also see
›››
page 218, Special desti-
nations (POI).
In the Navigation settings
menu, under Map settings you can
configur
e the categories of points of
interest to display on the map
›››
page 222.
a)
Only displayed with route guidance activated.
Split screen
Fig. 214 Split screen displayed.
The split screen
›
››
Fig. 214
A
shows the in-
f
ormation detailed below:
»
219
Infotainment system
●
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
View
function button.
●
Enable the Split scr
een
button by pressing
.
●
Press the ... function button. the split
scr
een to select a display option.
Function buttons
Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.
Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav-
elling direction and indicates the current position of
the vehicle (street name).
Manoeuvre
a)
: The list of manoeuvr
es is displayed.
Road signs
: Based on the features of the vehicle, the
r
oad signs stored in the navigation data
›››
page 222
or the road signs recognised by the road sign detec-
tor are displayed
›››
page 222.
Sat. data
: current vehicle position in coordinates and
GPS st
atus (satellite reception).
a)
This is only active when route guidance is active.
Pr
ess the
function button to close the split
scr
een.
Map display
Fig. 215 Messages and function buttons on
the map displ
ay.
Function buttons and messages on the
map displ
ay.
To activate function buttons
1
and , pr
ess
function button
3
.
Function buttons
1
To select automatic scaling. If the function is
activ
e, the symbol is displayed in blue ().
2
Current altitude indicator.
3
View map scale ( or ). R
otate the set-
tings button to modify the scale of the map.
To change the orientation of the map (north-
f
acing or direction of travel). This function is on-
ly available in 2D mode.
To centre the exact vehicle position on the map.
Function buttons
To centre the exact destination on the map. This
function butt
on is only displayed if either Dis-
play destination on map is selected
›››
page 219.
Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few sec-
onds, it aut
omatically returns to the last selec-
ted scale.
Traffic bulletins and dynamic desti-
nation guidance (TRAFFIC)
The Infotainment system constantly receives
tr
affic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-
ground, if a traffic information station is
tuned.
Traffic bulletins are displayed on the map
with symbols
›››
page 221, Traffic reports
on map (selection) and they are required
dynamic destination guidance
›››
page 221,
Dynamic route guidance.
List of available traffic reports
●
Press the infotainment button to dis-
play the list of current traffic bulletins.
●
Press the
function button and select All
or Route.
Function buttons
All : All traffic bulletins received will be displayed.
220
Operating modes
Function buttons
Route : The traffic bulletins received that affect the
cal
culated route will be displayed.
Dynamic route guidance
In or
der for dynamic route guidance to func-
tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the
route options.
If a traffic report is received that affects the
route being travelled, an alternative route will
be searched for if the system calculates that
time can be saved.
If, on the other hand, the alternative route
does not save time, the route will continue
with the traffic jam. In both cases, an an-
nouncement will be made.
Shortly before reaching the announced traf-
fic jam, it is indicated again.
Avoiding a traffic jam by following the instruc-
tions of a traffic bulletin does not always save
time, for example, if alternative routes are
congested. The effectiveness of dynamic
navigation depends on the traffic bulletins
that are received.
The rest of the route that has to be travelled
can be manually excluded to force its recal-
culation
›››
page 216.
Traffic reports on map (selection)
Symbol: Meaning
: Sl
ow traffic
: T
raffic jam
: Accident
: Slippery r
oad surface (ice or snow)
: Slippery r
oad surface
: Danger
: R
oad works
: Str
ong wind
: Road closed to traffic
During route guidance, traffic incidents that
do not aff
ect the calculated route calculated
are displayed in grey.
The length of a traffic jam on the calculated
route is shown by a red line.
Incidents that affect the calculated route and
that have led to the recalculation of the route
are shown in orange.
The position of a symbol indicates the start of
the traffic jam if it is precisely specified in the
traffic bulletin.
Importing vCards (electronic busi-
ness cards)
Importing vCards to the destination mem-
ory
●
Insert the data storage device with the stor-
ed vCar
ds or connect it to the Infotainment
system
›››
page 202.
●
Press the Settings
function button in the
Navigation main menu.
●
In the Navigation settings menu, pr
ess
the Import destinations
function button.
●
Select the data carrier with the vCards
sav
ed in the list.
●
Press Import all vCards from this folder
.
●
Confirm the import notice with the OK
function button.
Sav
ed vCards will now be in the destinations
memory
›››
page 216.
Note
Only one address per vCard can be impor-
t
ed. In the event any vCards have multiple
addresses, only the main address will be
imported.
221
Infotainment system
Navigation with images
Fig. 216 Images main menu.
Selecting an image and starting route
guidance
●
Press the Infotainment
button and then
select the Images context.
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 216
1
function button and
sel
ect the data storage device where the im-
ages are stored.
●
If the image displayed was taken using GPS
localisation, the function button will appear.
Press to start guidance to a destination.
Road signs indication
The road sign indication must be active in the
Navigation settings menu
›
››
page 222.
If there are road signs stored in the navigation
data for the route you are driving on, the sys-
tem can display them on the map (e.g. a
speed limit).
Take into account the age of the navigation
data and the limitations of the navigation sys-
tem
›››
page 213!
Recognition of road signs
Some vehicles have a road sign recognition
camer
a. If the vehicle has road sign recogni-
tion and it is active, road signs detected by
the system will be displayed on the map,
along with additional information.
Read and take into account the information
and indications of the road signs recognition
system
›››
page 78.
Route guidance in Demo mode
If demo mode is activated in the Navigation
settings menu, an additional pop-up win-
do
w opens when you start route guidance.
●
Pressing the Demo mode
function button
st
arts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti-
nation you have entered.
●
If you press the Normal
function button, a
“r
eal route guidance” starts.
The development and operation of virtual
route guidance is compatible with the devel-
opment and operation of real route guidance.
Virtual route guidance is repeated after
reaching the fictitious destination and re-
starts from the starting point, if it is not inter-
rupted beforehand.
When the starting point of the Demo mode is
manually set in the Navigation settings
menu, the virtual route guidance starts from
that position.
A manually entered starting point is overwrit-
ten with the current location of the vehicle, if
the vehicle starts moving.
Note
Deactivate the Demo mode after use, oth-
erwise you will al
ways have to select
whether to start a virtual route or normal
route before starting route guidance.
Navigation settings
●
Press the Navigation function butt
on in the
main Settings
menu.
Function buttons
Route options : To make the route calculation adjust-
ments.
222
Operating modes
Function buttons
Suggest 3 alternative routes : After starting route
guidance
, 3 alternative routes are proposed
›››
page 215.
Route
: Route type selection.
Economical : Route calculation, taking econom-
ic aspects int
o account.
Fast
: The fastest route to the destination.
Short : The shortest route to the destination,
e
ven if it results in longer travelling time.
Dynamic route
: Dynamic route guidance activates
when a T
MC is received
›››
page 220.
Avoid motorways and highways
: Motorways will be
e
xcluded from the route calculation wherever
possible.
Avoid ferries and motorail trains
: Ferries and motorail
tr
ains will not be taken into account for the route
calculation, wherever possible.
Avoid toll roads
: Toll roads will be excluded from
the r
oute calculation, whenever possible.
Avoid tunnels
: Tunnels will be excluded from the
r
oute calculation, whenever possible.
Avoid routes requiring toll stickers
: Mandatory toll
stick
ers (stickers certifying that the toll has been
paid) will be excluded from the route calculation
whenever possible.
Function buttons
Show available toll stickers
a)
: T
o mark the available
toll stickers on the list
( Avoid routes requiring toll stickers
must be active).
Routes requiring toll stickers will be taken into ac-
count in the route calculation if it is marked that
the toll sticker is available.
Map : To adjust the map display settings.
Show road signs : The road signs stored in the navi-
gation dat
a for the road you are driving on are dis-
played during route guidance
›››
page 222.
Lane guidance
: During route guidance, an addi-
tional indication is displ
ayed to recommend a
lane when driving, and when turning on roads with
several lanes. Only if the data bank contains infor-
mation about the area that is being driven
through.
Show favourites
: The destinations saved as favour-
it
es on the map are displayed ().
Show POIs
Select categories for POIs : To select the POI cate-
gories sho
wn on the map
›››
page 218.
Show brand logos for POIs
: Displays logos of the
sel
ected special destinations categories (e.g.
displays logos of service stations).
Manage memory
: To make adjustments to the stored
destinations.
Sort contacts : To select the sequential order of
agenda entries r
ecorded with postal addresses,
see also
›››
page 216.
Define home address
: To assign or edit a home ad-
dr
ess, see also
›››
page 217.
Function buttons
Delete user data : To delete stored destinations (e.g.
Last destinations or the Destination
memory).
Navigation announcements : To change the navigation
announcements settings.
Volume : To adjust the volume of audible driving
r
ecommendations.
No navigation announcements during calls
: During a
t
elephone conversation, audio driving recommen-
dations will not be given.
Speed limits
: Shows the speed limits, depending on
the r
oad, of the country that is being driven through.
Fuel options
: To change fuel related settings.
Select preferred petrol station : The brand of the se-
l
ected service station is given priority in special
destination search results.
Fuel warning
: The fuel warning is active.
If the fuel level reaches the reserve, an appropri-
at
e warning is generated that enables the service
station search.
Import destinations
: To import digital business cards
(vCar
ds) into the destination memory
›››
page 221.
Version information
: Information about stored naviga-
tion dat
a.
Advanced settings
: For making advanced changes to
the navigation settings.
Time display : Indication during r
oute guidance.
»
223
Infotainment system
Function buttons
Time of arrival : The estimated time of arrival at
the destination is displ
ayed.
Running time
: The envisaged travelling time to
the destination is displayed.
Status line : View during r
oute guidance.
Destination
: The calculated distance to the
destination is sho
wn.
Next stopover
: The calculated distance to the
ne
xt stopover is shown.
Note: National border crossed
: Indication of the
speed limits of the country in question when
cr
ossing a border.
Demo mode
: When the Demo mode is active and
r
oute guidance is started, a virtual guide to the en-
tered destination may be started
›››
page 222.
Define demo mode starting point
: If the Demo
mode is activ
e and the vehicle is stopped, a fic-
titious starting point can be set for the virtual
route guidance.
a)
This functionality will depend on the country.
Telephone
Gener
al information
Telephone functions can only be used if there
is a mobil
e phone connected by Bluetooth to
the infotainment system
›››
page 226.
To do this, the phone must have the Blue-
tooth® function activated.
The instructions shown on the screen for the
telephone menus will depend on the mobile
telephone used.
Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. For
further information on compatible Bluetooth®
products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or
check on the Internet.
Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-
phone and of any accessories.
If you detect any operating issues between
your mobile telephone and the Infotainment
system, restart your mobile by switching it off
and on again.
Some functions and setup can only be per-
formed when the vehicle is stopped and are
not available on all mobile telephones.
You may experience poor reception or may
be cut off in areas where the signal is weak.
Most electronic devices are shielded against
HF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, the
electronic equipment may not be protected
from the HF signals of the telephone man-
agement system. This may cause interfer-
ence.
Priority mobile phone
A priority-connected mobile phone has full
access to the user profile.
It offers all the telephone management sys-
tem functions.
Associated mobile phone
A mobile phone connected as an associate
does not have access to the user profile.
Incoming calls can be received and main-
tained through the phone's management sys-
tem.
Outgoing calls can only be maintained
through the phone's management system, if
they have been started with the mobile
phone.
During a telephone call the functions
›››
page 229, During a phone call are avail-
able.
WARNING
General, mandatory, legal and country-
specific instructions and l
aws for the use of
mobile phones inside the vehicle must al-
ways be considered.
WARNING
Speaking by telephone and using the mo-
bil
e telephone management system whilst
driving can distract you from the road and
cause an accident.
●
In areas of little coverage your call may
be cut off and you may not be able to make
even emergency calls.
224
Operating modes
WARNING
Mobile telephones may interfere with and
alt
er the correct operation of pacemakers
if they are carried directly over them.
●
Maintain a minimum distance of at least
20 centimetres between the aerials of the
mobile telephone and the pacemaker.
●
Do not carry your switched-on mobile
telephone in your breast pocket directly
over the pacemaker.
●
If you suspect interference, switch off the
mobile telephone immediately.
CAUTION
High speeds, poor weather or road condi-
tions and the qualit
y of reception can all
affect the audio quality of a telephone con-
versation in the vehicle.
Note
●
R
estrictions on the use of devices using
Bluetooth® technology may apply in some
countries. For further information, contact
the local authorities.
●
If you wish to connect a device via Blue-
tooth®, consult the safety warnings in its
instruction manual. Use only compatible
Bluetooth® products.
●
Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-
cle may cause noise in the speakers.
●
Some netw
orks may not recognise all of
the language characters or offer all of the
services.
Places with special regulations
In the majority of cases, these places are
signpost
ed, but not always clearly. They in-
clude, for example:
●
The vicinity of chemical pipelines and
tanks.
●
The lower decks of boats and ferries.
●
In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid
gas (such as pr
opane or butane).
●
Places where the air is laden with chemi-
cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal
powder.
●
All other places where the vehicle engine
must be switched off.
WARNING
Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a
risk of e
xplosion! The mobile telephone
may automatically reconnect to the mobile
telephone network if it loses the Bluetooth®
connection to the telephone management
system.
CAUTION
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobil
e telephones is prohibited,
both the telephone and the telephone
management system must always be
switched off. Interference may be caused
with sensitive technical and medical equip-
ment, possibly resulting in a malfunction or
damage to the equipment.
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele-
phone t
o be connected to your vehicle's tele-
phone management system. Prior pairing be-
tween the two is required for this purpose.
Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones connect
automatically when the ignition is turned on if
a connection has been previously establish-
ed. Its Bluetooth® function must be activated
for this purpose, and there must be no Blue-
tooth® connection with other devices.
Bluetooth® connections are free.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth® SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth® profiles
When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-
ephone management system, a data ex-
change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®
profiles.
»
225
Infotainment system
●
Hands-fr
ee telephone profile (HFP): the
HFP can be used to manage calls through the
infotainment system.
●
Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows
audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It
may require connecting other profiles for
managing and controlling playback.
●
Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows
phone book contents to be downloaded from
the mobile telephone.
●
Message profile (MAP): It allows short
messages (SMS) to be downloaded and
synchronised.
●
Audio and video remote control profile
(AVRCP): To view information of tracks and
control playback on the mobile device.
Note
The mobile telephone's button and warning
t
ones should be off. Where necessary, dis-
connect the headset from the mobile tele-
phone you wish to connect to the system.
Pre-installation for mobile phone
Basic
If there is a mobile phone connected to the
t
elephone management system through the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free-Profile (HFP), you
can make phone calls with the hands-free
system.
The aerial of the vehicle cannot be used.
Take into account the instructions to use a
mobile telephone in the vehicle without con-
nection to the external antenna
›››
page 345.
Possible types of connection Basic
The types of connection depend on the
country and device in question.
To see the meaning of the acronyms and
terms of the table, see
›››
page 225.
Device 1 Device 2
HFP (with priority) +
A2DP/AVRCP
HFP (associated)
HFP (with priority)
HFP (associated) +
A2DP/AVRCP
HFP (with priority) HFP (associated)
HFP A2DP/AVRCP
HFP (with priority) +
A2DP/AVRCP
HFP
Pairing and connecting a mobile
t
elephone to the Infotainment sys-
tem
In order to manage a mobile telephone via
the Inf
otainment system, it is necessary to
pair both devices once.
For your safety, pairing should be done when
the vehicle is stationary. In some countries it is
not possible to perform the pairing with the
vehicle running.
Conditions
●
The ignition must be switched on.
●
The Bluet
ooth® function of the mobile
phone and the infotainment system must be
active and visible.
●
The keypad lock on the mobile telephone
must be deactivated.
Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-
bile telephone.
During the pairing process, it is necessary to
enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.
Pairing a mobile telephone
●
Press the infotainment button.
●
Press the Find telephone
function button.
226
Operating modes
As soon as the search is completed, the
names of the Bluet
ooth® devices found are
displayed on-screen.
●
Turn on the mobile phone you want to pair
on the list of Bluetooth® devices found.
The infotainment system and the mobile
phone can be connected to each other. To
terminate the connection of both devices,
you might have to enter more data on the
mobile phone and the Infotainment system.
●
If necessary, confirm the pairing on the mo-
bile phone.
Depending on the mobile phone:
●
Use your mobile telephone to enter and
confirm your PIN code, as instructed in the
display of the infotainment system.
OR:
●
Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-
play of the Infotainment system with that
shown on the mobile telephone. If they
match, confirm on both devices.
Once the pairing has completed successful-
ly, the Telephone main menu is displayed
along with the phonebook, call list and SMS
stored on the mobile phone, which are auto-
matically loaded. Confirmation on the mobile
phone may be necessary.
The duration of the loading process depends
on the amount of data stored on the mobile
telephone. After loading, the data will be
available on the Infotainment system.
Pairing and connection of mobile tele-
phones
You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to
the Infotainment system, but the number of si-
multaneous connections varies:
●
Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-
bile phones simultaneously connected to the
hands-free profile, and one of them as Blue-
tooth® audio.
When the Infotainment system is switched on,
it connects to the last connected mobile tele-
phone. If it is not possible to connect to this
mobile telephone, the system will try to con-
nect to the next mobile telephone on the list
of paired devices.
The maximum range of the connection is ap-
prox. 10 metres. The connection will be inter-
rupted if this distance is exceeded. The con-
nection is automatically re-established as
soon as the device is once again within Blue-
tooth® range.
WARNING
Do not perform the pairing and connection
pr
ocess while driving. This may cause an
accident!
Note
Check that there are no requests pending
accept
ance in your mobile phone. If there
are, this could block some of the functions
in the Telephone menu.
Switching the telephone manage-
ment syst
em off
●
End the current call.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
●
Turn the mobile phone off.
If the k
ey is still in the ignition switch after
turning off the ignition, it will not turn off. After
around 15 minutes of delayed disconnection
(default value) the telephone management
system will switch off.
Note
If there was a mobile phone connected to
the t
elephone management system, the
emitting unit of the mobile phone will still
be on after turning the phone management
system off. You might have to turn off the
mobile phone.
227
Infotainment system
Telephone main menu
Fig. 217 PHONE main menu.
Fig. 218
Incoming call.
User profile
A connect
ed mobile phone is stored in the tel-
ephone's management system as a user pro-
file.
The telephone management system can
store up to a maximum of 4 user profiles for
mobile telephones. If another mobile phone is
paired, the user profile that has not been
used for the longest time is automatically de-
leted.
The user profile stores the phone’s contact
data, the stored favourites (speed-dial but-
tons) and the settings in the User profile
settings menu.
When the mobile phone connects to the tele-
phone management system again, the data
and settings become available again.
If any entries in the mobile phone book are
modified while connected, a manual update
of the phone book data can be initiated from
the User profile settings
›››
page 236
menu. The next time that the mobile tele-
phone is connected (e.g. on the next journey)
the phonebook is updated automatically.
Opening the PHONE main menu
Press the button on the Infotainment
system to open the Telephone
›››
Fig. 217
main menu.
Function buttons
1
Mobile phone with priority
a)
and con-
nect
ed.
Press to connect or pair a different
mobil
e phone.
Function buttons
2
b)
Associated mobile phone
a)
and con-
nect
ed.
Press to change its priority. The asso-
ciat
ed mobile phone becomes the
priority mobile phone and vice-versa.
3
Favourites (speed dial buttons), to
which a cont
act can be assigned
›››
page 235.
Dial
number
To open the number pad and enter a
t
elephone number
›››
page 230.
Con-
t
acts
To open the contacts of the paired
mobil
e phone
›››
page 231.
T
ext
message
c)
To open the SMS menu
›
››
page 233.
Call
s
To open call lists of the paired mobile
t
elephone
›››
page 234.
Set
-
tings
To open the Telephone settings
›
››
page 235. menu.
Press to accept a call
.
Press to end a call
.
OR: Press to reject an incoming call.
228
Operating modes
Function buttons
Press to mute the call signal during a
call and t
o reactivate it.
a)
See more information about priority or associated
mobil
e phones and about user profiles
›››
page 228.
b)
Only displayed if the associated mobile telephone
is connected.
c)
Depending on the mobile phone connected.
Instructions and symbols of the phone
management system
Display: Meaning
A
Name of the mobile network operator
(pr
ovider) of the SIM of the paired phone.
B
View of stored telephone number or name.
If the stored contact has an assigned im-
age, it can be displayed
›››
page 235
a)
.
When receiving a call, the name of the
mobil
e phone receiving the call is dis-
played (priority or associated mobile
phone).
Paired mobile telephone battery charge
st
atus.
Strength of coverage signal received by
the mobil
e telephone.
a)
Depending on the mobile phone connected.
During a phone call
Fig. 219 During a phone call.
After starting a call with a phone number, the
PHONE main menu s
witches to the Phone call
screen
›››
Fig. 219.
Display and function buttons: operation
and eff
ect
A
Press to disconnect the microphone of
the pr
e-installation for mobile phone dur-
ing a phone call (button
switches to
).
Press to connect the microphone of the
pre-installation for mobile phone during a
phone call (button switches to ).
a)
Press to keep the phone call through the
pr
e-installation for mobile phone.
Display and function buttons: operation
and eff
ect
B
View of stored telephone number or
name
. If the stored contact has an as-
signed image, it can be displayed
›››
page 235
b)
.
When receiving a call, the name of the
mobil
e phone receiving the call is dis-
played (priority or associated mobile
phone).
Press to open the detailed view of the
cont
act.
Press to hold a call.
When there is a call on hold, audio trans-
mission is off
. Phone calls held in the vehi-
cle are not transmitted.
Press to end a call.
a)
This button is only displayed when the phone call is
on the mobil
e phone.
b)
Depending on the mobile phone connected.
Functions during a phone call
Functions available
Mute the micro-
phone of the pr
e-
installation for
mobile phone
Press the
function button.
The microphone of the pre-in-
stallation for mobile phone is
muted (button switches to
).
»
229
Infotainment system
Functions available
Turn on the mi-
cr
ophone of the
pre-installation
for mobile phone
Press the
function button.
The microphone is enabled (but-
t
on
switches to ).
Have a phone
call via the mo-
bil
e phone
Press the function button
Settings
and then
Hands-fr
ee
.
The hands-free system is disa-
bl
ed and the phone call contin-
ues on the mobile phone (button
switches to ).
Return to the
phone call
through the pre-
installation for
mobile phone.
Press the function button.
OR: Pr
ess the Settings
func-
tion butt
on and them press
Hands free
.
The hands-free system is ena-
bl
ed and the phone call contin-
ues on the pre-installation for
mobile phone (button
switches to ).
Enter telephone number menu
Fig. 220 Enter telephone number menu.
Fig. 221
Enter telephone number menu (select
a cont
act from the list).
Open the Enter telephone number menu
●
Press the Sel
ect number
function button
t
o open the Enter phone number menu.
SOS Emergency call
1)
●
Press the function button to make an emer-
gency call.
Assistance call
1)
●
Press the function button to obtain help in
the event of breakdown.
SEAT, S.A. Authorised Services are also at
your disposal with their mobile units.
Information call
1)
●
Press the function button to obtain informa-
tion about the SEAT, S.A. brand and selected
additional services related to traffic and trav-
el.
Call mailbox
●
Press the Voice mail
function button to
st
art the connection.
●
OR: Press the
function button for about 2
seconds t
o start the connection.
If the number for the mailbox has not yet
been stored, enter it and confirm with OK
.
1)
This depends on the country and unit in ques-
tion.
230
Operating modes
Stored numbers can be modified in the User
profile settings
›
››
page 236 menu.
1)
Prefix function
The prefix function serves to add a prefix to
the phone number entered or stored when di-
alling, e.g. to make a phone call from a differ-
ent profile of the SIM (Dual/TwinBill) or to
cancel service or control orders on the phone
network (e.g. hide phone number).
●
Enter the phone number without the prefix
and press /
.
The pr
efix stored in the Use profile set-
tings
›››
page 236 menu is automatically
placed before the phone number and the call
starts.
2)
Voice input
●
Press the function button to start a connec-
tion through voice control through a phone
number.
Enter telephone number
●
Entering a phone number with the keypad.
Press the
function button to make a call.
Sel
ect a contact from the list
●
Enter the first letters of the contact to find
using the keypad. The available entries ap-
pear on the list of contacts
›››
Fig. 221.
●
Search in the phonebook and press the de-
sired contact to establish the connection.
Enter the country code
To enter a country code, instead of the first
two digits (international access code e.g.
“00”) you can enter the character “+”.
●
Press the function button 0
for approx. 2
seconds t
o add the +.
Phonebook Menu (contacts)
Fig. 222 Contacts Menu (phonebook).
»
1)
The function button is only displayed when the
pr
efix button is enabled in the User profile
settings
›››
page 236 menu.
2)
This depends on the country and unit in ques-
tion.
231
Infotainment system
Fig. 223 Search window.
Once the first pairing is made, it may take
some time until the phonebook dat
a
1)
of the
paired mobile are available in the infotain-
ment system. Depending on the volume of
data that has to be transferred, the process
may take several minutes. It may be necessa-
ry to confirm the data transmission on the
mobile phone.
The phonebook can also be viewed during a
telephone conversation.
If the name saved in the phonebook has an
assigned photo, it can be displayed on the list
next to the name. To do this, the option
Show pictures for contacts
in the Phone set
-
tings context must be enabled and your mo-
bile phone must support this functionality
(check the compatibility list)
›››
page 235,
Phone settings.
In the Telephone main menu, press the
Contacts
function button to access the
phone book
.
Select a contact from the list
●
Search the list and press on the desired
contact to make the call.
●
OR: If the contact has several numbers, first
press on the contact and then press on the
desired number for making the call.
Search for a contact in the search window
●
Press the Search
function button
›
››
Fig. 222 to open the search window.
●
Enter the name of the contact you are look-
ing for in the window
›››
Fig. 223. While the
characters are being entered, a contact is
displayed in the input field.
●
The number of matching results is dis-
played to the right of the input field. Press the
function button to go to the list.
●
Search the list and press on the desired
contact to make the call.
Opening the detailed view of a contact
●
Press the function button
›››
Fig. 222 lo-
cated next to the entry on the contacts list.
All the telephone numbers are displayed in
the detailed view, and where applicable, the
address recorded for the contact in question.
Read contact name
●
Press the function button on the detailed
list if you want the voice control system to
read the name of the contact.
Call a contact
●
Press the desired telephone number on the
detailed list to make the call.
Send SMS to a contact
●
Press the function button on the detailed
list.
Start route guidance to a contact's ad-
dress
2)
If the contact’s address data has been saved,
route guidance can be started to the con-
tact's address.
1)
Depending on the device, only contacts in the
phone's memory ar
e loaded.
2)
Valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.
232
Operating modes
●
Pr
ess address data in the detailed view to
start route guidance.
Note
If you edit a number before calling, it will
not be sav
ed in the phonebook but only
used for the call.
Short messages (SMS) menu
Fig. 224 Short messages (SMS) menu.
Fig. 225 Overview of possible function buttons
in submenus.
Requirements
T
o receive, view and send short messages
(SMS) via the infotainment system, the mobile
phone connected to the infotainment system
must be compatible with the MAP
›››
page 225 Bluetooth® profile.
Due to the large number of different Blue-
tooth devices on the market, it cannot be
guaranteed that all of the functions will be
executed.
Opening the short messages (SMS) menu
●
Press the SMS
function button from the
TELEPHONE main menu.
Function buttons
A
Indicates the selected menu.
: T
o return to the short message (SMS) menu
›››
Fig. 224.
1
New SMS: T
o write and send an SMS.
2
Inbox: T
o open the received SMS folder.
3
Sent: T
o open the sent SMS folder.
4
Outbox: T
o open the outbox folder. SMS mes-
sages that have not been sent are stored here.
5
Drafts: T
o open the Drafts folder. SMSs stored
as drafts are saved here.
6
Open the Templates menu: T
o select a text
template from the list.
During route guidance, a template is prepared
with the current destination (I am on my
way to <...> <...> ).
To return to the main PHONE menu.
Possible submenu function buttons
The number of functions available depends on the
mobil
e phone that is connected.
Function buttons
7
For the voice control system to read the text of
the SMS.
»
233
Infotainment system
Function buttons
8
Open the Options menu.
Reply with template: To select a text template
from a list.
Show numbers: The t
elephone numbers that
are included in the message are displayed.
9
To forward an SMS.
10
To reply to an incoming SMS.
11
The text is saved as a draft and can be sent lat-
er
.
12
Open the Templates menu: T
o select a text
template from the list, see also
6
.
13
To open the number pad and enter a tele-
phone number
.
OR: To select a recipient from the contacts list.
14
To add more recipients by entering a telephone
number or cont
acts list.
15
To send an SMS.
16
To delete an SMS.
17
To open the number pad and enter a tele-
phone number
.
Calls Menu (call lists)
Fig. 226 Calls Menu (list of calls).
If a telephone number is stored as a contact,
the st
ored name is displayed on the call list
instead of the number.
If an image is assigned to the contact, it can
be displayed on the call list next to the name
›››
page 235.
Open the Calls menu
●
Press the Calls
function button to open
the Calls menu.
●
Press function button
›
››
Fig. 226
1
.
●
Select the desired call list: All , Missed call
s
,
Diall
ed numbers
or R
eceived calls
.
Possible displays in the Calls menu
Display: Meaning
Missed calls : Displays the numbers of
missed and unans
wered calls.
Dialled numbers
: Indicates the numbers di-
alled on the mobile telephone and on the
Infotainment system telephone manage-
ment system.
Received calls : Indicates the numbers of the
call
s received on the mobile telephone and
on the Infotainment system telephone
management system.
The stored prefix is placed before the
phone number aut
omatically and the con-
nection is started. Also see
›››
page 230,
Enter telephone number menu.
Opening the detailed view of a contact. All
the telephone numbers are displayed in the
detailed view, and where applicable, the
address recorded for the contact in ques-
tion.
The phone number is copied to the Enter
phone number menu
›››
page 230.
Note
The availability of the call lists will depend
on the mobil
e phone used.
234
Operating modes
Quick dial keys
Fig. 227 PHONE main menu.
The speed dial keys
›
››
Fig. 227
1
can be as-
signed a t
elephone number from the phone
book.
If a photo is assigned to the name stored in
the phone book, it can be displayed on the
speed dial button
›››
page 235.
All speed dial keys have to be manually edi-
ted and will be assigned to a user profile. Up
to 12 contacts can be added to the speed di-
al keys.
Assign the speed dial keys
●
In the main Telephone menu, press a free
speed dial key.
●
Select the desired contact from the list. If
the selected contact has several phone num-
bers, select the number you want.
Edit assigned speed dial keys
●
Press and hold an occupied speed dial key
in the Telephone main menu until the Con-
tacts menu opens.
●
Select the desired contact from the list. If
the selected contact has several phone num-
bers, select the number you want.
Delete assigned speed dial keys
●
The phone numbers stored in the speed di-
al buttons can be deleted in the menu User
profile settings > Manage favourites
›››
page 236.
Make a call with a speed dial button
●
Briefly press an assigned speed dial key in
the Telephone main menu to call the tele-
phone number stored in it.
Note
The contacts stored in the speed dial keys
ar
e NOT updated automatically. If a con-
tact stored on a speed dial key is modified
on the mobile phone, the speed dial key
must be assigned again.
Phone settings
In the T
elephone main menu, press the
Settings
function button.
Function buttons
Private mode : Private mode can only be activated
during an activ
e call. When private mode is disabled
(by default), the call’s audio is managed through the
vehicle. When private mode is activated, call audio is
managed through the mobile phone.
Select mobile phone
: From the list, select the mobile
phone to be connected to the hands-free profile with
the infotainment system.
OR: Press Find telephone to connect a new mobile
phone
.
Bluetooth®
: Opens the menu Bluetooth® set-
tings
›
››
page 235.
User profile
: Open the User profile settings
menu
›
››
page 236.
Note
Some telephones require a restart to down-
l
oad the last added contacts again.
Bluetooth® settings
●
In the T
elephone main menu, press the
Settings
function button.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment button.
●
Next, press the Bluetooth
function button.
Function buttons
Bluetooth® : Press to deactivate Bluetooth®. All active
connections ar
e disconnected.
»
235
Infotainment system
Function buttons
Visibility : Activating and deactivating Bluetooth® vis-
ibilit
y.
Visible
: Bluetooth® visibility is active.
Hidden : Bluetooth® visibility is deactivated.
Bluet
ooth® visibility must be active for external
pairing of a Bluetooth® device with the infotain-
ment system. When a Bluetooth® audio device
is active and playing, visibility is automatically
set to Hidden.
Forename
: Display or change the Bluetooth® name
of the inf
otainment system. This will be the name
shown to other Bluetooth® devices.
Paired devices
: Viewing paired devices. To disconnect
and connect Bluet
ooth® devices and Bluetooth®
profiles.
Find devices
: Search for visible Bluetooth® devices
that ar
e within range of the infotainment system. The
maximum range is approx. 10 meters.
Bluetooth® Audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
: If an external audio
sour
ce is to be connected to the infotainment system
via Bluetooth®, this function must be active
›››
page 210.
User profile settings
In the T
elephone main menu, press the
Settings
function button and then press the
User pr
ofile
function button.
Function buttons
Manage favourites : Edit the speed dial keys.
Delete all : All favourites are deleted.
Occupied speed dial key: Pr
ess to delete the
stored number.
Free speed dial key: Pr
ess to save a phone
book number on the speed dial key.
Mailbox number
: To enter or change the voice mailbox
number
.
Prefix
: To enter the prefix that must be prefixed to the
ent
ered number
›››
page 230.
Sort by
: To set the order of appearance of the phone
book entries (Forname and Surname or vice v
ersa).
Import contacts
: Press to import the phone book of the
connect
ed telephone or to update the imported
phone book.
Delete other user profiles
: To delete all non-active user
pr
ofiles or just one of them.
Select ring tone
a)
: T
o select a ring tone from a list of
preset melodies (tones). The selected ring tone is
played and set when leaving the sub-menu.
Reminder: remember your mobile phone
: If a Bluetooth®
connection is activ
e with a mobile phone, the mes-
sage “Do not forget your mobile phone”
is displayed when the ignition is switched off.
Function buttons
Show pictures for contacts
a)
: If the cont
acts in the
phone book have been saved with a photo, it can be
displayed on the speed dial keys, call lists and
phone book.
a)
Depending on the mobile phone.
Note
Some telephones require a restart to down-
l
oad the last added contacts again.
236
Operating modes
Multimedia
USB/AUX-IN input
Fig. 228 Centre front armrest: USB/AUX-IN in-
put.
Depending on the special characteristics and
the country, the v
ehicle may have a
USB/AUX-IN port.
The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the
storage compartment area of the centre
console
›››
Fig. 228.
Convenience phone system
Fig. 229
The phone holder used for connect-
ing the mobil
e phone to the car aerial is loca-
ted in the front centre armrest.
Comfort phone service with connection to
the aerial of the v
ehicle is available for mobile
phone standards GSM 900, GSM 1800 and
UMTS 2100.
If there is a mobile phone connected to the
telephone management system through the
Bluetooth®
›››
page 225 Hands-Free-Profile
(HFP), you can make phone calls with the
hands-free system.
For the connection to the aerial of the vehicle,
the mobile phone must be on the lodging sur-
face
›››
Fig. 229
1
.
If the mobil
e phone does not connect, take
into account the instructions to use a mobile
telephone in the vehicle without connection
to the external antenna
›››
page 345.
The location of the mobile phone lodging sur-
face to use the comfort phone service de-
pends on the vehicle in question.
Special characteristics
Take into consideration the following aspects
in order not to hinder the connection of the
phone to the aerial of the vehicle.
●
The dimensions of the mobile phone must
not exceed 120 x 67 mm.
●
Only one mobile phone can be placed on
the lodging surface
1
.
●
Place the mobile phone without a protec-
tion co
ver or case on the lodging surface.
●
Do not place metallic objects (e.g. keys,
coins, etc.) on the lodging surface.
Connection to the external antenna of the
car
Take into account the particular characteris-
tics to connect to the external antenna of the
vehicle.
●
If necessary, open the armrest.
●
Place the mobile phone on the lodging sur-
face
1
(the rear part of the mobile phone
must r
est on the lodging surface).
If the mobile phone has been placed correct-
ly, the antenna of the mobile phone will auto-
matically connect to the external antenna of
the vehicle.
»
237
Infotainment system
An additional antenna amplifier guarantees
the qualit
y of the connection.
USB Port
Depending on the features, there may be a
USB port in the lodging surface area in
which USB devices can be charged (e.g. mo-
bile phones or Media players).
The maximum charging capacity is 1.6 A.
Depending on the features, the USB devices
connected can also be used as audio sour-
ces
›››
page 202.
●
Connect the desired USB device via a ca-
ble compatible with the USB port .
The charging process is automatically inter-
rupted when turning off the ignition or taking
the key off the ignition.
Compatible charging cables can be pur-
chased from SEAT dealers.
238
Start and driving
Driving
St
art and driving
Starting and stopping the
engine
Ignition lock
Fig. 230
Ignition key positions.
Key positions
›
››
Fig. 230
Ignition off. Key can be removed from the
vehicle.
Ignition is switched on.
Starting the engine.
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
●
Lock the steering wheel: remove the key
from the ignition and turn the wheel until it
1
2
3
locks. Depending on the country, in vehicles
with aut
omatic transmission, in order to re-
move the key, move the gear shift to the P po-
sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block-
ing key and release it.
●
Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into
the ignition and turn it at the same time as the
steering wheel in the direction indicated by
the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-
ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.
Start-Stop system
If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop
system switches off the engine, the ignition
remains switched on.
Automatic transmission: before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch-
ed off and the selector lever is in position P.
WARNING
●
Al
ways remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a
short period. This is especially important if
children or disabled people are left alone
in the vehicle. They could accidentally
start the engine or operate electrical
equipment, resulting in an accident.
●
The ignition key must NOT be removed
from the lock until the vehicle comes to a
standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be
immediately blocked- Risk of accident!
CAUTION
Always remove the ignition key when leav-
ing the v
ehicle, as it may discharge the bat-
tery if it is kept in for a long period of time.
Note
●
If it is difficult t
o turn the ignition key to
the position
2
, move the steering wheel to
both sides t
o release the steering lock.
●
If the vehicle battery is disconnected and
reconnected, the key must remain in the
position
2
for around 5 seconds before
st
arting up.
●
Vehicles with automatic transmission,de-
pending on the country, after switching off
the ignition, you can only remove the igni-
tion key if the selector lever is in position
“P” (parking lock). Next, the selector lever
is locked.
239
Driving
Ignition and start button
Fig. 231
In the centre console: Start button of
the K
eyless Access locking and starting sys-
tem. The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is
symmetrical.
The engine can be started with a start button
(Pr
ess & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid
key inside the vehicle in the area of the front
or rear seats, or on the centre console.
In vehicles with the Keyless Access
›››
page 95system, the engine can also be
started with the key in the luggage compart-
ment.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the
steering column if the ignition is disabled.
Switching the ignition on/off manually
If you only want to switch on the ignition
(without starting the engine), briefly press the
start button once without pressing the brake
pedal or the clutch pedal
›››
.
Aut
omatic ignition disconnection
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key
with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni-
tion does not switch off automatically. The ig-
nition is switched off by pressing the lock but-
ton on the remote control or by pressing
the sensor surface on the door lever
›››
Fig. 92.
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on
vehicles with the Start-Stop system
The ignition is switched off automatically
when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-
matic engine shutdown is active, if:
●
The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
●
the driver does not step on any pedal,
●
the driver door is opened.
After automatically turning off the ignition, if
the dipped beam is on, the side light re-
mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is
enough charge in the battery). If the driver
locks the vehicle or manually turns off the
light, the side light goes out.
Engine restart feature
If no key is detected inside the vehicle after
the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-
onds to restart it. A warning will display on the
dash panel screen.
After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside the
vehicle.
WARNING
When switching on the ignition, d
o not
press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
the engine could start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
out due car
e, this may cause accidents and
serious injury.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-
authorised person could lock the vehicle,
start the engine or connect the ignition and
operate any of the electrical equipment.
Note
●
Bef
ore leaving the vehicle, always dis-
connect the ignition and, if appropriate,
take into account the instructions on the
screen of the dash panel.
●
If the vehicle is stationary for a long time
with the engine off and the ignition on, the
vehicle battery might be discharged and it
might not be possible to start the engine.
240
Start and driving
●
If during the S
TOP phase you press the
button, the ignition is
s
witched off and the button flashes.
●
If the indication is displayed on the in-
strument panel display “Start-Stop system
deactivated: Start the engine manually”;
the
button will flash.
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine
●
Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the
gear l
ever in neutral, press the clutch pedal
and keep it in this position until the engine
starts.
●
Vehicles with automatic transmission: put
the lever in position P or N.
Vehicles with ignition locks
●
Turn the key to position
›››
Fig. 230
2
.
●
Keep turning the key to position
›
››
Fig. 230
3
without stepping on the accel-
er
ator.
●
Once the engine starts, release the key.
When it is released, the key returns to position
2
.
●
If the engine does not start, stop and wait
f
or around 1 minute to try again.
Vehicles with start buttons
●
Press and hold the brake pedal until the en-
gine starts.
●
Press the starter button
›››
Fig. 231; do not
press the accelerator. There must be a valid
key in the vehicle for the engine to start.
●
Once the engine starts, release the start
button.
●
If the engine does not start, stop and wait
for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,
perform an emergency start
›››
page 243.
WARNING
Do not keep the engine running in confined
spaces, as ther
e is a danger of poisoning.
●
The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-
ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-
ness and death.
WARNING
Do not get out of the vehicle with the en-
gine running, especially if a gear is engag-
ed. The v
ehicle could then suddenly move
or something strange could happen that
would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
WARNING
Never use cold start sprays, they could ex-
pl
ode or cause the engine to run at high
revs. Doing this risks injury.
CAUTION
●
The st
arter motor or the engine may be
damaged if you try to start the engine while
driving or if you restart it immediately after
switching it off.
●
When the engine is cold, you should
avoid high engine speeds, driving at full
throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk
of engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the v
ehicle stationary. Start off
immediately, driving gently. This helps the
engine reach operating temperature faster
and reduces emissions.
Note
●
El
ectrical components with a high power
consumption are switched off temporarily
when the engine starts.
●
When starting with a cold engine, noise
levels may briefly increase. This is quite
normal, and no cause for concern.
Turning off the engine
●
Bring the vehicle to a full stop
›
››
.
●
With manual transmission, press the clutch
all the w
ay down. If the vehicle is automatic,
set the selector lever to the P position.
»
241
Driving
●
Apply the el
ectronic parking brake.
●
Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key to
position
›››
Fig. 230
1
.
●
Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly pr
ess the
start-up button
›››
Fig. 231.
Emergency disconnection
If the engine does not switch off after briefly
pressing the starter button, an emergency
disconnect will be required:
●
Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-
onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-
ond
›››
in Ignition and start button on
page 2
40.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehi-
cl
e is moving. This could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
The airbags and belt tensioners do not
work when the ignition is switched off.
●
The brake servo does not work with the
engine off. Therefore, you need to press the
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
●
Power steering does not work when the
engine is not running. You need more
strength to steer when the engine is switch-
ed off.
●
If the ignition is s
witched off, the steering
column could be locked, making it impossi-
ble to control the vehicle.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the
steering could suddenly lock, making it im-
possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-
dent!
WARNING
Always take the key with you when you
l
eave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-
tant if there are children in the vehicle, as
they might otherwise be able to start the
engine or use power-operated equipment
(e.g. the electric windows), which could
cause injuries.
CAUTION
●
If the v
ehicle is stopped and the Start-
Stop system switches off the engine, the ig-
nition remains switched on. Make sure that
the ignition is switched off before leaving
the vehicle, otherwise the battery could
discharge.
●
If the engine has been driven at high
speed for a prolonged period of time, it
may overheat when turned off. To avoid en-
gine damage, allow the engine to run for
approximately two minutes in neutral be-
fore switching it off.
Note
After the engine is switched off the radiator
f
an may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if
the ignition is switched off. It is also possi-
ble that the fan turns itself on once more if
the coolant temperature increases due to
the heat accumulated in the engine com-
partment or due to its prolonged exposure
to solar radiation.
Electronic immobilizer
The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-
thorised persons fr
om driving the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates
the electronic immobiliser automatically
when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The electronic immobiliser will be activated
again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with
the “Keyless Access” system, the key has to
be outside the vehicle.
If the following message is shown on the in-
strument panel display: SAFE or Immobilis-
er active, it is not possible to start the vehi-
cle.
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
242
Start and driving
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-
ed if genuine SEAT k
eys are used.
Emergency starting function
Fig. 232 Emergency ignition in vehicles with
K
eyless Access.
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emer
gency start-up will be required. The
relevant message will appear in the dash
panel display. This may happen when, for ex-
ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:
●
Immediately after pushing the starter but-
ton, keep the key next to the right trim of the
steering column
›››
Fig. 232, as close as pos-
sible to the Kessy logo.
●
The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Start-Stop system
Control lamps
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-
gine shutdown is active.
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is not available or has been
disconnect
ed.
Description and operation
The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel
and r
educe CO
2
emissions.
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-
cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is
stopping. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine automatically switches back on
when required.
When the ignition is switched on, the Start-
Stop function is automatically activated.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
●
When the vehicle is at a standstill, leave it in
neutral and take your foot off the clutch. The
engine switches off.
●
Simply depress the clutch pedal to move
off again.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
●
Brake until the vehicle has come to a stand-
still, and keep your foot on the brake pedal or
activate the Auto Hold system so that the ve-
hicle remains braked. The engine will stop.
The warning lamp will appear in the dis-
play. The engine can be stopped before
stopping completely (approximately 7 or 2
km/h depending on the vehicle's gearbox).
●
When you take your foot off the brake ped-
al the engine will start up again. The indicator
lamp goes out. In vehicles with the Auto Hold
system, when the system is active, the engine
will not start if you remove your foot from the
brake pedal. The car starts when you press
the accelerator pedal.
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop
mode
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The bonnet must be closed.
●
The engine has reached operating temper-
ature.
●
The reverse gear must not be engaged.
●
The vehicle must not be on a very steep
slope.
»
243
Driving
The engine does not turn off for various
r
easons
Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri-
fies whether certain conditions are met. The
engine does not switch off, in the following
situations for example:
●
The engine has not yet reached the re-
quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.
●
The temperature selected on the climate
control has not been reached.
●
The interior temperature is very high/low.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 161.
●
Park assist is switched on.
●
The battery is very low.
●
The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
ing turned.
●
If there is a danger of misting.
●
After engaging reverse gear.
●
In case of a very steep gradient.
is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen; it is also displayed in the driver infor-
mation system, .
The engine starts by itself
When stopped, the normal system mode may
be interrupted in the following situations. The
engine restarts without the driver's interven-
tion.
●
The interior temperature differs from the
temperature selected on the climate control.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 161.
●
The brake is pressed several times in a row.
●
The battery is not charged enough.
●
High electricity consumption.
Additional information related to the auto-
matic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in
the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when
in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P,
the engine will also remain switched off when
you take your foot off the brake pedal. In or-
der to start the engine up again the accelera-
tor must be pressed, or another gear engag-
ed or the brake released.
If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-
ped, the engine will start up again.
Change from D to P to prevent the engine
from accidentally starting when passing
through R.
Additional information about vehicles with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will
start up again in certain operating conditions
if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle
ahead drives off again.
WARNING
●
Ne
ver switch the engine off until the vehi-
cle is stationary. The operation of the brake
and steering will not be fully guaranteed.
More force will be needed to turn the steer-
ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an
accident and even serious injuries.
●
To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-
Stop system is switched off when working
in the engine compartment
›››
page 245.
CAUTION
The Start-Stop system must always be
s
witched off when driving through flooded
areas
›››
page 256.
Note
●
In v
ehicles with an automatic gearbox,
you can control whether the engine should
switch off or not by reducing or increasing
the brake force applied. While the vehicle
remains stopped, the engine will not stop if
the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic
jams with frequent stopping and starting
for example. As soon as strong pressure is
applied to the brake pedal, the engine will
stop.
●
When stopped, the brake pedal must be
kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle
does not move.
244
Start and driving
●
If the engine “st
alls” with a manual gear-
box, it can be directly started up again by
immediately pressing the clutch pedal.
●
With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is
placed in position D, N or S after engaging
reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards
direction must be reached for the system to
be in a status to stop the engine.
Manually connecting and discon-
necting the St
art-Stop system
Fig. 233 Detailed view of the centre console:
St
art-stop operation button.
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
s
witch it off manually.
●
To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop
system, press the
button
›››
Fig. 233.
The button will light up when the Start-Stop
function is switched off.
Note
The system switches on every time the en-
gine is t
urned off voluntarily.
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
Fig. 234 Diagram of a 6-speed manual gear-
bo
x.
Gear positions are indicated on the gear lev-
er
›
››
Fig. 234.
●
Depress the clutch and keep your foot as
far as it will go.
●
Move the gear lever to the desired position.
●
Release the clutch.
Engaging reverse gear
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is
stopped.
●
Depress the clutch and keep your foot as
far as it will go.
●
With the gear lever in neutral, push it down,
move it all the way to the left and then for-
wards to select reverse gear
›››
Fig. 234
R
.
●
Release the clutch.
Changing t
o lower gears
When driving, you should always change
down through the gears progressively, i.e. to
the gear immediately below when engine
RPM is not tool high
›››
. Skipping one or
se
veral gears when changing down through
the gears at high speed or high RPM can
cause damage to the clutch and gearbox,
even if the clutch is depressed
›››
.
WARNING
If the engine is running, the vehicle starts
mo
ving as soon as a gear is engaged and
the clutch pedal is released. This also hap-
pens if the electronic parking brake is
switched on.
●
Never engage reverse gear while the ve-
hicle is in motion.
»
245
Driving
WARNING
Changing down through the gears incor-
r
ectly by selecting a gear that is too low
can lead to loss of control of the vehicle
and cause accidents and serious injuries.
CAUTION
Engaging a gear that is too low when driv-
ing at high speed or at high engine RP
M
can cause considerable damage to the
clutch and gearbox. This can happen even
if the clutch pedal is kept depressed and
the gear is not engaged.
CAUTION
Consider the following to avoid damage
and pr
emature wear:
●
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure exerted by the
hand is transmitted to the gearbox forks.
●
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal;
Even if the pressure seems insignificant, it
can cause premature wear of the clutch
disc. Use the footrest when not changing
gears.
●
Make sure the vehicle is completely stop-
ped before engaging reverse gear.
●
When changing gears, always fully de-
press the clutch.
●
Do not “ride” the clutch with the engine
running when the vehicle is stopped on an
uphill slope.
Automatic gearbox/DSG au-
t
omatic gearbox
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-
ly contr
olled manual gearbox. Torque be-
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-
mitted via two independent clutches. They
replace the torque converter found on con-
ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-
hicle.
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to
change gears manually
›››
page 248,
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode.
Control lamps
It lights up green
The brake is not pressed.
T
o select a gear range, press the brake pedal.
Flashes green
The selector lever locking button is not engaged.
The v
ehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En-
gage the selector lever lock.
Selector lever positions
Fig. 235
Automatic gearbox selector lever with
l
ocking button (arrow)
When the ignition is on, the current position of
the sel
ector lever is shown on the instrument
panel.
– Parking lock
When the lever is put in this position, the drive
wheels are locked. The lever must only be put
in P when the vehicle is stationary
›››
.
T
o put the lever in P or take it out of P , the
locking button must be pressed and held and
the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.
– Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when
the vehicle is stationary and the engine is
idling
›››
.
246
Start and driving
To move the lever to position R, the l
ock but-
ton must be pressed and held while pressing
the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse
lights come on when the lever is in the R posi-
tion with the ignition on.
– Neutral
With the lever in this position, the gear is in
neutral.
Press the brake pedal to move the lever from
N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at
speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)
›››
.
- St
andard forward driving position (nor-
mal programme)
The gears are changed (up and down) auto-
matically. The gear shifts are determined by
the engine load, your individual driving style
and the speed of the vehicle.
- Standard forward driving position
(sports programme)
The shift up to a higher gear is automatically
delayed and the shift down is faster with re-
spect to the D range of gears, to take full ad-
vantage of the engine power. The gear shifts
are determined by the engine load, your indi-
vidual driving style and the speed of the vehi-
cle.
Selector lever lock
In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range
from being engaged, and prevents the vehi-
cle from moving off accidentally.
To release the gear lever lock, press and hold
the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the
same time, press the lever lock in the direc-
tion of the arrow
›››
Fig. 235.
The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly
through position N (e.g. when shifting from R
to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to
“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if
it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-
gages automatically if the brake pedal is not
pressed and the lever is in position N for more
than about one second at a speed of less
than 5 km/h (3 mph).
In vehicles with a DSG® automatic gearbox,
on rare occasions the lever lock may not en-
gage. In this case, the transmission is locked
to prevent the vehicle from moving acciden-
tally. The green control light flashes and
an information text is displayed. Proceed as
follows to engage the lever lock:
●
Press the brake pedal and then release.
Safety interlock for ignition key
Once the ignition has been turned off, the key
may be removed only if the gear selector is in
position P. While the key is not in the ignition,
the selector lever is locked in position P.
WARNING
●
T
ake care not to press the accelerator
pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-
hicle could start moving immediately (in
some cases even if the parking brake is en-
gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
●
Never move the lever to R or P when driv-
ing. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in an accident or failure.
●
With lever in any position (except P), the
foot brake must be pushed down whenever
the engine is running. This is because an
automatic gearbox still transmits power
even at idling speed.
●
While you are selecting a gear and the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running,
do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
As a driver you should never leave your
vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is
engaged. Switch on the electronic parking
brake and select the parking lock (P).
Note
●
If the l
ever is moved accidentally to N
when driving, release the accelerator and
let the engine speed drop to idling before
selecting gear range D or S again.
●
Should the power supply to the lever be
interrupted in position P, it will not be possi-
ble to move the lever. If this should happen
the manual release can be used
›››
page 250.
»
247
Driving
Note
●
Despit
e a gear being engaged, the vehi-
cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-
ceed to the next mode:
–
When the vehicle does not move in the
required direction, the system may not
have the gear range correctly engag-
ed. Press the brake pedal and engage
the gear range again.
–
If the vehicle still does not move in the
required direction, there is a system
malfunction. Seek specialist assistance
and have the system checked.
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode
Fig. 236
Selector lever in Tiptronic position
(l
eft-hand drive vehicles). The lay-out in right-
hand drive vehicles is symmetrically opposed.
Fig. 237 Steering wheel with two paddle shifts
f
or Tiptronic
Tiptronic gives the driver the option to
change gears manually.
When you change t
o the Tiptronic pro-
gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently
selected gear. This is possible as long as the
system is not changing gear automatically
due to a traffic situation.
Using Tiptronic with the selector lever
It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,
both when the vehicle is stopped and while
driving.
●
Press the selector lever from position D to
the right into the Tiptronic selector gate.
●
Push the lever forwards
+
or backwards
–
to move up or down a gear
›
››
Fig. 236.
●
To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the
left.
Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel
paddles
●
In D or S, move the steering wheel paddle
shifts
›››
Fig. 237.
●
Press the gearshift paddle
+
to select a
higher gear
›
››
Fig. 237.
●
Press the gearshift paddle
–
to select a
l
ower gear.
●
To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-
hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-
proximately 1 second or move the lever to the
left.
If the paddles are not operated for some time
and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection
position, it will automatically exit from Tip-
tronic mode.
CAUTION
●
When accel
erating, if a higher gear is not
selected, it will automatically change
shortly before reaching the maximum per-
mitted RPM.
●
Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-
tem will not change until it detects that the
engine will not reach its maximum RPM.
Driving with an automatic gearbox
The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-
cally as the v
ehicle moves.
248
Start and driving
The engine can only start with the selector
l
ever in position P or N. At low temperatures,
below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can only
start with the selector lever in position P.
Driving down hills
Under certain circumstances it may be ad-
vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-
lect the gear manually according to driving
conditions
›››
.
St
op/Park
On level ground, just use the lever to engage
position P. On slopes you should first apply
the parking brake and then set the lever to P.
This makes it easier to remove the lever from
position P when starting.
Stopping on a downhill
Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,
apply the electronic parking brake
›››
.
Do not accel
erate while a range of gears is
engaged to prevent the car from rolling
downhill
›››
.
St
arting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-
tion
●
Once you have engaged a gear, take your
foot off the brake pedal and gently press the
accelerator.
Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold
function
●
Pull on the electronic parking brake button.
●
Once you have engaged a gear, gently
press the accelerator and pull on the elec-
tronic parking brake button.
Back-up programme
If all the positions of the lever are shown over
a light background on the instrument panel
display, there is a system fault and the auto-
matic gearbox will operate in with the backup
programme. It is still possible to drive the ve-
hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se-
lected range of gears. Driving in reverse
gear may not be possible.
6-speed DSG® automatic transmission
overload protection
When the clutch is overloaded, the vehicle
begins to jerk and the selector lever position
indicator begins to flash. To prevent damage
to the clutch, this interrupts the power trans-
mission between the engine and the gearbox.
There is no more traction and it is not possible
to accelerate. If the clutch is opened auto-
matically due to overloading, press the brake
pedal. Wait a few seconds before starting to
move again.
Kick-down
The kick-down system provides maximum ac-
celeration when the gear selector lever is in
the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right
down, the automatic gearbox will shift down
to a lower gear, depending on road speed
and engine speed. This takes advantage of
the maximum acceleration of the vehicle
›››
.
The upshift t
o the next higher gear is delayed
until the engine reaches maximum rpm.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Selec-
t
or lever positions on page 247.
●
Never allow the brake to rub and do not
use the brake pedal too often or for long
periods, as the brakes can overheat. This
reduces the braking power, increases the
braking distance or even causes a brake
system fault.
●
If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-
cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or
parking brake.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
pery or w
et, the kick-down feature could
cause the driving wheels to spin, which
could result in skidding.
»
249
Driving
CAUTION
●
If you st
op the vehicle on a gradient, do
not attempt to stop it from rolling by de-
pressing the accelerator when a gear has
been selected. This could cause overheat-
ing and damage the automatic gearbox.
●
If you allow the vehicle to roll with the
lever in position N and the engine off, the
automatic gearbox will be damaged by
lack of lubrication.
●
If the gearbox operates with the backup
programme, take the vehicle to a special-
ised workshop and have the fault repaired
without delay.
Launch-control program
The Launch-control programme enables
maximum accel
eration from a standstill.
Condition: the engine must have reached op-
erating temperature and the steering wheel
must not be turned.
The engine speed for Launch-control is differ-
ent on petrol and diesel engines.
●
With the engine running, switch off traction
control (ASR)
›››
page 287.
●
Press the brake pedal with your left foot
and hold it down for at least one second.
●
Place the selector lever in position S or Tip-
tronic.
●
Press the accelerator with the right foot un-
til reaching an approximate speed of 3,200
rpm.
●
Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The
vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.
●
Turn on the ASR after accelerating!
WARNING
●
Al
ways adapt your driving style to the
traffic conditions.
●
Only use the Launch control programme
when road and traffic conditions permit,
and make sure your manner of driving and
accelerating the vehicle does not incon-
venience or endanger other road users.
●
Make sure that the ESC remains switched
on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC
are deactivated, the wheels may start to
spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Acci-
dent hazard!
Note
●
Aft
er using the Launch control pro-
gramme, the temperature in the gearbox
may have increased considerably. In this
case, the program may be out of service for
a few minutes. The program may be used
again once the cooling phase is complete.
●
Accelerating with the launch control pro-
gramme places a heavy load on all parts of
the vehicle. This can result in increased
wear and tear.
Manual release of the selector lev-
er
Fig. 238
Remove the lining from the area of the
gear indication
Fig. 239
Manual release of gear selector lever
In the event of a power failure when starting
(e
.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain
locked in position P. To move it to position N to
move the vehicle, there is an emergency re-
lease device under the centre console, on the
250
Start and driving
right side. Releasing the selector lever re-
quir
es a certain degree of practical skill.
Removing the cover from the selector lev-
er
●
Apply the electronic parking brake
›››
.
●
Pull the cover up around the dust guard on
the gear l
ever
›››
Fig. 238.
Releasing the selector lever
●
Press the release lever
›››
Fig. 239 in the di-
rection of the arrow and hold it in this position.
●
Press the lock button
›››
Fig. 238
1
on the
gear l
ever knob and place the gear selector
lever in the N position.
WARNING
Do not move the lever from position P if the
parking br
ake is not firmly engaged. If you
still think the car could move, press the
brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could
move in an unforeseen way and cause an
accident or serious injury.
Gear-change recommenda-
tion
Sel
ecting the optimal gear
Depending on the equipment on the instru-
ment panel scr
een, a recommendation is
shown with the gear that should be engaged
to optimise consumption.
Display Meaning
Optimum gear.
Recommendation to change up a
gear
.
Recommendation to change down
a gear
.
Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
the par
ticulate filter
When the exhaust system detects that the
particulate filter is close to saturation, this
system’s self-cleaning function recommends
the optimal gear for that function
›››
page 313.
WARNING
The gear change recommendation is an
auxiliary function and in no case shoul
d be
a substitute for careful driving.
●
R
esponsibility for selecting the correct
gear, depending on the circumstances,
rests solely with the driver.
For the sake of the environment
Selecting the correct gear can help to save
fuel.
Note
The recommended gear indication turns off
when the clut
ch pedal is pressed or when
the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi-
tion.
Steering
Inf
ormation relating to different ve-
hicle processes.
Electro-mechanical power steering adapts
el
ectronically to the speed of the car, torque
and steering angle.
Even if the power steering fails or the engine
is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate
the steering wheel as long as the key remains
in the ignition lock, but more force must be
applied.
»
251
Driving
Electronic steering column lock
V
ehicles with Keyless Access: the steering
column locks when the driver's door is
opened and the ignition is switched off.
Therefore, the vehicle should be at a stand-
still and, where applicable, the selector lever
in position P.
If the driver door is opened before the ignition
is switched off, the steering column electronic
lock is activated via the ignition key or the
sensor built into the door handle.
Steering assist
This help assists the driver in critical situa-
tions. It recommends turning the steering
wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre
(counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid
skidding
›››
.
WARNING
Steering assist helps the driver in critical
sit
uations. The driver is the person who has
to control the vehicle's steering at all times.
Control lamp
It lights up red
Faulty steering.
Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible and in a safe manner.
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired as soon as possible.
It lights up yellow
Limited steering operation.
Driv
e carefully to a specialised workshop to have the
steering checked.
If the warning light does not come on again after re-
starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is
not necessary to check the steering.
OR: The 12-v
olt battery was disconnected and re-
connected.
Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).
Flashes red
Fault in the steering column electronic lock.
Do not continue driving! Seek specialist assis-
t
ance.
It flashes yellow
The steering column is jammed.
When st
opped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-
tions.
OR: The st
eering column does not unlock or lock.
Remove the key from the ignition switch and recon-
nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru-
ment panel display.
Do not continue driving if the steering column re-
mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek
specialist assistance.
The control lamp should light up for a few
seconds when the ignition is s
witched on. It
should go out once the engine is started.
WARNING
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es.
●
If the warning lamps and the correspond-
ing messages ar
e ignored, the vehicle may
stall in traffic, causing serious damage or
accidents and injuries.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
252
Start and driving
Dynamic chassis control
(DCC)
Function and oper
ation
Fig. 240
In the centre console: button to ad-
just the adaptiv
e suspension.
DCC continuously adapts the suspension to
the condition of the r
oad and current driving
conditions, according to the pre-set pro-
gramme.
Steering is also adapted in the “Sport” pro-
gramme.
Programme Driving recommendations
“COMFORT” C
Adjust it to the most comfortable
setting, f
or example, driving on
surfaces in poor condition, or
making long trips.
“NORMAL”
Balanced setting, suitable, for
e
xample, for day-to-day use.
Programme Driving recommendations
“SPORT” S
Sport setting for sporty style
driving
Select a program
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the butt
on repeatedly until the
desired program is displayed
The “NORMAL” programme is active when
neither the C nor Sbuttons are lit up.
WARNING
Switching the dynamic chassis control sys-
t
em on while the vehicle is in motion could
divert your attention from the traffic and
cause accidents.
WARNING
Adjusting the suspension can change driv-
ing pr
operties. Dynamic chassis control
must never lead to any kinds of risk.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
Note
If the dynamic chassis control does not op-
er
ate as described in this chapter, go to an
authorised workshop and request it be
checked.
Note
In the case of an adaptive suspension fail-
ur
e, the indications C and S light up on the
button. The vehicle’s comfort and driving
may be affected by the fault. Have the sys-
tem checked by a specialised workshop.
Driving tips
Running in
Please observe the instructions for running-in
ne
w components.
Running-in the engine
A new engine must be driven through a run-in
period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000
miles). During its first few hours of running, the
internal friction in the engine is greater than
later on when all the moving parts have bed-
ded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km
(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-
formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it
should be driven at a moderate speed (espe-
cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce
engine wear and increase its useful life. Never
drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always
engage a lower gear when the engine works
“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or
600 miles, please note:
»
253
Driving
●
Do not use full thr
ottle.
●
Do not force the engine above two thirds of
its maximum speed.
●
Do not tow a trailer.
Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600
to 1000 miles), gradually increase power
until reaching the maximum speed and high
engine speeds.
Running in new tyres and brake pads
●
Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres
›››
page 328.
●
Information about brakes
›››
page 281.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the
engine will be incr
eased and the engine oil
consumption reduced.
Four-wheel drive (4Drive)
3 V
alid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive
On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow-
er is distributed to all four wheels
General notes
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine
power is distributed to all four wheels. The
distribution of power is controlled automati-
cally according to your driving style and the
r
oad conditions. Also see
›››
page 286.
The four-wheel drive is specially designed to
complement the superior engine power. This
combination gives the vehicle exceptional
handling and performance capabilities, both
on normal roads and in more difficult condi-
tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-
haps especially for this reason), it is important
to observe certain safety points
›››
.
Wint
er tyres
Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
have plenty of traction in winter conditions,
even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,
we still recommend that winter tyres or all-
season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to
give even better braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory,
this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive
›››
page 333.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four
tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-
ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying
tread depths
›››
page 328.
Off-roader?
Your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: in fact,
the ground clearance is not enough to be
used as such. Avoid consequently rough
tracks and uneven terrain.
WARNING
●
Ev
en with four-wheel drive, you should al-
ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-
tions. Do not let the extra safety features
tempt you into taking any risks when driv-
ing. Accident hazard!
●
The braking capability of your vehicle is
limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no
different from a car without four-wheel
drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast
on firm or slippery roads just because the
vehicle still has good acceleration in these
conditions. Accident hazard!
●
On wet roads bear in mind that the front
wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose
contact with the road if the car is driven too
fast. If this should happen, there will be no
sudden increase in engine speed to warn
the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel
drive car. For this reason you should always
choose a driving speed suitable for the
road conditions. Accident hazard!
254
Start and driving
Economical and environmentally
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and w
ear to the engine, brakes and tyres all
depend largely on driving style. Consumption
can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-
cient driving type. The following section gives
you some tips on lessening the impact on the
environment and reducing your operating
costs at the same time.
Active cylinder management (ACT®)
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
cylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-
vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-
ing situation does not require too much pow-
er.
The number of active cylinders can be seen
on the instrument panel display.
›››
page 71.
Foresight when driving
If you think ahead when driving, you will need
to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take
advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-
ever possible, with a gear engaged. This
takes advantage of the engine braking effect,
reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-
sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.
Changing gear to save energy
An eff
ective way of saving is to change in ad-
vance to a higher gear.
Manual gearbox: change from first to sec-
ond gear as soon as possible. Choosing the
correct gear saves fuel. Select the highest
possible gear suitable for the driving situation
(the engine should continue to run with cycli-
cal regularity).
Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-
ally and without reaching the “kick-down”
position.
Avoid driving at high speed
Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,
whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-
sion of harmful gases and noise pollution
multiply as speed is increased. Driving at
moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Reduce idling time
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is
automatically reduced. In vehicles without
the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off
the engine, for example, at level crossings
and at traffic lights that remain red for long
periods of time. When an engine has reached
operating temperature, and depending on
the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off
for a minimum of about 5 seconds already
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-
ry for restarting.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high during
this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best
to drive off immediately after starting the en-
gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Regular maintenance
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even
before the engine is started. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced
engine can consume up to 10% more fuel
than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to
reach their optimal operating temperature
in order to minimise fuel consumption and
emissions.
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate
amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
ing temperature after about four kilometres
(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return
to a normal level.
Check tyre pressure
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
correct pressures
›››
page 330 to save fuel. If
the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
»
255
Driving
rolling resistance, under-inflation al
so increa-
ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as
they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
Since the luggage rack increases the aero-
dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-
move it when not needed. At speeds of
100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%
of fuel.
Save electrical energy
The engine drives the alternator, thereby
generating electricity. This implies that any
increase in power consumption also increa-
ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch
off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices
that use a lot of electricity include the blower
at a high setting, the rear window heating or
the seat heating.
Note
●
If you hav
e the Start-Stop system, it is
recommended that it should not be discon-
nected.
●
It is r
ecommended that you close the
windows when driving at more than
60 km/h (37 mph).
●
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
plate slip. This causes wear and can dam-
age the clutch plate.
●
Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the
brake. The fuel consumption will be lower
and you will prevent the clutch plate from
being damaged.
●
Use the engine brake on downhills by
changing to the gear that is best suited for
the gradient. Fuel consumption will be
“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.
Driving on flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on
fl
ooded roads, take the following into ac-
count:
●
The water should never come above the
lower edge of the bodywork.
●
Drive at pedestrian speed.
WARNING
After driving through flooded zones, brak-
ing eff
ectiveness can decrease if the brake
discs or pads are damp
›››
page 281.
CAUTION
●
Driving thr
ough flooded areas may dam-
age vehicle components such as the en-
gine, transmission or electrical system.
●
Whenever driving through water, the
Start-Stop system must be switched off
›››
page 243.
Note
●
Check the depth of the w
ater before en-
tering the flooded zone.
●
Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,
or stop the engine.
●
Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-
tion cause waves that could exceed your
vehicle's critical height.
●
Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion)
›››
page 339.
Trips abroad
●
With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured
that l
ead-free petrol is available throughout
the journey
›››
page 311, Fuel types. Seek
information about service station networks
selling unleaded fuel.
●
In some countries, it is possible that your
vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may
not be available or the technical services
may only be able to make limited repairs.
256
Assistant systems
SEAT importers and distributors will provide
inf
ormation about the technical preparation
that your vehicle requires and also about
necessary maintenance and repair possibili-
ties.
CAUTION
SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-
age t
o the vehicle due to the use of a lower
quality fuel, an inadequate service or the
non-availability of genuine spare parts.
Assistant systems
Gener
al notes
Safety advice
WARNING
●
R
esponsibility for driving rests with the
driver at all times. The drive assist systems
are not a replacement for driver attention.
Focus all your attention on driving and be
prepared to intervene at all times.
●
Use the drive assist systems only when
conditions allow. The driving style must al-
ways be suitable for the weather, visibility,
road and traffic conditions.
●
In order for drive assist systems to react
correctly, sensors and cameras must oper-
ate without limitations. Please read the
notes on sensors and cameras in this chap-
ter.
Note
●
K
eep in mind the specific rules of each
country, especially when it comes to driv-
ing, formation of an emergency corridor,
braking distance, speed, parking position,
wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re-
sponsible for always complying with the
specific regulations of each country.
●
The area in front of and around the radar
sensor should not be covered with adhe-
sives, additional headlights or similar
it
ems, as this could have a negative impact
on the operation of the assistants. If the ve-
hicle is not properly repaired or structural
modifications are made to it, the operation
of the assistants may be affected.
●
The repair and adjustment of sensors and
cameras requires special knowledge and
tools. It is recommended to visit a SEAT
dealership for this purpose.
System limits
WARNING
●
Driv
e assist systems can not overcome
the laws of physics. Depending on the cir-
cumstances, a collision may not be avoida-
ble.
●
Warnings, notices and indicator lamps
may not be displayed on time, or may be
displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap-
proaches too quickly.
●
Corrective interventions by drive assist
systems (e.g. interventions in the steering
or brakes) may be insufficient or may never
occur, depending on the circumstances. As
a driver, you must be prepared to act at all
times.
»
257
Driving
Note
●
Due t
o the system's detection limits in the
surroundings, the systems may not give
warnings or intervene on time, or they
might do so even if it is not desired. In addi-
tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly
interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result,
warn the driver in an unexpected manner.
●
When the towing mode is selected, some
assist systems may react with limitations,
in an unusual way or may not be available.
Keep in mind the instructions relating to the
towing mode.
Drive assist sensors and
camer
as
Front radar
Fig. 241 On the front bumper: radar sensors.
Fig. 242 Detection area.
A radar sensor may be fitted to the front
bumper of the v
ehicle
›››
Fig. 241. The front
radar detects any objects in its detection
zone
›››
Fig. 242 and provides support for the
following functions:
●
Front Assist
›››
page 263.
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
›››
page 266.
The radar can have a range of up to 120m
(400ft) depending on road and weather con-
ditions.
WARNING
The visibility of the radar sensor can be im-
pair
ed by dirt or environmental influences
such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects
etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC
functions may stop working. The instrument
panel displays the following message: No
sensor vision! And the Front Assist un-
available or ACC unavailable warning
lights come on.
●
Clean the sensor area on the bumper as
indicat
ed in
›››
page 341, Cleaning the ex-
terior. When the radar sensor starts cor-
rectly detecting again, the message disap-
pears from the screen and the functions
become available again.
CAUTION
●
If the r
adar sensor is dirty or poorly ad-
justed, the Front Assist system may give un-
necessary warnings and apply the brakes
inappropriately.
●
The operation of the radar can be affec-
ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig-
nal. This may occur, for example, in an en-
closed car park or due to the presence of
metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets
used in road works).
●
The sensor may not be adjusted correct-
ly if it receives an impact. This may com-
promise the system's efficacy or discon-
nect it. If you have the feeling that the ra-
dar sensor is damaged or adjusted incor-
rectly, switch off the Front Assist and ACC
functions to avoid any damage. If this oc-
curs have it adjusted.
258
Assistant systems
Front camera
Fig. 243
On the windscreen: field of vision of
the L
ane Assist system.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may be fitt
ed with a front camera on the front
windscreen
›››
Fig. 243. This camera detects
lane boundaries (lines) to provide support for
the following functions:
●
Lane Assist
›››
page 272.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
t
ems, take the following points into consid-
eration:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
and ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the windscr
een is not dam-
aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
sion.
Rear radar
Fig. 244
Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor
z
ones.
Fig. 245
Sensor detection zones
The radar sensors are located on the left and
right of the bumper and ar
e not visible from
the outside
›››
Fig. 244. The sensors monitor
both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-
hicle
›››
Fig. 245.
They support the following functions:
●
Blind spot detector (BSD)
›››
page 276.
●
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)
›››
page 279.
Automatic deactivation of supported func-
tions
The rear radar sensors deactivate automati-
cally when, among other reasons, one of the
sensors is detected to be permanently cov-
ered. This may be the case if, for example,
there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the
sensors.
The relevant text message will appear in the
instrument panel display.
CAUTION
●
The r
adar sensors on the rear bumper
may be damaged or shifted in the event of
a collision, for example, when entering or
exiting a parking space. This may result in
the system disconnecting itself, or at least
possibly having its functionality diminished.
●
In order to ensure that the radar sensors
work properly, keep the rear bumper free of
snow and ice and do not cover it.
»
259
Driving
●
The r
ear bumper should only be painted
with paint authorised by SEAT. The lane de-
parture warning's functions may be limited
or work incorrectly if other paints are used.
●
The visibility of radar sensors may be af-
fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or
dirt, among others. Clean the area in front
of the sensors.
●
Never use auto lane changing or the rear
cross traffic alert if the radar sensors are
dirty.
Ultrasound sensors
The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen-
sors t
o perform the following functions:
●
Park Assist
›››
page 288.
●
Park assist
›››
page 292
CAUTION
●
Damage t
o the radiator grille, bumper,
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can
modify the orientation of the sensors. This
can affect the parking aid function. Have
the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
●
A number plate or number plate holder
with dimensions that exceed the space for
the number plate, or a cured or deformed
number plate can cause false detections or
a loss of visibility for the sensors.
Note
●
In or
der to guarantee good operation,
keep the sensors clean, free of snow and
ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
other objects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
unless you do so very briefly, and always
keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
●
Fitting certain accessories to the front of
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation
of the Park Assist.
Rear View Camera
Fig. 246
In the rear bumper: location of the re-
v
erse assist camera.
A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
when r
everse parking or manoeuvring. This
provides support to the following function:
●
Rear View Camera
›››
page 295.
WARNING
Fitting a number plate frame may interfere
with the vie
w shown on the screen, as it
may reduce the camera’s field of vision.
CAUTION
●
In or
der to guarantee good system oper-
ation, keep the cameras clean, free of snow
or ice, and do not cover them with stickers
or other objects.
●
Never use abrasive cleaning products to
clean the camera lens.
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove
ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so
could damage the camera.
Cruise control (GRA)
Contr
ol lamp
It lights up green
The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and
activ
e.
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
s
witched on and should turn off after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for
the function check.
260
Assistant systems
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Introduction
Fig. 247
Instrument panel display: GRA status
indications.
The cruise control system (CCS) is able to
maint
ain the set speed from 20 km/h (15
mph).
The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by
ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking
the vehicle
›››
.
Status display
Ther
e are different versions of the cruise con-
trol system. In vehicles with the multifunction
display (MFD), the set speed is displayed on
the instrument panel screen.
GRA status
›››
Fig. 247
CCS temporarily switched off. The set
speed is displayed in small or darkened
figures.
System error. Contact a specialised
workshop.
CCS switched on. The speed memory is
empty.
The CCS is switched on. The set speed is
displayed in large figures.
Changing gear in CCS mode
The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch
pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
cally after a gear is engaged.
Travelling down hills with the CCS
If the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-
cle speed downhill, brake and change down
a gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarily
disabled by pressing the brake.
Automatic disconnection
The GRA disconnects automatically or is
temporarily interrupted:
A
B
C
D
●
If the syst
em detects a fault that could af-
fect the working order of the CCS.
●
If you press and maintain the accelerator
pedal for a certain time, driving faster than
the stored speed.
●
If the dynamic driving control systems inter-
vene, ASR, ESC, etc.
●
If the brake pedal is pressed.
●
If the airbag is triggered.
●
If the lever is taken out of the D or S posi-
tion.
●
If, in the case of a manual gearbox, 1st gear
is engaged.
●
If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long
time.
WARNING
Use of GRA could cause accidents and se-
v
ere injuries if it is not possible to drive at a
constant speed maintaining the safety dis-
tance.
●
Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-
tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-
cient, on steep roads, with several bends or
in slippery circumstances or on flooded
roads.
●
Never use the CCS when driving off-road
or on unpaved roads.
»
261
Driving
●
Adapt your speed and the dist
ance to the
vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-
er, the condition of the road and the traffic
situation.
●
To avoid unexpected operation of the
cruise control system, turn it off every time
you finish using it.
●
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
too high for other conditions.
●
If driving down a steep gradient, the GRA
cannot maintain a constant speed. The
speed can increase. In this case, brake and
change down a gear.
Operating the cruise control
Fig. 248
On the left of the steering column:
thir
d lever for operating the GRA.
Connecting
●
Move the lever towards the steering wheel
t
o position .
If no speed has been programmed, the sys-
tem will not control it.
Activating the cruise control
●
Push button
›››
Fig. 248
1
.
The curr
ent speed is stored and the cruise
control is activated.
Temporarily interrupting
●
Move the lever to and release it, or
step on the brake.
The cruise control system is switched off tem-
porarily. The speed is stored.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Move the lever to and release it.
Cruise control is activated at the stored
speed.
Adjusting the speed
While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be
adjusted:
●
Move the lever to the pressure point
to increase speed in small increments of 1
km/h (1 mph).
●
Move the lever upwards
+
to in-
cr
ease in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 248
1
to reduce
speed in small incr
ements of 1 km/h (1 mph).
●
Move the lever downwards
–
to re-
duce in incr
ements of 10 km/h (5 mph).
To change the stored speed without interrup-
tion, keep the lever pressed in the direction
+
or
–
. The vehicle adapts the
curr
ent speed by accelerating or stopping
accelerating. The vehicle does not brake ac-
tively.
Switching off
●
Move the lever to position .
The system is disconnected and the memo-
rised speed is deleted.
262
Assistant systems
Emergency brake assistance
syst
em (Front Assist)
Introduction
Fig. 249
On the instrument panel display: ad-
v
ance warning indications.
The objective of the system is to prevent
head-on collisions against ob
jects that may
be in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con-
sequences of such impacts.
Depending on several factors and how criti-
cal the situation is, the system operates in a
staggered manner. First it warns the driver,
and if the driver’s reaction does not occur or
is insufficient, it activates independent emer-
gency braking.
The function is intended to prevent collisions
with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same
lane travelling in the same direction. It may
not activate in other hazard situations
›››
.
Fr
ont Assist is active between 4 km/h (2.5
mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph). Depending on
a range of conditions, some of the functions
described below are omitted to optimize the
behaviour of the system.
Front Assist is a driving assistance function
that can never replace the driver’s atten-
tion.
Safety distance warning
If the system detects that you are driving too
close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the
driver with this indication on the instrument
panel display .
The timing of the warning varies according to
other factors: driver behaviour and speed.
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with
the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by
means of an audible warning and an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 249.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
possible emergency braking
›››
.
Critical warning
If the driv
er fails to react to the advance
warning, the system may actively intervene
in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn
the driver of the imminent danger of a colli-
sion.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the critical
warning, the system may initiate independ-
ent emergency braking by progressively in-
creasing the braking in accordance with how
critical the situation is.
Driver emergency braking assistance sys-
tem
The system may detect that the driver is not
braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In
this case, it will increase the braking intensity.
The system cannot prevent a collision, al-
though it can significantly minimise the con-
sequences by reducing the speed and the
force of the impact.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
WARNING
Front Assist cannot change the laws of
physics or r
eplace the driver in terms of
»
263
Driving
keeping control of the vehicle and reacting
t
o a possible emergency situation.
WARNING
Following a Front Assist emergency warn-
ing, pay immediat
e attention to the situa-
tion and try to avoid the collision as appli-
cable.
●
If the Front Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly
intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.
Have the system checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership.
●
Always adapt your speed and distance
away from the vehicle in front of you at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
In complex driving situations, Front Assist
may issue warnings and intervene in brak-
ing unnecessarily.
●
If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
paired by dirt or because the radar sensor
has lost its settings, the system may issue
unnecessary warnings and intervene inop-
portunely in the braking.
●
The Front Assist does not react to animals
or vehicles crossing your path or ap-
proaching head-on down the same lane.
●
The Fr
ont Assist does not react to pedes-
trians walking head-on in the same lane.
●
The driver must always be ready to take
over the control of the vehicle.
Note
●
When Fr
ont Assist is connected, the indi-
cations of other functions on the screen
may be hidden.
●
When the Front Assist causes a braking,
the brake pedal is “harder”.
●
Automatic interventions by the Front As-
sist on the brakes may be interrupted by
pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving
the wheel.
●
The Front Assist may brake the vehicle
until it stops completely. However, the
brake system does not halt the vehicle per-
manently. Use the foot brake!
●
If the Front Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes
several times unnecessarily), switch it off.
Operation of the emergency brake
assist
ance system (Front Assist)
Fig. 250
On the instrument panel display:
Fr
ont Assist deactivated indication.
The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-
tion is s
witched on.
When the Front Assist is disabled, so too are
the advance warning and the distance
warning functions.
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist
activated. Exceptions
›››
page 265, Deacti-
vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol-
lowing situations.
Switching the Front Assist on and off
With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist
can be deactivated or activated as follows:
●
Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the button for the assistants systems
›››
page 86.
264
Assistant systems
●
OR: using the instrument panel menu Set-
tings > Assistants > Front Assist. T
o
access the Settings menu, depending on
the features, use the arrow keys and the
wheel of the multi-function steering wheel or
the button on the windscreen wiper lever
›››
page 85.
When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-
cation
›››
Fig. 250 will be displayed on the
instrument panel.
Activating or deactivating the pre-warning
(advance warning)
The advance warning can be activated or
deactivated in the instrument panel menu
Settings > Assistants > Front Assist
›››
page 73.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping advance warning
active.
Switching distance warning on and off
The distance warning can be activated or
deactivated in the instrument panel menu
Settings > Assistants > Front Assist
›››
page 73.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance
warning active.
Deactivating Front Assist tempora-
rily in the following situations
In the following situations the Front Assist
shoul
d be deactivated due to the system's
limitations:
●
When the vehicle is to be towed.
●
If the vehicle is on a test bed.
●
When the radar sensor is damaged.
●
If the radar sensor receives a violent im-
pact.
●
If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
●
If the radar sensor is temporarily covered
by an accessory.
●
When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto
tr
ansportation.
System limitations
Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to
the syst
em. Thus, in certain circumstances,
some of the reactions may be inappropriate
from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention
in order to intervene if necessary.
The following conditions may cause the
Front Assist not to react or to do so too
late:
●
In the first few instants of driving after
switching on the ignition, due to the system’s
initial auto-calibration.
●
If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-
aged.
●
If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
●
On taking tight bends or complex paths.
●
Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
●
If the ASR has been disconnected or the
ESC activated in Sport mode
›››
page 287.
●
If the ESC is controlling.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or
sheets used in road works.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
In case of snow or heavy rain.
●
In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
bikes.
●
Misaligned vehicles.
●
Vehicles crossing the other's path.
●
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tion.
●
Loads and accessories of other vehicles
that protrude over the sides, backwards or
over the top.
265
Driving
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-
tr
ol
Introduction
Fig. 251
Detection area.
The ACC is an e
xtension of the vehicle’s
cruise control function (GRA)
›››
.
It all
ows the driver to set a cruise speed be-
tween 30 km/h (20 mph) and 160 km/h (100
mph) or 210 km/h (130 mph), and select the
desired distance from the vehicle in front.
The ACC adapts the cruising speed of the
vehicle, keeping a safe distance away from
the vehicle in front, if there is one, depending
on speed.
When driving behind another vehicle, the
ACC reduces speed until it is the same as
that of the vehicle ahead and maintains the
set distance between the vehicles. If the vehi-
cle ahead accelerates, the ACC also accel-
erates the vehicle, going no higher than the
programmed target speed.
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic
gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until
it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it
stops.
The distance programmed should be in-
creased when the road surface is wet.
Driver intervention prompt
ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent
to the system. In other words, in certain cir-
cumstances the driver will have to adjust the
speed and the distance from other vehicles.
In this case, the instrument panel screen will
warn you to intervene by applying the brake
and a warning tone will be heard
›››
page 267.
WARNING
The ACC’s technology cannot overcome
the syst
em's inherent limitations or change
the laws of physics. If used negligently or
involuntarily, it may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Do not use ACC in poor visibilit
y, or on
roads that are steep, with lots of curves or
slippery.
●
Never use ACC when driving off-road or
on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-
signed for use on paved roads only.
●
ACC does not react when approaching a
fixed obstacle, such as the end of a traffic
jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-
ped at the traffic lights.
●
The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-
destrian monitoring system is available.
The system does not react to animals or
vehicles crossing your path or approaching
head-on down the same lane.
●
If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-
ciently, brake the vehicle immediately.
●
If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-
ted, the ACC system could automatically
switch off. Switch off the system when
starting off.
●
If the vehicle continues to move involun-
tarily after a driver intervention prompt,
brake the vehicle.
●
If the instrument panel screen displays a
driver intervention prompt, adjust the dis-
tance.
●
The driver should be ready to accelerate
or brake at all times.
266
Assistant systems
Note
●
If the ACC does not w
ork as described in
this chapter, do not use it until it has been
checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this purpose.
●
Maximum speed with the ACC activated
is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).
●
When the ACC is switched on, strange
noises may be heard during braking,
caused by the braking system.
Symbols on the instrument panel
displ
ay and control lamps
The speed reduction by the ACC
t
o maintain the distance from the
vehicle in front is not sufficient.
Brake! apply the f
oot brake! Driver intervention
prompt.
ACC is not currently available
a)
.
While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engine
and st
art it again. Check the area of the SEAT em-
blem on the front
›››
Fig. 241. If it is still unavailable,
refer to a specialised workshop to have the system
inspected.
a)
The symbol on the instrument panels with colour
displ
ay is in colour.
The ACC is active.
No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed
speed r
emains constant.
If the symbol is white: the ACC is
active.
A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-
justs speed and dist
ance from the vehicle in front.
If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-
tiv
e (Standby)
The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.
The lamp lights up green
The ACC is active.
Some control and warning lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is s
witched on to
check certain functions. They will switch off
after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Status display
Fig. 252
On the instrument panel display:
ACC inactiv
e (Standby). ACC active.
Indications on the display
›
››
Fig. 252:
Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-
tive and is not regulating your speed.
Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is
not active and is not regulating your dis-
tance.
Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active
and is regulating your speed.
»
1
2
3
267
Driving
Distance level 2 set by the driver.
ACC is activ
e and is regulating your dis-
tance based on speed.
Speed programmed with the ACC
Note
When the ACC is connected, the indica-
tions on the instrument panel scr
een may
be concealed by warnings from other func-
tions, such as an incoming call.
ACC operation
Fig. 253 On the left of the steering column:
oper
ating the ACC with the third lever.
4
5
6
Fig. 254 On the left of the steering column:
oper
ating the ACC with the third lever.
When the ACC is connected, the green con-
tr
ol lamp will light up on the instrument
panel, and the programmed speed and ACC
status will be displayed
›››
Fig. 252.
What ACC settings are possible?
●
Connecting and activating the ACC
›››
page 268.
●
Setting your speed
›››
page 268.
●
Setting your distance
›››
page 269.
●
Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC
›››
page 269.
●
Adjusting the default distance level at the
start of your journey
›››
page 269.
●
Adjusting the driving profile
›››
page 269.
●
Conditions in which the ACC does not re-
act
›››
page 269.
Connecting and activating the ACC
To connect and activate the ACC, the posi-
tion of the gearbox lever, the vehicle speed
and the position of the third level of the ACC
must all be taken into account.
●
With manual transmission, the gear lever
must be in any gear except first. With auto-
matic transmission, the gear lever must be in
position D or S. Speed must be higher than
30 km/h (18 mph) approx.
●
To activate the ACC, move the third lever to
position
›››
Fig. 253
1
. At this time, the
ACC is not activ
e and there is no program-
med speed.
●
Next, press button
›››
Fig. 254
B
or
mo
ve the lever to position
›››
Fig. 253
2
. At this moment the ACC is ac-
tiv
ated and the current speed and distance
are programmed. The picture on the instru-
ment cluster will change to Active
›››
Fig. 252
mode.
While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at a
set speed and distance from the vehicle
ahead. Both speed and distance can be
changed at any time.
Setting speed
●
To set the speed, move the third lever up
+
or down
–
to the desired speed
›
››
Fig. 252
6
. The speed adjustment is
made at 10 km/h (6 mph) int
ervals.
268
Assistant systems
●
If you wish t
o increase speed by intervals of
1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position
›››
Fig. 253
2
, or to decrease it press
butt
on
›››
Fig. 254
B
.
The set speed can be changed when the v
e-
hicle is stopped or during driving.
Setting your distance level
●
To increase or reduce the distance, press
button
A
to the right or left
›
››
Fig. 254.
The instrument panel display modifies the se-
lected distance
›››
Fig. 252
4
. There are 5
dist
ance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-
mends level 3. The set distance can be
changed when the vehicle is stopped or while
driving
›››
.
Disconnecting and deactiv
ating the ACC
●
To disconnect the ACC move the lever to
position (fixed)
›››
Fig. 253
0
. An ACC de-
activated message appears and the func-
tion is t
otally deactivated.
If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just
to switch it temporarily to inactive mode
(Standby), move the third lever to position
3
or press the brake pedal.
It will al
so switch to inactive mode (Standby)
if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is
opened.
Adjusting the default distance level at the
start of your journey
In wet road conditions, you should always set
a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in
front than when driving in dry conditions
›››
.
When connecting the ACC, the dist
ance level
can be preset to: Very short, Short, Medium,
Long, Very long and Last distance. To access
the Settings menu, depending on the fea-
tures, use the arrow keys and the wheel of the
multi-function steering wheel or the button on
the windscreen wiper lever
›››
page 85.
Changing the driving profile
The driving profile can be used to modify the
ACC acceleration and braking behaviour.
There are three profiles available though the
instrument panel menu at Settings > As-
sistants > ACC > Basic settings:
●
Normal
●
Sport,
●
Eco
To access the Settings menu, depending on
the features, use the arrow keys and the
wheel of the multi-function steering wheel or
the button on the windscreen wiper lever
›››
page 85.
The following conditions may lead the
ACC not to react:
●
If the accelerator is pressed.
●
If there is no gear engaged.
●
If the ESC is controlling.
●
If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).
WARNING
There is a danger of rear collision when the
dist
ance to the vehicle in front is reduced
and the speed difference between both ve-
hicles is so great that a speed reduction by
the ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brake
immediately!
●
The ACC may not be able to detect all
situations properly.
●
Stepping on the accelerator may cause
the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver
braking will have priority over intervention
by the speed control or adaptive cruise
control.
●
Always be ready to use the brakes!
●
Observe country-specific provisions gov-
erning obligatory minimum distances be-
tween vehicles.
●
It is dangerous to activate control and re-
sume the programmed speed if the road,
»
269
Driving
traffic or weather conditions do not permit
this. Accident haz
ard!
Note
●
The pr
ogrammed speed is erased once
the ignition or the ACC are switched off.
●
When the anti-slip regulation (ASR) is dis-
connected while accelerating, the ACC
disconnects automatically.
●
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,
the engine switches off during the ACC
stopping phase and restarts for moving off.
Deactivating the ACC temporarily
in cer
tain situations
In the following situations the ACC should be
deactiv
ated due to the system's limita-
tions
›››
:
●
When overtaking, on closed curves or
mount
ain roads, roundabouts, slip roads or
roadwork sections, preventing the system
from accelerating to reach the programmed
speed.
●
When going through a tunnel, as operation
could be affected.
●
When other vehicles are going slower in the
left lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be
overtaken on the right.
●
In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi-
cle in front may not be detected.
WARNING
If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-
tions described, serious accidents and inju-
ries may occur
.
●
Always switch off the ACC in critical sit-
uations.
Note
If you do not switch off the ACC in the
af
orementioned situations, you may com-
mit a legal offence.
Special driving recommendations
Fig. 255
V
ehicle on a bend.
Motorcyclist
ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.
270
Assistant systems
Fig. 256 V
ehicle changing lanes. One
vehicle turning and another stationary.
The ACC has certain limitations inherent to
the syst
em. Certain reactions, under certain
circumstances, may be unexpected or come
late from the driver's point of view. So pay at-
tention in order to intervene if necessary.
The following situations require maximum at-
tention:
Starting driving after a stopping phase
(only with automatic transmission)
After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin
driving when the vehicle in front moves off
›››
.
Overtaking
When the t
urn signal lights up before the ve-
hicle starts to overtake, the ACC accelerates
the vehicle automatically and thus reduces
the distance from the vehicle in front.
When the vehicle moves to the overtaking
lane, if the ACC does not detect another ve-
hicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the
programmed speed.
System acceleration can be interrupted at
any time by pressing the brake or moving the
third lever to position
›››
Fig. 253
3
.
Driving thr
ough a bend
When entering or leaving some curves, the
radar sensor may cease to sense the vehicle
driving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in the
adjacent lane
›››
Fig. 255. The vehicle may
brake unnecessarily or stop reacting to the
vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to
intervene by accelerating or interrupting
braking by applying the brake or pushing the
third lever to position
›››
Fig. 253
3
.
Driving in t
unnels
When driving through tunnels the radar sen-
sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-
nels.
Narrow or misaligned vehicles
The radar sensor can only detect narrow ve-
hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align-
ment when they enter its range
›››
Fig. 255.
In these cases, you should brake as necessa-
ry.
Vehicles with special loads and accesso-
ries
Special loads and accessories of other vehi-
cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or
over the top may be out of the ACC's range.
SEAT recommends disconnecting it.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Vehicles changing lanes a short distance
away from your own can only be detected
when they are within range of the sensors. As
a consequence, the ACC will take longer to
react
›››
Fig. 256. Brake yourself as neces-
sary.
Stationary vehicles
The ACC does not detect stationary objects
while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged
vehicles.
If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or
moves over and there is a stationary vehicle
in front of it, the ACC will not react to it
›››
Fig. 256 . Brake yourself as necessary.
»
271
Driving
Vehicles driving in the opposite direction
and v
ehicles crossing your path
The ACC does not react to vehicles ap-
proaching from the opposite direction or ve-
hicles crossing your path.
Metal objects
Metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used
in road works, can confuse the radar sensor
and cause the ACC to react wrongly.
Factors that may affect how the radar
sensor operates
If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to
heavy rain snow or mud, the ACC is deactiva-
ted temporarily. A message will be displayed
stating this. If necessary clean the SEAT
badge
›››
Fig. 241.
When the radar sensor begins to operate
properly, the ACC will become available. The
message will turn off and the ACC may be
reactivated.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong
radar reverse reflection, for example in a
closed car park. SEAT recommends discon-
necting it.
Trailer mode
When driving with trailer the ACC controls
less dynamically.
Overheated brakes
If the brakes overheat, for example on long
and steep descents, the ACC may be deacti-
vated temporarily. A message will be dis-
played stating this. In this case, adaptive
cruise control cannot be activated.
Cruise control may be reactivated once the
brake temperature has dropped. The mes-
sage will disappear. If the message ACC not
available remains on for quite a long time it
means that there is a fault. Contact a speci-
alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership.
WARNING
If you do not pay attention to the Press
the brake message
, the vehicle may move
and crash into the vehicle ahead. Before
driving off again, check that the road is
clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-
stacles on the road. This could cause an
accident and serious injuries. If necessary,
apply the brake.
Lane Assist system
Intr
oduction
The Lane Assist System helps the driver
st
ay in his/her lane within the physical lim-
its of the system. This function is not suita-
ble for keeping the vehicle automatically
in the lane, and it is not designed for this
purpose.
Using the camera located in the windscreen,
the Lane Assist system detects the possible
lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in-
voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has
detected, the system notifies the driver with a
corrective steering movement. The purpose is
not only to warn the driver, but also to keep
the vehicle inside the lane. This movement
can be over-regulated at any time.
No warning is produced with the turn signals
activated, given that the Lane Assist system
understands that a lane change is required.
Control lamp
It lights up yellow
Lane Assist system active but not available.
The syst
em cannot accurately recognize the lane.
See page 274, The lane assist system is active but
it is not available (the control lamp is lit up yel-
low).
It lights up green
Lane Assist system active and available.
Some control and warning lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is s
witched on to
272
Assistant systems
check certain functions. They will switch off
aft
er a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Indications on the instrument panel
displ
ay
Fig. 257 On the instrument panel display: Indi-
cation on the L
ane Assist system display (ex-
ample 1).
Fig. 258 On the instrument panel display: In-
dication on the L
ane Assist system display (ex-
ample 2).
Status display
Fig. 257 : The syst
em is active, but not
available, either because the minimum
speed has not been reached or because
the lane lines are not recognised.
Fig. 257 : The system is activated and
available, it has recognised both lane
lines. It is not correcting the trajectory at
this time.
Fig. 258 : The system is operational,
the highlighted line
1
indicates that
ther
e was a risk of involuntarily crossing
the lane line and that the steering is be-
ing adjusted to correct the trajectory.
–
–
–
273
Driving
Operating mode
Steering wheel vibration
The f
ollowing situations can cause vibration
in the steering wheel and require the driver to
take active control of driving:
●
When the steering angle assist value re-
quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is higher
than the system’s maximum operating value.
●
If the system ceases to display the lane
lines while assisting with steering.
Switching the Lane Assist system on or off
●
Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the butt
on for the assistants systems
›››
page 86.
●
OR: using the instrument panel menu Set-
tings > Assistants > Lane Assist
›››
page 73. The “confirmation sign” indicates
that the driver assist system is switched on.
Automatic deactivation: the lane assist sys-
tem can be deactivated automatically if
there is a system malfunction. Control lamp
switches off.
The lane assist system is active but it is not
available (the control lamp is lit up yellow)
●
When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38
mph).
●
When the Lane Assist system does not de-
tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-
ple, in the event warnings indicating road
works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections.
●
When the radius of a curve is too small.
●
When no road markings can be seen.
●
When the distance to the next marking to
too great.
●
When the system does not detect any clear
and active steering movement during a long
period of time.
●
Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic
driving styles.
●
If a turn signal is activated.
●
When the ASR is switched off.
BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot As-
sist)
The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat-
ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions
›››
page 275. In this case, the Lane Assist
function expands its functions in the following
way:
If the driver tries to change lane and there is a
vehicle in the blind spot:
●
The lamp flashes in the corresponding
rear-view mirror even though the turn signal
has not been activated.
●
The steering wheel vibrates to warn the
driver of the risk of collision.
●
torque is applied to correct the steering
and return the vehicle to its lane.
Switching off the Lane Assist system in the
following situations
Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,
switch it off in the following situations:
●
When more attention is required of the driv-
er
●
When driving in a sporty style
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In areas of road works
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Lane As-
sist syst
em cannot change the limits im-
posed by the laws of physics and by the
very nature of the system. Careless or un-
controlled use of the Lane Assist system
may cause accidents and injury. The sys-
tem is not a replacement for driver aware-
ness.
●
Always adapt your speed and the dis-
tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-
bility, weather conditions, the condition of
the road and the traffic situation.
●
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel so it can be turned at any time.
●
The Lane Assist system does not detect
all road markings. The road surfaces, road
274
Assistant systems
structures or objects in poor condition can
be incorr
ectly detected as road markings
under certain circumstances by the Lane
Assist system. In such situations, switch the
Lane Assist system off immediately.
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
●
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
roundings.
●
When the area of vision of the camera
becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the
Lane Assist system function can be affec-
ted.
CAUTION
In order to avoid influencing the operation
of the syst
em, the following points must be
taken into account:
●
Regularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice
›››
Fig. 243.
●
Do not cover the area of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the area of vision of the wind-
screen camera is not damaged.
Note
●
The l
ane departure warning system has
been exclusively developed for driving on
paved roads only.
●
If the L
ane Assist system does not work as
described in this chapter, do not use it and
contact a specialised workshop.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
Using the blind spot detector
(BSD) with parking assist
ant
(RCTA)
Introduction
The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to de-
t
ect the traffic situation behind the vehi-
cle.
The integrated parking assistant (RCTA)
helps the driver when backing out of a
parallel parking spot and in manoeuvring.
The blind spot detector has been developed
for driving on paved roads.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the blind spot det
ector (BSD) with parking
assistance (RCTA) included cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. Accidents and severe injury may
occur if the blind spot detection system or
the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-
gently or involuntarily. The system is not a
r
eplacement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
to be ready to intervene in the steering at
any time.
●
Pay attention to the control lamps that
may come on in the external rear view mir-
rors and on the instrument panel, and fol-
low any instructions they may give.
●
The blind spot assistant could react to
any special constructions that might be
present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high
or irregular dividers. This may cause erro-
neous warnings.
●
Never use the blind spot detector with
rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads.
The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-
fic alert has been designed for use on
paved roads.
●
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
roundings.
●
The external rear view mirror control
lamps may have limited functionality due
to solar radiation.
Note
If the blind spot detector with parking as-
sist
ant does not work as described in this
»
275
Driving
chapter, stop using it and contact a speci-
alised w
orkshop.
Control lamps
Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:
It lights up
It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac-
tiv
ated and ready to operate.
It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi-
cl
e in the blind spot.
Flashes
The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the
blind spot and the t
urn signal has been turned on in
the direction of the detected vehicle
›››
.
For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist
›››
page 272, a warning to switch lanes will also ap-
pear even though the turn signal has not been en-
gaged.
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
s
witched on and should turn off after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for
the function check.
If there are no indications from the control
lamp in the external rear view mirror, this
means that the blind spot detector has not
detected any other vehicles in the area
›››
.
If the dipped beam is on, then the control
l
amps in the external rear view mirrors will be
dimmed (night mode).
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
messages ar
e ignored when they light up,
the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause
accidents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-
sages.
●
Carry out the necessary operations.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and cor-
r
esponding text messages when they light
up may result in damage to the vehicle.
Blind spot detector (BSD)
Fig. 259
In the exterior mirrors: blind spot de-
t
ector indication.
The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to
monit
or the areas behind the vehicle
›››
page 259. The system does this by meas-
uring the vehicle's distance from other vehi-
cles and its speed differential. The blind spot
detector will not work at speeds of less than
approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses
optical signals in the external rear view mir-
rors to notify the driver.
276
Assistant systems
The lane width is not detected individually,
but is r
ather pre-configured in the system.
Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-
tween two lanes, the indications may be in-
correct. Furthermore, the system can detect
vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if
there are any), and can also detect station-
ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an
incorrect indication.
Indication on the exterior mirror
The control lamp (expanded view) provides
an indication in the corresponding external
mirror
›››
Fig. 259 regarding the traffic situa-
tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be
critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-
ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to
the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of
the right-hand external mirror indicates the
traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.
In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or
windows with tinted film, the indications of the
external mirrors may not be seen clearly or
correctly.
Keep the external mirrors clean and free of
snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-
hesives or other similar materials.
277
Driving
Driving situations
Fig. 260 Schematic representation: P
ass-
ing situation with traffic behind the vehicle.
Indication from the blind spot detector in the
left-hand external mirror.
Fig. 261 Schematic representation: Sit
ua-
tion of passing and then moving into the right-
hand lane. Indication from the blind spot de-
tector in the right-hand external mirror.
In the following situations, an indication will
be displ
ayed in the external mirror
›››
Fig. 260 (arrow) or
›››
Fig. 261 (ar-
row):
●
When being overtaken by another vehicle
›››
Fig. 260 .
●
When passing another vehicle
›››
Fig. 261
with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-
erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-
played.
The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-
er an indication will be displayed in the exter-
nal mirror, because the blind spot detector
takes into account the speed differential with
other vehicles. Thus even though the distance
from the other vehicle is identical, the indica-
tion will appear sooner in some cases and
later in others.
Physical limitations inherent to the system
In some situations the blind spot detector
may not interpret the traffic situation correct-
ly. E.g. in the following situations:
●
on tight bends;
●
in the case of lanes with different widths;
●
at the top of slopes;
●
in adverse weather conditions;
278
Assistant systems
●
in the case of special constructions t
o the
side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-
ers.
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)
Fig. 262
Schematic representation of the rear
cr
oss traffic alert assistant: zone monitored
around the vehicle while leaving a parking
space.
Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear
bumper
›
››
page 258
›››
Fig. 244 to monitor
traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it rever-
ses out of a parking bay, or as it is being man-
oeuvred, for example in very low visibility con-
ditions.
If the system detects that someone else on
the road is approaching the rear of the vehi-
cle
›››
Fig. 262, an acoustic alarm is heard.
●
In vehicles without ParkPilot a “gong” will
sound and a message will be displayed on
the instrument panel.
●
If the vehicle is equipped ParkPilot, the
ParkPilot acoustic alarm will sound continu-
ously.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
If the rear cross traffic alert detects that
someone else on the road is approaching the
rear of the vehicle and the driver does not
step on the brake, the system will engage the
brakes automatically.
The parking system helps the driver by auto-
matically engaging the brakes to reduce any
damage. The automatic intervention on the
brakes takes place when driving in reverse at
approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting
that the vehicle is stationary, the system
keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.
After automatically braking to reduce dam-
age, the system will not be able to automati-
cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
You can interrupt the automatic braking by
stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or
the brake pedal in order to regain control of
the vehicle.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the r
ear cross traffic alert cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. The parking assistant function
should not tempt you into taking any risks.
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness.
●
The system should never be used in limi-
ted visibility conditions or complicated
traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when
crossing multiple lanes.
●
Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-
cle's surroundings, since the system often
fails to detect things such as bicycles or
pedestrians.
●
The rear cross traffic alert itself will not
brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
Using the blind spot detector (BSD)
with parking assist
ant (RCTA)
Activating and deactivating the blind spot
det
ector (BSD) with parking assistant
(RCTA)
The blind spot detector with parking assistant
can be switched on and off by accessing the
Assistance systems menu on the dash
panel display using the steering wheel con-
trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-
function camera, it can also be accessed by
»
279
Driving
means of the assistants systems key located
on the main beam headlight l
ever.
Open the Assistants menu.
●
BSD
●
Parking Assist.
If the verification box on the control panel is
checked , the functionality will be automat-
ically activated at ignition.
When the blind spot detector is ready to op-
erate, the indications in the external mirrors
will turn on briefly as confirmation.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-
ment in the system will remain active.
If the blind spot detector was automatically
deactivated, it will only be possible to restart
the system after turning the vehicle off and
restarting it.
Trailer mode
The Blind spot detector and the rear cross
traffic alert will be automatically deactivated
and it will be impossible to activate them if
the tow hitch is electrically connected to a
trailer or other similar object.
As soon as the driver starts to drive with a
trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a
message will appear on the instrument panel
display indicating that the blind spot detector
and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva-
ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from
the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot
detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you
will have to reactivate them in the corre-
sponding menu.
If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,
then the blind spot detector and the rear
cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated
manually when driving with a trailer.
Braking and parking
Br
aking system
Control lamps
It lights up red
Brake fluid level too low
›››
page 322 or fault in the
brake system.
Do not carry on driving!
Together with the contr
ol lamp on the button:
Electronic parking brake on
›››
page 283.
Flashes red
Electronic parking brake faulty. Simultaneously, the
contr
ol warning light may light up , or the control
lamp on the button may flash.
Go to a specialised workshop, as you may not be
able to park safely.
It lights up yellow
Along with the w
arning lamp flashing: fault in the
electronic parking brake.
Contact a specialised workshop.
It lights up yellow
Front brake pads worn.
Cont
act a specialised workshop immediately.
280
Braking and parking
It lights up red
Brake pedal not pressed!
Fully depr
ess the brake pedal.
It lights up green
Brake pedal not pressed.
Pr
ess the brake pedal to select a gear range.
Brake pedal not pressed.
Pr
ess the brake pedal to disengage the electronic
parking brake
›››
page 283.
WARNING
●
When the ignition is s
witched on, the sta-
tus of the brake system and the brake as-
sist functions are automatically checked.
The control lamps on the instrument cluster
light up briefly and then go out. Any indica-
tor lamp that remains on indicates a fault.
Seek qualified technical assistance imme-
diately.
●
If the brake warning lamp does not go
out or if it lights up when driving, the brake
fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there
is a risk of an accident
›››
page 322, Brake
fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.
Obtain technical assistance.
●
If the brake warning lamp lights up to-
gether with the ABS lamp this could be
due to an ABS fault. When this function
fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under
certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-
cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-
tr
ol. Stop and seek technical assistance.
●
If the lamp lights up, alone or accom-
panied by a warning message on the in-
strument panel display, please go immedi-
ately to a specialised workshop to check
the brake pads and to replace them if they
are worn.
Information about the brakes
New brake pads
F
or the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200
miles), new brake pads have not yet reached
their maximum braking capacity, and need to
be “run in” first. However, you can compen-
sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by
applying more pressure on the brake pedal.
Avoid overloading the brakes while running
them in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
a great deal on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a
particular problem in urban traffic and short
stretches, or with very sporty driving.
Depending on the speed, the braking force
and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-
perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be
produced when braking.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain situations (for example, on driving
through flooded areas, in severe downpours
or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-
tion could be delayed if the discs and pads
are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the
brakes should be “dried” by pressing the
brake pedal several times.
At high speed and with the windscreen wipers
activated, the brake pads will briefly touch
the brake discs. This takes place, although
unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals
to improve the response time of the brakes
when they are wet.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be
temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for
some distance without using the brakes when
there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The
layer of salt that accumulates on the discs
and pads can be removed by gently apply-
ing the brakes a few times.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to
form on the discs and dirt to build up on the
brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently
or the brakes are not used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust
has formed on the disks, it is advisable to
clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly
a few times at a moderately high speed
›››
.
»
281
Driving
Fault in the brake system
If the br
ake pedal travel should ever increase
suddenly, this may mean that one of the two
brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to
the nearest specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-
member that you will have to apply more
pressure on the brake pedal and allow for
longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if
the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid
level is monitored electronically.
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you
apply to the brake pedal. It works only when
the engine is running.
WARNING
Any anomaly in the brake system can in-
cr
ease the braking distance, with the re-
sulting risk of an accident.
●
New brake pads and discs must be run in
and do not have the correct friction during
the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced
braking capacity may be offset by pressing
on the brake pedal a little harder.
●
If you are driving on roads which have
been salted, braking effectiveness may be
decreased.
●
Br
akes can overheat if used excessively
on slopes. Before driving down a long steep
slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
change down into a lower gear or range.
Therefore, using the engine brake relieves
the brakes.
●
Gentle continuous braking causes the
brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
tance will increase. Apply and then release
the brakes alternately.
●
Apply the brakes heavily to clean the
brake system only in a suitable traffic situa-
tion. Do not put other road users in danger:
there is risk of causing an accident.
●
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
neutral, when the engine is stopped. The
braking distance is increased considerably
when the brake servo is not active.
●
If the brake is subjected to high stresses,
vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-
tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of
the brakes.
●
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
accessories please read the relevant in-
structions.
CAUTION
●
Ne
ver let the brakes “drag” by leaving
your foot on the pedal when it is not neces-
sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-
sulting in longer stopping distances and
gr
eater wear.
●
Before driving down a long, steep gradi-
ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-
lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine
braking and relieves the brakes. If you still
have to use the brakes, it is better to brake
firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes
continuously.
Note
●
If the br
ake servo is out of action, for ex-
ample when the car is being towed, you will
have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder than normal to make up for the lack
of servo assistance.
●
If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-
cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel
covers, it is important that the flow of air to
the front wheels is not obstructed, other-
wise the brakes can overheat.
282
Braking and parking
Electronic parking brake
Fig. 263
In the centre console: electronic
parking br
ake button
The electronic parking brake replaces the
handbr
ake.
Applying the electronic parking brake
The electronic parking brake can be activa-
ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,
even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-
vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-
cle.
●
Pull and hold the
›››
Fig. 263 button.
●
The parking brake is activated when both
the control lamp of button
›››
Fig. 263 and
the red control lamp on the instrument
panel are both on.
●
Release the button.
Disconnecting the electronic parking
brake
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 263. At the same
time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the
engine is running, press the accelerator pedal
slightly.
●
The indicator lamp on button
›››
Fig. 263
and the red indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster turn off.
Automatic release of the electronic park-
ing brake when moving off
The electronic parking brake automatically
disconnects when moving off in any of the
following situations, if the driver's door is
closed and the driver's seatbelt is buckled:
●
In vehicles with automatic transmission: a
gear range is engaged or the vehicle is
switched to another one and the accelerator
pedal is lightly pressed.
●
In vehicles with manual transmission: the
clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting
off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-
ed.
●
To facilitate certain manoeuvres, there are
exceptions that allow the parking brake to
disconnect automatically without the driver's
seatbelt being buckled.
The parking brake can be prevented from be-
ing automatically released by continuously
pulling up the
›››
Fig. 263 switch when
starting off.
The electronic parking brake is not discon-
nected until the button is released. This
can facilitate starting off when a heavy load
is towed
›››
page 299.
Emergency brake function
Only use the emergency brake function if you
are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot
brake
›››
.
●
Pull and hold the
›
››
Fig. 263 button in
this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At
the same time, an acoustic warning can be
heard.
●
To stop the braking process, release the
button or press the accelerator.
WARNING
The improper use of the electronic parking
br
ake can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Never use the electronic parking brake to
stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.
Braking distances can be considerably lon-
ger, since, under certain circumstances,
only the rear wheels brake. Always use the
foot brake.
●
Never accelerate from the engine when a
gear range or a gear is engaged and the
engine is running. The vehicle could move,
»
283
Driving
even if the electronic parking brake is acti-
v
ated.
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally
mo
ving when parking it, first apply the
electronic parking brake and then remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
Note
●
In v
ehicles with manual transmission,
when you release the clutch pedal and ac-
celerate at the same time, the electronic
parking brake is automatically disconnec-
ted.
●
If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be
possible to disconnect the electronic park-
ing brake. Use the jump-start
›››
page 51.
●
When the electronic parking brake is ap-
plied or released, noises may be heard.
●
The system performs automatic and au-
dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-
cle if some time elapses without the elec-
tronic parking brake being used.
Auto Hold function
Fig. 264
Detailed view of the centre console:
Aut
o Hold button
The control light of the
›››
Fig. 264
button remains on when the Auto Hold func-
tion is connected.
Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-
sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-
ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-
od of time with the engine running, for exam-
ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at
traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-
tent stops.
When connected, the Auto Hold function au-
tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling
when stationary without pressing the brake
pedal.
After detecting that the vehicle is stationary
and the brake pedal has been released, the
Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-
er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.
When the driver touches the accelerator
pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-
ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.
The vehicle moves according to the slope of
the road.
If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-
ditions required by the Auto Hold function is
impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's
control light goes out
›››
Fig. 264. The elec-
tronic parking brake connects automatically,
if necessary, to park the vehicle safely
›››
.
Conditions f
or keeping the vehicle stop-
ped with the Auto Hold function
●
The driver's door is closed.
●
The driver’s seatbelt is buckled.
●
The engine is running.
Switching the Auto Hold function on and
off
Press the button
›››
. The control
l
amp on the button goes out when the Auto
Hold function is switched off.
Automatically engaging and disengaging
the Auto Hold function
If the Auto Hold function was switched on with
the button before disengaging the
284
Braking and parking
ignition, the function will remain on after the
ignition is r
e-engaged.
If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,
it will automatically remain off next time the
ignition is engaged.
The Auto Hold function connects automat-
ically if the following conditions are met
(all points must be met at the same time
›››
):
The v
ehicle is kept stationary with the
brake pedal on a flat surface or on a
slope.
The engine rotates “correctly”.
The Auto Hold function disconnects auto-
matically if the following conditions are
met:
If any of the conditions mentioned on
›››
page 284, Conditions for keeping
the vehicle stopped with the Auto
Hold function are no longer met.
If the engine runs erratically or has any
anomaly.
If the engine is turned off or stalls.
Manual gearbox: If the clutch and the
accelerator are pressed at the same
time.
Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is
pressed
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres
have only minimal contact with the
ground, e.g. For example, if the axles are
crossed.
Permanent Auto Hold connection
The Auto Hold function must be switched on
every time the engine is started. However, to
switch the Auto Hold function on permanent-
ly, the “mark” must be switched on in the
Settings menu, Autohold submenu
›››
page 73.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the Aut
o Hold function cannot defy the
laws of physics; it only works within the lim-
its of the system. The greater convenience
provided by the Auto Hold function should
never tempt you to take any risk that may
compromise safety.
●
Never leave the vehicle running and with
the Auto Hold function switched on.
●
The Auto Hold function cannot always
keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-
hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on
slippery or frozen surfaces.
Note
Before entering a car wash, always switch
off the Aut
o Hold function, because if the
electronic parking brake is automatically
connected, it may cause damage.
5.
Stabilisation and brake as-
sist
ance systems
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by
the system.
The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the
ABS fails, the lamp also lights up.
Flashes
ESC or ASR activated.
It lights up
ASR manually deactivated.
It lights up yellow
Along with the ESC control lamp : f
ault in the ABS.
Together with the warning lamp or : ABS f
ault.
WARNING
When the ignition is switched on, the status
of the br
ake system and the brake assist
functions are automatically checked. The
control lamps on the instrument cluster
light up briefly and then go out. Any indica-
tor lamp that remains on indicates a fault.
»
285
Driving
Seek qualified technical assistance imme-
diat
ely.
Brake assist systems
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC helps t
o improve safety. It reduces
the tendency to skid and improves the stabili-
ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC
detects critical handling situations, such as
vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin
on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle
by braking individual wheels or by reducing
the engine torque. The warning lamp will
flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is
intervening .
The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system
(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the
traction control system (ASR), electronic dif-
ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control
(XDS).
ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by
changing the torque.
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin
is desirable
›››
page 287.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-
der braking until the vehicle has reached a
virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the
vehicle even when the brakes are on full.
K
eep your foot on the brake pedal and do not
pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal
pulsate while the ABS is working.
If the running gear or brake system is modi-
fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-
verely limited.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
The brake assist system can reduce the re-
quired braking distance. The braking force is
automatically boosted if you press the brake
pedal quickly in an emergency. You must
keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-
ger has passed.
Traction control system (ASR)
In the event of wheelspin, the traction control
system reduces the engine torque to match
the amount of grip available. This helps the
car to start moving, accelerate or climb a
gradient.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes
the spinning wheel and directs the power to
the other driven wheel. This function is active
up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel
from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on
again automatically when the brake has
cooled down.
Electronic engine torque management
(XDS)
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher
speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the
wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-
ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.
This may mean that in certain situations the
torque delivered to the inner wheel is too
high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other
hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower
drive torque than it could transmit. This can
cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this
case the front axle, which results in under-
steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
The XDS can detect and correct this effect
via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside
wheel and counter the excess driving torque
of that wheel. This means that the requested
trajectory is much more precise.
XDS works in combination with the ESC and is
always active, even when ASR is disconnec-
ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-
connected.
WARNING
Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet
gr
ound can result in loss of vehicle control
286
Braking and parking
and serious injury to the driver and passen-
gers.
●
The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-
ic t
orque control system cannot exceed the
limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al-
ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or
slippery roads. If you notice the systems
cutting in, you should reduce your speed
immediately to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not be encouraged to take
risks by the presence of more safety sys-
tems. If you do, an accident may occur.
●
Please remember that the accident risk
always increases if you drive fast, espe-
cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if
you follow too close behind the vehicle in
front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,
EDS and the electronic torque control sys-
tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-
dents!
●
Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-
faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).
Despite the control systems, the driven
wheels could spin, affecting the stability of
the vehicle: risk of accident!
WARNING
The effectiveness of ESC can be consider-
ably r
educed if other components and sys-
tems affecting driving dynamics are not
maintained or are not functioning correct-
ly. This includes, among others, brakes,
tyres and other systems already men-
tioned.
●
R
emember that changing and fitting oth-
er components to the vehicle can affect
operation of the ABS, HBA and ESC.
●
Changes to the vehicle suspension or us-
ing unapproved wheel/tyre combinations
can affect operation of the ABS, HBA and
ESC, as well as their effectiveness.
●
Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC de-
pends on the use of suitable tyres
›››
page 327.
Note
●
The ABS and ASR will only oper
ate cor-
rectly if the four wheels have identical
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius
of the tyres can cause the system to re-
duce engine power when this is not desired.
●
The regulating processes of the systems
can make noises due to their operation.
●
If the warning lamp or lights up,
there could be a fault
›››
page 87.
●
Any modifications made to the vehicle
(for example, to the engine, brake system,
running gear or to the combination of
wheels and tyres) may affect the operation
of the ABS, ASR and EDS.
Connecting and disconnecting the
ASR
Fig. 265
Detailed view of the centre console:
butt
on used to switch ASR on and off (vehicles
with ESC)
The electronic stability control ESC consists
of ABS, EDL and ASR and only w
orks when
the engine is running.
The ASR can be switched off while the engine
is running by pressing the button
›››
Fig. 265. The ASR (and similar) is only
switched off when the required traction is not
obtained:
●
When driving through deep snow or on
loose ground (gravel, etc.).
●
When “freeing” a trapped vehicle.
Turn the ASR back on by pressing the
button
›››
Fig. 265.
287
Driving
Parking
P
ark the vehicle
When parking your vehicle, all legal require-
ments shoul
d be observed.
When parking, consider the following:
●
Park the vehicle on a suitable surface
›››
.
●
Connect the electronic parking brake
›
››
page 283.
●
For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-
t
or lever to position P.
●
Switch the engine off and remove the key
from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel
slightly to engage the steering lock.
●
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear
on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse
gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.
●
When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with
you.
Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines
Before switching off the engine, rotate the
steering wheel so that if the vehicle should
move, it will be held by the kerb.
●
On slopes, turn the front wheels so that
they are against the edge of the kerb.
●
Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of
the road.
WARNING
●
Av
oid parking the vehicle where the hot
exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes,
spilt fuel or flammable materials.
●
Do not leave passengers inside a closed
vehicle, they may not be able to open
doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the
possibility of a rescue.
●
Children should not be left alone in the
vehicle. They could tamper with the hand-
brake or the gears, which could cause the
vehicle to move without control.
●
Depending on weather conditions, it may
become extremely hot or cold inside the
vehicle. This can be fatal.
Note
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
k
ey can only be removed from the ignition
when the lever is in position P.
Help with parking and ma-
noeuvring
P
ark Assist system
Introduction
The Park Assist system helps the driver to find
a suit
able place to park, to insert the vehicle
into parallel and perpendicular parking pla-
ces and to leave parallel parking places.
The Park Assist system is limited to the system
abilities and requires that the driver is espe-
cially attentive
›››
.
The parking sensor syst
em is a component of
the Park Assist system that helps to park the
vehicle.
For vehicles with the optical parking system
(OPS), the infotainment system screen dis-
plays the detected zones in front of and be-
hind the vehicle, indicating - within the limits
of the system - the position of obstacles in re-
lation to the vehicle.
The park assist system cannot be switched
on if the factory-fitted towing bracket is elec-
trically connected to a trailer.
WARNING
Despite the assistance provided by the
park assist syst
em, do not run any risks
288
Help with parking and manoeuvring
when parking. The system is not a replace-
ment f
or driver awareness.
●
Unintentional movements of the vehicle
could cause serious injury.
●
Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-
ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.
●
The surface of certain objects and items
of clothing and external sound sources
may have a negative affect on the park as-
sist signals or on the system sensors or
may not reflect its signals.
●
The sensors have blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not registered.
●
Always observe the area around the vehi-
cle, as the sensors do not always detect
small children, animals or objects.
CAUTION
●
The park assist syst
em aims exclusively
at other parked vehicles, without taking
curbs or other circumstances into account.
Make sure you do not damage the tyres
and wheel rims when parking. Where nec-
essary, stop manoeuvring to avoid damag-
ing the vehicle.
●
The sensors may not always be able to
detect objects such as trailer draw bars,
thin rails, fences, posts and trees, etc. This
could result in damage to your car.
●
Although the parking distance warning
system detects and warns of the presence
of an obstacle, the obstacle could disap-
pear from the measurement angle of the
sensors if it is t
oo high or low and the sys-
tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it
will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring
the warnings of the parking sensor system
could cause considerable damage to the
vehicle. This is also valid when using the
park assist (e.g. to park behind a truck or
motorcycle). Therefore, always keep a
close watch on the area in front of and be-
hind the vehicle while parking, and inter-
vene promptly if necessary.
●
To ensure that the system works properly,
the bumper sensors must be kept clean,
free of ice and snow and uncovered.
●
The bumper sensors may become dam-
aged or misaligned, for example, when
parking.
●
When cleaning the sensors with high-
pressure or steam cleaning equipment,
spray the sensors briefly at a distance of
no less than 10 cm.
Note
If there is a fault in the system, go to a spe-
cialised w
orkshop. SEAT recommends tak-
ing your car in for technical service.
Parking using the park assist sys-
t
em
Fig. 266
Detailed view of the centre console:
butt
on to switch the park assist system on man-
ually.
»
289
Driving
Fig. 267
Space detected: parallel or angle.
Parking preparations
●
The Traction control system ASR must be
t
urned on
›››
page 283.
●
In parallel parking: press the
›››
Fig. 266 button as many times as neces-
sary to select the desired parking mode.
When the function is enabled, the lamp but-
ton will light up.
●
In head-in parking: press the
›››
Fig. 266 button as many times as neces-
sary to select the desired parking mode.
When the function is enabled, the lamp but-
ton will light up.
●
If necessary, press the button once more
to change parking mode.
●
Apply the turn signal for the side on which a
gap is to be detected for parking. The instru-
ment panel displays the side corresponding
to the road.
Parking
●
When parking parallel to the road: drive
next to the gap at a speed of no more than
40 km/h (25 mph) and at a distance of be-
tween 0.5 m and 2 m.
●
When parking perpendicular to the road:
drive next to the gap at a speed of no more
than 20 km/h (12 mph) and at a distance of
between 0.5 m and 2 m.
●
The best parking results will be achieved if
you position the vehicle as parallel as possi-
ble to the line of parked cars or the kerb.
●
When a suitable parking place is displayed
on the instrument panel, stop and select re-
verse gear.
●
Follow the instructions given on the instru-
ment panel display
●
Then, release the steering wheel when the
warning signal sounds
›››
: The system
will move the steering wheel! Ob-
serve the surrounding area.
●
Observe the surrounding area and acceler-
at
e carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h
(4 mph).
●
The park assist system is only responsible
for moving the steering wheel during the ma-
noeuvre. The driver applies the accelera-
tor, the clutch, the gears and the brake.
●
Follow the instructions given by the park
assist system until the manoeuvre is comple-
ted.
●
The park assist system steers the vehicle
forwards and backwards until it is in a straight
position in the parking space.
●
The manoeuvre is complete when the cor-
responding indication is given on the instru-
ment panel display.
Finishing early or interrupting the parking
manoeuvre
The park assist system stops the manoeuvre
in advance in the event of one of the follow-
ing:
●
Press button .
●
Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
●
The driver moves the steering wheel.
●
The parking manoeuvre has not been com-
pleted after 6 minutes since the park assist
system was activated.
290
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
A sliding door is opened. T
o restart the ma-
noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the
button again.
●
There is a system malfunction (system tem-
porarily unavailable).
●
The ASR system is switched off or the ASR
or ESC is working.
WARNING
The steering wheel turns quickly by itself
when parking using the park assist syst
em.
Placing your hand between the steering
wheel spokes could lead to injuries.
Note
●
The park assist syst
em has its limitations.
For example, it is not possible to park on
tight bends using the park assist system.
●
Even if the park assist system recognises
that there is not enough space for parking
the vehicle, the instrument panel display
will still show this place. In this case, the
parking manoeuvre should not be reques-
ted.
●
Changing gears between forward and re-
verse gears before indicated (that is, be-
fore the signal from the parking sensor sys-
tem) the parking results may not be ideal.
●
For parallel parking (parallel to the road),
a sound will tell the driver when they must
change from forward gears to reverse; the
signal from the parking sensor system does
not indicat
e changes of direction.
●
The park assist can also be activated af-
terwards, if you pass close to a parallel
parking space at a maximum of 40 km/h
(25 mph) or close to a perpendicular park-
ing space at about 20 km/h (12 mph) and
then press the button.
●
The progress bar on the screen of the in-
strument panel shows a display of the rela-
tive distance to be covered.
●
When the Park Assist system is turning
the steering wheel of the stopped vehicle
the symbol is also displayed. Press on
the brake pedal so that the steering can
turn with the vehicle at a standstill and thus
reduce the number of manoeuvres.
●
A “suitable” parking space length is at
least 1.1 m greater than the length of the
vehicle.
●
If the results of the park assist system are
not as good after changing the wheels, the
system must memorise the perimeter of the
new wheels. This process is performed au-
tomatically while the vehicle is in motion.
To help this process, turn slowly (at less
than 20 km/h [12 mph]), e.g. in an empty
car park.
Leaving a parking space using the
P
ark Assist system
Exiting a parking space
●
Switch on the engine.
●
Press button . When the function is ena-
bl
ed, the button
›››
Fig. 266 will light up.
●
Apply the turn signal for the side on which
you want to leave the parking space.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Follow the instructions given by the park
assist syst
em.
●
When the next indication appears, release
the steering wheel
›››
in Parking using the
park assist syst
em on page 291: The sys-
tem will move the steering wheel!
Observe the surrounding area.
●
Observe the surrounding area and acceler-
ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h
(4 mph).
●
The park assist system is only responsible
for moving the steering wheel during the ma-
noeuvre. The driver applies the accelera-
tor, the clutch, the gears and the brake.
●
When it is possible to leave the parking
space, the Park Assist system will stop. Take
control of the steering and when traffic con-
ditions permit, leave the parking space.
»
291
Driving
Automatic interruption of the manoeuvre
The park assist syst
em stops the manoeuvre
in the event of one of the following:
●
Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
●
The driver moves the steering wheel.
●
A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma-
noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the
button again.
●
There is a system malfunction (system tem-
porarily unavailable).
●
The ASR system is switched off or the ASR
or ESC is working.
WARNING
The steering wheel turns quickly automati-
cally when l
eaving a parking space using
the park assist system. Placing your hand
between the steering wheel spokes could
lead to injuries.
Park Assist brake operation
The Park Assist system helps the driver by
br
aking automatically. Automatic braking
does not relieve the driver of responsibility for
controlling the accelerator, brake and clutch
›››
.
Braking to avoid damage due to unsuitable
speed
It is possibl
e that the system operates the
brakes to reduce excess speed. The parking
manoeuvre can then continue. The brakes
will intervene during each parking process.
Braking to minimise damage
When approaching an obstacle, the vehicle
may brake automatically. In certain circum-
stances (e.g. storm, detection of ultrasounds,
vehicle status, load, inclination), the Park As-
sist system may stop the vehicle completely
before an object.
●
Press the foot brake
›››
!
F
ollowing the intervention of the brakes, the
Park Assist will stop.
WARNING
Despite the assistance provided by the
park assist syst
em, do not run any risks
when parking. The system is not a replace-
ment for driver awareness.
●
Always be ready to brake.
●
Automatic brake intervention will end af-
ter 1.5 seconds approximately. Following
automatic intervention of the brakes, stop
the vehicle yourself.
Park assist
Intr
oduction
The parking aid helps the driver when parking
and manoeuvring. When the v
ehicle ap-
proaches an obstacle, forwards or back-
wards, an intermittent audible warning will be
heard, higher or lower depending on the dis-
tance. The shorter the distance, the shorter
the intervals between tones. If the vehicle is
too close to the obstacle, the audible warning
becomes constant.
If you continue to approach an obstacle
when the sound is continuous, this means the
system can no longer measure the distance.
The sensor system on the bumpers transmit
and receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasound
signal (transmission, reflection from the ob-
stacle and reception), this system continu-
ously calculates the distance between the
bumper and the obstacle.
WARNING
The parking aid and the optical parking
syst
em are no substitute for driver aware-
ness.
●
The sensors have blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not registered.
●
Always observe the area around the vehi-
cle, as the sensors do not always detect
small children, animals or objects.
292
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
The surf
ace of certain objects and some
clothing do not reflect the ultrasound sig-
nals from the parking distance system. The
system cannot detect or incorrectly de-
tects these objects and people wearing
these types of clothes.
●
External sound sources can affect the
parking distance aid signals. In this case,
under certain circumstances, people and
objects will not be detected.
CAUTION
●
The sensors may not al
ways be able to
detect objects such as trailer draw bars,
thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open
boots, etc. This could result in damage to
your car.
●
Although the parking distance warning
system detects and warns of the presence
of an obstacle, the obstacle could disap-
pear from the measurement angle of the
sensors if it is too high or low and the sys-
tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it
will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring
the warnings of the parking sensor system
could cause considerable damage to the
vehicle.
●
The bumper sensors may become dam-
aged or misaligned, for example, when
parking.
●
To ensure that the system works properly,
the bumper sensors must be kept clean,
free of ice and snow and uncovered.
●
When cl
eaning the sensors with high-
pressure or steam cleaning equipment,
spray the sensors briefly at a distance of
no less than 10 cm (4 inches).
Note
Acoustic sources may lead to erroneous
w
arnings on the parking sensor system, e.g.
rough tarmac, cobbles or the noise of other
vehicles.
Connecting and disconnecting
Fig. 268 Detailed view of the centre console:
butt
on to connect or disconnect the park as-
sist.
Fig. 269 Parking sensor system sensors on the
fr
ont bumper
●
Press the butt
on when the ignition is
switched on
›››
Fig. 268.
●
Automatic connection: engage reverse
gear.
●
Automatic disconnection: drive faster than
15 km/h (9 mph).
The button lights up when the function is
switched on.
Special characteristics
●
The parking aid system sometimes detects
water on the sensors as an obstacle.
●
If the distance does not change, the warn-
ing signal will sound less loudly after a few
seconds. If the continuous signal sounds, the
volume will remain constant.
●
When the vehicle moves away from the ob-
stacle, the beeping sound automatically
switches off. On approaching the obstacle
»
293
Driving
again, the beeping sound will automatically
s
witch back on.
●
If the electronic parking brake is engaged
or the selector lever is set to P, no audible
warning will be emitted.
●
Your technical service centre can adjust the
volume of the warning signals.
Note
If the parking aid system is faulty, a contin-
uous audibl
e warning will sound when it is
switched on for the first time, and the but-
ton will flash. Press the button to discon-
nect the park assist and have the system
checked as soon as possible by a special-
ised workshop.
Optical parking system (OPS)
Fig. 270
On-screen OPS display:
A
has de-
t
ected an obstacle in the collision zone;
B
has
det
ected an obstacle in the segment;
C
zone
r
ecorded behind the vehicle.
Fig. 271
On-screen OPS display:
A
area re-
cor
ded in front of the vehicle;
B
an obstacle
has been det
ected in the segment.
The optical parking system is an accessory to
the parking aid syst
em
›››
page 293 and the
park assist system
›››
page 288.
The zone recorded by the sensors in front of
and behind the vehicle is displayed on the
factory-fitted infotainment system display.
Any obstacles are displayed in relation to the
vehicle
›››
.
The OPS activ
ates automatically when the
parking aid
›››
page 293 or the park assist
system is connected
›››
page 288.
Manual disconnection of the optical indi-
cation
●
Press a button on the factory-fitted infotain-
ment system, for example the button.
●
OR: briefly press the function button or
RVC on the screen.
Automatic disconnection of the optical in-
dication
●
Drive forwards at around 10-15 km/h
(6-9 mph).
●
On vehicles with reverse assist, engage re-
verse gear
›››
page 295. The display
changes to the image of the camera.
Zones explored
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
●
Front area: 1.20 m
●
Front side area: 0.60 m
●
Rear area: 1.60 m
294
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
R
ear side area: 0.60 m
Screen display
The image displayed represents the super-
vised zones in several segments. As the vehi-
cle approaches an obstacle, it approaches
the displayed vehicle segment
›››
Fig. 270
B
and
›
››
Fig. 271
B
. Ultimately, when the sec-
ond-t
o-last segment is shown, the collision
area has been reached. Stop the vehicle!
Segment colours (colour display)
The distance to the obstacle ahead is
approximately 31-120 cm and 31-160
cm behind. The audio signal is intermit-
tent.
The distance to the obstacle ahead or
behind is approximately 0-30 cm. The
audio signal is continuous.
1)
With trailer
A specific image is displayed on the screen of
vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket
and an electrically connected trailer. In this
case, the distances behind the vehicle are not
indicated.
Yellow
Red
Switching the parking sensor system
sound on and off
If the button on the infotainment system
display is pressed briefly, it may mute the
sound of OPS warnings. To switch the warn-
ings back on, press the button again briefly.
When the OPS is switched off and back on
again, muting is cancelled. Error messages
cannot be switched off.
WARNING
Do not be distracted from the traffic when
l
ooking at the screen.
Reverse Assist (Rear View
Camer
a)
Introduction
The camera fitted to the rear lid helps drivers
during parking or r
eversing manoeuvres
›››
page 260. The camera image and certain
orientation points generated by the system
are indicated on the factory-fitted infotain-
ment system screen.
Two types of location point (modes) can be
selected:
●
Mode 1: reverse parking perpendicular to
the road (e.g. in a car park).
●
Mode 2: reverse parking parallel to the
curb.
The mode can be changed by pressing the
button on the infotainment system screen.
Only the mode to which the points can be
changed will be displayed.
WARNING
Use of the camera to calculate the dis-
t
ance from obstacles (people, vehicles,
etc.) is inaccurate and may cause acci-
dents and severe injuries.
●
The camera lens expands and distorts
the field of vision and displays the objects
on the screen in a different, vague manner.
●
Some objects may not be displayed or
may not be very clear (e.g. very thin posts
or fences), due to the resolution of the
monitor or if the light is dim.
●
The camera has blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not detected.
●
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of
snow and ice. Do not cover it.
»
1)
The permanent sound starts at a somewhat
gr
eater distance on vehicles with a factory-fitted
towing bracket.
295
Driving
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the rear assist
syst
em cannot change the limits imposed
by the laws of physics and by the system it-
self. Careless or uncontrolled use of the
rear assist system may result in severe inju-
ries and accidents. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-
ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.
●
Always keep a close eye on the area
around the vehicle and always look to-
wards where you are parking. The display
shows the path of the rear end of the vehi-
cle using the current steering angle. The
front of the vehicle turns more in compari-
son with the rear.
●
Do not be distracted from the traffic
when looking at the screen.
●
Always observe the area around the vehi-
cle, as the cameras do not always detect
children, animals or objects.
●
The system might not show all areas
clearly.
●
Only use the rear assist system when the
boot hatch is completely closed.
CAUTION
●
The camer
a only displays 2D images on
the screen. Due to the lack of depth, it
might be difficult or impossible to recog-
nise protruding objects or cracks in the
r
oad.
●
The cameras may not always be able to
detect objects such as thin rails, fences,
posts and trees, etc. This could result in
damage to your car.
Usage instructions
Fig. 272
Reverse assist indication: mode 2
connect
ed.
Function buttons on the screen:
displ
ay the menu; hide the menu.
Turning off the reversing camera im-
ages.
Display help. The help list explains the
surfaces and lines on the camera image.
Press to exit help.
Mute the sound.
Adjust the display: bright, contrast, colour.
1
2
3
4
5
Switching on the orientation points for
r
ear parking perpendicular to the road
(mode 1).
Displaying the optical parking system.
Reverse assist works when the ignition is on or
with the engine running. After switching off
the ignition, the reverse assist image remains
briefly on the screen.
Connecting the reverse assist
●
Select reverse gear. Mode 1 will be dis-
played.
Manual disconnection
●
Press the button (vehicles with an opti-
cal parking system).
●
OR: press a button on the factory-fitted in-
fotainment system, for example the but-
ton.
●
OR: press the button on the screen.
Automatic disconnection
●
Release the reverse gear. The image turns
off after about 10 seconds, or, in vehicles with
parking systems (OPS), the OPS indication is
immediately displayed.
●
OR: Drive forward at more than 15 km / h (9
mph), approximately.
6
7
296
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Do not use the reverse assist system in the
f
ollowing cases
●
– If there is a fault in the dynamic chassis
control (DCC).
●
If the image displayed is not very clear or
reliable (low visibility or dirty lens).
●
If the space behind the vehicle cannot be
clearly or completely recognised.
●
If the vehicle has been overloaded at the
rear.
●
If the driver is not familiar with the system.
●
If the rear lid is open.
●
If the position and installation angle of the
camera have been changed, e.g. in a rear-
end collision. Have a specialised workshop
check the system.
Optical illusions of the camera (examples)
The rear assist camera produces two-dimen-
sional images. Any cracks in or objects pro-
truding from the ground or from other vehi-
cles are more difficult to spot or cannot be
seen due to a lack of depth in the image dis-
played.
Objects or other vehicles may seem to be
closer or further away than what they really
are:
●
On changing from a flat surface to a slope
or gradient.
●
On changing from a slope or gradient to a
flat surface.
●
If the vehicle has been overloaded at the
rear.
●
On approaching protruding objects. These
objects may be outside the angle of vision of
the camera when reversing.
Note
●
SEAT r
ecommends that you practise
parking with the rear assist system in a qui-
et location or in a car park to become fa-
miliar with the system, including the orien-
tation lines and their function.
●
The orientation lines will not be displayed
on the screen if the rear lid is open or the
factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically
connected to a trailer.
Parallel parking (mode 1)
Fig. 273
Screen: orientation lines for the park-
ing space behind the v
ehicle.
Summary of the orientation points
Meaning of orient
ation lines displayed on the
screen
›››
Fig. 273. All of the lengths of the
orientation lines use a vehicle located on a
horizontal surface as reference.
Red: safety distance, i.e. road area loca-
ted up to 40 cm behind the vehicle.
Green: prolongation of the rear of the ve-
hicle (somewhat enlarged). The area dis-
played green ends around 2 metres be-
hind the vehicle, on the road.
Yellow: prolongation of the rear of the ve-
hicle as the steering wheel turns. The
area displayed yellow ends around 3 me-
tres behind the vehicle, on the road.
»
1
2
3
297
Driving
Parking
●
Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-
l
ect reverse gear.
●
Reverse slowly and turn the steering wheel
so that the yellow orientation lines guide you
towards the space
›››
Fig. 273
3
.
●
Align the vehicle straight in the parking
pl
ace using the help of the green orientation
lines.
Parallel parking (mode 2)
Fig. 274 Screen: orientation lines and surfaces
f
or the space behind the vehicle.
After applying the turn signal, the lines and
surf
aces not required are deleted.
Summary of the orientation points
Meaning of orientation lines and surfaces dis-
played on the screen
›››
Fig. 274. All of the
lengths of the orientation lines use a vehicle
located on a horizontal surface as reference.
Safety distance: road area located up to
40 cm behind the vehicle.
Vehicle side limit.
Turning point when parking. When the
yellow line touches the curb or another
limit of the parking space, the point for
changing direction (magnifying glass) will
have been reached.
Free space required to parallel park the
vehicle. The surface displayed must com-
pletely fit in the space.
Possible vehicle parked next to the curb.
Parking
●
Stop the vehicle 1 m away parallel to the
parking space and select reverse gear.
●
Switch on mode 2 on the navigation system
screen for parallel parking.
●
Slowly reverse and turn the steering wheel
so that the surface displayed yellow on the
screen stops in front of any obstacles
5
(e.g.
another v
ehicle).
●
Turn the steering wheel fully towards the
space and reverse slowly.
●
When the yellow line
3
touches the side
limit of the space
, e.g. the border or curb
(magnifying glass), turn the steering wheel
fully in the opposite direction.
1
2
3
4
5
●
Continue r
eversing until the vehicle is inside
the space, parallel to the road. Correct the
position if necessary.
298
Towing bracket device
Towing bracket device
T
railer mode
Introduction
Take into account country-specific regula-
tions about driving with a tr
ailer and the use
of a towing bracket.
The vehicle has been developed primarily for
carrying people, although it can also be used
to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding
technical equipment. This additional load has
an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption
and vehicle performance and in some cases
can reduce the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from
the vehicle, and thus more concentration
from the driver.
In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both
the vehicle and the trailer.
Maximum vertical load technically permit-
ted on the coupling device
The maximum vertical load technically per-
mitted from the trailer draw bar on the towing
bracket's tow ball is 100 kg (220 lbs).
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing
bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the
Start-Stop system operates as normal. No
special char
acteristics need to be taken into
account.
If the system does not recognise the trailer or
the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by
SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-
nected by pressing the corresponding button
in the lower part of the centre console before
driving with the trailer, and it should remain
off for the rest of the journey
›››
.
T
railer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If
you do not load the trailer up to the maximum
permitted trailer weight, you can then climb
correspondingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above
sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-
gine performance and the ability to climb
slopes, the tow load decreases proportional-
ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-
bination must be reduced by 10% for every
1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate
the trailer with the maximum authorised
drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing
bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-
it.
WARNING
Never use the trailer to transport people,
since it w
ould put their life in danger and is
also prohibited.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may
cause injury and accidents.
●
Only use the towing bracket if it is in a
perf
ect state of repair and is properly se-
cured.
●
Never modify or repair the towing bracket
in any way.
●
In order to reduce the danger of injury in
the event of rear-end collisions and to
avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists
when parking the vehicle, cover or remove
the tow hook when you are not using a trail-
er.
●
According to EU regulation 2021_535 it is
not permitted to install a towing device that
completely or partially covers the rear
number plate.
●
Never fit a towing bracket “with weight
distribution” or “load compensation”. The
vehicle has not been designed for this type
of towing bracket. The towing bracket
could fail and the trailer could be released
from the vehicle.
»
299
Driving
WARNING
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or l
arge objects can affect driving
properties and even cause an accident.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in
good condition.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
more likely to overturn than those with a
low one.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Take great care when overtaking.
●
Reduce speed immediately if you notice
that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never drive at more than 80 km/h
(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more
than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-
cumstances). This also applies in countries
where driving at higher speeds is permit-
ted. Take into account the speed limit for
vehicles with trailers in the corresponding
country, as it could be less than the speed
limit for vehicles without a trailer.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
WARNING
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted
by a non-SEAT w
orkshop, the Start-Stop
system must be disconnected manually
whene
ver driving with a trailer. Otherwise
the brake system could be damaged and
could consequently cause a serious acci-
dent or injury.
●
Always disconnect the Start-Stop system
manually when using a towing bracket that
has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.
Note
●
Bef
ore hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-
ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm
›››
page 95. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could
cause the alarm to go off.
●
Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's
first 1000 km
›››
page 253.
●
If a removable and retractable tow hook
is fitted, it should not be mounted when not
in use. In the event of a rear-end collision,
the damage to the vehicle could be greater
if the tow hook is fitted.
●
Some retrofitted towing brackets cover
the rear towing eye. In these cases, the
towing eye should not be used for tow-
starting or for towing other vehicles. For
this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-
ted with a towing bracket, always keep the
tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.
Technical requirements
Vehicles that are f
actory-equipped with a
towing bracket fulfil all the technical and le-
gal requirements for driving with a trailer.
If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing
bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for
the maximum authorised load of the trailer
that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing
bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and
the trailer and must be properly secured to
the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing
bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for
this vehicle. Always check and take into ac-
count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-
structions. Never fit a towing bracket “with
weight distribution” or “load compensation”.
Towing bracket fitted on the bumper
Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to
the area where the bumper is mounted. The
towing bracket should not impair the bum-
per's function. Do not make modifications or
repairs to the exhaust system or the brake
system. Make regular checks to ensure that
the towing bracket is secure.
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer increases the load on the
engine and cooling system. The cooling sys-
tem should have sufficient coolant and be
prepared for the additional effort involved in
driving with a trailer.
300
Towing bracket device
Trailer brakes
If the tr
ailer has its own brake system, please
take the relevant legal requirements into ac-
count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-
tem to the vehicle's brake system.
Tow cable
Always use a cable between the vehicle and
the trailer
›››
page 301.
Trailer tail lights
The trailer's rear lights should comply with
the statutory safety regulations
›››
page 301.
Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly
to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not
sure that the trailer's electrical connection is
correct, have it checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
Exterior mirrors
If you cannot see the area behind the trailer
with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,
additional mirrors will have to be installed in
accordance with the regulations of the coun-
try in question. The exterior mirrors should be
adjusted before you start driving and must
provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.
Trailer maximum electricity consumption
Never exceed the values indicated!
Brake lights (total) 84 Watts
Turn signal (on each side) 54 Watts
Side lights and rear lights 50 Watts
Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts
Rear fog light 42 Watts
WARNING
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is
not the right one
, the trailer could become
detached from the vehicle and cause seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
●
If the r
ear lights of the trailer are not cor-
rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
●
If the trailer absorbs excessive electric
current, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem directly to the electrical connections
of the tail lights or any other power sour-
ces. Only use the connections intended for
providing electric current to the trailer.
Hitching and connecting a trailer
Fig. 275 Schematic representation: assign-
ment of the pins of the tr
ailer's electrical sock-
et.
Pin Meaning
1 Left turn signal
2 Rear fog light
3 Earth, pins 1 to 8
4 Right turn signal
5 Rear light, right
6 Brake lights
7 Rear light, left
8 Reverse lights
9 Permanent live
10 Live charge cable
11 Unassigned
»
301
Driving
Pin Meaning
12 Unassigned
13 Earth, pins 9 to 13
Power socket for trailer
The v
ehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the connection between the trailer
and the vehicle. With the engine running,
electrical devices on the trailer receive power
from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin
10 of the trailer power socket).
If the system detects that a trailer has been
connected, the consumers on the trailer will
receive electricity through this connection
(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.
This powers, for example, the trailer's interior
lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in
a caravan only receive electrical power if the
engine is running (through pin 10).
To avoid overloading the electrical system,
you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3
or pin 13.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you
will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not
be available.
Tow cable
The tow rope must always be securely fixed
to the towing vehicle and loose enough so
that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.
Ho
wever, make sure that the cable does not
rub on the ground while driving.
Trailer tail lights
Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure
they are working correctly and that they
comply with the relevant safety regulations.
Make sure that the maximum permissible
power that can be absorbed by the trailer is
not exceeded
›››
page 301.
Include in the anti-theft alarm
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system
if the following conditions are met:
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an
anti-theft alarm and towing bracket.
●
If the trailer is electrically connected to the
towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-
et.
●
If the electrical systems of the vehicle and
trailer are in perfect condition and have no
faults or damage.
●
If the vehicle is locked with the key and the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-
gered if the electrical connection with the
trailer is cut off.
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always
turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt
sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
Trailers with LED tail lights
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED
rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-
theft alarm system.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does
not go off when the electrical connection
with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with
light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connect
ed, it may lead to an excessive
amount of current supplied to the trailer,
which can cause abnormalities in the entire
vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
Ensure that any repairs that need to be
carried out on the electrical system are
carried out by a specialised workshop.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem directly to the electrical connections
of the tail lights or any other power sour-
ces.
WARNING
Contact between the pins of the trailer
po
wer socket can cause short circuits,
overloading of the electrical system or
302
Towing bracket device
failure of the lighting system, and conse-
quently can cause accidents and serious
injuries.
●
Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-
er sock
et to each other.
●
Make sure any work on bent pins is car-
ried out by a specialised workshop.
CAUTION
Do not leave the trailer connected to the
v
ehicle when parked; place it on its support
wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or
falls due, for example, to a variation of the
load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will
be placed on the towing bracket and the
trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
Note
●
In case of anomalies in the el
ectrical sys-
tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in
the anti-theft alarm system, have them in-
spected by a specialised workshop.
●
If the trailer accessories consume energy
through the power socket to the trailer and
the engine is turned off, the battery will dis-
charge.
●
If the vehicle battery is running low, the
electrical connection with the trailer will be
automatically cut.
Trailer loading
Technically permissible maximum trailer
w
eight and vertical load on the coupling
device
The technically permissible maximum trailer
weight is the weight that the vehicle can
tow.
›››
The vertical load on the coupling is
e
xerted vertically from above on the hook of
the towing bracket.
The information on the maximum trailer
weight and vertical load on the coupling de-
vice contained in the type plate of the towing
bracket are experimental values only. The
correct figures for your specific model, which
may be lower than these figures, are given in
the vehicle documentation. The information in
the vehicle documentation takes precedence
at all times.
To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-
mends making the most of the maximum ver-
tical load technically permissible on the
coupling device
›››
page 299. An insufficient
vertical load has a negative influence on the
behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
The vertical load increases the weight on the
rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-
pacity.
Gross combination weight of the towing
v
ehicle and trailer
The gross combination weight is the actual
weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual
weight of the loaded trailer.
In some countries trailers are classified into
distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-
taining information from a specialised work-
shop regarding which type of trailer is most
suitable for your vehicle.
Trailer loading
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
must be balanced. In order to do this, the
load must be as close as possible to the max-
imum vertical load technically permissible on
the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-
tributed between the back and front of the
trailer:
●
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible or
above it.
●
Secure the trailer load properly.
Tyre pressure
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-
cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-
ommendations.
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the
towing vehicle with the maximum allowable
pressure
›››
page 330.
»
303
Driving
WARNING
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the
maximum l
oad technically permissible on
the coupling point, the maximum author-
ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-
tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
are exceeded, accidents and serious inju-
ries may occur.
●
Never exceed the indicated values.
●
The actual weight on the front and rear
axles must never exceed the maximum per-
missible axle weight. The weight on the
front and rear axles must never exceed the
maximum permissible weight.
WARNING
A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-
it
y and security of the towing vehicle and
trailer, which could lead to accidents and
serious injuries.
●
Always load the trailer correctly.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in
good condition.
Driving with a trailer
Adjusting the headlights
The fr
ont part of the vehicle may be raised
when the trailer is connected and the light
may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
headlight range adjuster
›››
page 123
1)
.
Specific features of driving with a trailer
●
If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake
gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-
vent the jerking that can be caused by the
locking of trailer wheels.
●
Due to the gross combination weight of the
t
owing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-
tance increases.
●
When going down a slope, engage a lower
gear (with a manual gearbox, or use the au-
tomatic gearbox's tiptronic mode) to use en-
gine braking. Otherwise, the brake system
could overheat and even fail.
●
The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-
bination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, change the centre of gravity and the
properties of the vehicle.
●
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
is loaded, then the load distribution is incor-
rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and
with extra caution.
Hill starts with a trailer
Depending on the slope of the hill and the
combination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-
wards slightly when you first start up.
For hill starts with a trailer hitched:
●
Press and hold the brake pedal.
●
Press the button once to disconnect the
electronic parking brake
›››
page 283.
●
If the vehicle is fitted with a manual trans-
mission, depress the clutch pedal fully.
●
Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-
lector lever to position D
›››
page 245.
●
Pull out the button and hold it in that po-
sition to immobilise the towing vehicle and
trailer with the electronic parking brake.
●
Release the brake pedal.
●
Move off slowly. To do this, release the
clutch pedal slowly if your vehicle has a man-
ual gearbox.
●
Do not release the button until the en-
gine has sufficient power to start driving.
1)
This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED
x
enon headlights.
304
Towing bracket device
WARNING
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may
l
ead to loss of control of the vehicle and
serious injury.
●
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or large objects will change the ve-
hicle handling and braking distances.
●
Always drive cautiously and carefully.
Brake earlier than usual.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions. Slow down, especially
when driving down hills or slopes.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-
vres.
●
Take great care when overtaking. Reduce
speed immediately if you notice that the
trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
●
Take into account the speed limit for vehi-
cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than
for vehicles without a trailer.
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle
and tr
ailer combination
The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer
combination is an additional function of the
el
ectronic stability control (ESC).
If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation system
detects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac-
tion on the steering control to reduce the
weaving of the trailer.
Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-
tion requirements
●
The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-
ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a
compatible towing bracket.
●
The ESC and ASR are active. The control
lamp or is not lit up on the instrument
cluster.
●
The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-
cle through the trailer power socket.
●
The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h
(approx. 37 mph).
●
The maximum vertical load technically per-
missible is not being exceeded on the cou-
pling device.
●
The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
●
If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped
with a mechanical overrun brake.
WARNING
The enhanced safety provided by the elec-
tric st
ability control of the vehicle and trail-
er should not lead you to take any risks that
could compromise your safety.
●
Adapt your speed and driving st
yle at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Accelerate with caution when the road is
slippery.
●
When adjusting any settings, stop accel-
erating.
WARNING
The electric stability control for the vehicle
and tr
ailer may not correctly detect all
driving conditions.
●
When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-
sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-
so switched off.
●
The stability system does not always de-
tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise
these correctly.
●
When driving on surfaces with poor grip,
the trailer can even interfere with the sta-
bility system.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity can
tip over without having previously weaved.
●
If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-
tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.
installation of a bicycle rack with lights),
repeated automatic braking may occur in
extreme driving conditions.
305
Driving
Electrically unlocking trailer
hook
Description
Fig. 276
On the right side of the luggage com-
partment: butt
on for unlocking the tow hook.
The towing bracket’s hook is located in the
bumper
. Tow hooks for electrical unlocking
cannot be removed.
There should be no person, animal or object
in the path of the tow hook
›››
.
Unl
ocking the tow hook and removing it
●
Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic
parking brake
›››
page 283.
●
Switch off the engine.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 276 button briefly. The tow
hook unlocks electrically and automatically
turns outwards. The button's control lamp
flashes.
●
Finish remove the tow hook by hand until
you feel and hear that it has engaged and
the control lamp on the button stays on.
●
Close the rear lid.
●
Before hitching the trailer, remove the dust
guard from the ball.
●
The indicator only lights when the boot
hatch is open and when a trailer is not hitch-
ed.
Retracting the tow hook
●
Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic
parking brake.
●
Switch off the engine.
●
Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-
cal connection between it and the vehicle. If
you are using an adapter, remove it from the
trailer's power socket.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 276 button briefly. The tow
hook unlocks electrically.
●
Turn the tow hook under the bumper with
your hand until you feel and hear that it en-
gages and the control lamp on the button re-
mains on continuously.
●
Close the rear lid.
The control lamp
●
If the warning light on the button
›››
Fig. 276
flashes, this means that the tow hook has
not been attached properly or is dam-
aged.
›››
●
If the warning lamp
›
››
Fig. 276 remains
on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is cor-
rectly in place both when extracted and
when covered.
The control light of the lamp switches off ap-
proximately 1 minute after closing the read lid.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may
cause injury and accidents.
●
Only use the tow hook if it is properly en-
gaged.
●
Always ensure that no person, animal or
ob
ject is to be found in the path of the tow
hook.
●
Never use a tool or instrument while the
tow hook is moving.
●
Never press the button
›››
Fig. 276 when
there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or
when a carrier system or other accessories
are mounted on the tow hook.
●
If the tow hook is not attached properly,
do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised
workshop and have the towing bracket
checked.
306
Towing bracket device
●
If you det
ect any fault in the electrical
system or in the towing bracket, contact a
specialised workshop and ask them to
check it.
●
If the ball has a diameter of less than 49
mm at any one point, do not use the towing
bracket under any circumstances.
CAUTION
If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure
or st
eam devices, do not point the jet di-
rectly towards the retractable tow hook or
the trailer power socket, as this may dam-
age the joints or remove the grease neces-
sary for lubrication.
Note
At extremely low temperatures, the tow
hook may be impossibl
e to operate. In this
case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca-
tion (for example, a garage).
Installing a rear carrier system or a
bicycl
e rack on the trailer hitch
Fig. 277
Recommended weight distribution on
the r
ear support system.
Fig. 278
Schematic representation of the max-
imum l
oad overhang of a bicycle rack for two or
three bicycles.
Examples of rear carrier systems are bicycle
r
acks or multi-purpose boxes that are instal-
led on the trailer hitch.
Only use rear carrier systems that have been
specified by the respective manufacturer for
the vehicle model, model year and version of
the vehicle in question
›››
.
SEAT r
ecommends the use of genuine SEAT
spare parts and accessories, which can be
purchased from the brand’s dealers. Install
the rear carrier system according to the man-
ufacturer’s installation instructions.
The load capacity results from the weight of
the rear carrier system and the weight of the
load carried on it.
»
307
Driving
The recommended maximum load capacity
of the r
ear carrier system installed on the
trailer hitch may be different from the maxi-
mum vertical load on the specific vehicle
coupling.
However, it is not permitted to exceed the
maximum permitted vertical load on the tow
hitch (which depends on the model).
The load capacity is reduced due to the lever
effect that occurs the further the carrier sys-
tem is from the ball head.
Place heavy objects as close as possible to
the trailer hitch
›››
Fig. 277.
Maximum load capacity depending on the
vehicle
To find out the recommended load capacity
for your vehicle, check the maximum vertical
load on its coupling
›››
page 357. Please re-
fer to the following table for the load capaci-
ty. In accordance with the UN-R-55 guideline,
CUPRA recommends not carrying more bicy-
cles than recommended on the rear rack sys-
tem.
Maximum vertical
l
oad on the vehi-
cle's specific cou-
pling
Maximum
load ca-
pacity
Number
of bicy-
cles
50 kg 50 kg 2
55 kg 55 kg 2
Maximum vertical
l
oad on the vehi-
cle's specific cou-
pling
Maximum
load ca-
pacity
Number
of bicy-
cles
From 75 kg 75 kg 3
Maximum load overhang of the rear carri-
er syst
em
Key to
›››
Fig. 278
With up to 55 kg load capacity: 500 mm
(approx. 19.7 in)
With 75 kg load capacity: 700 mm (ap-
prox. 27.6 in)
The maximum overhang shall not exceed, in
the case of two-bicycle racks, 500 mm from
the centre of the ball head to the centre of
the rail of the last support
›››
Fig. 278
A
. In
the case of thr
ee-bicycle carriers, the maxi-
mum overhang shall not exceed 700 mm
›››
Fig. 278
B
.
WARNING
The incorrect use of a rear carrier system
inst
alled on the tow hook can cause acci-
dents and injury.
●
Make sure that the carrier system is suit-
able for your vehicle.
●
Read and observe the installation in-
structions of the rear carrier system manu-
facturer.
A
B
●
Ne
ver attach a rear carrier system below
the ball head of the trailer hitch. The sys-
tem could slip due to the shape of the hitch.
CAUTION
Before setting off, SEAT recommends re-
mo
ving, to the extent possible, all accesso-
ries from the load attached to the carrier
system. Examples of these accessories are
baskets and panniers, child seats or batter-
ies. This improves the aerodynamics and
centre of gravity of the rear carrier system.
308
Towing bracket device
Retrofitting a towing bracket
Description
Fig. 279
Limits and attachment points for ret-
r
ofitting a towing bracket.
SEAT recommends that towing brackets be
r
etrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-
ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-
just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-
tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership for this.
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance
specifications should always be kept in mind.
The distance between the centre of the ball
head and the road
›››
Fig. 279
D
must never
be l
ess than indicated. This also applies when
the vehicle is fully loaded, including the tech-
nically permissible maximum vertical load on
the coupling device.
Separation distances
›››
Fig. 279:
Attachment points (lower part of the vehi-
cle)
1,040 mm (41 inches)
74 mm (3 inches)
364 mm (14 inches)
247 mm (10 inches)
596 mm (23 inches)
1,097 mm (43 inches)
1,102 mm (43 inches)
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connect
ed, this may lead to malfunctions
in the entire vehicle electronic system, as
well as to accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem to the electrical connections of the tail
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
lights or any other unsuitable power sour-
ces. Only use suit
able connectors to con-
nect the trailer.
●
The towing bracket should be retrofitted
only at a specialised workshop.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-
suit
able, the trailer may separate from the
vehicle while driving. This could cause seri-
ous accidents and fatal injuries.
Note
●
Accor
ding to regulation EU2021_535 it is
not permitted to install a towing device that
cannot be removed or retracted.
●
Only use towing brackets that have been
approved by SEAT for the model in ques-
tion.
●
In some versions, the fitting of a conven-
tional towing hook solution is not recom-
mended. Please consult your Technical
Service.
309
Practical tips
Practical tips
Checking and r
efilling lev-
els
Refuelling
Refuelling
Fig. 280
Fuel tank flap with tank cap attach-
ed.
The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the
v
ehicle.
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
and locked automatically using the central
locking.
●
Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the
retainer zone.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
●
Place it in the space on the hinge of the
open flap
›››
Fig. 280.
●
Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as
the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel
supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the
nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion
chamber in the fuel tank.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
●
Close the lid.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at
›››
page 311.
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-
en in
›››
page 357.
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-
rious burns and other injuries.
●
When refuelling, turn off the engine, the
auxiliary heat
er
›››
page 168 and turn off
the ignition for safety reasons.
●
Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or
a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in
the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
●
Observe legislation governing the use,
storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-
ter in the vehicle.
●
For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-
cle. In an accident the canister could be
damaged and coul
d leak.
●
If, in exceptional circumstances, you
have to carry a spare fuel canister, please
observe the following points:
–
Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-
ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.
This could cause an explosion. Always
place the canister on the ground to fill
it.
–
Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-
ble into the spare fuel canister.
–
If the spare fuel canister is made of
metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-
tact with the canister during filling. This
helps prevent an electrostatic charge
building up.
–
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is
explosive. Risk of fatal accident!
CAUTION
●
If any fuel is spilt ont
o the vehicle, it
should be removed immediately. It could
otherwise damage the paintwork.
●
Never run the tank completely dry. The
catalytic converter can be damaged.
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause
the fuel t
o overflow if it becomes warm.
310
Checking and refilling levels
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual r
elease of the fuel tank flap. If nec-
essary, request assistance from special-
ised personnel.
Note
●
If the pump no
zzle is worn, damaged, or if
it is very small, it is possible that it will not
be able to open the protective device. Be-
fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by
turning it, try a different pump or request
specialist help.
●
If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-
ister, the protective device will not open.
One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in
slowly.
Fuel types
Identification of fuel
s
1)
Fig. 281
Identification of fuels according to
Eur
opean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/
Fuels are identified by different symbols on
the pump and on your v
ehicle's tank flap. The
identification serves to prevent confusion
when choosing the fuel.
Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-
nol). The number indicates the percent-
age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,
for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.
1
Diesel accor
ding to the EN590 standard.
The number indicates the maximum per-
centage of Biodiesel in the fuel. “B7”
means a maximum of 7% Biodiesel.
Synthetic diesel according to the
EN15940 standard.
Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed
Natural Gas.
Type of petrol
3 V
alid for: vehicles with petrol engines
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the
fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
verter and must only be run on unleaded
petrol. The petrol must comply with the
standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels
with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled
(E10)
2)
. The types of petrol are differentiated
by using the octane numbers (RON) or via
the anti-knock index (AKI).
»
2
3
4
1)
Depending on country
2)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
311
Practical tips
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or
normal 91 oct
ane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-
tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91
octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power
loss) may be used.
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at
least
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91
AKI) at least.
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or
super 95 octane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super plus 98
octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super
95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power
loss).
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
CAUTION
●
Fuel
s high percentage of ethanol, e.g.
E30 - E100 button must not be used. The
fuel system would be damaged. Exception:
vehicles with Totalflex engine
›››
page 312,
Ethanol fuel.
●
A single refuelling with leaded fuel or
other metal additives entails a permanent
deterioration of the effectiveness of the
catalytic converter.
●
Only use fuel additives that have been
approved by SEAT. The products that con-
tain substances to increase the octane rat-
ing or decrease knocking may contain met-
al additives that damage the engine and
catalytic converter. This type of products
must not be used.
●
Do not use fuels shown in the pump as
containing metals. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Risk of engine damage!
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with
an octane rating lower than the correct
grade for the engine.
Note
●
Fuel with an oct
ane rating higher than the
one required by the engine can be used.
●
In countries in which ther
e is no sulphur-
free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-
phur content fuel.
Ethanol fuel
3 V
alid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines
You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-
gines
1)
by label on the fuel tank lid with the
marking “Petrol/ethanol”.
Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with
unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-
ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high
percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-
led in the same way as petrol refuelling.
Also consider that
›››
page 311, Type of pet-
rol
Note
SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-
siv
ely with petrol every 10,000 km to de-
crease impurities that using E100 ethanol
fuel might have left in the engine.
1)
This motor is only available in some markets.
312
Checking and refilling levels
Engine management and
emissions contr
ol system
Introduction
WARNING
●
Due t
o the high temperatures reached by
the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you
should not park your vehicle near a surface
that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!
●
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the emission control system.
R
educe speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
Flashes
Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic
conv
erter.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
It lights up
Particulate filter blocked
›››
page 313.
It lights up
Fault in the petrol engine management.
Hav
e the engine checked as soon as possible by a
specialised workshop.
When the ignition is switched on, the (El
ectronic
Power Control) lights up and should go off once the
engine has started.
Note
While the indicator lamps , or ar
e
on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel
consumption may go up and the engine
might lose power.
Catalytic converter
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic
conv
erter
●
Always use unleaded petrol.
●
Never run the fuel tank dry.
●
When changing or adding engine oil, do not
exceed the necessary amount
›››
page 319,
Topping up the engine oil.
●
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary
›››
page 51.
If you should notice misfiring, uneven running
or loss of power when the car is moving, have
the vehicle inspected by a specialised work-
shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp
will light up when any of these symptoms
occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can
enter the exhaust system and escape into the
atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also
be damaged by overheating.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause an irr
egular fuel supply can cause
ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to
enter the exhaust system, which could
cause overheating and damage the cata-
lytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is
w
orking perfectly, there may be a smell of
sulphur from the gases on occasions. This
depends on the sulphur content of the fuel
used. This can quite often be avoided by
changing to another brand of fuel.
Particulate filter
The particulate filter eliminates most of the
soot fr
om the exhaust gas system. Under nor-
mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If
the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short
journeys are made continuously), it becomes
blocked with soot and the following indica-
tion is displayed to the driver: Particu-
late filter: cleaned while the vehi-
cle is moving. See Manual. The
»
313
Practical tips
particulate filter needs cleaning (regenera-
tion).
R
egeneration of the particulate filter
Requirements for the regeneration journey:
the engine is at operating temperature.
●
Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h
(31-75 mph). This increases the temperature
and burns the soot in the filter
›››
.
●
Consider the legal speed limits as well as
the r
ecommended gears.
●
End the regeneration journey once the con-
trol warning lamp has gone out.
If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes
of running in regeneration mode, have a spe-
cialised workshop repair the fault
WARNING
Always adjust your speed to suit the weath-
er conditions, r
oads, braking distance and
traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen-
eration phase. Route recommendations
should never make you disregard each
country's specific traffic regulations.
CAUTION
●
When the e
xhaust system detects that
the particulate filter is close to saturation,
the self-cleaning function of this system
recommends optimal driving for this func-
tion.
●
Due t
o the high temperatures caused by
the regeneration of the particulate filter, it
is possible that the radiator fan will acti-
vate after stopping the engine, even it its
operating temperature has not been
reached.
●
Noise, smells and high idle speeds can
occur during regeneration.
●
Always use the correct engine oil and the
correct fuel to make sure the useful life of
the particulate filter is not affected. Also
avoid making short trips all the time.
Engine compartment
W
orking in the engine compart-
ment
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scal
ding as well as the risk of accident or fire
when working in the engine compartment
(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).
Always observe the warnings listed below
and follow all general safety precautions.
The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-
tentially hazardous area
›››
.
WARNING
When work is done in the engine compart-
ment, injuries, burns, accidents and e
ven
fires can occur.
●
Switch the engine off, remove the key
from the ignition and apply the electronic
parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual
gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has
an automatic gearbox, place the selector
lever in position P. Wait for the engine to
cool down.
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam
or drips of coolant being released from the
engine compartment. Wait until no steam
or coolant can be seen before opening the
bonnet.
●
Keep children away from the engine
compartment.
●
Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-
tion on the engine compartment, as these
may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-
ant).
●
Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-
trical system, particularly at the points
where the jump leads are attached
›››
page 51. The battery could explode.
●
If working inside the engine compart-
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury.
314
Checking and refilling levels
●
Ne
ver cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant
expansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure.
●
Protect face, hands and arms by cover-
ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect
against escaping coolant and steam.
●
Always make sure you have not left any
objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in
the engine compartment.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehi-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for
securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
●
If any work has to be performed when the
engine is started or with the engine running,
there is an additional, potentially fatal,
safety risk from the rotating parts, such as
the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,
and from the high-voltage ignition system.
You should also observe the following:
–
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
–
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing
and long hair do not get trapped in ro-
tating engine parts. Danger of death.
Before starting any work remove jewel-
lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear
tight-fitting clothes.
–
Ne
ver accelerate with a gear engaged
without taking the necessary precau-
tions. The vehicle could move, even if
the handbrake is applied. Danger of
death.
●
Observe the following additional warn-
ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-
trical system is necessary:
–
Always disconnect the battery from the
on-board network.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always keep an approved fire extin-
guisher immediately available.
For the sake of the environment
●
Inspect the gr
ound underneath your vehi-
cle regularly so that any leaks are detec-
ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil
or other fluids in the area where it was
parked, have your vehicle inspected at the
workshop.
●
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-
vironment. For this reason you should make
regular checks on the ground underneath
your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a
specialised workshop.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 282
Release lever in the driver's footwell
ar
ea.
Fig. 283
Cam under the bonnet
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is r
eleased from inside the vehi-
cle.
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that
the windscreen wiper arms are in place
against the windscreen.
»
315
Practical tips
●
Open the door and pull the l
ever under the
dashboard
›››
Fig. 282
1
. The bonnet disen-
gages fr
om the locking of the protective lid
due to the effect of a spring.
●
Lift the bonnet using the opening lever
›››
Fig. 283 (arrow) and open the bonnet fully.
The bonnet remains open thanks to the pres-
surised gas spring.
Closing the bonnet
●
To close the bonnet, pull it down to over-
come the gas strut pressure.
●
Allow the bonnet to fall into the lock holder
locking component from a distance of around
20 cm. Don’t push it!
If the bonnet does not close, do not press
downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
mentioned above.
WARNING
Make sure that the bonnet is properly
cl
osed. If it opens when driving, it can
cause an accident.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the
windscr
een wiper arms, only open it when
the windscreen wipers are in place against
the windscreen.
Checking levels
Fig. 284
Diagram for the location of the various el-
ements.
316
Checking and refilling levels
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluids in the v
ehicle must be checked. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
›››
page 320
Engine oil level dipstick
›››
page 319
Engine oil filler cap
›››
page 319
Brake fluid reservoir
›››
page 322
Vehicle battery (underneath a cover)
›››
page 324
Windscreen washer reservoir
›››
page 323
Note
The layout of parts may vary depending on
the engine
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Engine oil
Gener
al notes
Fig. 285
In the engine compartment: engine
oil l
abel
Fig. 286
In the engine compartment: area
wher
e the engine oil label is located
Key to the
›
››
Fig. 285:
Information about the engine oil stand-
ard.
Information about engine oil viscosity.
A
B
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year r
ound.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
tial for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
For vehicles with an engine oil label
If the engine oil has to be topped up, use one
of the oils shown on the label
›››
Fig. 285. The
label with the prescribed standard is located
at the front of the engine compartment
›››
Fig. 286
1
. If you use the recommended
engine oil, you can t
op up the oil as often as
necessary.
For vehicles without an engine oil label
Contact a specialised workshop or SEAT offi-
cial service for information about the corre-
sponding standard.
If the engine oil level is too low
If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
ble, in the event of an emergency you can
change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L
of the next oil until the next oil change:
Petrol and CNG engines: VW 504 00,
ACEA C3 or API SN standard.
»
–
317
Practical tips
SEAT recommends changing the oil at a spe-
cialised w
orkshop. SEAT recommends an
Official SEAT Service.
SEAT recommends the use of engine oils ap-
proved according to the appropriate VW
standard. Use of engine oils that do not meet
these quality requirements can cause engine
damage.
SEAT recommends the use of Original SEAT
Spare Part engine oils.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
CAUTION
Take the following into account if you have
r
efilled with an engine oil different to those
specified in the aforementioned standards,
or by your SEAT technical service centre:
●
There is no way of completely avoiding
the danger of causing damage to the en-
gine and particulate filter.
●
You can continue driving with the vehicle
if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine
oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon
as possible and request an oil change. Oth-
erwise, there is a danger of engine dam-
age.
●
If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of
engine oil, drive with the engine at low load
levels and within the medium RPM range as
a maximum. Do not driv
e at more than 80
km/h and do not travel more than 300 km
(approximately). Go to a specialised work-
shop as soon as possible and request an oil
change. Otherwise, there is a danger of en-
gine damage.
●
You are responsible for the risk of possi-
ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust
system). If in doubt, do not start the engine
and request assistance from the technical
service centre.
●
Do not start the engine if you have top-
ped up with a fluid other than engine oil.
Request assistance from the technical
service centre. Danger of engine damage!
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conf
orms to the corre-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
Warning lamp
Flashes red
Do not carry on driving!
Engine oil pressure too low.
Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.
If the warning lamp fl
ashes although the oil level
is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at
idle speed! Seek professional assistance.
It lights up yellow
Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.
R
eplace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to
do so
›››
page 319.
It flashes yellow
Fault in the oil level sensor.
Hav
e the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-
til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time
you refuel.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
318
Checking and refilling levels
Checking the engine oil level
Fig. 287
Engine oil dipstick.
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of
the oil.
Check the oil l
evel
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the
operating temperature is reached and then
stop.
–
Wait for about two minutes.
–
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
in as far as it will go.
–
Then pull it out once more and check the oil
level
›››
Fig. 287. Top up with engine oil if
necessary.
The oil must leave a mark between zones
A
and
C
. It can never go above zone
A
.
●
Z
one
A
: do not add oil.
●
Zone
B
: you can add oil but keep the level
in that z
one.
●
Zone
C
: add oil until zone
B
.
Depending on ho
w you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine com-
par
tment or on the engine must be carried
out cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compart-
ment, always observe the safety warnings
›››
page 314.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above area
A
, do not start
the engine
. This could result in damage to
the engine and catalytic converter. Con-
tact a Technical Service.
Topping up the engine oil
Fig. 288
In the engine compartment: Engine
oil fill
er cap.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the w
arnings
›››
in Working in the engine
compar
tment on page 314.
Topping up engine oil
●
Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening
›››
Fig. 288.
●
Carefully add oil in small quantities (no
more than 0.5 l).
●
To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you
add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes
and recheck the oil level
›››
page 319.
●
If necessary, add some more oil.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
›››
Fig. 287
B
, unscrew the engine oil filler
cap car
efully
›››
.
»
319
Practical tips
The position of the oil filler opening is shown
in the corr
esponding engine compartment il-
lustration
›››
page 316.
Engine oil specification
›››
page 317.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes int
o contact with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above area
›
››
Fig. 287
A
,
do not st
art the engine. This could result in
damage to the engine and catalytic con-
verter. Contact a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above zone
›
››
Fig. 287
A
. Otherwise oil can be drawn
in thr
ough the crankcase breather and leak
into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-
tem.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conf
orms to the corre-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
Engine oil change
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed by a T
echnical Service.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
hav
e the specialist knowledge required!
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings
›››
page 314.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
may cause burn injuries.
●
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,
such as acid burns, caused by splashes of
oil.
●
When removing the oil drain plug with
your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to
help prevent oil from running down your
arm.
●
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
●
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of
children.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil.
This coul
d result in engine damage. Any
damage caused by the use of such addi-
tives would not be covered by the factory
warranty.
For the sake of the environment
●
W
e recommend that you change the en-
gine oil and the filter at a technical service
centre.
●
Never pour oil down drains or into the
ground.
●
Use a suitable container when draining
the used oil. It must be large enough to hold
all the engine oil.
Cooling system
Cool
ant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the f
actory with a specially treated mixture of
water and at least 40 % of the additive
G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture
gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy
parts of the engine cooling system against
corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-
siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-
ant.
To protect the cooling system, the percent-
age of additive must always be at least 40 %,
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
tection is not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is
necessary, the proportion of additive may be
320
Checking and refilling levels
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifr
eeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
additive G12evo for optimal protection
against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13
(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-
tection again corrosion and should be avoi-
ded.
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the
cool
ant system, the engine may fail lead-
ing to serious damage.
●
Ensure that the percentage of additive is
correct for the lowest expected ambient
temperature in the zone in which the vehi-
cle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very
low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-
cle would be immobilised.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be
mix
ed with coolants which are not ap-
proved by SEAT.
●
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not
purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-
cates that the G12evo additive has been
mixed with an inadequate coolant. The
cool
ant must be changed as soon as possi-
ble if this is the case!
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate
the envir
onment. If any fluids are spilled,
they should be collected and correctly dis-
posed of, with respect to the environment.
Refilling coolant
Fig. 289 In the engine compartment: marking
on cool
ant expansion tank.
Fig. 290 Engine compartment: coolant expan-
sion t
ank cap.
The coolant tank is located in the engine
compartment
›
››
page 316.
Top up coolant when the level is below the
(minimum) mark.
Checking coolant level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be between the
marks
›››
Fig. 289. When the engine is hot, it
may be slightly above the upper mark.
Topping up coolant
–
Allow the engine to cool down.
»
321
Practical tips
–
Co
ver the coolant expansion tank cap with
a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left
›››
.
–
Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-
ant in the e
xpansion tank, otherwise you
could damage the engine. If there is no
coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-
tinue driving. You should obtain professional
assistance
›››
.
–
If there is still some coolant in the expansion
t
ank, top up to the upper mark.
–
Top up with coolant until the level becomes
stable.
–
Screw the cap back on correctly.
If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-
cialised workshop to have the cooling system
examined.
WARNING
●
The cooling syst
em is under pressure. Do
not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-
sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
burns!
●
Store the antifreeze in its original con-
tainer and keep it out of reach of children.
●
If working inside the engine compart-
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury.
CAUTION
If you run out of coolant in the expansion
t
ank, park the car in a safe place and do
not continue driving. Obtain technical as-
sistance.
Brake fluid
Check and r
efill the brake fluid
Fig. 291 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-
erv
oir cap.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment
›
››
page 316.
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the
and markings.
However, if the brake fluid level goes down
noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
mark, there may be a leak in the brake
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning
light on the instrument panel display monitors
the brake fluid level
›››
page 87.
Changing brake fluid
We recommend that you have the brake fluid
changed by a Technical Service.
WARNING
If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-
bl
e/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys-
tem may fail or braking power may be re-
duced.
●
Check the brake system and the brake
fluid level regularly!
●
When the brake fluid is used and brakes
are subjected to extreme braking forces,
bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-
tem. These bubbles can significantly re-
duce braking power, notably increasing
braking distance, and could result in the to-
tal failure of the brake system.
●
Be sure to always use the correct brake
fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly
meets the VW 501 14 standard.
●
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake
fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official
Service. If none is available, use only high-
quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925
322
Checking and refilling levels
CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards
FMVSS 1
16 DOT 4.
●
The replacement brake fluid must be
new.
●
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
original container in a safe place out of
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
CAUTION
Brake fluid should not come into contact
with the v
ehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.
For the sake of the environment
Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.
Coll
ect any spilt service fluids and allow a
professional to dispose of them.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Checking the l
evel of the window
washer tank and refilling it
Fig. 292
In the engine compartment: blue cap
of the windscr
een washer tank.
The window washer tank is in the engine
compartment
›
››
page 316.
Check the water level in the windscreen
washer reservoir regularly and top up as re-
quired.
The container for the windscreen washer
contains the cleaning fluid for the wind-
screen, the rear window and the headlight
washer system.
●
Open the bonnet
›››
page 314.
●
The window washer tank is marked with the
symbol on the cap.
●
Check there is enough windscreen water in
the reservoir.
Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-
screen and headlights. We recommend that
you always add a product to the windscreen
washer fluid.
Recommended windscreen wipers
●
For the hottest seasons we recommend
summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-
tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:
1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-
ter).
●
All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.
Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,
up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2
parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of
mixture in the washer fluid tank.
The capacity of the window washer tank can
be found in
›››
page 357.
CAUTION
If the water from the windscreen washer
does not cont
ain enough anti-freeze, it may
freeze on the windscreen and rear window,
reducing forward and rear visibility.
●
In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
contains enough anti-freeze.
●
In cold conditions, you should not use the
windscreen wiper system unless you have
»
323
Practical tips
warmed the windscreen with the ventila-
tion syst
em. The antifreeze could freeze on
the windscreen and reduce visibility.
CAUTION
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
simil
ar additives with the windscreen wash-
er water. A greasy layer may be formed on
the windscreen which will impair visibility.
●
Use clean water with a window cleaner
recommended by SEAT.
●
If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
the water in the reservoir.
CAUTION
●
Do not mix cl
eaning products recommen-
ded by SEAT with other products. This
could lead to flocculation and may block
the windscreen washer jets.
●
When topping up service fluids, make ab-
solutely certain that you fill the fluids into
the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-
ids could cause serious malfunctions and
engine damage!
●
Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-
duces visibility through the windscreen,
and leads to loss of visibility in headlights
in models with headlight washer.
12-volt battery
Gener
al information
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment and is almost maint
enance-free. It is
checked as part of the Inspection Service.
Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean
and have the correct tightening torque, espe-
cially in summer and winter.
All work on batteries requires specialist
knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official
Service or a workshop specialising in batter-
ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!
The battery must not be opened. Never try
to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-
erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-
tery that could cause an explosion.
Battery warning indications
Wear protective goggles.
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-
t
ective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any
splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are
pr
ohibited.
The battery should only be charged in a well-
v
entilated zone. Risk of explosion!
Keep children away from acid and the battery.
Always follow the instruction manual.
Disconnecting the battery
The batt
ery should only be disconnected in
exceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
connected, some of the vehicle's functions
are lost. These functions will require resetting
after the battery is reconnected.
When disconnecting the battery from the ve-
hicle on-board network, disconnect first the
negative cable and then the positive cable.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm before you
disconnect the battery. Otherwise the alarm
will be triggered.
Winter conditions
During the winter, the starting power may be
reduced, and if necessary, the battery should
be charged
›››
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury
and chemical burns as w
ell as the risk of
accident or fire when working on the bat-
tery and the electrical system:
●
Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,
skin and clothing from acid and particles
containing lead.
●
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection. Do
not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid
through the vents.
●
Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on
the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy
324
Checking and refilling levels
solution, and rinse off with plenty of water.
If acid is s
wallowed by mistake, consult a
doctor immediately.
●
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking
are prohibited. When handling cables and
electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks
and electrostatic charge. Never short the
battery terminals. High-energy sparks can
cause injury.
●
A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
leased when the battery is under charge.
The batteries should be charged in a well-
ventilated room only.
●
Keep children away from acid and bat-
teries.
●
Before working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical devices. The negative ca-
ble on the battery must be disconnected.
When a light bulb is changed, you need on-
ly switch off the light.
●
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-
locking the vehicle before you disconnect
the battery! The alarm will otherwise be
triggered.
●
When disconnecting the battery from the
vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
●
Switch off all electrical devices before
reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first
the positive cable and then the negative
cable. Never reverse the polarity of the
connections. This could cause an electrical
fir
e.
●
Never charge a frozen battery, or one
which has thawed. This could result in ex-
plosions and chemical burns. Always re-
place a battery which has frozen. A flat
battery can also freeze at temperatures
close to 0°C (+32°F).
●
Ensure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the battery.
●
Never use a defective battery. This could
cause an explosion. Replace a damaged
battery immediately.
CAUTION
●
Do not e
xpose the battery to direct sun-
light over a long period of time, as the in-
tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the
battery housing.
●
If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-
ditions for a long period, protect the bat-
tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be
damaged.
Warning lamp
It lights up red
Alternator fault.
The control lamp lights up when the ignition is
s
witched on. It should go out when the engine
has started running.
If the control lamp lights up while driving,
the alternator is no longer charging the bat-
tery. You should immediately drive to the
nearest specialised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment
that is not absolutely necessary because this
will drain the battery.
Checking the battery electrolyte
level
Fig. 293 Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt
batt
ery (schematic representation).
The electrolyte level should be checked reg-
ul
arly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-
tries and in older batteries.
»
325
Practical tips
●
Open the bonnet and then lift the co
ver
that protects the front part of the battery
›››
in Working in the engine compart-
ment on page 314.
●
Check the colour display in the "magic eye"
on the t
op of the battery.
●
If there are air bubbles in the window, tap
the window gently until they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the
corresponding engine compartment diagram
›››
page 316.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on
the charge state and electrolyte level of the
battery.
There are two different colours:
The battery's electrolyte
level is too low. Go to a specialised work-
shop to have the battery checked and
replaced if necessary.
The battery’s electrolyte level is cor-
rect.
Charging or changing the battery
If you often drive short distances or if the ve-
hicl
e is not driven for long periods, the battery
should be checked by a specialised work-
shop between the scheduled services.
Yellow or colourless:
Black:
If the battery has discharged and you have
problems starting the vehicle, the battery
might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-
ommend you have the vehicle battery
checked by a Technical Service where it will
be re-charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a
specialised workshop only, as batteries using
special technology have been installed and
they must be charged in a controlled environ-
ment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the
conditions of its location and has special
safety features. If the battery must be re-
placed, consult a technical service for infor-
mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the
size and maintenance, performance and
safety requirements of the new battery in
your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT
recommends you have the battery replaced
by a technical service.
Start-Stop systems (
›››
page 243) are equip-
ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must
only be replaced with a battery of the same
specifications.
Automatic disconnection of devices
The intelligent vehicle electrical system auto-
matically implements a range of measures to
prevent the battery from discharging when
high demands are made on it:
●
the idling speed is increased so that the al-
ternator provides more electricity.
●
where necessary, the power of the most
powerful devices is reduced or even com-
pletely disconnected.
●
On starting the engine, the power supply
from the 12-volt power sockets and the ciga-
rette lighter may be interrupted for a short
time.
The on-board management programme
cannot always prevent the battery from run-
ning flat. For example, if the ignition is left on
for a long period with the engine off or if the
side lights or parking lights are left on while
the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
●
Al
ways use only maintenance free bat-
teries that do not run flat alone and whose
properties, specifications and size corre-
spond to the standard battery. The specifi-
cations are indicated on the battery case.
●
Before starting any work on the batteries,
you must read and observe the warnings
›››
in General information on page 324.
326
Wheels
For the sake of the environment
Batt
eries contain toxic substances such
as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be
disposed of appropriately and must not be
disposed of with ordinary household waste.
Wheels
Wheel
s and tyres
Introduction
The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard
with anti-punct
ure technology tyres (Conti-
Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of
up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a pro-
tective layer inside the tread.
The inclusion of this technology means that
there is no type of spare wheel included in
the vehicle's equipment.
SEAT recommend that all work on tyres and
wheels is carried out by a specialised work-
shop. These workshops have the necessary
special tools and replacement parts, trained
personnel and facilities for disposing of the
old tyres while respecting the environment.
SEAT recommends taking your car in for
technical service.
General notes
–
When driving with ne
w tyres, be especially
careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).
–
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as
possible at a right angle to the obstacle.
–
Check from time to time if the tyres are
damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or
dents). Remove any foreign objects em-
bedded in the treads.
–
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately.
–
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
–
Replace any missing valve caps as soon as
possible.
–
Mark the wheels before taking them off so
that they rotate in the same direction when
put back.
–
When removed, the wheels or tyres should
be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
Low profile tyres
Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger
wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.
Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres, for instance due to
strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and
kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important
›››
page 330.
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive
with special care when driving on roads in
poor condition.
Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.
»
327
Practical tips
If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-
pact or hav
e been damaged, have a special-
ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-
essary to change the tyre.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the
car pulling to one side, this may indicate
that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce
speed immediately if there is any reason to
suspect that damage may have occurred. In-
spect the tyres for damage. If no external
damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully
to the nearest specialised workshop and
have the car inspected.
Foreign objects inserted in the tyre
●
Do not remove foreign bodies if they have
penetrated through the tyre wall!
●
If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility
system, where necessary seal the damaged
tyre as shown in section
›››
page 42. Use a
specialised workshop for repair or replace-
ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread
wraps around the foreign body and provision-
ally seals the tyre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-
ways note the direction of rotation indicated
when mounting the wheel. This makes sure
that optimal use is made of tyre properties in
terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise
and wear.
Subsequent fitting of accessories
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or
wheel trims, we recommend that you consult
with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice
regarding current techniques.
Speed symbols
The speed rating indicates the maximum
speed permitted for the tyres.
max. 150 km/h (93 mph)
max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
max. 170 km/h (106 mph)
max. 180 km/h (112 mph)
max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
max. 200 km/h (124 mph)
max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
max. 270 km/h (168 mph)
max. 300 km/h (186 mph)
P
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
Z
W
Y
Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for
tyres with a maximum authorised speed
above 240 km/h (149 mph).
WARNING
●
Ne
w tyres do not have maximum grip dur-
ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly
carefully to avoid possible accidents.
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. This
may cause an accident.
●
If you notice unusual vibrations or if the
vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop
the vehicle immediately and check the
tyres.
●
Never use old tyres or those with an un-
known history of use.
New wheels and tyres
It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced
by a specialised w
orkshop. There they have
the required knowledge, the special tools and
the corresponding spare parts.
●
Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you
have installed new tyres, drive the first 500
km carefully and at a moderate speed.
●
All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of
the same type, size (rolling circumference)
and, if possible, tread pattern.
●
When changing tyres, do not change just
one; change at least two on the same axle.
328
Wheels
●
If you w
ant to equip your vehicle with a
combination tyres and rims that are different
to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-
cialised workshop before purchasing them
›››
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for
your v
ehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-
mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity
or COC document
1)
). The vehicle documen-
tation varies depending on the country of res-
idence.
If the type of spare wheel is different form the
normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter
tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare
wheel should only be used temporarily in the
event of a puncture, and the vehicle should
be driven with care. Refit the normal road
wheel as soon as possible.
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels
must be fitted with tyres of the same brand,
type and tread so that the traction system is
not damaged by a difference in the number
of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event
of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the
same perimeter as normal tyres should be
used.
Manufacturing date
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the
wheel):
DOT ... 2218 ...
it means, for example, that the tyre was man-
ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.
WARNING
●
Use only combinations of t
yres and rims,
as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by
SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-
aged, causing an accident.
●
For technical reasons it is not possible to
use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases
not even wheels from the same vehicle
model should be used.
●
Always ensure that the tyres you have
chosen have adequate clearance. When
selecting replacement tyres, do not rely
entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on
the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-
fer significantly depending on the manu-
facturer. Lack of clearance can damage
the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-
danger road safety. Accident hazard!
●
Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in
an emergency, and drive with due care.
●
The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-
ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-
hibited use can cause accidents or can
damage your v
ehicle.
●
If decorative hubcaps are subsequently
fitted, make sure that they allow enough air
in to cool the braking system. Accident haz-
ard!
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the l
aws in the country concerned.
Note
●
A SEAT Service Centr
e should be consul-
ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of
different sizes to those originally fitted by
SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about
the combinations allowed between the
front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
●
Never mount used tyres if you are not
sure of their “previous history”.
1)
COC = certificat
e of conformity.
329
Practical tips
Tyre life
Fig. 294
Position of tyre pressure specification
pl
ate
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-
ing habits will incr
ease the useful life of your
tyres.
●
Check tyre pressure at least once a month,
and also prior to any long trip.
●
The tyre pressure should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
pressure of warm tyres.
●
Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-
ried by the vehicle
›››
Fig. 294.
●
Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
●
Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from
time to time.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted at
the factory is shown on a label and is valid for
summer and winter tyres. This label
›››
Fig. 294 is either on the driver door strut or
inside the fuel tank flap.
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-
duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-
ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-
rect inflation pressures are very important,
especially at high speeds.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-
ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the
vehicle is going to carry the maximum load,
the tyre pressure should be increased to the
maximum value indicated on the sticker
›››
Fig. 294.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre
wear.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, certain circumstances may lead to
imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
brations in the steering wheel.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,
as they otherwise cause excessive wear on
steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-
ficial Service.
WARNING
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and
t
yres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-
ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-
out.
●
The driver is responsible for ensuring that
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-
ted to the right pressure. The recommen-
ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label
›››
Fig. 294.
●
Check tyre pressures regularly and en-
sure they are maintained at the pressures
indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low
could cause overheating, resulting in tread
detachment or even burst tyres.
●
When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure
should be that indicated on the label
›››
Fig. 294.
●
Regularly check the cold inflation pres-
sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the
330
Wheels
tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they
ar
e cold.
●
Regularly check your tyres for damage
and wear.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speed or loads specified for the type of
tyre fitted on your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
Tread wear indicators
Fig. 295
Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.
Fig. 296 Interchanging tyres.
Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be
f
ound on the base of the original tyre treads,
ordered at regular intervals and running
across the tread
›››
Fig. 295. The letters "TWI"
or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark
the position of the wear indicators.
The minimum permitted profile depth
1)
have
been reached when the tyres have worn
down to the wear indicators. Replace the
tyres with new ones
›››
.
Changing wheel
s around
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
the wheels should be changed round from
time to time according to the system
›››
Fig. 296. The useful life of all the tyres will
then be about the same time.
WARNING
The tyres must be replaced at the latest
when the tr
ead is worn down to the tread
wear indicators. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
Particularly in difficult driving conditions
such as wet or icy roads. It is important that
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and
be approximately the same on the tyres of
both the front and the rear axles.
●
The scant driving safety due to insuffi-
cient tread depth is particularly evident in
vehicle handling, when there is a risk of
“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water
and when driving through corners, and
braking is also adversely affected.
●
The speed has to be adapted according-
ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control
over the vehicle.
Wheel nuts
The wheel bolts ar
e matched to the rims.
When installing different wheels (for instance
alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is
important to use the correct wheel bolts with
the right length and correctly shaped bolt
»
1)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
331
Practical tips
heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-
cur
ely and that the brake system functions
correctly.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi-
ly.
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-
theft wheel bolts
›››
page 46.
WARNING
Wheel nuts should never be greased or
oil
ed.
●
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the
wheel.
●
If the prescribed torque of the wheel
bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst
the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If
the tightening torque is too high, the wheel
bolts and threads can be damaged.
CAUTION
See
›
››
page 49to find out the recommen-
ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for
steel and alloy rims.
Winter tyres
–
Winter tyres must be fitted on all f
our
wheels.
–
Only use winter tyres that are approved for
your vehicle.
–
Please note that the maximum permissible
speed for winter tyres may be lower than
for summer tyres.
–
Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
fective when the tread is worn down.
–
After fitting the wheels you must always
check the tyre pressures. When doing so,
take into account the correct tyre pressures
listed on the rear of the front left door frame
›››
page 330.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-
siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-
sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
equipped with wide section tyres or with
high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on
the sidewall).
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents
(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC
1)
).
The vehicle documentation varies depending
on the country of residence.
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The performance of winter tyres is also se-
verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is
still much deeper than 4 mm.
A code letter indicating the speed limit is
stamped on all winter tyres
›››
page 328.
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
must have an appropriate sticker attached
so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-
ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-
ice and specialised workshop. Please note
the regulations to this effect in your country.
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable
240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres
with the letter V is subject to technical re-
strictions; the maximum permissible speed
for your vehicle may be significantly lower.
The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-
pends directly on the maximum axle weights
for your car and on the listed weight rating of
the tyres being used.
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to
check the maximum speed which is permissi-
ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on
the basis of this information.
1)
COC = certificat
e of conformity.
332
Wheels
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted
f
or the winter tyres fitted on your car can
cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-
trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
When winter is over, change back to sum-
mer t
yres at an appropriate moment. In
temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-
ance will be improved if summer tyres are
used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises
while driving will all be reduced.
Note
All-weather tyres can also be used instead
of wint
er tyres. Please note that only winter
tyres with the symbol may be fitted in
some countries where winter tyres are
mandatory.
Snow chains
Snow chains must only be fitted t
o the front
wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel
drive.
●
Check that they are correctly seated after
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
turer's fitting instructions.
●
Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
If there is a danger of being trapped de-
spite having mounted the chains, it is best to
disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
›››
page 287, Connecting and disconnect-
ing the ASR.
Snow chains will improve braking ability as
well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
combination.
Tyres Wheel rim Chains
205/60 R16 6.5Jx16 ET33 Max. link 15 mm
Other dimensions do not allow chains
Remove any central wheel trims and the rim
ring bef
ore fitting snow chains.
WARNING
The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted
chains coul
d lead to serious accidents and
damage.
●
Always the appropriate snow chains.
●
Observe the fitting instructions provided
by the snow chain manufacturer.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speeds when driving with snow chains.
CAUTION
●
R
emove the snow chains to drive on
roads without snow. Otherwise they will im-
pair vehicle handling, damage the tyres
and wear out very quickly.
●
Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-
ed if the chains come into direct contact
with them. SEAT recommends the use of
covered snow chains.
Tyre pressure monitor sys-
t
em
Control lamp
Blinks or lights up
The tyre pressure of a wheel has dropped considera-
bly compar
ed to the pressure set by the driver.
Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking!
Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any dam-
aged tyres.
System fault
Consult a specialised w
orkshop if the tyre pressure is
correct and the lamp remains lit after switching the
ignition off and back on again.
Several control and warning lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on while the function is verified. They will
switch off after a few seconds.
»
333
Practical tips
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Tyre pressure monitor indicator
Fig. 297 Centre console: tyre pressure loss in-
dicat
or button.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator compares
wheel r
evolutions and, with this information,
the tread of each wheel using the ABS sen-
sors.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator warns the
driver if it detects a considerable drop in tyre
pressure of one or several tyres while driving.
Loss of tyre pressure will be indicated by the
indicator as well as an audible warning
and sometimes a text message on the instru-
ment panel display.
Wheel tread change
The wheel diameter changes when:
●
Tyre pressure is changed manually.
●
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
●
The tyre structure is damaged.
●
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a
load.
●
The wheels on an axle are subject to a
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).
●
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
●
The wheel on one axle is changed.
There may be a delay in the reaction of the
tyre pressure monitoring indicator or it may
not indicate anything under certain circum-
stances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or
unpaved roads, or when driving with snow
chains).
Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in-
dicator
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni-
toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the
same, for example, when the front and rear
wheels are swapped.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press and hold down the
›››
Fig. 297
button until an audible signal is heard.
When driving, the system self-calibrates the
tyre pressure provided by the driver and the
wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied
speeds the programmed values are collected
and monitored.
With the wheels under very heavy loads, the
tyre pressure must be increased to the total
recommended tyre pressure before calibra-
tion
›››
Fig. 294.
If the tyre monitor system button is pressed
down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
WARNING
When the tyres are inflated at different
pr
essures or at a pressure that is too low
then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a
loss of control of the vehicle and a serious
or fatal accident.
●
If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-
mediately and avoid any sudden turning or
braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,
and check the tyre pressure and status.
●
The tyre monitoring system can only op-
erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-
ted to the correct pressure when cold.
●
If a tyre has not been punctured and it
does not have to be changed immediately,
drive to the nearest specialised workshop
at a moderate speed and have the tyre
checked and inflated to the correct pres-
sure.
334
Wheels
WARNING
Incorrect use of the tyre pressure monitor-
ing indicat
or set button could result in the
indicator giving incorrect warnings or pre-
vent it from indicating the danger caused
by very low tyre pressure
›››
Fig. 297.
Note
●
Driving f
or the first time with new tyres at
a high speed can cause them to slightly ex-
pand, which could then produce an air
pressure warning.
●
Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring
system. Regularly check your tyres to en-
sure that the tyre pressure is correct and
that the tyres are not damaged due to
puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.
Remove objects from the tyres only when
they have not pierced the tyres.
●
The tyre pressure monitoring indicator
does not function when there is a fault in
the ESC or ABS
›››
page 286.
●
An incorrect warning may be given when
snow chains are in use because the chains
increase the tread of the wheel.
335
Maintenance
Maintenance
SEAT Maint
enance Pro-
gramme
Service intervals
Service work and the Digital Main-
tenance Plan
Log of services performed (“Digital Main-
t
enance Plan”)
The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-
shop records Service receipts in a central
system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-
mentation of the service history, it is possible
to reproduce the services performed any
time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service
receipt after every service carried out con-
taining all the services carried out on the sys-
tem.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is
replaced with a current one.
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-
able in some markets. In this case, your
SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-
rent documentation of the work.
Service works
In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT
authorised service or specialised workshop
documents the following information:
●
When each one of the services was carried
out.
●
Whether a specific repair has been sugges-
ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near
future.
●
If you have expressed a special request for
the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will
write the work order.
●
The components or fluids that were
changed.
●
The date of the next service.
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until
the next inspection. This information is docu-
mented in all checks performed.
The type and the volume of the service may
vary from one vehicle to another. A special-
ised workshop will be able to provide specific
information on the jobs for your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
f
ormed and if the service intervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic cause an accident and severe in-
juries.
●
Mak
e sure that any repairs are carried
out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-
alised workshop.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
t
o the vehicle due to insufficient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Note
Regular services on the vehicle not only
maint
ain its value, but also its correct oper-
ation and road safety. For this reason, con-
duct the services in accordance with SEAT
guidelines.
Set Service or Flexible Service In-
t
ervals
Services are classified as oil change service
and inspection. The service int
erval display
on the instrument panel display serves as a
reminder of the next service.
Depending on the features, the engine and
the conditions of use of the car, either the
Fixed service or the Flexible service will be
applied for an oil change service..
336
SEAT Maintenance Programme
How to know which type of service needs
t
o his vehicle
●
Check the tables below:
Oil change service
a)
PR No.
Type of
service
Service interval
QI1
Fixed
Every 5000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI2
Every 7500 km or aft
er
1 year
b)
QI3
Every 10000 km or aft
er
1 year
b)
QI4
Every 15000 km or aft
er
1 year
b)
QI6 Flexible
According to the service in-
t
erval display
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
b)
Whatever happens first.
Inspection Service
a)
According to the service interval display
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
P
articular characteristics of the Flexible
Service
Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil
change service only has to be performed
when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when
you have to carry out this service, take into
account the individual conditions of use and
personal driving style. A major component of
the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-
stead of conventional engine oil.
Bear in mind the information about the speci-
fications of the engine oil according to the
VW standard
›››
page 317.
If you do not want to the flexible service
you can select the fixed service However,
a fixed service may affect service costs
The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.
Service interval display
At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-
ted by the service interval display on the in-
strument panel display
›››
page 83.
The service interval display gives information
for service dates that involve an engine oil
change or an inspection. When the time for
the corresponding service comes, additional
work required, such as the change of brake
fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.
Information about the terms of use
The service intervals and groups are usually
based on normal conditions of use.
If
, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-
verse conditions of use, some of the work
must be carried out before the next service
period or even between service intervals.
Conditions of use adverse include:
●
The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
●
Frequent short trips.
●
Letting the engine idle for a long period of
time, as in the case of taxis.
●
Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.
●
Frequent driving with a trailer (depending
on equipment).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a
lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in winter.
This applies especially for the following
parts (depending on equipment):
●
Dust and pollen filter
●
Air Care allergen filter
●
Air filter
●
Toothed chain
●
Particulate filter
●
Engine oil
The Service Advisor of your specialised
workshop will gladly inform you about the
need of performing service work between
normal service intervals, always considering
the conditions of use of your vehicle.
»
337
Maintenance
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
f
ormed and if the service intervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic and cause accidents and severe
injuries.
●
Have the services conducted at author-
ised SEAT services or specialised work-
shops.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
t
o the vehicle due to insufficient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Service sets
Sets of services include all the maint
enance
works needed to ensure the safety and the
smooth running of the vehicle (depending on
the conditions of use and the features of
the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or
operating fluids). Maintenance services are
divided into inspection and review services.
Consult the details of the jobs required for
your vehicle at:
●
Your SEAT authorised service
●
Your specialised workshop
Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-
opment of components) the sets of services
may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or
specialised workshop is always receiving up-
dates in time.
Additional service offers
Approved spare parts
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-
ceiv
ed for their vehicles and approved by
SEAT S.A., with a special emphasis on safety.
These parts correspond exactly to the manu-
facturer's requirements in terms of design,
accuracy of the measurements and materi-
als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been
conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this
reason, we always recommend the use of
Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT S.A. cannot
be held liable for the safety and suitability of
parts from other manufacturers.
Approved spare parts
Approved spare parts, following the manu-
f
acturer's requirements, are an additional
service to you, offering the possibility of re-
placing complete sets, such as: light engine,
gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical
components, etc.
These parts are, approved parts, and are the
same as the factory parts, which are also ap-
proved spare parts.
Original accessories
We recommend you only use SEAT Original
Accessories and SEAT appr
oved accessories
for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and
suitability of these accessories have been in-
spected specifically for this type of vehicle.
SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and
suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
SEAT Service Mobility
Since the moment you purchase your SEAT
v
ehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits
and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.
For the first two years after the purchase,
your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-
ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-
ditional costs.
If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-
od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as
you carry out the recommended Inspection
and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-
ised Service.
338
Vehicle conservation
If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a
f
ault or an accident, our assistance services
will help you keep moving.
Take into account that the SEAT Mobility
Service differs depending on the country in
which the vehicle was purchased. For further
information ask your SEAT dealership or the
SEAT website in your country.
Warranty
Fault-free operation warranty
SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect
condition of ne
w vehicles. Check the pur-
chase agreement or complementary addi-
tional documentation provided by your Tech-
nical Service to see the conditions and the
terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-
mation in this regard in your SEAT Official
Service.
Vehicle conservation
Maint
enance and cleaning
Basic observations
Regular and careful care helps to maintain
the v
alue of your vehicle. In addition, it may
become a prerequisite to demand the war-
ranty in the event of corrosion damage and
deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-
work.
Specialised workshops have the necessary
care products. Please follow the instructions
for application on the packaging.
WARNING
●
Cl
eaning products and other materials
used for car care can be damaging to your
health if misused.
●
Always keep care products in a safe
place, out of the reach of children. Danger
of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
●
When pur
chasing car care products,
chose products that are compatible with
the environment.
●
The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste.
Washing the vehicle
The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.
r
emains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin
or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the
more damage it can cause to the surface.
High temperatures, for instance strong sun-
light, further intensify the damage.
Before washing the car, soften the dirt using
plenty of water.
To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird
droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and
a microfibre cloth.
Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-
ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.
High pressure cleaning equipment
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
structions for the equipment. This applies
particularly to the operating pressure and the
distance between the spraying water. Do not
aim the jet directly to the side window gas-
kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sunroof;
the same applies to tyres, rubber hoses,
soundproofing material, sensors or camera
lenses. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm.
Do not remove snow and ice with a high-
pressure cleaner.
»
339
Maintenance
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out
in a dir
ect stream or one that has a rotating
jet for forcing off dirt.
The water temperature must not exceed
60°C.
Automatic car washes
Spray the vehicle before starting the car
wash.
Make sure that the windows and the panor-
amic sunroof are closed and the windscreen
wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-
structions of the car wash tunnel operator,
especially if your vehicle has detachable
parts.
Use of car washes without brushes if possible.
Washing by hand
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a
soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-
ing products that do not contain solvents.
Washing vehicles with a matte paint by
hand
To prevent damage to the vehicle when
washing it, first remove the thicker dust and
dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and
fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner
for matte paint.
Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To
avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do
not apply too much pressure.
Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with
a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-
bre cloth.
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water
and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of
water with a leather cloth.
WARNING
●
Only w
ash the vehicle with the ignition
switched off or according to the specifica-
tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Acci-
dent hazard!
●
When cleaning the underbody or the in-
side of the wheel arches, protect yourself
from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of
cut!
●
After cleaning the brakes could act more
slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice
on the brake discs and pads. Accident haz-
ard! In this case the brakes should be dried
by pressing the brake pedal several times.
CAUTION
●
Bef
ore washing the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them
from being damaged. The electric folding
exterior mirrors should only be folded/un-
folded electrically!
●
Do not w
ash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Risk of damaging the paint job!
●
Do not use sponges, abrasive household
sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
Risk of damaging the surface!
●
Vehicle parts with matte paint:
–
Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of
damaging the surface!
–
Never select washing programmes that
include the use of wax. This could dam-
age the appearance of matte paint.
–
Do not put stickers or magnets on parts
with matte paint, as removing them
may damage the paint.
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special
w
ash bays. These places are prepared to
prevent oily water from getting into the
public drains.
Cleaning and maintenance instruc-
tions
The cleaning and maintenance of individual
components of the v
ehicle can be checked in
the following tables. The contents should be
understood merely as a recommendation. Go
to your specialised workshop if you have spe-
cial questions or parts that are not listed. Take
340
Vehicle conservation
he general considerations into account
›
››
in Take special care with... on page 344.
Cleaning the exterior
Windscreen wipers
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with wipers
Headlights / Tail lights
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Sensors / Camera lenses
Problem Solution
Dirt
Sensors: soft cl
oth with a sol-
vent-free cleaning product
Camera lenses: soft cloth with
an alcohol-free cleaning prod-
uct
Snow/ice
Hand brush/Anti frost spray
with no sol
vents
Wheels
Problem Solution
Antifreeze salt Water
Problem Solution
Brake abrasion
dust
Acid-free special cleaning
pr
oduct
End exhausts
Problem Solution
Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-
uct is r
equired
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if a
st
eel cleaning product is re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Paint
Problem Solution
Paint flaws
Check the paint's colour code
in an authorised service and r
e-
store with a touch-up pencil
Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water
Environmental rust
t
ank
Apply rust remover and then
apply har
d wax. Go you your
specialised workshop if you
have any queries
Corrosion
Have your specialised work-
shop t
ake care of this
Problem Solution
The water does
not cr
eate drop-
lets on the clean
paint
Maintain with hard wax (at
l
east 2 times a year)
No shine de-
spit
e sober main-
tenance/paint
Treat with suitable wax and ap-
ply paint pr
eservative after-
wards if the wax used does not
contain preservative ingredi-
ents
Tanks, e.g. insect
r
emains, bird
droppings, tree
sap, road salt
Immediately soften with water
and remove with a microfibre
cloth
Fat-based dirt,
e
.g. cosmetic
products or
sunscreen
Delete immediately with a neu-
tral soap solution
a)
and a soft
cloth
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Carbon fibre parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean the same way as pain-
t
ed parts
›››
page 339
»
341
Maintenance
Decoration slides
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Interior cleaning
Windows
Problem Solution
Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and
then dry with a cl
oth
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Plastic parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Damp cloth
Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if pos-
sible solvent-free plastic clean-
er
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Displays/instrument panel
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal
displ
ay cleaner
Control panels
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with
neutr
al soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Seat belts
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, al
-
lowed to dry before retracting
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather
Problem Solution
Particles of dirt
st
uck to surfaces
Vacuum cleaner
Water-based dirt,
e
.g. coffee, tea,
blood etc.
Absorbent cloth and neutral
soap solution
a)
Problem Solution
Grease-based
dirt, e
.g. oil, make-
up, etc.
Apply a neutral soap solution
a)
.
Absorb the dissolved grease
and paint particles drying with
an absorbent cloth, in case you
must treat it with water after-
wards
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cr
eam etc.
Special stain remove: dry with
an absorbent cloth, if applica-
ble, apply neutral soap solution
afterwards
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Natural leather
Problem Solution
Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap
solution
a)
Water-based dirt,
e.g. coffee, tea,
blood etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
Dry stains: stain remover suita-
ble for leather
Grease-based
dirt, e
.g. oil, make-
up, etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
and suitable stain remover for
leather
Dry stains: grease solvent
spray
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cr
eam etc.
Stain remover suitable for
leather
342
Vehicle conservation
Problem Solution
Care Apply preservative cream regu-
l
arly to protect from sunlight.
Use a colour preservative if re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Carbon fibre parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean like plastic parts
Take special care with...
Headlights/tail lights
●
Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with
a dry cl
oth or sponge.
●
Do not use cleaning products that contain
alcohol. Risk of cracks!
Wheels
●
Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive
products.
●
If the protective coating on the paint of the
rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,
scratches, etc., the damage should be re-
paired immediately.
Camera lenses
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of
cracking the lens!
●
To clean the camera lens, never use abra-
sive cleaning products or products with alco-
hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!
Windows
●
Remove snow and ice from windows and
exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches, the scraper should only be
pushed in one direction and not moved to
and fro.
●
Never remove snow or ice from windows
and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.
Risk of cracks on the windows!
●
To prevent damage to the heating of the
rear window, do not put stickers over the
heating elements.
Covers/trims
●
Do not use cleaning products or chrome
based cleaning agents.
Paint
●
The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust
before applying wax or care products. Risk of
scratches!
●
Do not apply wax or care products if the
vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of
damaging the paint job!
●
The ambient rust deposits must not be re-
moved through friction. Risk of damaging the
paint job!
●
Remove cosmetic products and sunlight
immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
Displays/instrument panel
●
The displays, the instrument panel and the
trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of
scratches!
●
Make sure that the instrument panel is
switched off and cooled down before clean-
ing.
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks between the
instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-
age!
Control panels
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-
trol panels. Risk of damage!
Seat belts
●
Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.
●
Seat belts and their components must nev-
er be cleaned with chemical products, nor
should they be allowed to come into contact
with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-
jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!
●
If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
ask your specialised workshop to replace the
belt in question.
»
343
Maintenance
Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-
er
●
Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara
l
eather with leather cleaning products, sol-
vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers
or similar products.
●
If the stain is very hard to remove, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it
removed there. This will prevent damage.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating to dry the
seats.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage
the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro
fasteners are closed.
Natural leather
●
Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
spot removers or similar products on leather.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating to dry the
seats.
●
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for
long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose
some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-
longed period in the bright sun, it is best to
cover the leather.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the
windscr
een. In bad visibility conditions
such as humid weather, darkness or when
the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may
be impacted. Accident hazard! Such coat-
ings can also cause the windscreen wiper
blades to make noise.
Note
●
R
emains of insects can be removed much
more easily with previously treated paint.
●
Regular car care treatments can prevent
deposits of ambient rust.
Remove the vehicle from traffic
If you want to leave your vehicle stationary
f
or a long period of time, contact a qualified
workshop. They will gladly inform you about
the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-
sion protection, Service and storage.
Also take into account instructions regarding
the vehicle's battery
›››
page 324.
Accessories and modifi-
cations t
o the vehicle
Accessories, spare parts and
repair work
Introduction
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer
f
or advice before purchasing accessories
and replacement parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-
ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-
son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-
cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-
ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official
Service has the latest information from the
manufacturer and can recommend accesso-
ries and replacement parts which are suita-
ble for your requirements. They can also an-
swer any questions you might have regarding
official regulations.
We recommend only using SEAT accesso-
ries and genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has
tested these parts and accessories for suita-
bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official
Services have the necessary experience and
facilities to ensure that the parts are installed
correctly and professionally.
344
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle
Any r
etro-fitted equipment which has a di-
rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is
driven, such as a cruise control system or
electronically-controlled suspension, must
be approved for use in your vehicle and bear
the e mark (the European Union's authorisa-
tion symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fit-
ted which do not serve to control the vehicle
itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop
or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the
sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in
the European Union).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone hold-
ers or cup hol
ders, should never be fitted
on the covers, or within the working range
of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger
of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-
dent.
Technical modifications
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic
components, softw
are, wiring or data transfer
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership
cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work per-
formed incorrectly.
For this reason we recommend asking official
SEAT service centres to do any necessary
work using genuine SEAT parts®.
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or
other w
ork on your vehicle can lead to mal-
functions and cause accidents.
Radio telephones and office equip-
ment
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
Any r
etrofit installations of radio transmitters
in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT
generally authorises in-vehicle installations
of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
ded that:
●
The antenna is installed correctly.
●
The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
vehicle (and shielded cables are used to-
gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).
●
The effective transmitting power does not
exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-
shop will be able to inform you about options
for installing and operating radio transmitters
with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile radio transmitters
Commercial mobile telephones or radio
equipment might interfere with the electron-
ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
This may be due to:
●
No external aerial.
●
External aerial incorrectly installed.
●
Transmitting power more than 10 W.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
nal aerial
›››
.
Pl
ease note also that the maximum range of
the equipment can only be achieved with an
external aerial.
Business equipment
Retrofit installation of business or private
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
driver's immediate control of the vehicle and
that any such equipment carries the mark.
Any retrofit equipment that could influence
the driver's control of the vehicle must have a
type approval for your vehicle and must carry
the e mark.
WARNING
Mobile telephones or radio equipment
which is oper
ated inside the vehicle without
»
345
Maintenance
a properly installed external aerial can
cr
eate excessive magnetic fields that
could cause a health hazard.
Note
●
The post
erior fitting of electric and elec-
tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its
licence and could lead to the withdrawal of
the vehicle registration document under
certain circumstances.
●
Please use the mobile telephone/radio
operating instructions.
346
Information for the user
Information for the user
Inf
ormation for the user
Information stored by the
control units
Storage of accident data (Event
Data Recorder)
Your vehicle has an event data recorder
(EDR).
The EDR’
s function is to record data in the
event of a mild or serious accident. These da-
ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-
ferent vehicle systems behaved.
The EDR records, over a reduced time range
(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-
ing data and data from the restraint systems,
such as:
●
How different vehicle systems worked.
●
Whether the driver and the occupants were
wearing their seat belts.
●
How hard the acceleration or brake pedal
was pressed.
●
Vehicle speed.
These data will provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances of the accident.
Data from the driving assist systems are also
recorded. This includes data such as whether
the systems were inactive or active and if
such action had an impact on the vehicle’s
dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the
aforementioned situations, accelerating or
decelerating the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-
cludes data from systems such as:
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
●
Emergency braking assistance system
(Front Assist).
●
Park Pilot system
The EDR data are only recorded in specific
accident situations. No data are recorded in
normal driving conditions.
No audio or video data inside or around the
vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-
ces are personal data such as name, age, or
gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties
(such as criminal proceedings authorities)
may relate the contents of the EDR data to
other data sources and create a personal
reference in the context of an accident inves-
tigation.
In order to read the EDR data it is necessary
to access (if legally permitted to do so) the
vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-
face while the vehicle is switched on.
SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless
the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee
or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-
ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-
tractual provisions.
Due to legal requirements in safety-related
products, SEAT may use the EDR data for
field research and in order to improve vehicle
system quality. Any data used for the purpo-
ses of research will be treated anonymously
(in other words, no reference will be made to
the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).
Description and operation
Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a ser-
ies of el
ectronic control units responsible for
the engine and gearbox management. In ad-
dition, the control units supervise the per-
formance of the exhaust gas system and the
airbag systems.
Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven,
these electronic control units are continuous-
ly analysing the vehicle data. In the event of
faults or deviations from the theoretical val-
ues, only this data is stored. Normally, the
warning lamps on the instrument panel light
up in the event of faults.
This data can only be read and analysed us-
ing special equipment.
»
347
Information for the user
The storing of the data allows specialised
w
orkshops to detect and repair faults. Stored
data may include:
●
Data relating to the engine or the gearbox
●
Speed
●
Direction of travel
●
Braking force
●
Detection of seat belt
The vehicle control units never record conver-
sations held by passengers in the vehicle.
In vehicles equipped with an emergency call
function via the mobile phone or other appli-
ances connected in the vehicle, it is possible
to send the vehicle position. If the control unit
records an accident with airbag activation,
the system may automatically send a signal.
This will depend on the network operator.
Normally, transmission is only possible in
areas with good coverage.
Event Data Recorder
The vehicle is not fitted with an event data re-
corder.
An event data recorder temporarily stores the
vehicle information. Therefore, in the event of
an accident, it is possible to obtain detailed
information about how the accident occur-
red. For example, in vehicles with airbag sys-
tems, data relating to speed of impact, seat
belt status, seat positions and airbag activa-
tion times may be stored. The volume of data
depends on the manufacturer.
Event data recorders can only be mounted
with authorisation from the vehicle owner
and, in some countries, they are governed by
local legislation.
Reprogramming of control units
On the whole, all the data required for the
component management is stored in the
control units. The programming of certain
convenience functions, such as the turn sig-
nals, individual door opening and instructions
on the display can be modified using special
equipment at the workshop. If this is the case,
the information and descriptions given in the
Instruction Manual will not match the original
functions. Therefore, SEAT recommends that
any modifications be recorded in the section
“Other workshop notes” in the Maintenance
Programme.
The technical service centre must have a re-
cord of any modification to the programming.
Reading the vehicle's fault memory
There is a diagnostics connector in the vehi-
cle interior for reading the vehicle fault mem-
ory. The fault memory documents errors and
deviations from the theoretical values of the
electronic control units.
The diagnostics connector is in the driver side
footwell area, next to the lever for opening
the bonnet, below a cover.
The fault memory should only be read and
reset by a specialised workshop.
Other important information
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, choice of mat
erials and manufac-
ture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage re-
cycling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling.
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling.
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
●
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
348
Information for the user
●
Use of r
ecycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, including
odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-
cle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free stickers.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Stickers and plates
Some parts in the engine compartment come
fr
om the factory with certificates of safety, la-
bels or plates containing important informa-
tion regarding the operation of the vehicle, for
example, on the fuel tank flap, on the pas-
senger's sun visor, on the driver door strut, or
on the floor of the boot.
●
Never remove these certificates of safety,
labels or plates, and ensure they are kept in
good condition and are legible.
●
If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate of
saf
ety, label or plate, is replaced, the special-
ised workshop should attach the information
back in the same place.
Certificate of safety
A certificate of safety on the door strut states
that all the safety standards and regulations
established by the national traffic authorities
responsible for road safety were met at the
time of manufacture. It may also give the
month and year of manufacture, together
with the chassis number.
Warning of high voltage label
There is a label close to the bonnet lock
which warns of high voltage in the vehicle's
electrical system. The vehicle ignition system
complies with several standards, including
the Canadian standard, ICES-002.
Using the vehicle in other countries
and continents
The vehicle is manufactured at the factory for
use in a particul
ar country in accordance
with the national legislation in force at the
time of manufacture.
If the vehicle is sold in another country or
used in another country for an extended peri-
od of time, the applicable legislation of that
country should be observed.
It may be necessary to fit or remove certain
pieces of equipment or to deactivate certain
functions. Service work may also be affected.
This is particularly true if the vehicle is used in
a different climate for an extended period of
time.
As there are different types of frequency
bands around the world, you may find that
the radio or navigation system supplied at the
factory does not work in another country.
CAUTION
●
SEAT does not accept liabilit
y for any
damage to the vehicle due to the use of a
lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or
the non-availability of genuine spare parts.
●
SEAT does not accept liability if the vehi-
cle does not comply in part or in full with
the legal requirements of other countries or
continents.
349
Information for the user
Radio and antenna reception
The aerial of radio and navigation systems fit-
t
ed at the factory may be mounted in differ-
ent parts of the vehicle:
●
On the inside of the rear window, next to the
rear window heating,
●
on the inside of the rear side windows,
●
on the inside of the windscreen,
●
on the roof of the vehicle.
Aerials mounted on the inside of a window
can be recognised by the fine wires.
CAUTION
Aerials on the inside of windows may be
damaged if knock
ed or if cleaned with cor-
rosive or acid cleaning products. Do not
stick adhesive labels over the heating ele-
ments and never clean the inside of the
rear window with corrosive or acid prod-
ucts or other similar chemical products.
Note
There may be interference with AM station
r
eception if electrical equipment is used
close to the antenna built into the glass.
Information about SEAT repairs
WARNING
Repairs or modifications which are not per-
f
ormed correctly may result in damage or
errors in the vehicle operation, affecting
the effectiveness of the driver assist and
airbag systems. This could result in serious
accident.
●
Have any repairs or modifications carried
out at a specialised workshop.
Collection of end-of-life vehicles
and scr
apping
Collection of end-of-life vehicles
An e
xtensive network of used car reception
centres already exists in much of Europe. Af-
ter the vehicle has been delivered, you will re-
ceive a certificate of destruction describing
the environmentally friendly scrapping of the
vehicle in accordance with applicable legis-
lation.
We will collect the used vehicle free of
charge, provided it complies with all national
legislation.
Please see your technical service for further
information about the collection and scrap-
ping of end-of-life vehicles.
Scrapping
The relevant safety requirements must be ob-
served when the vehicle or components of
the airbag or belt tensioner systems are
scrapped. These requirements are known to
specialised workshops.
Recycling of electrical or electron-
ic devices
All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that
ar
e not permanently fitted in the vehicle must
be marked with the following symbol:
This symbol indicates that EED must not be
discarded as home waste but through selec-
tive waste collection.
350
Information for the user
Product recycling
Fig. 298
For the sake of the environment
The Triman logo and the Infotri symbol con-
t
ain important information for the classifi-
cation of the end consumer.
Radioelectrical equipment
Simplified decl
aration of conformi-
ty
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manuf
acturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Directive
2014/53/EU when legally required.
The full text of the EU compliance declaration
is available online at the following address:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
United Kingdom
Y
our vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with the UK Radio
Equipment Regulations 2017 (SI 2017/1206) if
required by law.
The full text of the declaration of conformity is
available online at the following Internet ad-
dress:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
Ukraine
Y
our vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Ukraine Decree
355/2017 (TR Radio Equipment) where legal-
ly required.
The full text of the declaration of conformity is
available online at the following Internet ad-
dress:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
Addresses of the manufacturers
The address of the manufacturers of compo-
nents that, due t
o their size or nature, cannot
include a sticker are listed below, as long as it
is legally required:
Central control unit (BCM)
Robert Bosch GmbH/Braunschweig
Theodor-Heuss-Strasse 12
38122 - Braunschweig, Germany
Phone: 0049 53188890
Keyless Access system
HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA/Hamm
Roemerstr. 66
59075 - Hamm, Germany
Phone: 0049 23817980
»
351
Information for the user
Roof antenna
ASK Industries S.p
.A
Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16
60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy
Phone: +3907174521
Website: www.askgroup.it
Mitsumi Electronics Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 32
63225 Langen, Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 6103913-0
Website: www.minebeamitsumi.co.jp
Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH
Daimlerring 31
31135 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Antenna amplifiers
ASK Industries S.p.A
Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16
60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy
Phone: +3907174521
Website: www.askgroup.it
Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH
Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51
72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Phone: +49 7127 140
Website: www.te.com
KATHREIN Automotive GmbH
Römerring 1
31137 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +498031184-0
Website: www.kathrein.com
Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH
Daimlerring 31
31135 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Navigation antenna
Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH
Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51
72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Phone: +49 7127 140
Website: www.te.com
KATHREIN Automotive GmbH
Römerring 1
31137 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +498031184-0
Website: www.kathrein.com
Connectivity Box
Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH
Märkische Strasse 72
15806 Zossen OT Dabendorf, Germany
Phone:+49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Basic infotainment system
Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech
U Panasonicu 266
530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic
Optional infotainment system
LG Electronics Mlawa SP
LG Electronics 7
06 500, Mlawa
Remote control key
Digades GmbH Digitales Und Ana/Zittau
Äußere Weberstr. 20
02763 - Zittau, Germany
Phone: 0049 358357750
Instrument panel
Analogue SE38x/SE316
Visteon Electronics Germany GmbH
Visteonstr. 4-10
50170 Kerpen, Germany
Analogue all other models
Continental Automotive Spain, S.A.
Crta. de Rubí a Ullastrell, nº 12-30
08191 Rubí (Barcelona - Spain)
FPK (digital)
Continental Automotive GmbH
VDO-Strasse 1,
64832 Babenhausen, Germany
352
Information for the user
Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe
GmbH
R
obert Bosch Str. 27-29
63225 Langen, Germany
Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech,
s.r.o.
U Panasonicu 266
530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic
Front radar sensors
MRR for SE38X
Robert Bosch GmbH
Markwiesenstrasse, 46
72770 Reutlingen (Kusterdingen) Germany
MRR for Tarraco, Ateca, Ibiza, Arona
Automotive Distance Control Systems
GmbH
Peter-Dornier-Strasse, 10
88131, Lindau, Germany
Rear radar sensors
Hella GmbH & Co. KGaA
Rixbecker Straße 75
59552 Lippstadt (Germany)
Online Connectivity Unit
LG ELECTRONICS INC.
10, Magokjungang 10-ro,
Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Republic of Korea
Frequency bands, station power
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)
433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)
All SEAT models
433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW
868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW
434.42 MHz 32 µW
Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary
heater)
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW Alhambra
Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating)
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW Alhambra
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
»
353
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Bluetooth
2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm
All SEAT models
2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm
Connection to the external antenna of the car
GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm
Leon, Alhambra and TarracoGSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm
WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm
WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm
Tarraco and Leon
WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm
LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm
Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Radar sensors for front assist systems 76 GHz-77 GHz
28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra
35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco
Radar sensors for rear assist systems 24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 5 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m
Ibiza, Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and
Alhambr
a
354
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Online Connectivity Unit
EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm
Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm
UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm
UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm
UMTS FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 24 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748 MHz 23.0 dBm
a)
The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.
Additional information for coun-
tries outside the Eur
opean Union
Mexico
Y
our vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Directive
RLVCOAR15-0008 when legally required. The
full text of the declaration of conformity is
available online at the following Internet ad-
dress:
https://www.seat.mx/servicio/mi-seat/manual-
del
-propietario.html
Certificate: RLVHERS17-0286. RS4 Hella
KGaA Hueck & Co. short-range radar
IFT:RLVHERS17-0286. The operation of this
equipment is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this equipment or device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
equipment or device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
United Kingdom
This v
ehicle has various radio equipment de-
vices installed.
The following acts as importer of the radio
equipment devices for the United Kingdom
market within the meaning of The Radio
Equipment Regulations 2017:
»
355
Information for the user
Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd.
Y
eomans Drive, Blakelands
Milton Keynes, MK 14 5AN
United Kingdom
Türkiye
Telsiz Ekipmanları Yönetmeliği
(2014/53/AB)
Aracınızda çeşitli telsiz ekipmanları bulun-
maktadır.
Telsiz Ekipmanlari Yönetmeliği (2014/53/AB)
açısından Türkiye pazarı için radyo ekipmanı
ithalatçısı (bu bilgi sadece resmi temsilcimiz
olan Doğuş Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A.Ş.’nin
ithal ettiği ürünler için geçerlidir):
Doğuş Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A.Ş.
Şekerpınar Mahallesi, Anadolu Caddesi,
No: 22 ve 45
41420 Çayırova/Kocaeli
Ukraine
Імпортер:
ТОВ «Порше Україна»
просп. Павла Тичини, 1В, офіс „В“, 4-й
поверх
02152 Київ, Україна.
Importer:
Porsche Ukraine LLC
Pavla Tychyny ave. 1V, Office “B”, 4th floor
02152 Kyiv, Ukraine.
356
Indications about the technical data
Technical data
Indications about the
t
echnical data
Important information
Introduction
The values indicated in the technical data
may diff
er depending on optional equipment
or version of the model, as well as in the case
of special vehicles and equipment for certain
countries.
The information in the official vehicle docu-
mentation takes precedence at all times.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-
fications section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Horsepower (not currently used), en-
gine po
wer measurement unit.
rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute – engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the die-
sel combustion po
wer.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock r
esistance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle ID number
The v
ehicle ID number can be found in the
following places:
●
One the vehicle's data label.
●
In front, under the windscreen.
●
To the right in the engine compartment.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right
hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export
countries do not have a type plate.
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived
fr
om measurements performed or supervised
by certified EU laboratories, according to the
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions can be found in the documen-
tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-
cle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions de-
pend on the equipment/features of each indi-
vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,
road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-
mental conditions, load or number of passen-
gers.
Filling capacities
Tank level
Petrol engines 73 l, 8 l reserve
Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-
t
ainer
Versions without
headlight w
asher
system
approx. 3.5 litres
Versions with
headlight w
asher
system
approx. 6 litres
Weights
Load on the roof
The maximum authorised r
oof load for your
vehicle is 100 kg (220 pounds).
Empty weight, total weight, axle loads
The empty weight of the vehicle with driver
(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)
1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can
increase the empty weight, which means that
»
357
Technical data
the possible useful load decreases propor-
tionally.
T
railer weight
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the
ball head of the towing bracket is 100 kg.
WARNING
The values indicated for the maximum per-
mitt
ed weights must not be exceeded.
There is a risk of accident and damage!
358
Indications about the technical data
Engine specifications
Petrol engines 1.4 TSI Start-Stop
Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,395
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox manual DSG
Top speed (km/h) 200 (VI) 198 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9
Maximum authorized weight (kg) (5/7 seats) 2,330/2,450 2,350/2,480
359
Technical data
Dimensions.
Fig. 299 Dimensions.
ALHAMBRA
A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 967/966
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,921
D Length (mm) 4,854
E/F Front/rear
a)
tr
ack width (mm) 1,571/1,617
G Width (mm) 1,904
H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,734
b)
Turning radius (m) 11.9
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
b)
Dimension to the roof bars.
360
Index
Index
Numbers and Symbol
s
12-volt battery
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
automatic disconnection of devices . . . . . . 326
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 324
operation in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
positive pole for jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
A
ABS
see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Access aid for the third row of seats . . . . . . . . . . 137
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Active cylinder management (ACT)
status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Additional heating
automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
see also Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Adjust
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 139
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
seat with memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Air conditioning
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Alternator
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Android Auto™
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Anti-trap function
electric sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Aspects to think about before starting the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ASR
connection and disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
see Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
see also Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . 286
Assistance call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Assistance systems
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
anti-slip regulation during acceleration
(ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-
sistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
361
Index
driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
dynamic chassis contr
ol (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . 253
ear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . 263
front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
parking distance warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
steering wheel assist for parking . . . . . . . . . . 288
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Audible warning
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . 284
Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 118
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . 250
operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . 248
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 248
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
electricity consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
radio-operated remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 171
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
B
Background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
change on the remote control (independ-
ent heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bicycle carrier
fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . 307
max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 276
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Blown bulbs
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Bluetooth®
connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 316
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Braking system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
BSD
see blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
BSD Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
C
Camera
cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Capacities
window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Card compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
362
Index
Care
see Cl
eaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
xenon headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Changing the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Child lock
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Child seat
integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Child seats
group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35
Cleaning
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 339
special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Climate control
auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Clocks
set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Communication between the Infotainment
System and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Connectivity
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Connectors
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 267
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 310
remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 169
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
windscreen washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Controls and displays
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
363
Index
Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
r
eprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Convenience close function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Convenience functions
reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Convenience open function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Convenience phone system
outside antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Cooling system
check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Cornering lights
dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
D
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
see: RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Data bank view
see MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Data logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
DCC
see Adaptive suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Deactivation of cylinders
see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . . 71
Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Delayed shutdown (Infotainment system) . . . 176
Detection of road signs
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Diagnostic connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Disconnection of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Disposal
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
vehicle at the end of its useful life . . . . . . . . . 350
Distance control
see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Door
child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Door emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Drink holder
bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Driver
see Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Driving
data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
E
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
EDL
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Electric child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Electric sliding door
anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
364
Index
Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
El
ectromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Electronic engine torque management
(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 242
Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Emergencies
anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
first aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 258
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Emergency closing and opening
front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Emergency opening
driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Emergency operation
gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Emissions control system
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Engine and ignition
12 volt power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . 240
emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 241
switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 316
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 321
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Engine failure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine oil
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 320
check the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Environment
ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Environmental tip
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
ESC
electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 286
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Event data recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347, 348
365
Index
Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Ext
erior lighting
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Exterior mirrors
driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8
External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
F
Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Factors that have a negative influence on
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fault
park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Fault memory
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Filling capacities
fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
First aid kit
housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Folding chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Folding the rear seats
load surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Frequency band
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Front Assist
see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 263
Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Front passenger front airbag
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fuel
ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fuel consumption
inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 313
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fuel tank cap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Full Link™
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
map representation, navigation . . . . . . . . . . . 220
MirrorLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 59
preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
G
GALA (speed-dependent volume) . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Gearbox DSG
see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gear change
engage the gears (manual change) . . . . . . 245
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Glasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
H
Handbrake
see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 17
Head-protection airbags
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
366
Index
Headlights
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 134, 135
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
I
Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Information call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
CD or DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
change the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
FM, AM, DAB settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Media settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
navigation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
rotary/push buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
scroll button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
scroll (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
search on lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 197
sound distribution (Balance and Fader) . . . 180
station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
volume and sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 336
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 73
use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 85
use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
seat belt route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Interferences caused by mobile phones . . . . . 176
Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Interior mirror
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 34
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 34
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
positive pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
K
Keyless Access
Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 98
367
Index
Keyless Access lock and ignition system:
see K
eyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Keyless Entry
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Keyless Exit
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Keys
assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 104
vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Kick-down
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
L
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Lane Assist system
see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 250
Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Loading the luggage compartment
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 140
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
rail system with fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Lock and unlock
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 140
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
electric lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
electric opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
folding the rear seats down as a cargo sur-
face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
opening and closing controlled by sensors
(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
rail system with fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
unfolding and folding the net partition. . . . . 149
Luggage compartment net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Lumbar massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
M
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Main menu
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
MirrorLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Maintenance
see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Malfunction
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . 253
emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
368
Index
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
t
owing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Map display
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Media
changing track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
playback modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
playback order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
requirements for data media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
select track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
switching the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
unreadable CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
MEDIA
data bank view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
MFD
see Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
MirrorLink™
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Mirrors
adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Multifunction steering wheel
with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
N
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
import vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
my route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
points of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
selecting the destination on the map . . . . . . 215
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
special destinations (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
traffic bulletins (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
NAV (navigation)
map display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Net
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
unfolding and folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Noise
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328, 332
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
O
Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
369
Index
Operating fault
aut
omatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Operation in winter
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Overseas
longer stay with the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
P
Painting the vehicle
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Panoramic sliding sunroof
see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Park assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 293
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
connecting or disconnecting (leaving park-
ing space) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
connecting or disconnecting (parking) . . . 290
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
leaving a parking space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
parking preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Parking assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Parking brake
automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Parking distance warning system
see Park assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Parking side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Parking (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 15
Petrol
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Phone management
three button module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Portable rubbish bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Power sockets
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Power steering
see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Pre-installation for basic mobile phone . . . . . . 226
possible connection types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Preheating system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Press & Drive
start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
R
Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Radio
frequency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
indications and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
save station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
RADIO
additional DAB services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
additional DAB stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
DAB memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
DAB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
DAB radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
DAB slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
DAB station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
DAB transmission standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
indication of station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
save and delete station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 197
set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
station tracking by RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
tracking of DAB stations on FM . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
370
Index
Radio reception
ant
enna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Rail system with fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
net to cover the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 275
RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
automatic station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
RDS Regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . 275, 279
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 112
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rear mounting
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Recognition of road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Reflective vest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Refuelling
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Remote control
see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Remote control key
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . . 169
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Reprogramming of control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 80
Road signs detection system
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Rotary push buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Rotation direction
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Running in
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
S
Saddle
access aid for the third row of seats . . . . . . . 137
folding the rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Safety
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety instructions
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Seat adjustment
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Seat belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 22
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
seat belt height adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
with two buckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
371
Index
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
contr
ol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seat belt with two buckles
fasten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
twisted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
unfasten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Seat functions
access aid for the third row of seats . . . . . . . 137
lumbar massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Seats
adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 139
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Selling the vehicle
in other countries/continents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Service
Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Settings
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 248
Side airbags
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
manual opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Special characteristics
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 306
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 56
tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
volume reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Start-Stop system
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 243
the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Station
set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 71
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 246
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 76
372
Index
Steering
contr
ol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Steering wheel
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 248
Steering wheel brake assist system
brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Steering wheel park assist
interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Stickers and plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
front centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
glasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
in the front central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
in the roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
other storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
portable rubbish bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
rear footwell area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Storage compartment accessories
see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Storage compartment in the roof console . . . 154
Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Storage of trip data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Storing objects
bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 139
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 152
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sun blinds
rear side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Switch
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
T
Tail lights
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Telephone
Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
during a phone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
favourites (quick access to the phone
book) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 225
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
short messages (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
TELEPHONE
switching the telephone management sys-
tem off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Text message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Time
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 246, 248
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35
Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35
Torque
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Towable loads
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 302
Tow hook
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
373
Index
Towing device
fitting a bicycl
e carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 306
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 56
tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
TP (Traffic information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 302
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-
er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 302
technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 302
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . . 306
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 299, 303
Trailer mode
see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Transport
luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
rail system with fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Trips abroad
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Tyre Mobility System
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tyre pressure loss indicator
tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
U
Unlock and lock
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
connecting external data media . . . . . . . . . . 209
load devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Vehicle
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
374
Index
recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
unl
ocking and locking with Keyless Access . 98
vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Vehicle battery
electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Vehicle care
wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Vehicle conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
antenna built into the glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
available languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
W
Warning symbols
see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 122
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Washing the vehicle
conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 339
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 339
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 292
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 331
anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 48
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Windows
automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
convenience close function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
convenience open function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Window washer
window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Window washer water
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Windscreen washer fluid
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Winter
menu configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Winter conditions
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Wiper and rear window wiper blades
cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Wiper blades
cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
X
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
375
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.22
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Alhambra
Owner’s manual
7N5012720BT
Inglés
7N5012720BT (06.22)
SEAT Alhambra Inglés (06.22)
